Category: Siemens Cerberus Pyrotronics

Air Duct Housings AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Series IL, and Series 3 Ionization or Detectors Optional Relays for Supplementary Operation Optional Control Module for Self-contained (Series 3 Detectors Only) Alarm LED Visible from Front Clear Housing Cover for Quick of Detector Type Listed, ULC Listed, NYMEA, FM, CSFM and City of Chicago Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics air duct detector housings are to be used with Cerberus Pyrotronics Series IL, and Series 3 ionization or photoelectric detectors. for installation directly to heating, ventilating and conditioning duct systems, they comply with National Protection Association Standard No. 90A. When with ionization or photoelectric detectors, these will signal the presence of hazardous quantities of of combustion or smoke being carried through duct system. Air duct detectors are not intended to be for open area detection. duct housings can be equipped with optional relays. relays are utilized to operate any supplementary when smoke or particles of combustion are Most control equipment including System 3 guaran- only one detector per zone is permitted when the operated relay function is critical. The connection a remote lamp or a remote relay per detector is allowed, not both. XL3 control panel assures operation of all detector relays, therefore up to 30 detectors per circuit relays for critical functions may be used. For the control panel, up to 60 detectors per circuit having may be used. The connection of a remote lamp or a relay is allowed for each detector but not both. duct housings (see Ordering Information) are Under- Laboratories, Inc.listed. Cerberus Pyrotronics air duct housing is uniquely to use the highly sensitive yet stable Series IL, and Series 3 detectors. sensitivity of Series 3 detectors can be checked in under actual dynamic air flow conditions using a Pyrotronics sensitivity test module. The sensitivity Series IL detectors can be checked in place under dynamic conditions at the XL3 control panel, MXL panel or IXL respectively or may be printed by on the optional printer. detector unit employs a cross-sectional sampling of operation. Inlet sampling tubes are available in lengths (see table on reverse side). Outlet sampling are one common length. A continuous cross- sample of air moving through the duct is taken. averages the effects of laminar flow, stratification or effect phenomena occurring in the duct that could combustion product or smoke (especially in large from reaching a spot type detector. addition, the unique design of the Cerberus Pyrotronics chamber insures uniform sensitivity in air veloci- ranging from a low of 300 feet per minute to as high 4000 feet per minute. NUMBER handling equipment shall be shut down by a signal the fire detection system control equipment. When air duct housing incorporates the optional relay, the down of air handling devices may be accomplished a signal directly from the detector. air duct housing shall be available with a self-con- power supply so that it can function as a stand- unit if desired. The self-contained stand-alone unit power and supervise two satellite units. air duct housing shall utilize a plug-in detector head in the air sampling chamber. The detector shall be ionization or photoelectric. There shall be provisions check the detector sensitivity in place under actual air conditions. air duct housing shall be mounted directly outside of air duct by means of four bolts (supplied). A template be provided for making necessary cut-outs and holes. instructions shall be supplied with the unit. air duct housing shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics _______ (See listing on back page) and shall be Laboratories, Inc. Listed, specifically for use air handling systems. to Architect: When building codes regulate the of detectors within ventilating systems, make sure the number and locations of detectors is in accor- with the code regulations. Series and the PEC-3 detectors are obsolete of 1/1/92. The IL Series are direct replacement for ID-60 and Series and the PE-3 for the PEC-3.) inlet sampling tube length is determined by the width the air duct being protected. The inlet tube near

Vibrating and Single Stroke Bells AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AC or DC Operation Vibrating or Single Stroke Sturdy Metal Construction High dB Output Standard 4″ Square Available in 4″, 6″, 8″ and Sizes Noise Cancellation Available in Chime Listed ULC Pending Pyrotronics Vibrating and Single Stroke bells high quality construction for maximum reliability customer satisfaction. Cerberus Pyrotronics bells bell/chime design combines the bell mechanism gong/chime into one unit. Four gong sizes and a are available to provide distinctive tones and to different ambient noise levels. Bell Bell Pyrotronics bells are used in a variety of applica- Used in schools and other buildings, the Cerberus unique design provides a sound all its own. in chime, 4, 6, 8, and 10 inch gong or additional plate configurations, the signals can be used for installations or existing retrofits. Parallel units are with terminals to insure proper supervision as as provide better electrical connections. Parallel also include a blocking network for connection to supervised signal circuit. Each unit is provided with noise circuitry to prevent the transmission of tran- spikes, typically generated by DC contact type devices. NUMBER Pyrotronics Bells Bell Bell Bell Bell db @ 10 = Vibrating = Single Stroke = Low Current For (Canada) ULC labeled models, add to the model number. db calculated from integrated sound power measurements at Underwriter Laboratories per UL 464. Typical db measurements with conventional sound meters will be significantly higher in actual installation. / Chime Strobe Plates No. Strobe Current Ratings (mA) (15/75) alone strobes utilize wire nuts for connection. Terminal strips are available by modifying part number to read -FT (Flush with Terminals) or -ST (Surface with terminals). FS (single models are not available with terminals. mount units are rated weatherproof when used with FWB-1 or FWB-2 surface weatherproof box. ( ) represents strobe model, e.g., 15, 17, 75 or 110. / Chime Sync Strobe Plates No. Strobe Current Ratings (mA) (15/75) alone strobes utilize wire nuts for connection. Terminal strips are available by modifying part number to read -FT (Flush with Terminals) or -ST (Surface with terminals). FS (single models are not available with terminals. mount units are rated weatherproof when used with FWB-1 or FWB-2 surface weatherproof box. ( ) represents strobe model, e.g., 15, 17 or 75.

System Batteries Volts DC Nominal for Fire Alarm System Secondary Power AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 6, 10, 15, 31 & 55 Amp Hour Battery Sets Sealed, Lead-Acid, Rechargeable Mount in System Enclosure or BB-55, BB-55R Battery Box Listed and ULC Listed FM Approved Information Information Number Pyrotronics battery sets are manufactured by suppliers of batteries such as Johnson Controls, and Eagle-Picher. All are UL listed for use with Pyrotronics control panels. the manufacturers improve the design of their batteries, amp-hour rating will increase. However, the dimensions the batteries remain the same to insure that they fit in system enclosures as specified. the system enclosure does not house the required set use the model BB-55 battery box, Catalog It can house any of the available battery sets. is listed with BT-33, BT-34 and BP-61 only. Note: The amp-hour ratings stated here are minimums. actual batteries installed may exceed the indicated rating. NUMBER Drawings Drawings Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 Issue

System 3 Output Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AA-30U AA-30U AE-30U AE-30U Styles Y or Z Circuit LED Trouble Placement AC or DC Audibles ULC NYMEA, FM and City of Approved AA-30U Audible Alarm Extender Module has been for use with the System 3 control panel and meets requirements of NFPA 72 Style (Class module provides a four wire circuit for operating parallel-connected 24 Vdc notification appliances. circuit capacity is typically 20 vibrating dc bells, 10 dc or strobes. However, depending on the current of the connected devices, additional bells, or strobes can be added providing the total circuit does not exceed 1.5 amperes. of the module is caused by a high going input from a system control module. Dual input activation are provided for programming or sequencing its Model AA-30U contains a yellow LED indicator the face of the module which indicates an open or loop condition. This is operative at all times except the system is in alarm. Model AA-30U is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. Power the alarm circuit is fused within the module. The fused requires an end of line resistor valued at 5.6 K ohms .5 watts. A Alarm Module Audibles Visuals B Alarm Module or DC Audibles Visuals AE-30U Audible Alarm Extender Module has been for use with the System 3 control panel and meets requirements of NFPA 72 Style (Class module provides a two wire circuit for operating polariz- parallel-connected 24 Vdc or 120 Vac notification app- The circuit capacity varies depending on device and rating. The total circuit load must not exceed 1.5 of the module is caused by a high going input from a system control module. Dual input activation are provided for programming or sequencing its Model AE-30U contains a yellow LED indicator the face of the module which indicates an open or condition. This is operative at all times except when system is in alarm. Model AE-30U is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. The wire circuit which is fused, requires an end of line valued at 5.6K ohms and rated at .5 watts for DC and 5 watts for AC devices. NUMBER and Architect Specifications and Architect Specifications Style systems, a notification appliance circuit for operating 24 Vdc polarized audible alarm devices shall be provided a Cerberus Pyrotronics Audible Alarm Class Module, Model AA-30U. This module shall be system inter-connected by ten-pin plug and harness assembly and shall be operable with the main control panel. receipt of a high-going DC actuating signal, the solid state circuitry shall supply operating power for vibrating 24 Vdc 24 Vdc horns or strobes. The maximum output current shall be limited to 1.5 amperes. The audible devices shall a four wire fused, supervised circuit. module shall contain a yellow LED indicator lamp to indicate an open or shorted alarm line when the system is in the condition. The LED shall be lamp tested from the main control panel. Model AA-30U shall be placement supervised and shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. of Line Device, Power Note 1) Note 2) Ohms max Line Resistance Notification Circuit Wires Notification (See Note 3) Z (Class A) Connected Polarized Appliances Shown in Supervisory Condition: 5mA or 120VAC, 1.5 Max NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES 1 strobe When Style Z (Class A) type notification appliance circuit configuration is used, 24 VDC appliances are

FM-200TM Extinguishing Systems Braided Actuation Hoses ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS in both 22 inch and inch Sizes to Install than Copper Tubing Servicing of Cylinders Minimum Bursting Pressure of psi Listed inch Flex Hose Length O.A.) inch Flex Hose Length O.A.) simplify installation and to ease servicing of cylinders, flexible hose can be used in place of inch copper The need to flare tubing is thus eliminated. Hoses are with swivel nuts for connection to the inch check in the master cylinder and to inch tees on pressure on slave cylinders. The tees used with flexible are fitted with swivel nuts for connection to pressure The hoses are furnished in 2 lengths to suit all sizes 10 lb. through 500 lb. Specifications between cylinders for pressure operation be made using stainless steel reinforced braided with swivel nut connections which fit standard male flared tubing fittings. It shall have a minimum working of 3000 psi and a minimum burst pressure of psi. Information No. Description inch Flexible Braided Hose, Length inch Flexible Braided Hose, Length No. NUMBER Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 Issue

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Sampling Detection AnaLASERTM Control Cards Bargraph Display of Smoke Intensity Microprocessor Controlled Real-time Monitoring via PC Three Field Programmable Alarm Alarm Verification at all Levels Detector Calibration Test Detector Isolate Switch Air Flow and Detector Status On-board History Storage Listed, FM Approved AnaLASERTM Control Card, Model ACC, is used in control units and in conjunction with air sampling detectors. The ACC displays intensity, measured by the detector, in an illumi- bar graph display. One ACC is used for each intensity, alarm conditions, and system troubles be communicated to fire alarm control panels via on dry contact relays. These same conditions are in the ACC own history buffer. Finally, they can be output to a chart recorder or other recording ACC, housed in the control unit, is connected to the detector via a six wire cable. Analog signals smoke and air flow are transmitted along this cable to ACC. Power to operate the detector and fan is also on this cable. ACC provides all the visual and mechanical interaction to operate its respective detection zone. All zone inputs, outputs and data ports are obtained plug in connectors located on the front of the card. detection zone operates as a stand alone system. ACC is a microprocessor based device with several parameters. All programmable parameters factory set to default values. In most applications no is required to make the system operational. NUMBER history buffer stores information on past smoke levels events. The programmed information and history data stored in non-volatile memory. The system will retain configuration and history data following a CPU reset or periods of power down conditions. Programming history data acquisition is done through a terminal or a with terminal emulation software. By adding a modem, programming and real time monitoring can be ACC control functions are as follows: fire alarm is selectable at any point along the bar display. This alarm is generally intended to be by the associated fire alarm system as a fire pre-alarms are selectable at any point along the bar display. These are generally interpreted by fire alarm to require investigation or to cause equipment A 0 to 60 second delay can be programmed for independent alarm level. This delay provides alarm for that detector as required. Bar Graph bar graph at the center of the control card displays the continuous output of smoke level in 10% of full scale. The absolute level of full scale is on the detector head sensitivity. Each bar segment can be configured as a possible alarm Alarm Indicators normal operation (see Isolate Switch the three LEDs located on the left side of the control card will when their respective pre-set levels have been and sustained for a period greater than their alarm threshold timer delays. Their flashing also the operation of each alarm level output relay. Normal Operation Indicator illuminated, indicates that all system functions are and their are no active troubles. Power Supply Trouble Indicator flashing, indicates that power has been transferred battery or that the power is outside the normal range. Air Flow Trouble Indicator flashing, indicates loss of adequate flow through the Low flow level is programmable. Detector Fail Indicator flashing, indicates that the detector needs servicing communication to the detector has been severed. CPU Fail Indicator flashing, indicates the CPU is not running or is in the mode. Signal Offset Switch selected, will subtract ambient smoke levels up to of the detector full scale obscuration. The modified reading is then used to control all output functions. Signal Averaging Switch selected, the control card averages the smoke and flow signals over 2, 4 or 8 second intervals. The modi- smoke reading is then used to control all output Isolate Switch selected, disables all alarm outputs and indicators of smoke level. Used for system testing. Alarm Levels Switch depressed, displays selected alarm levels on the b

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Audio Control Module Backup Tone On Board Central Controller For Audio System Local Trouble Audible and LED Network Communication Diagnostic LED Supervised Microprocessor Signal Generator Supervised Microphone Pre-amplifier Backup ULC Listed, FM, NYMEA, City Of Chicago ACM-1 is an MXLV module which acts as the audio master controller. It controls all audio related ACM-1 includes a local audible and on-board LED for indication of ACM troubles. These will also be indicated on the MKB-2 display. An amber LED is also supplied for monitoring network polling. ACM-1 has a microprocessor controlled signal with a complete set of available tones, select- using MXL AccuLINK system programming soft- The tones are fully supervised and a connector is for the addition of a BTC-1 backup tone when required. Tones available are: Whoop Hz Hz @ 120 PPM Hz @ 30 PPM Code KHz Code 3 Coded Audibles ACM-1 also includes a microphone preamplifier for with the MMM-1 microphone master module. The uses an automatic gain control circuit to distortion free live voice announcements. A pre-amplifier is supplied with automatic transfer the pre-amp fails. When the microphone key switch is the ACM-1 can send the adjustable length pre- tone to selected speaker circuits. The ACM-1 supervises the microphone, its cable and the ACM-1 acts as the controller for all VSM-1 switch VFM-1 fan control modules and VLM-1 annun- modules. It also controls the warden page as routed from the TMM-1 telephone master to the paging audio channel. It includes a for audible keystroke feedback and call-in signal. The ACM-1 mounts on the rear the MKB-2 display/keyboard module in the voice console and occupies one MXL network The address is set using a DIP switch on the itself. One ACM-1 is required in each system. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 NUMBER Sppececiifficicaations Archiitect S aand Arch Emergency Voice Alarm/Communication system include an ACM-1 module which shall act as the system master controller. It shall control all audio functions. ACM-1 shall include a local audible and on-board LED for indication of ACM troubles. These shall also be indicated on the MKB-2 display. on-board amber LED shall also be supplied for the fire alarm system CPU network polling. ACM-1 shall include a microprocessor controlled generator with a complete set of available tones, using system programming software. The shall be fully supervised and a connector shall be for the addition of a BTC-1 backup tone Tones available shall be: Whoop Hz Hz @ 120 PPM Hz @ 30 PPM Code KHz Code 3 Coded Audibles Diagram Diagram ACM-1 shall also include a microphone pre-ampli- for use with the MMM-1 microphone master module. preamplifier shall use an automatic gain control to assure distortion free live voice announce- A backup pre-amplifier shall be supplied with transfer during primary pre-amp failure. When microphone key switch is pressed, the ACM-1 shall capable of sending an adjustable length pre-an- tone to selected speaker circuits. The ACM-1 supervise the microphone, its cable and the ACM-1 shall act as the controller for all VSM-1 modules, VFM-1 fan control modules and VLM-1 modules. It shall also control the warden functions as routed from the TMM-1 telephone module to the paging audio channel. It shall a Sonalert for audible feedback of keystrokes firefighter telephone call-in. It shall mount on the of the MKB-2 display/keyboard module and occupy MXL network address. The address shall be set a DIP switch on the unit itself. One ACM-1 shall be in each system. Information Information Number Control Module Instructions to MMB-1, P8 to PSR-1, P5 Cable 555-192238

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Sampling Detection Sampling Detection ACU-2, ACU-3, ACU-4, ACU-S Control Units to 4 Zone Control Options with all Fire Alarm Panels Listed, FM Approved ABC-2, APS-1-48, APS-2-48 Power Supplies VAC to 24 VDC Standard Amp. Capacity, Regulated 48 VDC to 24 VDC Converter Listed, FM Approved AnaLASERTM Control Units are available in multiple and single zone configurations. The multiple zone unit houses up to four AnaLASERTM control cards, ACC (see Catalog Number 1162). The control cards all the necessary links for communication to other single zone control unit is a more compact package. it holds a control card with all of the same features above. Both control units are secured with lock key. AnaLASERTM power supplies are self-contained in an with batteries for backup. The standard supply a 120 VAC input. Both the AC power and the are supervised. additional battery cabinet for storage of two batteries is for systems of 3 or 4 zones of detection. 48 VDC to 24 VDC converter is available where required telephone switching centers. control units and power supplies are FM approved. AnaLASERTM system consists of four components: Air Sampling Network AnaLASERTM Detector Assembly (see Catalog No. 1160) AnaLASERTM Control Unit AnaLASERTM Power Supply. NUMBER Information Information Zone complete control unit. Incl: ACC, (1) control encl., (1) pwr. assy. Zone complete control unit. Incl: ACCs, (1) control encl., (1) pwr. assy. Zone complete control unit. Incl: ACCs, (1) control encl., (1) pwr. assy., (1) battery encl. Zone complete control unit. Incl: ACCs, (1) control encl., (1) pwr. assy., (1) battery encl. zone control unit. Incl: (1) (1) control encl., (1) pwr. supply (separate). VAC power supply assembly. Cabinet. VDC converter assembly. VDC converter (2) assembly. VDC 31 AH battery set. (Req w/ 2, S). (2 req w/ ACU-3, 4). (Required with ACU-1-4, S, one per ACC) detector assembly detector assembly detector assembly Control Unit Specifications Temperature: Recorder Output: Assembly Weight: to 125 V, 220 ohm lb. (4 Zone with DCCs) Humidity: Power Supply Specifications VAC to 24 VDC Supply Section Voltage: Current: Section Voltage: +/- 0.3 VDC Amps +/- 0.3 VDC final charge Input Voltage Range: Input Current: Range: Relay: VDC/24 VDC Converter Voltage: Ripple: Voltage: Ripple: Temperature: Voltage to output): Current: Supply to 132 VAC Hz to 256 VAC Hz Amps @ 120 VAC Amps @ 230 VAC to 70 closed rated 1 Amp. 28 VDC Resistive lead acid VDC VDC + 2% MV to 125 KVrms Amps 1/2″ x 4 5/8″ x 3″ Dimensions for AnaLASERTMTM Control Unit (Single Zone) Dimensions for AnaLASER Control Unit (Single Zone) Dimensions for AnaLASERTMTM Power Supply/Battery Box Dimensions for AnaLASER Power Supply/Battery Box Dimensions for AnaLASERTMTM Control Unit (Multiple Zone) Dimensions for AnaLASER Control Unit (Multiple Zone) Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/95

Audible Bases AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS ADB-3 / ADBI-60 ADB-3 / ADBI-60 ADB-3 Compatible with Series Detectors ADBI-60 Compatible with Series Detectors Produces 85db Audible Signal Surface Mounting Listed NYMEA Approved ADB-3 and ADBI-60 audible bases contain a prewired piezo-electric device that produces an 85db signal localized annunciation. The ADB-3 is designed to be with conventional Series 3 plug-in detectors. The is designed for use with addressable analog intelligent Series plug-in detectors. Typical applica- includes all areas that normally would require localized annunciation such as hotel, motel, apartment, and dormitory rooms. The ADB-3 and ADBI- are UL listed and NYMEA approved. ADB-3 is powered by a conventional zone of the control panel with operation of the piezo electric being controlled via terminal #6 of the detector During the supervision or no alarm condition, circuit to the ADB-3 is absent and there is zero current Upon alarm of its detector, circuit ground is provided the ADB-3 via the base contact of terminal #6 and the device is activated producing an 85db audible which serves as the local alarm. ADB-3 is turned off by the reset of the system control The system guarantees that only one auxiliary or device will activate per zone. ADB-3 operates with an input zone power of 18 VDC- VDC and requires a 4 square, 2 deep electrical box. The ADB-3 is not to be used for primary evacuation, but only as a audible signal device. Audible Base Model ADBI-60 consists of a standard Pyrotronics Series 3 base combined with sup- circuitry for the and Series Detectors and an device. All field wiring terminates at two of the four- terminal blocks located on the back of the unit. ADBI-60 can be used with the MXL, MXL-IQ or IXL different configurations can provide audible signal power to the ADBI-60 at terminals 1 through 4, as in diagrams 2, 3, 4 and 5 (See the typical Installa- Diagram Section). During the supervision state alarms), the polarity of the power to all ADBI-60 is in normal state, resulting in zero current flow to base. NUMBER Catalog Number 6148 any alarm is reported to the system, the power to all reverses polarity, but no audible sounds. The may then selectively command the ADBI-60, under control, to become audible. All ADBI-60 are capable of sounding simultaneously, individually in any combination depending upon the system Pro- and control panel. The ADBI-60 is UL 268 listed and the audibility sound output of 85 decibels at ten The ADBI-60 is not to be used for primary evacuation, but only as a audible signal device. Data Data ADB-3 is fully compatible with Series 3 plug-in detec- When an ADB-3 is used with a compatible detector, remote relay or lamp device can be used with that detector. No more than thirty (30) compatible of any type or combination (other than thermals manual stations) may be used on any one Cerberus conventional system detector circuit. ADBI-60 is compatible only with Cerberus Pyrotronics or IXL addressable detectors. No more than sixty (60) Series detectors on MXL or IXL loops may be used on one addressable initiating circuit. smoke detectors used with the ADB-3 and ADBI-60 subject to the maximum 30 ft. center spacing (900 sq. as referred to in the National Fire Protection Association 72. This spacing, however, is based on ideal namely, smooth ceiling, no air movement, and physical obstructions between the fire source and the This spacing should be used as a guide or in detector installation layout. Do not mount in areas close to ventilating or air conditioning Exposed joists or beamed ceilings may also effect spacing limitations for detectors. It is mandatory that 72 and good engineering judgement be applied detector locations and spacing. Specifications Speci

ALD-2I Analog Loop Driver AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Dynamic Supervision 2 Intelligent Analog Device Circuits Remote Smoke Detector Sensitivity, Voltage Device Identification 32 Character Custom Alphanumeric Message Accepts Remote Conventional Zone Modules Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, Security and Status Device Supports Audible Bases Short Circuit Isolation with LIM-1 On Board Microprocessor Isolated Power Supply Power Limited Per NEC 760 Programmable Input/Output Module 60 Intelligent Devices Per Circuit Remote Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjustment Independent Control of Detector Relays (Up to per Circuit) Intelligent Contact Monitoring Devices Supports T-Tap Wiring Style 4 (Class B) or Style 6 (Class A) Wiring Degrade Mode On-Board Ground Fault Detection Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA, City of Chicago Approved ALD-2I is an MXL Network option module that sup- two intelligent analog circuits utilizing Cerberus series type intelligent devices. It occupies addresses on the Network and, through the use of a communications protocol, devices connected to ALD-2I circuits are dynamically supervised by the MXL Panel. Smoke detectors are monitored for sensitiv- and notification is given when the sensitivity is outside parameters. Each of the ALD-2I circuits supports use of up to 60 alarm, trouble, security, status and type devices as well as remote conventional device zone modules (CZM-1) and intelligent devices (TRI-60R, ICP). Sensitivity of any smoke can be queried and adjusted from the control Sensitivity as well as other device information can displayed and printed at the control panel. The ALD-2I the use of relay bases and audible bases (inde- controllable). provide analog loop short circuit isolation, the LIM-1 can be used to prevent a single short from loop device communication. ALD-2I circuit can be wired in either a Style 4 (Class or Style 6 (Class A) configuration. When using the Style method, T-Tapping is permitted with no loss of supervi- ALD-2I has an on board microprocessor that provides with the ability to function in a degrade mode and initiate conditions even if the MXL main microprocessor NUMBER Instructions 315-090287 315-086590 315-090556 315-091857 315-092471 315-092135 315-090437 315-090903 315-092169 315-090903 315-090288 No end of line device is required. Both circuits are power limited to NFPA 70, per NEC Each detector, or group of detectors, requires a circuit of 18 AWG minimum thermoplastic wire enclosed in a conduit of 18 AWG limited- shielded cable without conduit, if permitted by building codes. Total circuit resistance must not exceed 100 ohms. Capacitance: between loop+ and loop- between loop+ and chassis between loop- and chassis T-Tapping is not allowed on Class A loops. Diagram ALD-2I plugs into one full option slot in the MOM-2 or card cage. equipment is approved for operation over the tem- range of 0 and 49 and Architect Specifications analog device circuits shall be provided by an Analog Loop Driver Module. This module shall into one full slot of the MOM-2 or MOM-4 card cage a part of the Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL or MXLV sys- ALD-2I shall provide two circuits. Each of these shall support the use of up to 60 intelligent de- as well as remote conventional initiating zone Sensitivity of any smoke detector can be and adjusted from, as well as displayed at, the panel. Sensitivity change shall be performed either or automatically through the time based logic. ALD-2I shall support the use of relay bases, audible and remote lamps. circuits shall be capable of being wired to meet the of either NFPA Style 4 or Style 6. When wired a Style 4 circuit, it shall support the use of parallel circuits (T-Tapping). ALD-2I shall utilize an on board CPU as well as interface circuitry and A/D converters. It shall be of operation in a degrade mode in the event of main processor failure or loss or network communica- link. In the degrade mode the ALD-2I circu

ASC-1 / ASC-2 Amplifier Supervisory Cards AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Amplifier Input And Output Supervision Variable Backup Amplifier Ratio Automatic Transfer To Backup Plugs Into OMM-1 Cardcage Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM, City Of Chicago ASC-1 is an MXLV card which plugs into one slot of OMM-1 cardcage. It supervises the output of up to primary and optionally, one backup amplifier. The may be on the same or different audio chan- ASC-1 is required for each 3 primary amplifiers, if no backup amplifiers are being used. ASC-1 monitors and compares the channel riser on the OMM-1 to the amplifier output. If it deter- that the output of any primary amplifier is incor- it will automatically transfer operation to the backup The backup amplifier may be shared by ASC-1 cards providing the ability to determine primary to backup ratio. If desired, backup amplifi- can be provided on a one for one basis, using ASC-1 for each primary/backup amplifier set. ASC-1 occupies one OCC-1 sub-address. The is set using an on-board DIP switch. A second switch is provided for configuration of the ASC-1. between the amplifiers, audio riser busses the ASC-1 are made through the appropriate OMM- screw terminals. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 ASC-2 is an MXLV card which plugs into one slot of OMM-1 cardcage. It supervises the output of one and optionally, one backup amplifier. ASC-2 is required for each primary amplifier, a high power audio riser is to be connected to Control modules, even if no backup amplifiers are used. ASC-2 monitors and compares the channel riser on the OMM-1 to the amplifier output. If it deter- that the output of any primary amplifier is incor- it will automatically transfer operation to the amplifier. The backup amplifier may be shared multiple ASC-2 cards providing the ability to deter- the primary to backup ratio. If desired, backup can be provided on a one for one basis, one ASC-2 for each primary/backup amplifier set. ASC-2 occupies one OCC-1 sub-address. The is set using an on-board DIP switch. A second switch is provided for audio configuration of the between the amplifiers, audio riser busses the ASC-2 are made through the appropriate OMM- screw terminals. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 NUMBER and Architect Specifications of primary and backup amplifiers shall be by a configurable plug-in module, model ASC- The card shall plug into one slot in on the OMM-1 cardcage. Multiple ASC-1s may be used to additional amplifiers, both primary and as necessary. Through the use of the ASC-1, amplification shall be provided on either a one one or one for multiple basis. Backup amplifiers shall capable of supporting primary amplifiers in any of 3 amplifier supervisory card shall monitor the input output of each amplifier and check for proper audio If a primary amplifier output is found to be defec- the supervisory card shall annunciate a system condition and transfer operation to the backup if supplied. The backup amplifier shall replace first failed primary amplifier. ASC-1 card edge fingers shall be gold plated for reliability. The module shall be provided with a which when inserted into the OMM-1 card slot will any other type of module from being inadvert- plugged into that slot. ASC-1 shall occupy one of the OCC-1 module sub- This address shall be set using an on-board switch. A second dip switch shall be provided to the ASC-1 operation. of primary and backup amplifiers shall be by a configurable plug-in module, model ASC- The card shall plug into one slot in on the OMM-1 cardcage. It shall be capable of supervising one and optionally, one backup amplifier. The ASC- shall be used to supervise high power audio risers ICP remote control modules are controlling audio Multiple ASC-2’s may be used to supervise amplifiers, both primary and backup, as Through the use of the ASC-2, backup shall be provided on either a one for one one for multiple basis. amplifier supervisory card shall monitor the input output of each amplifier and check for proper audio If a primary amplif

AnaLASER Sampling Detection ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS ASD-6, ASD-12 AnaLASERTM Detectors Air Sampling/Aspiration Smoke Detection Highly Sensitive Detection Times More Spot Type Detectors Laser Light Scattering Technology Applicable to High Air Flow Environments Minimal Maintenance Required Engineered Air Sampling Pipe Network Meets NFPA 72 Standard for Smoke Detectors FM Approved (ASD-3, ASD-6), (Canada) AnaLASERTM detection system is a high sensitivity, air system. Through the laser based light source fire be detected in its incipient stage. Smoke particles are by a fan into an air sampling pipe network to the de- This allows detection over a large area, in confined or from air return ducts. The AnaLASERTM system is Approved and meets NFPA 72 requirements for smoke Applications AnaLASERTM detection system can be used in many where conventional spot -type smoke detec- are used, but are stretched beyond their reasonable The Ana-LASERTM system can be used in envi- with high volume air movements such as clean or with unpredictable airflow patterns such as atri- and hangars. It can provide high sensitivity detection a large area. Applications which require the detector to obscure, as in prisons and museums, are also well by the AnaLASERTM system. The following list in- some of the many applications for the AnaLASERTM system. hangars, anechoic chambers, art galleries, atriums, rooms, cable tunnels, cathedrals, clean rooms, com- rooms, concert halls, container vessels, cruise ships, equipment racks, escalators, historical build- hospitals, hotels, laboratories, libraries, machine motels, museums, nuclear reactors, office buildings, accelerators, passenger rail prisons, radio transmitters, recording studios, satellite facilities, schools, sports complexes, stadi- switchboards, telephone exchanges, theaters, under- railway stations, warehouses. AnaLASERTM system consists of four components: Air Sampling Network, AnaLASERTM Detector Assembly, AnaLASERTM Control Unit (see Catalog No.1161) AnaLASERTM Power Supply (see Catalog No. Sampling Network air sampling network is constructed of 1 inch, 3/4 inch and 1/2 inch smooth bore pipe which is distributed the protected area. A sampling network may only one length of pipe or up to 20 pipes which all to the detector. Air sampling holes are strategically along the pipes according to code, per NFPA 72 or as required for maximum protection. 1161). NUMBER their size, and contribute little to the detector sig- level. Airflow is monitored with a bead type thermistor is cooled by the air passing through the detection and compared to a reference thermistor mounted the chamber. Should the airflow vary or stop, a com- circuit transmits a signal to the control panel. intensity of the laser is monitored and controlled with a control circuit that maintains the stability and of the AnaLASERTM detector over its life. Compen- is provided by changes in laser intensity due to tem- aging of components, or contaminant buildup. circuit also monitors or supervises the operation of criti- components in the system: laser, photo diode, and opti- assembly. Failure or out of tolerance will result in a fail signal being transmitted to the control panel. detectors with different sensitivity dynamic ranges available. Sensitivity selection depends on the minimum of smoke to be detected plus the ambient level of air It is necessary to conduct an on-site test to deter- which sensitivity range is appropriate for the protec- of given hazard. This test should be conducted before installation is commissioned. AnaLASERTM Control Unit and Power see Catalog Number 1161. Archii tect and Arch Air Sampling Smoke Detection System shall be Pyrotronics AnaLASERTM. The detector shall be in an airtight enclosure with straight- through airflow The air shall pass through the detector without ob- or filter which requires maintenance and which inhibit the system ability to detect smoke. An optional to a 3/4 inch pipe, shall be available to return the air back to the area or duct being prote

System 3 Annunciators AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Cerberus Pyrotronics model AV-32 Audio/Visual Annun- and model V-33 Visual Annunciator are designed to the sense of sight to conventional audible fire alarm The AV-32 packages both the visual and audible in a single enclosure. The model V-33 is suitable visual annunciation only or for use with separately audible devices. units are UL listed. AV-32 and V-33 provide a red phenolic cover plate a thermoplastic lens and polarized lamp assembly. The assembly contains a solid state flasher and vibration lamp. To increase visual awareness, the word printed vertically in white, on both sides of the module. AV-32 also provides an integral mounting bracket and for installing a Cerberus Pyrotronics polarized horn (order surface and flush back boxes are available to meet most requirements. The surface backboxes are finished red enamel to match the annunciator. AV-32 and the V-33 are available in 24 VDC or 120 VAC Lamps are easily replaceable from the rear of the All wiring connections are by pigtail leads. and Architect Specifications remote annunciators shall be Cerberus Pyrotronics ________(AV-32 or V-33). They shall or visual) indication of a fire unit shall consist of a red molded cover plate, polarized unit, convex thermoplastic reflective lens and a metal The lamp unit shall contain a solid state flasher and vibration-resistant illuminating lamp. Provision shall be in the model AV-32 to accommodate a Cerberus polarized horn. annunciator shall operate from_____(24 VDC or 115 VAC) supply and shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Information Requirement: VDC – .17 Amp. VAC – 10 watts Information Fire Annunciator, 115 VAC (less horn and Fire Annunciator, 24 VDC (less horn and Fire Annunciator, 115 VAC (less backbox) Fire Annunciator, 24 VDC (less backbox) Backbox for AV-32 Backbox for AV-32 Backbox for V-33 2.2 2.2 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 .9 .9 The polarity of the DC devices coresponds to actuation (alarm) while the polarity of the devices corresponds to the supervisory mode. When connecting the DC devices to Pytotronics equipment, plus (+) connects to minus (-) in supervisory mode. For AC plus (+) connects to plus (+). For Dimensions, see reverse side. NUMBER The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 12/93

Abort Station for Extinguishing ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AW-1 Momentary Contact Manually Prevents FM-200TM Mushroom Button Listed and FM Approved model AW-1 abort station is designed for use with Pyrotronics fire detection systems which are listed/ for release of FM-200TM. abort station employs a momentary contact push button switch which, while held in, prevents of the clean agent. Upon release of the push the FM-200TM will be discharged either immediately or a delay period, depending on the system configura- model AW-1 abort station consists of a momentary switch with large red head for ease of It is mounted on a steel plate. Screw type terminals provided for connection to the agent release circuit. The assembly mounts on a standard 2 deep two gang box. one or both detection zones are in alarm, FM-200TM can be withheld by pressing the switch push depending on system configuration and program- The button must be kept pressed until the control is reset. If the control panel is not reset and the push is released, provided that two zones have alarmed, the panel will enter a discharge mode. This will result in discharge, resumption of pre-discharge delay or beginning of pre-discharge delay period, depend- on the abort/delay configuration of the system. Pressing button before a zone is in alarm will cause a trouble signal the control panel. Specification abort station shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics model AW-1 Underwriters Laboratories listing and Factory Mutual shall include a momentary contact type switch push button which, while pressed, will prevent the of the clean agent. The switch shall be mounted on steel cover plate. Screw type terminals shall be provided. entire assembly shall be capable of being mounted on a 2 deep two gang electrical box. NUMBER and Electrical Information No. Contact Pole N.C. amp AC/DC Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 Issue

A/P Series Alphanumeric Display / Printer Interface Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS LAN, RAN, LPI and RPI LAN, RAN, LPI and RPI Field Programmable User Selectable, English Read-Out 80 Character Liquid Crystal Display 40 Character Lines) Alarm Indication Local and/or Remote Applications Up to 16 Displays per System Up to 1,000 History Log Events Memory Audible Signaling RS232 Compatible Output to Drive Printer ULC Listed, FM, CSFM and Approved Pyrotronics A/P Series, Alphanumeric Display/ Interface Modules, include nonvolatile memory to user specific alarm and trouble messages, as well as log information. User specific messages can be programmed using a terminal or laptop computer to the serial I/O port. Alphanumeric Display/Printer Interface satisfies requirements for local and/or remote text of the system. The display is field Alphanumeric Display consists of two 40-character of user-selectable, field programmable information. In quiescent mode, the display indicates system status the switch is activated. The Display/Printer Interface also provides an signal when a new alarm or trouble condition is to the Control Panel. When the Alphanumeric/ Interface is mounted in the control panel, the switch will activate the display during conditions and to scroll the display for the messages. Located on the remote Alphanumeric is a multipurpose switch designed to activate the during quiescent conditions, silence the audible scroll the display for multiple messages and check programmed message text. Alphanumeric Display/Printer Interface may be to operate the printer in three different & Trouble and Logger the Alphanumeric/Printer Interface receives a report the Control Panel, which changes the mode of from quiescent to Alarm and/or Trouble mode(s), a user selected field programmed message is and may be programmed to print on a standard printer. The Alphanumeric/Printer Interface is communicating with the Control Panel via the Communication Line so that any malfunction that communication will cause a trouble signal at the Panel. NUMBER Alphanumeric/Printer Interface is frequently utilized in remote from the control panel, where annunciation is Its user selectable display of alarms provided an text readout for identifiable devices connected to Control Panel. Its printer interface drives a serial printer. annunciation allows for ease of identification of the area under an emergency condition. Supports message vectoring to particular A/P annuncia- local Alphanumeric/Printer Interface may be installed the Control Panel. The remote Alphanumeric/Printer is constructed to be mounted on a 19 width by high rack mounting plate, with an overall depth of 2.75 The display should be mounted so the liquid crystal display is 4 to 5 above floor level for optimum viewing angle. The viewing angle may be if necessary. However, best results are obtained the above recommended height. and Environment Temperature:: to 49 Humidity:: non-condensing Number of A/P per System:: (4 loops) Voltage:: Current:: VDC (from Network Line) Amp (plus printer if required) Connector:: RS232C Compatible Display Size per Letter:: 4.55 mm Height Box Width:: x 19 x 3 Trim Kit Width:: x 21 and Architect Specifications Alphanumeric shall connect to the Network Line and be completely field program- It shall have two lines of 40 characters each, and indicate first alarm. There will be an audible device that activate upon alarm. These annunciators shall also 1,000 history log events. When installed in the panel cabinet, it shall be model LAN or LPI. If installed, the model shall be RAN or RPI. The user shall be totally field programmable with

BB-55, BB-55R and DE-1 Enclosures AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS BB-55 Enclosure for Up to 60 Battery DE-1 Enclosure for Document Sturdy Welded Construction T-45 Key and Lock Set Installed Vented for Heat Dissipation Available in Black with Cerberus Logo BB-55R is a Red Battery Enclosure Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics BB-55 and BB-55R are steel enclosures with sufficient capacity and strength to up to the BTX-2 battery set. The BB-55 is a black with the Cerberus Pyrotronics logo. The BB-55R red to meet specific local codes. boxes have the same dimensions. The width is 24 to match the enclosure width of our larger systems. enclosures are secured with the same lock set pro- on all Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment. enclosures are constructed for long life and heat A top knockout aligns with the bottom knock- in the MXL enclosure. This product is listed by Under- Laboratories for its intended use. Cerberus Pyrotronics DE-1 can be used to store and documents pertinent to the fire alarm system they may be required. This enclosure matches fire alarm system enclosure in color, logo and key set. Information Number NUMBER and BB-55R The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotonics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (973) 267-1300 (973) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/97

System 3 Control Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS BC-35 Battery Charger/Transfer BC-35 Battery Charger/Transfer BE-35 Battery Extender BE-35 Battery Extender Automatic Operation LED Trouble Indicator For Lead Acid or Sealed Cadmium Batteries Battery Circuit Supervised Transfers System to Battery Listed, ULC Listed, NYMEA, FM, CSFM and City of Chicago Approved Supervises battery placement along with high and low voltage points. Withstands shorted battery terminal connections along preventing the possibility of reversed battery polarity. Charging path of BC-35, BE-35 and MM-35 modules are for placement. are the battery capacities for this charging Capacity Modules Used NUMBER

System 3 Battery Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AH AH Sealed Spillproof High Energy Density No Corrosive Fumes Mounts Within Enclosure Long Life Cycle FM, NYMEA & Approved AH AH NUMBER Cerberus Pyrotronics battery supply modules are to provide 24 volt emergency standby power operate a System 3 Universal Control during failure of normal commercial power source. Pyrotronics offers 2 battery module options. module option 1 contains two (2) sealed lead rechargeable batteries (12 volts each) model BT-33 provide 6.0 ampere hours of energy and the model chassis and bracket assembly. option 2 contains four (4) sealed lead acid batteries (6 volts each) model BT-34 that 10 ampere hours of energy and the model BK- chassis and bracket assembly. Batteries are especially suited to high discharge They are also suited for long term power when with the proper charging circuits. Terminals are for connecting both battery module options to charger model BC-35. BT-33/BK-33 and the BT-34/BK-33 combination 3 standard module spaces and must occupy 3 the center 4 module positions in the lowest module of the enclosure. The BT-33, BK-33 battery module and the BT-34, BK-33 battery module are UL listed. Information and Architect Specifications supply standby power to the system there shall be a Pyrotronics battery module. This module shall of a 24 volt sealed lead acid battery system of the gelled electrolyte type or starved electrolyte rated at ______ (insert 6 or 10) ampere hours at a hour discharge rate. module shall be complete with support bracketing screw type terminals and shall be installed on the standard enclosure that houses the control panel operating modules. battery module shall be the Cerberus Pyrotronics BT-33 battery pack and the model BK-33 battery for 6 ampere hour requirements or the Cerberus model BT-34 battery pack and model BK-33 10 ampere hour requirements. Characteristics BT-33 24V AH Voltage Capacity BT-34 24V AH Rate 6.0 ampere hour battery pack 10.0 ampere hour battery pack bracket for either of the above Weight lbs. (4.5Kg) bs. (6.8Kg) lbs. (.9Kg) The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (973) 267-1300 (973) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/97

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Control Element Module Form C Relay Contacts Field Programmable Requires No DIP Switch Solid LED to Indicate Activation Scew Terminals Provided Listed, FM, CSFM and Approved CE-S Addressable Control Element provides a set of C relay contacts, and addressable electronics to its use on the IXL System Network Communication An optional trim plate, model FR5, is available for mounting. Each control element contains an LED for of normal monitoring or alarm activation. and Architect Specifications control element shall be provided as model CE-S. This shall be connected to the Network Communication and be field programmable for one of the following Remote Relay (Form C, 1 Amp. 24 VDC, 200mA VAC) with supervised relay operation, or Remote Audio Circuit (1 Amp.). There shall be an LED on device that will flash to indicate the unit is being and a steady LED to indicate the unit has been CE-S Control Element connects directly to the Network Communication Line via either NFPA 72, Style 6 (Class A) or NFPA Standard 72 Style 4 B) wiring Configuration. the quiescent mode, the addressable electronics in the Control Element monitors the unit for internal status. The Control Element in its quiescent will flash a red LED to indicate that the monitored is active and functional. In this state, the Form C associated with the Control Element are in a de- state. an alarm occurs, the system program causes the Control Element to activate. When the Control is activated, it reacts by energizing its relay. The will remain energized as long as the Control Element activated. The LED on the cover plate will remain lit to indicate activation. NUMBER Control Element will report a Trouble whenever there is break in the external wiring when internal circuitry fails or there is a Network Communication Line Break. of Control Elements must be performed a new unit is installed. In order to program a Control the control panel must be placed in the program- mode. The address will be assigned to the Control that has the Programming Tool applied to it. The must have an EOL device in place to program if it is as a remote signal circuit. Also refer to the IXL Manual for CE-S and system configuration details. Control Element(s) should be installed in accessible for maintenance purposes. They should be (surface or flush) in visible locations so that their LED may be seen for quick and easy verification. Diagram and Environmental Temperature: Humidity: Current: to 49 non-condensing (deactivated) (relay activated) VDC (from Network Line) at 30 VDC Amp. at 120 VAC C Contact Voltage: Rating: Element Housing: standard electrical box 11/16 x 4 11/16 x 2 3/4 x 4 3/4 x 1 5/8 3/4 x 5 3/4 x 1/2 Ring: Information Mount Element Trim Ring Tool Use 18 AWG minimum wire. Limit the maximum ohms per pair to 80. Use shielded twisted pair. End the shield ONLY at the MMB-1 enclosure. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 12/93

U-MH and U-MHT Series Horns and Mini-Horn/Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Universal Mount 1, 2 Gang or 4(cid:148) Square Back Box Mounting Mini-Horn or Mini-Horn / Strobe Units Very Low Inrush Current 24 Vdc Units Available with 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110 Candela Strobes Electronics Steady Tone – Selectable Steady or Temporal Tone – Low Current Draw – DC or Full Wave Available in Red or Sof-White Color Light Plastic Grille Design ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Versions Screw Terminals Accept #12 AWG CSFM, NYMEA & ULC Pending Pyrotronics MH & MHT series mini-horn operates a current of 15 ma at 24Vdc. The audio portion of the provides a 92dB output. The U-MH-1G and U-MHT- units, mount on a single gang. All other units are either 2 gang or 4(cid:148) square mounting. Pyrotronics notification devices are designed with installer in mind. The U-MH and U-MHT series devices constructed with all of the electronics in the housing not in the box. This design helps eliminate possible faults from jamming everything in the box. Units are available in two colors, red and sof-white. mini horn / strobe unit construction consist of Xenon with solid state circuitry for maximum reliability efficiency. The full range of new strobes have a dome shape made of clear Lexan (cid:147)FIRE(cid:148) letters visible on the front mounting plate. The overall lens is x 2 7/8(cid:148) with a height of 1 3/8(cid:148). units can also be synchronous when used with the sync control unit. (See reverse side for ordering order a device in (cid:147)white(cid:148) use a (cid:147)-W(cid:148) at the end of the number (i.e., U-MH-W or U-MHT-W). NUMBER Information Mini-Horns / Strobes Number Description Rating 10 Number Description Rating 10 operating range is 20 to 31 VDC/FWR UL measurements ar 82dB taken in free air at 360 around the and averaged. Typical readings are frontal sound readings taken a dB meter with signal mounted on wall. Rated for indoor use at 32 120 (0 to 49 with 85% RH. for Canadian ULC listed model) for Canadian French ULC listed model)

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Interface Module Interface for MXL/CXL Provides Remote Monitoring and Control Built-in Modem 8 Miles with Twisted Pair Wire Fiber Optic Interface Unlimited Distance with Data Grade Lines Plugs into MOM-2/MOM-4 Cardcage Slot) Allows Bi-Directional Communication Alarm and Trouble Monitoring Diagnostic Report Generation ULC Listed, NYMEA, CSFM, City of Chicago Approved CMI-300 is an MXL option module which provides communication between an MXL and a CXL The CMI-300 plugs into any available 1/2 slot on MOM-2/MOM-4 cardcage. This interface board trans- signals from the MXL network to CXL compatible signals. CMI-300 allows alarm and trouble information to be from the MXL to the CXL as well as allowing execution of commands from the CXL to the MXL. can be wired in either a Style 4 or Style 6 configuration 18 AWG 2 conductor cable with a distance limitation approximately 8 miles. It can also be used with dedi- data grade conditioned telco lease lines, 600 Ohms 2 wire, full duplex, with no distance limitation. to CXL communication is also possible via fiber optic (Note: Dedicated data grade phone lines are amplified via telephone system equipment. lines are supervised by the CXL and therefore pass through switching stations on general voice lines). communications between the MXL and CXL are via the CMI-300. equipment is approved for operation over the tem- range of 0 and 49 and Architect Specifications communication between an MXL and a CXL shall be provided by a CMI-300 MXL option The CMI-300 shall plug into any available 1/2 slot an MOM-2/MOM-4 cardcage. This interface board shall signals from the MXL network to Cerberus CXL system compatible modem signals. CMI-300 shall allow alarm and trouble information to transmitted from the MXL to the CXL as well as allowing execution of commands from the CXL to the MXL system report generation such as device sensitivity It shall be capable of either a Style 4 or Style 6 configuration using 18 AWG 2 conductor cable with distance limitation of approximately 8 miles. It shall also capable of use with dedicated data grade conditioned lease lines, 600 Ohms balanced, 2 wire, full duplex, no distance limitation. MXL to CXL communication is possible on fiber optic cable at distances up to 10,000 between fiber optic interface modules. communication between the MXL and the CXL shall be supervised via the CMI-300. NUMBER Data Rating or Alarm Battery Current: 30mA max. Data MOM-2/MOM-4 SLOT Wiring P/N 140-820366 Use 2-wire copper cable, 105 300V, 18AWG, solid or stranded. Do use more than seven strands. The recommended cable is Belden or its equivalent. All wiring must conform to local codes and to the authority having over the installation. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 7/95

Conventional Fire Alarm & Accessories Fire Alarm Control 12 Zones Expandable to 32 10 Amp Power Supply to 20 4 Notification Appliance Expandable to 16 2 Amps per Notification Circuit Model PXL, Part No. 599-694189 Alarm Control Panels of Cerberus Pyrotronics conventional Fire Alarm Controls listed/approved by UL, ULC, CSFM & NYMEA. These based panels are listed as compatible with of the accessories included here. They also include based features to meet any need including monitoring, waterflow alarms, event history logs zone bypass. They provide a complete system solution any zoned building. Features Easy to Use, ATM-Style for Operating & Programming Fire Alarm Control 4 Zones Expandable to 8 3 Amp Power Supply 2 Notification Appliances Circuits Field Programmable Software Features Every Application Model SXL, Part No. 599-692530 NUMBER Self Diagnostic Detector Advanced Field Cleanable Chamber Design UL Listed Self Test Feature Multi-Color LED for Normal, Trouble or Indication Low-Profile Design Easy Twist-In Base Design Made in USA at ISO 9001 Facility ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, Approved Detector Model PE-11, Part No. 500-094150 Base Model DB-11, Part No. 500-094151 Detectors Pyrotronics smoke detectors have been devel- using an extensive history of fire test data. This is designed into new technology products provide high reliability while reducing installation and test time. DI-3 has standardized the ionization detection principle over 15 years. PE-11 uses a self-test feature to eliminate need for special sensitivity meters. The PBA-1191 both transmitter and receiver in one housing to installed wiring costs. These devices satisfy any detection problem. Ionization Smoke Detector Adjustable Sensitivity Dual Chamber Sensitivity Test Points Simple Twist/Lock Assembly Optional Auxiliary Relay Screw-Clamp Terminals Alarm LED ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, Approved Detector Model DI-3, Part No. 500-081806 Base Model DB-3S, Part No. 595-381804 Beam Smoke Detector Transmitter and Receiver Installed in the Housing Easy Alignment and Installation Two-Wire Installation Suitable for Ranges from 17 Feet to 280 Feet Response Behavior Selectable in Three Settings High Immunity to Extraneous Light Automatic and Comprehensive Self-Test Operates According to the Principle of Light- by Smoke Detector Model PBA-1191, Part No. 500-095076 Base Model PBB-1191, Part No. 500-095077 Reflector Model PBR-1191, Part No. 500-095078 Voice/Alarm Communication System 25 or 70.7 VRMS Audio (Field Selected) True 100 Watts RMS Output Capacity Up to 11 Optional Speaker and Strobe Modules in One Cabinet All Outputs are Power Limited & Supervised Style Y (Class B) and Style Z (Class A) and Strobe Circuits Dry Contact or polarity reversal Activation Activation Inputs are Fully Supervised Optional Digital MessageMaker is Field Coded Tone Option Backup Evacuation Tone Option Stand Alone or for Use with any Fire Alarm/ Control Panel ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA Model VoiceCom, Part No. 500-693713 (50 Watts) Model VoiceCom-MM, Part No. 500-693714 Watts with MessageMaker) Model VoiceCom-L, Part No. 500-694227 (100 Watts) Auxiliary Power Supply / NAC Extender 6 Amps of Notification Appliance Power Advanced Microprocessor Control 24 VDC Regulated Output Voltage Four Power-Limited Notification Outputs Synchronized ANSI Temporal Pattern Class Selectable Ground Fault Detection Battery Supervision 3 Amp Auxiliary Power Output Trouble Contact for Monitoring Model PAD-2, Part No. 500-694275 Evacuation Americans with Disabilities Act has driven the need for capacity in all buildings. VoiceCom Emergency Evacuation System and the PAD-2 NAC provide for the control of notification appliances any structure. Both products can be configured multiple ways to meet local codes for installation as well for safe building evacuation. Notification Appliances S-Strobes 15, 15/75, 75 & 110 Models SS-Strobes-Synchronized MTL – 8 Tone Electronic Horns MTLS – 8 Tone Horn Strobes E – Singl

CP-2ER Control Panel ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS CP-2ER CP-2ER Class A* or B** Options Cross Zoned Detection Circuits Limited Option on Notification Circuits LED Indicating Various Normal Off Normal Conditions Discharge Delay Time Selection or 60 Hour Battery Back-Up Manual or Automatic Release Release Disconnect Switch as Complying with Either 72, 12A, 13 or 2001 CSFM and NYMEA Approval NFPA Style D ** NFPA Style b Cerberus Pyrotronics Control Model CP-2ER is a two- local control unit which meets the requirements of NFPA or a two-zone releasing device panel approved in accor- with NFPA 72, 12A, 13 and 2001 for cross zone When the CP-2ER Control Panel is used as a device, two Class A* or Class B** detection circuits arranged so that both zones must be activated in order to the agent automatically into the protected area. Control Panel provides for the external connection of manual discharge switches for releasing of agent well as several other supervised input and output func- Essentially, every supervised feature has its own fault indicator for ease of troubleshooting the should a fault occur. through the front cover are the usual visual for power, system alarm, and system trouble, as as several additional specific function indicators. Within Control Panel are a fire alarm RESET/LAMP TEST switch, ALARM SILENCE switch, a SUPERVISORY SILENCE a TROUBLE SILENCE switch and a RELEASE DIS- switch. The separate visual fault indicators are within the panel for all supervised features. of power limited Module PLM-35 allows power wiring of alarm indicating circuits. This permits alarm wiring to be run in same conduit with initiating device or with other power limited circuit wiring. Isolated relay are provided for: System alarm DPDT, System SPDT, Predischarge/discharge SPDT, and open. Automatic Discharge Operation single zone alarm condition results in: Alarm lock-in of that zone Visual alarm indication of that zone. General alarm condition of panel which includes: Change of state of fire alarm relay contacts. General alarm audible circuit activated. activation of both zones, the discharge delay sequence The discharge delay period may be preselected by Rotary Switch. the discharge delay period begins (both zones alarmed), the general alarm audible circuit is de-energized, the relay contacts (TB3, terminals 10 through 14) state (See Option No. 4). The predischarge audible NUMBER device service in accordance with NFPA 72 (Local fire code), 12A (Releasing of Halon 1301), 13 (Preaction) 2001 (Releasing of clean agent). It shall provide A (NFPA Style D) and B (NFPA Style B) options and 10 selectable discharge delay up to 45 seconds. shall provide the following abort options: Abort operational only if only one detection zone has Full discharge delay follows release of abort after both zones have activated. Abort operational anytime before discharge delay has Continuation of unexpired discharge delay release of abort switch. Same as #2, except full discharge delay follows release abort switch. shall provide the following manual discharge options: Operation of manual discharge switch results in delay prior to discharge. Operation of manual discharge switch results in imme- discharge. Use With Alarm System: control panel for the manual or automatic fire alarm shall be Cerberus Pyrotronics Model CP-2ER. It be FM approved and UL listed as a local control unit accordance with NFPA 72, 12A, 13 and 2001. It shall A (NFPA Style D) and B (NFPA B) options on two initiating device circuits. Information 120 VAC (102-132) 50/60 Hz. (3) wire, 2 amp. max. (2) with ground Information When ordering specify whether batteries shall be 24 60 hour standby capacity. No. Description Panel Hr. Battery Pack for CP-2ER (5AH) Hr. Battery Pack for CP-2ER (10AH) lbs. kg.)

Pyr-A-Lon 1301 Control Panel AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS CP-2HR CP-2HR Class A* or B* Options 3 Selective Abort Options Failsafe Reset Telltale Operation Latch Action Until Reset No Break Rods Necessary Listed, FM Approved Pyr-A-Lon Series MH Remote Manual Electric has been designed with extreme flexibility in to meet a wide variety of application requirements operational sequences in connection with its basic as a release control for Pyr-A-Lon 1301 Fire Systems. comply with NFPA 12A, these controls are now only with a dual action function involving a tab, followed by the lever action. of the above actions may operate electrical to achieve various electrical sequence func- as desired. Series MH Manual Controls are Underwriters Inc. listed and Factory Mutual approved. of Application basic standard model is the double action Model which contains one normally open contact. It intended for use with Cerberus Pyrotronics low systems, but has a rating of 120 Vac for connec- to other systems. the double action control, the optional switch on first action may be used for supervisory indication of with the control or for connection to a remote It may also be used to alarm one zone of a fire extinguishing system where the second releasing the Halon 1301. Description Pyr-A-Lon Series MH Remote Manual Electric is constructed of durable molded polycarbonate matte-finished in red with raised letting in The housing incorporates a tab which be operated first, permitting access to the lever which, when operated, locks in position releasing a spring-loaded contact switch. Restor- the system to normal can only be accomplished by the cover of the hinged housing with tool and then closing and locking the models are fitted with screw-type terminals for interconnection. Provision is made for surface semi-flush mounting to conduit boxes. NUMBER and Architect Specifications Remote Manual Electric Control shall be Pyr-A-Lon _____ (See chart for number) with Underwriters Inc. listing and Factory Mutual approval. Action Model the double action control, which be on the non-code type, shall consist of a molded fitted with a lever and a It shall be necessary to operate the tab to provide access to the lever, which, operated, locks in position after releasing a contact switch to effect actuation of the circuit. body of the control shall be hinged to a backplate to which it is locked with a socket head screw. the control after operation shall require the control momentarily, and then locking the to the backplate. Provision shall be made for the or semi-flush mounting to conduit boxes. No. Wt. Mounting Box lbs. Tool Pacakge 2 tools) lb. and Electrical Information No. Action SPST .75A 125VAC/DC DPST 1A 250 VAC/DC 3A 125 VAC/DC Action Type Contacts & Ratings Action SPST .75 125 VAC/DC Data Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 4/92

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 3 Control Panel Basic Two Zone System Expandable Double Supervision Ground Detection Supervised Alarm Relay Coil Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM and NYMEA Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics control panel model CP-35 is the control unit for the System 3 universal alarm control. is of solid state circuitry and is designed for use in institutional, industrial and life safety applica- The unit is Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed and approved for service in accordance with NFPA 72. The is also UL listed for waterflow alarm and supple- modules included in the system. model CP-35 and its associated PS-35 (Power Supply) circuitry for two supervised detector circuits, wired either Class A or Class B (Styles D or B respectively). CP-35 control panel accommodates any of Cerberus conventional low-voltage detectors, manual or contact type input devices. The CP-35 also one supervised audible signal circuit utilizing 120 VAC or 24 VDC audible devices. The audible circuit can be wired in either a Class A or B (Styles Z Y respectively) configured when using 24 VDC audibles. 120 VAC audibles are used, the circuit can only be wired a Class B (Style W) circuit. two initiating zones within the CP-35 are power limited NFPA 70. With the addition of a PLM-35 module, the circuit also becomes a power limited circuit. visual system indicators are mounted on the face of CP-35, a green Power On LED, a red Alarm LED, a Trouble LED and a yellow Ground Fault LED. To the two detector circuits, a red Zone Alarm LED a yellow Zone Trouble LED are supplied for each An additional yellow Audible Signal Circuit Trouble is also provided. momentary contact switches are mounted on the CP- one serving as a combination Test while the other permits Silence. A fixed position Silence switch and an internal signal sounding device is provided. A remotely Alarm and Trouble Annunciator (RTA-38) is op- combination of a Model CP-35 with a PS-35, operates a three-wire, 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz supply with neutral, incorporating double supervision. power may be supplied with option standby The green Power LED is illuminated to show that is normal. Each input power line is separately fused the power supply. of the main AC operating power or secondary AC power is signaled by the system audible and visual trouble LED. Restoration of power returns the to normal condition. When standby battery is loss of main power results in an audible and trouble signal and the batteries provide power to the NUMBER system power supply furnishes power for detector and audible signal circuits. The detector circuits be the two zones incorporated in the CP-35 control, any mix of additional compatible zones, signal circuits other fire monitoring circuits. In addition, an output rated 24 VDC 1.5A is provided on terminals 5 and 6 of the PS- for powering modules internally housed and wired within control unit enclosure. control panel alarm section circuitry responds to any module alarm input signal either from the on-board or separate zone modules. The alarm condition is In within the control panel and is cleared only by of the control panel switch. An alarm is indicated by: Change of state of the two SPDT alarm relay con- of the panel visual indicator. Energizing of both the silenceable and non- alarm outputs. High going current-limited alarm signal. Alarm signal output to the remote alarm and silence Operation of the momentary Silence causes both the silenceable alarm output to and the visual alarm indicator to flash. Alarm operation of the Silence switch following a alarm condition, the system visual indicator oper- in a flashing mode. A subsequent alarm input from a zone will cause a renewed high going signal on silenceable alarm output terminal, causing the associ- or connected audible devices to be energized again. operation may be repeated for up to ten (10) subse- alarm conditions.

Technical Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Relay Module 4 Independent Relays 4 SPDT Contacts (Form On Board Microprocessor 2 Amps. @ 30 VDC/120 VAC Resistive Fully Programmable Time Based Operation Manual or Automatic Control Supervised Coils Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA, City of Chicago and FM Approved Controllable Relay Module CRM-4 is designed to auxiliary control of building functions such as door release, elevator capture, smoke control, lock etc. CRM-4 plugs into one half slot in the MOM-4 or MOM-2 card cage. It provides four fully programmable Each relay contains one set of SPDT contacts rated 2 Amps. 30 VDC/120 VAC resistive. All relay coils are to insure proper operation. relays can be automatically activated or deacti- through control by event and time based logic in the MMB. Each relay may also be either controlled or the MKB annunciator indicate the affected relay and the System indicator will illuminate until the relay is returned to condition. on-board LEDs are provided. Two diagnostic LEDs positive indication of the CRM-4 network commu- The remaining two are user programmable the MXL software. and Architect Specifications control of auxiliary functions shall be provided by Pyrotronics programmable relay module model Each relay shall provide one set of SPDT contacts at 2 Amps. 30 VDC/120 VAC resistive. Relay coils shall supervised. relay module shall interface with the MOM-4 or MOM-2 card cage using gold plated edge connectors. CRM-4 shall occupy one half slot in the MOM-4 or MOM- Up to four (4) CRM-4 modules may be plugged into each card cage or two (2) CRM-4 modules may be into each MOM-2 card cage. or deactivation of each relay shall be controlled through event or time based programming in the MXL. Each relay shall be capable of manual through the MXL keypad. If a relay function is using the MXL keypad, the system shall display a indicating the disarmed relay and the Disable indicator shall illuminate until the relay is to the condition. NUMBER Data Data Supervisory: Active: Rating: Configuration: SPDT (Form Configuration: mA mA per relay energized mA all relays energized Amps. 30 VDC/120 VAC resistive Coil Normal State = in Slot MOM-4 or MOM-2 plated Connector: and Electrical Ratings Relay Wiring / Electrical Ratings Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 10/

FM-200TM Extinguishing Systems Mounting Straps ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS CS-10/20, CS-40/70, CS-125/200, CS-350, CS-500 CS-10/20, CS-40/70, CS-125/200, CS-350, CS-500 Straps and Brackets are Used to the Cylinders in Either a or Vertical Position No. Size O.D.* NUMBER Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 Issue

CSM-4 Signal/Releasing Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Supervised Alarm Notification Appliance Circuits Operates Audible or Visual Devices 2 Class A (Style Z) or Class B (StyleY) Circuits 24 VDC 1.5 Amps Per Circuit City Tie or Lease Line Output Releasing Service Fully Programmable Coded Audibles On Board Microprocessor March Time/Uniform Code 3 Selectable Degrade Operation Silencable/Non-Silencable Option Automatic/Manual Control Circuits Power Limited Per NEC 760 Listed, ULC Listed CSFM, NYMEA, FM Approved NFPA 13, Pre-Action and Deluge NFPA 2001, FM-200 Releasing NFPA 12A, Halon Releasing Controllable Signal Module CSM-4 provides two fully programmable notification appliance circuits. CSM-4 supplies two Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style type output circuits for the supervision and control of audible or visual notification appliances such as bells, strobes, etc. Each circuit can provide up to amps (24 VDC) of current to power indicating appli- output on a CSM-4 may be configured as either a connection to a local energy type Master City or a supervised connection to a Leased Line remote system. CSM-4 circuits may also be configured pre-action or deluge releasing service per NFPA 13, agent releasing (Halon, FM-200) per NFPA and NFPA 2001. circuit or output may be controlled automatically the MXL program logic or manually using the MXL Automatic control may also be time based. Each or output can be manually or the MXL keypad. When any circuit or output has the MXL LCD annunciator will indicate affected circuit or output and the System LED will illuminate, until the circuit or output has returned to the condition. CSM-4 contains an on-board microprocessor which notification circuit outputs to function in a degrade even if the main MXL processor or the local network link has failed. Each circuit degrade of operation can be separately configured to respond an alarm in the following manner: OFF, ON, CONTIN- or 1 SECOND ON – 1 SECOND OFF. In a degrade a CSM-4 will respond to an alarm from any Intelli- (ALD) initiating device or Conventional Zone connected to the same network node. notification appliance circuit outputs may be to provide a coded, march time, or uniform 3 output. equipment is approved for operation over the tempera- range of 0 to 49 NUMBER and Architect Specifications and Architect Specifications Appliance Circuits shall be provided by a Pyrotronics Model CSM-4 plug-in controllable module. The unit shall provide two alarm notifica- application circuits which may be configured as either A (Style Z) or Class B (Style Y). Each circuit will be of activating up to 1.5 amps of listed audible or notification appliances. These circuits shall also be of being configured for activation of a local energy City connection or polarity reversal type Leased Line circuit shall also be capable of being configured to a solenoid for pre-action or deluge releasing per NFPA 13, as well as extinguishing agent (Halon, FM-200) per NFPA 12A and NFPA 2001. notification appliance circuits shall be capable of a mode of operation in the event of main processor or loss of network communication. notification appliance circuits shall be capable of activation or de-activation through control by or time based programming contained in the control They shall also be capable of manual activation or using the system keypad. Disarming any or output shall result in the alphanumeric display the circuit or output which has been disarmed as as the illumination of the Partial Disable LED. CSM-4 shall be a plug-in type module using gold edge connectors to interface with the MOM-2 or expansion card cages. It shall occupy one half slot the card cages. Notification circuit, City Tie and Leased power shall be provided to the CSM-4 through the control power supply or through the supervised power supplies. Data Data Board Installation Slots municipal tie and leased line app

System 3TM Control Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS CT-35 CT-35 Code Module Dual Inputs Mulitple Signal Circuit Control ANSI S3.41 Audible Emergency Signal Placement Supervised Solid State Circuitry Listed, ULC Listed Temporal Code Module, Model CT-35 is designed to a common coded signal to connected alarm bells, chimes, lamps, etc. via Alarm Extender Type AE-30U or AA-30U. Actuation of the module from a high going DC signal between 12 and 24 volts system common from any type ZU Zone Module, or main control panel. Actuation may also be manual from type SM Switch Module. Dual input actuation terminals provided to facilitate programming. module contains sold state circuitry to supply output (15 ma maximum) at a controlled Code 3 Temporal as per ANSI S3.41 American National Standard Emergency Evacuation Signal. These signals, in can control up to three (3) audible signal circuits AE-30U and AA-30U modules) or other output By adding type SR Supplementary Relay Mod- additional audible circuits can be actuated. Audible power is not provided by the CT-35 Module. Model CT-35 is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and ULC listed. Information Requirement: 60 mA Input: 24 VDC, 5mA Output: 24 VDC, 15mA max. Information Code Module to Installation Instruction, P/N 315-095020. NUMBER Wiring Terminal 39, 40 of CP-35 10,11 of CP-30 Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 Issue

CXL-G Graphics System for the CXL AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Graphic Display of System Events SVGA Graphics Support Event Display by Color PC Based Interactive Terminal Mode w/ Full MXL Control Context Sensitive Help Complete History Log w/ Report Generation Supervised Color Printer Support Automatic and Manual Graphic Screen Printing Supervised Printer Support (PAL-1) Ten Levels of Zoom for Each Detection Device Touch Screen Support Graphical Arming and Disarming of Devices Uses Existing CAD Drawings or Scanned Regardless of Format Icon Library w/ Custom Icon Editor Special Instruction Field File Consistency Reports Password Protection NYMEA, CSFM and FM Approved ULC Listed is a PC based color graphics display package for with the Cerberus Pyrotronics CXL System. The CXL-G Graphics Package provides up to ten high resolution levels for each device on a CXL System. These allow the user to quickly identify the exact location any alarm or trouble occurrence. It also provides event history logging to the PC hard disk. This can be accessed using multiple index criteria. The of history log space is limited only by the available on the hard disk drive. Logs can be saved to disks and the hard drive can be cleared. History log can be displayed on the screen or printed. supports the use of a touch screen for the entry of commands. The system may also be used in a emulation mode allowing the execution of CXL commands from the PC keyboard. It supervises parallel printers such as the Epson compatible LC24-200 (color printer) and the HP Laserjet (black white printer). software includes a TSR (Terminate and Stay screen capture program which allows the of a customer existing floor plan drawings of their CAD format. Images may also be and used as screens, including photos and text. mouse is supplied for easy placement of device icons on various graphic screens, and for the selection of points be armed and disarmed. All programming is user with windowed information boxes and pull down A device icon library is supplied along with an icon for creation of custom icons. on each graphics screen is a flashing icon the alarm or trouble condition (alarms shown in troubles shown in yellow), with visual indication of status. Programming selection allows the of all devices or active devices only on each It also includes the 32 character custom device as provided by the CXL and space for two lines special instructions. Multiple custom banners can be when the system is in the normal condition. NUMBER Listed IBM Industrial Computer* the use of multiple PC or multiple monitors, graphics display locations can be provided. using multiple PC only one may be in a terminal mode and multiple sets of CXL-G packages be used.) Listed Industrial Computer Listed Industrial Computer Disk or higher or higher MBytes MBytes MBytes MBytes GBytes or higher MBytes GBytes Card XGA-2 XGA-2 XGA-2 Monitor (19 (15 (19 (15 (19 (15 Screen (19 only) (19 only) (19 only) Ports COM2 COM2 COM2 Ports LPT2 LPT2 LPT2 All the above are IBM industrial computers (UL 864 and UL 1076 listed) To obtain 4 hours of standby power, the Lifeline model 9300067 UPS is Interface Module Interface Module Information Information Listed CXL Color Graphics Software Disk, Computer Mouse, Bus Mouse Card, Software, CXL-G Installation Listed IBM Industrial Computer* UL Listed IBM Industrial Computer* UL Listed 15″ SVGA Monitor Listed Parallel Printer Listed Touch Select Touch for 19″ Monit

CZI Series Collective Zone Interface Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS CZI-H2S, CZI-H4S, CZI-L2S and CZI-L4S Monitors Conventional 2-Wire Smoke and Normally Open Initiating Surface or Flush Mounting Each Module is Address Programmable Field Programmable Built in LED Indicator LED Pulses Indicating Connection to Communication Line Requires no DIP Switch Programming Screw Terminals Provided No Auxiliary Power Supply Required Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM and NYMEA Approved Pyrotronics CZI Series, Collective Zone Interface are used to connect initiating devices to the IXL. initiating circuits are capable of supporting conven- 2-wire type detectors as well as contact type while CZI-L initiating circuits support contact type only. Associated with each CZI is an LED that both normal and alarm status. CZI are available either 2 or 4-wire initiating device circuits and for surface or flush mounting. and Architect Specifications Zone Interface, CZI Series models, shall be for supporting conventional initiating devices. Series shall support both detectors and direct initiating devices. CZI-L Series shall support direct initiating devices only. CZI shall incorporate an pulsing LED for confirmation that the CZI is active. LED shall change from pulsing to steady state upon alarm condition for quick identification of the alarming Collective Zone Interface Module electronics are to monitor the initiating device wiring for trouble alarms. In its quiescent mode of operation, each Zone Interface displays a pulsing LED, indicat- quiescent operation of the zone and proper connection the Network Communication Line. the Collective Zone Interface is in an alarm condi- the interface reports the alarm condition to the Control At the same time the status of the zone is reported the Control Panel, the LED will be lit continuously and state of the zone (non-latching monitored loop requires input device) becomes latched until the interface a reset command from the Control Panel. Once reset command is received, the CZI will resume its mode of operation. its trouble mode of operation, each CZI displays a LED indicating quiescent or active operation of the If the trouble signal is derived from the improper to the Network Communication Line, then the will not flash normally. NUMBER of the CZI must be performed when a new is installed on a system. In order to program a CZI, the Panel must be placed in the programming mode the address will be assigned to the CZI that has the tool applied to it. The circuit must also be to the specific application of the device and being driven within the CZI loop. should be installed in accessible locations for purposes. They should be mounted in visible so that their LED may be seen for quick status Diagram and Environmental VDC (from Network Power: Power: Line) Temperature: Temperature: 0 to +49 Humidity: Humidity: non-condensing is a 43/4″ x 43/4″ x 15/8″ Trim is 53/4″ x 53/4″ x 1/2″ deep, 411/16″ sq. device box Box: Box: CZI-H Detectors Series Series Series Beam Detector driven options not compatible with CZI. Information No. No. Only,” 2-wire, Collective Zone Interface, Class B Only,” 4-wire, Collective Zone Interface, Class A Current, 2-wire, Collective Zone Interface, Class B Current, 4-wire, Collective Zone Interface, Class A trim ring for CZI and CE-S tool The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equi

CZM-1 Conventional Zone Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Provides Distributed Conventional Zoning One Conventional Initiating Device Circuit Connects to MXL ALD Circuits Powers Up to 15 Series 3 Smoke Detectors Unlimited Shorting Devices per Circuit Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style B) Latching Alarm LED 32 Character Custom Alphanumeric Message Alarm Verification Capability Walk Test Capability No Mechanical Address Programming Required Includes Metal Cover Plate Circuits Power Limited per NEC 760 Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA Approved FM Approved as Intrinsically Safe with ISI-1 CZM-1 is an intelligent device which connects to an loop and provides one remote conventional initiating circuit. This circuit can power up to 15 Series 3 two ionization or photoelectric smoke detectors. It can also listed alarm causing shorting devices such as switches, thermal detectors, and manual station, Each CZM-1 can be assigned a 32 character custom message. It also includes a latching alarm LED which is visible through the cover plate. CZM-1 supports both Class A (Style D) or Class B B) wiring. It includes a trim cover plate. CZM-1 occupies one address on the ALD circuit. It not require any mechanical address programming. It programmed and tested using the Cerberus Pyrotronics Programmer/Tester. ISI-1, an Intrinsically Safe, FM Approved, Isolation now makes it possible to convert a conventional into an Intrinsically Safe zone. of CZM-1 modules allows a system to be designed a combination of intelligent and conventional devices a substantial reduction in wire. Intelligent devices can employed in those areas requiring pin-point annuncia- as well as analog detection features. Common or other can be protected using conventional zoned detection to the CZM-1 circuits. This method of conventional zoning through the use of modules to intelligent circuits can result in a substantial cost savings. ISI-1, an Intrinsically Safe, FM Approved, Isolation now makes it possible to convert a conventional into an Intrinsically Safe zone. The ISI-1 is designed to with a CZM-1 and in conjunction with the MXL and systems. detectors that are approved to use in Class I Div. I with the ISI-1 are the DI-3IS Ion Detectors and the and S-122 Flame Detectors. A maximum of ten (10) detectors are allowed and a maximum of five (5) or S-122 Flame Detectors are allowed. the ISI-1 is a passive device, no power is required. mechanical (non-energy storing) shorting devices as the MS-51 Manual Station may be used. In addi- S-121 and S-122 are also approved for use in Class II Class III Groups E, F and G. guidance on installation see ANSI/ISA RP 12.6, of Intrinsically Safe Instrument Systems in Class 1 Locations For DI-3IS information, see the DI-3 installation instructions, P/N 315-081943. For S-121 S-122 information, see the installtion instructions, 315-085258. NUMBER Analog Loops: CZM-1 communicates with the MXL via the MXL loops, which may be on the MMB-1 or the ALD-2 module. The analog loops may be wired A or Class B. 24 Volt DC Power: CZM-1 derives its power from the CZM-1 power on the MMB-1. This power is available on TB5 of MMB-1 on terminals 9-12. The power may be wired Class A or Class B. Since the CZM-1 monitors the at its screw terminals, it is possible to star or T-tap power connection; this can be done only in the Class configuration. The UL identifiers for compatibility are the same as the names specified below. Compatible Cerberus detectors are: Instructions 315-081943 315-081943 315-086590 315-086591 315-086592 315-086441 315-086545 STYLE D (CALSS A) INITIATING CIRCUIT WIRING and Architect Specifications CZM-1 Intelligent Remote Conventional Zone Module connect to an MXL ALD intelligent analog detection and provide one (1) conventional initiating device This circuit shall support the use of up to 15 Series 3 wire smoke detectors and an unlimited number of alarm causing shorting devices such as waterflow thermal detectors, manual stations, etc. The shall support either Class A (Style D) or Class B B) wiring. Its circuits shall be supervised f

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Zone Module Four Conventional Initiating Device Circuits Supports the Use of: Two Wire Photo or Ion Detectors Per Circuit Beam Detector (Limit 1 Per Zone) Shorting Devices Relay Bases Bases Indicator Lamps Class A (Style D) Class B (Style B) On-Board Microprocessor 32 Character Custom Alphanumeric Message Zone Optional Alarm Verification by Zone Walk Test by Zone Circuits Power Limited per NEC 760 Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA and City of Chicago Approved Conventional Zone Module CZM-4 is used with the MXL provide four Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style B) conven- initiating device circuits. Each circuit can monitor up 30 Cerberus Pyrotronics two wire photoelectric or smoke detectors and an unlimited number of open contact devices. Projected Beam Detectors also be used. The CZM-4 circuits will support the use Detector Relay Bases, Audible Bases and remote indica- lamps. Activation of any device on a circuit will initiate a alarm condition resulting in the operation of pro- functions. Any circuit in the alarm or trouble will be identified by a user specified 32 character message displayed on the MXL LCD annun- of the CZM-4 circuits are designed to function in a mode during failure of the MXL main or the loss of the system communication network. in the mode the CZM-4 is still capable of both alarm and trouble conditions and activating outputs. or all of the CZM-4 circuits can be programmed to with the Verification feature. This feature the automatic verification of alarm conditions caused smoke detectors in order to prevent nuisance alarms. CZM-4 module plugs into one full slot in the MOM-2 or expansion card cage. Up to two CZM-4 modules be plugged into a MOM-4 card cage. and Architect Specifica- two wire initiating devices such as smoke heat detectors, manual stations and sprinkler switches shall be connected to circuits provided the Cerberus Pyrotronics Conventional Zone Module plugged into the MOM-2 or MOM-4 expansion card Each zone shall support the use of up to 30 Cerberus two wire smoke detectors and an unlimited of UL listed shorting devices. Zones shall also the use of compatible Projected Beam Detectors, Relays, Audible Bases and Remote Indicator Each CZM-4 shall provide four independent Class (Style D) or Class B (Style B) initiating device circuits. conventional zone module shall contain an on-board Initiating device circuits shall be capable a local mode of operation during failure of system processor or loss of the communication During main system processor failure or loss of NUMBER Diagram o t e s: Circuits can be class A or class B All circuits are power limited per NEC 760 All circuits are supervised Do not connect more than one PBA-1191 to each zone (Refer to the PBA-1191 315-094912 Do not mix smoke detectors with the PBA-1191 Maximum PBA-1191 requires Rev 3 or higher of CZM-4 software OHMs/circuit Data network, initiating device circuits shall be of reporting both alarm and trouble conditions and be capable of activating local alarm indicating order to minimize standby battery drain, the end of line devices should be non-current drawing 50VDC capacitors. With beam detectors an EOL resistor must used. CZM-4 shall plug into one full slot in the MOM-2 or expansion card cage. It shall interface with the or MOM-4 using gold plated edge connectors. Up two CZM-4 modules may be plugged into one MOM-4. circuit on the CZM-4 shall be assigned a 32 character alphanumeric message which will be displayed on MXL LCD annunciator when any device attached to that is a

DC-35S 3TM DC Voltage Regulator Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS and Regulator Output Amp Output Input Supervised On LED Approved System 3TM, Model DC-35S Regulator is designed provide filtered and regulated DC power from the only unfiltered, unregulated DC power output of PS-35S. This module provides regulated power to Models RM-30U/RU for Factory Mutual approved or deluge sprinkler releasing applications. DC-35S is placement supervised within the System control panel. It features a power on LED and a input. The module contains a potentiometer for of the output voltage. However, that output factory set to the limit required by the System 3TM panel. and Architect Specifications Cerberus Pyrotronics Model DC-35S Regulator shall be provided to supply regulated power to sprinkler control valves. The regu- power shall be routed through the Model TC-30U Module to accommodate battery back-up and then through the Model RM-30U RM-30RU Release Module. The release module be connected to, and control, the electric pilot valve on the pre-action/deluge system. DC-35S shall receive unregulated, bridge only, power from the Model PS-35S Power Supply. output rating of the DC-35S shall be .75 Amps. DC-35S shall be placement supervised within System 3TM Control Panel and shall be Factory approved for pre-action/deluge sprinkler applications. Information Input Output to .75A @ 38V FWR to .75A @ 28VDC NUMBER 3181 Information No. Description H x 2 W x 2 D Wt. Wiring Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 2/95

Ultraviolet Flame Detector AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS DF-30 DF-30 Simple Twist/Lock Assembly Alarm LED Two Wire Operation Cerberus Pyrotronics Model DF-30 Flame Detector directly to the presence of flame. It senses ultra- radiation emanating from flames which must be for at least 5 seconds. flame detector is intended to protect hazards where anticipated fire will develop quickly with little or no or smoldering stages; where ignition is almost (e.g. flammable liquids, combustible gases, etc.) detector utilizes an ultraviolet sensitive cold cathode which operates on the Geiger-Mueller Principle. gas filled detection tube consists of an anode and a which is sensitive to ultraviolet wavelength of Angstroms. Both electrodes are energized by voltage. When ultraviolet rays reach the cathode, pho- are emitted toward the anode by forcing the gas to emit electrons. As the number of ionized begin to increase, an electrical current will flow the electrodes. As ultraviolet rays continue to the detection tube, a pulsed electrical signal is gen- which is digitally Upon completion of the delay cycle, if the electrical signal is still present, detector locks into an alarm condition and can only be at the control panel by an interruption of power. detector utilizes a low profile surface mounting base, DB-3S, which may be attached to either a 4 octa- 4 square wiring box or single gang outlet box. The base utilizes screw-clamp terminals for all electrical self-wiping contacts for reliability and con- provisions for an optional concealed locking mecha- to prevent unauthorized removal of the detector unit is capable of operating a remote alarm lamp RLI, RL30, RL40 or auxiliary relay, Model RR-3. The Model relay contains one set of double pole, double throw rated at 120 VAC, 2 amps resistive and requires a electrical box when mounted to the DB-3S. NUMBER Data detectors are essentially line-of-sight devices, there- special care must be taken in applying them to insure their ability to respond to fire in the area which is to be will not be compromised by the presence of structures or other opaque objects or materials. detectors should be installed at a point which provides most direct line of fight with the anticipated source of connected to Cerberus Pyrotronics control equip- the DF-30 is fully compatible with other types of Pyrotronics detectors. No more than five (5) detectors may be used on any one Cerberus detector circuit. and Architect Specifications Flame detector shall operate on the ultraviolet radia- principle. The amplifier-switching circuit, in the detec- shall be entirely sold state, contain no moving parts and an alarm actuation delay of 5 seconds. base assembly into which the detector is installed be of the twist/lock design with screw-clamp termi- The base shall utilize self-wiping contacts for reliabil- and shall be directly interchangeable with other compat- plug-in detectors. A security lock, DB-LK, shall be in those areas where tamper resistant installation required as indicated on the drawings. Auxiliary relays remote alarm lamps shall be installed where detector or group of detectors shall require a two-wire of #18 AWG thermoplastic fixture wire enclosed in or #18 AWG limited energy shielded cable without if permitted by local codes. detector assembly shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics DF-30. Specifications Requirements: Normal-500mA Max. Typical 3 VDC (-10 to 122 (50 Range: Range: of Vision: Information Lock for DB-4TS Weight Flame Detector with 5 delay Profile Mounting Base Relay (DPDT) Alarm Lamp Alarm Lamp Alarm Lamp .45 .45 .45 .45 .45 .45 .45 Wiring The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and

DI-3, DI-A3 and DI-B3 Smoke Detector AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Adjustable Sensitivity Dual Chamber Sensitivity Test Points Simple Twist/Lock Assembly Optional Auxiliary Relay Screw-Clamp Terminals Alarm LED ULC Listed, NYMEA, CSFM Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics DI-3, DI-A3 and DI-B3 fire smoke operate on the ionization principle. The detectors to the first traces of fire in the form of visible or invisible products of combustion. The DI-3, DI- and DI-B3 have been developed for the wide range of industrial and institutional fire detection and applications. The DI-3, DI-A3 and DI-B3 are in environments covered by UL 268 & UL 268A. DI-B3 must be utilized with a Series 3TM air duct DI-3 Series detector is a plug-in, ionization detector is designed for two wire system operation. The DI-3 is with adjustable sensitivity while the DI-A3 and DI-B3 have a fixed sensitivity designed for their indi- high air flow applications. DI-3, DI-A3 and DI-B3 consist of self-compensating ionization chambers and a highly stable solid state circuit. One chamber detects the of combustion products, the second chamber as a reference, to stabilize the detector sensitivity changes in environmental conditions. As products of enter the sampling chamber, the chamber is reduced producing a voltage change. At the time voltage range exceeds the pre-determined threshold, alarm is signaled to the control unit. The detector locks upon alarm and must be reset from the control panel. sensitivity of the DI-3, DI-A3 and DI-B3 is preset at the The electrical sensitivity can be monitored in the using the Cerberus Pyrotronics sensitivity tester, test TM-I3. The sensitivity test jack on the DI-3, DI-A3 DI-B3 and the adjustment screw on the DI-3 are from the front of the detector housing enabling user to perform all sensitivity adjustments and tests removing the detector from its base. detectors utilize a low profile surface mounting base, DB-3S, which may be attached to either a 4″ single gang outlet box or 4″ square wiring box or the audible base model ADB-3, which must be to a 4″ square, deep wiring box. The DB-3S base ADB-3 audible base utilize screw-clamp terminals for electrical connections, self-wiping contacts for reliability contain provision for an optional concealed locking to prevent unauthorized removal of the head. DI-3 Series ionization detector has been designed to a wide range of system design parameters. The DI-3 is designed for open area protection in areas with velocities up to 300 feet per minute. NUMBER Data is recommended for use in high air velocity applica- such as computer room underfloor areas. The model contains a specially designed internal chamber and a pre-selected fixed sensitivity setting which extremely stable operation. Model DI-A3 has UL listed for operation in air velocities of 0 to 1200 per minute. Since air velocity has an effect on detector and performance, the DI-A3 should be used only applications which meet this established air velocity DI-B3 is designed specifically for use with the Pyrotronics Series 3 air duct housings and, like DI-A3, contains a specially designed internal chamber and a pre-selected fixed sensitivity setting. The DI- must be utilized with the Series 3 air duct housing in air applications with air velocities of 400-4000 FPM. DI-3, DI-A3 and DI-B3 are also available for high applications, (3000 to 8000 feet above sea level) model numbers DI-3H, DI-A3H and DI-B3H. DI-3 and DI-A3 are capable of operating a remote lamp, RLI1, RLI2, RL-30, RL-40 or auxiliary relay, RR-3. The model RR-3/3S relay contains one set of pole, double throw contacts rated at 120 VAC, 2 Resistive and requires a deep outlet box when to the DB-3S. The DI-B3 is capable of utilizing the relay as supplied in the Series 3 air duct housing AD-3 with a DA-3SR Relay Board which contains set of double pole, double throw contacts rated at 125 VDC, 3 Amp. Resistive. multiple detector/relay combinations are used on the circuit, the zone module current limit will restrict the of guaranteed detector/relay actuations to one per DI-3, DI-A3, DI-B3 , DI-3H, DI-A3H and DI-B3H detectors are Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The ser

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Smoke Detector Flush or Surface Mounting Compact Adjustable Sensitivity Screw-type Terminals Versatile New Flow POC Path Rugged Alarm Light Simple Twist/Lock Assembly Solid State Circuitry Superior Air Velocity Characteristics Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA and City of Chicago Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics Model DI-4A smoke detector adjustable sensitivity operates on the ionization It is designed to respond to the first traces of fire the form of visible smoke or invisible products of Heat or flame is not required to activate the The Model DI-4A detector has been developed protection of a wide range of commercial, industrial, and residential occupancies. Description DI-4A detector is a plug-in, dual chamber ionization with adjustable sensitivity and contains two chambers together with a highly sensitive amplifier-switching circuit. One chamber the presence of combustion products. The chamber serves as a reference, to stabilize the sensitivity for changes in environmental tem- humidity, and pressure. The detector assembly in upon alarm; therefore it must be reset at the panel. DI-4A can be manually adjusted to two different settings; Low and High. This is easily done by the sensitivity indicator, located on the underside the detector housing, with a small pointed instrument as a ball point pen. detector operates from a 20 VDC source, provided by Cerberus Pyrotronics control panel. The detector a very small standby current (less than 110mA), permits the use of a 2-wire detector circuit of #18 wire, reducing system installation costs. In alarm, detector will draw approximately 175mA (with remote). DI-4A detector is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed ordinary indoor applications. assemblies for either flush or surface mounting, all screw type terminals, are available for use with the DI- detector as follows: Base with Integral Alarm Lamp and Connection for Remote Relay or Alarm Lamp Base with Integral Alarm Lamp and Connection for Remote Alarm remote indicator lamp, Model RL-30 or RL-40 may be when the detector is concealed from view or a relay, Model RR-2, may be connected to the DI-4A a detector-controlled function is required at or near detector. The Model RR-2 relay has one set of double- double throw contacts rated at 120 VAC, 2 Amp. NUMBER the RR-2 is used and the control function is critical, more than one DI-4A should be installed in a particular or zone, and no other initiating devices should be in that same circuit or zone. An exception to this would be an application where a number of RR-2 were used, each of which was connected to the critical control function. Data DI-4A detector utilizes either a flush or surface mount- base assembly. Each base may be attached to a 4″ octagonal electrical box with an adapter when conduit is used, or may be used without when local building codes permit. The DB-4TS base provision for an optional field installed locking to prevent unauthorized removal of the head. A flush locking base, Model DB-4TFL, is available. detector shell and base are fabricated of rugged material eliminating any corrosion prob- They are off-white in color and attractively styled to unobtrusive and to match most interiors. using the Cerberus Pyrotronics sensitivity tester, Model the detector can be easily checked for proper Data more than thirty (30) detectors of any type or combina- (other than thermals or manual stations) may be used any one Cerberus Pyrotronics detector circuit. detector is applicable to the 30-foot center spacing sq. ft.) as referred to in the National Fire Protection Standard 72. This, however, is based on ideal namely, smooth ceiling, no air movement, and physical obstructions between the fire source and the This spacing should be used as a guide or point in detector installation layout. Do not mount in areas close to ventilating or air conditioning Exposed joists or beamed ceilings may also affect spacing limitations for detectors. It is mandatory that judgment be applied regarding detector and spacing.

Adjustable Ionization Detector AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS DI-6 DI-6 Adjustable Sensitivity Two Response Settings Adjustable Smoke Inlet Twist Lock Base with Intergral Lamp Usable in Air Currents Up to ft./min. Encapsulated Electronics – 268 Listed, ULC Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics DI-6 adjustable ionization smoke is uniquely designed and is the most advanced most flexible UL 268 listed ionization smoke detector the market today. DI-6 inherent adjustable characteristics allow for 8 combinations of 3 adjustable settings, adjustable adjustable smoke entry ports, and two (2) time settings. DI-6 design permits it to detect a full range of visible invisible smoke particles therefore allowing it to detect before serious damage is caused. ability to detect the first traces of fire along with the flexibility makes it suitable for use in a wide of commercial, industrial and institutional fire and extinguishing applications. Description DI-6 detector is a plug-in dual chamber ionization is a plug-in dual chamber ionization detector, with adjustable sensitivity, field adjustable smoke inlets, two (2) response time settings. heart of the DI-6 is its sensor which is made up of two chambers. The first chamber, the sampling is open to the surrounding air and detects the of combustion products. The second chamber, reference chamber, is virtually sealed and serves as a to stabilize the detectors sensitivity for changes environmental temperature, humidity and pressure. products of combustion enter the sampling chamber, chamber current is reduced. At the time the voltage exceeds the predetermined threshold, an alarm is to the control unit. the alarm is signalled to the control unit, it is locked until it is reset at the control panel. NUMBER DI-6 has two levels of sensitivity, low and high, which easily set by rotating a ring at the top of the detector a pointed tool. at the low position, the detector raises the alarm requiring more particles of combustion to initiate alarm, therefore making the detector less sensitive. The is true for the high sensitivity setting. are two time response settings for the DI-6. The setting is set by placing the blue marker inside the and the delay setting (typically 30 seconds) is set placing the blue marker on the outside of the detector making it clearly visible. order to adapt the detector to dusty environments and air currents up to 1000 feet per minute, the DI-6 two (2) settings for the air shields protecting the inlets. inlet is adjusted by moving the grill of the detector with vent tool (part number #545-485624). Applications/Conditions table on page 3 depicts the detector settings in relation to various applica- and ambient conditions. DI-6 with Series 4 Base operates on 18-24 VDC by the Cerberus Pyrotronics control system and a 2 wire detector circuit using #18 AWG wire. detector can be either flush of surface mounted using DB-4TS base for surface mounting and model DB- for flush mounting. Both bases have an integral alarm and a terminal connection for using a remote alarm model RLI1-2, RL-30, RL-40 or a remote relay model (The model RR-2 relay has one set of double pole, throw contracts rated at 120 VAC, 2 amp resistive.) the RR-2 is used and the relay control function is no more than one (1) DI-6 should be installed in a circuit or zone, and no other initiating devices be installed in that same circuit or zone. An excep- to this rule would be an application where a number of relays were used each of which was connected to same critical control function. detector can be locked into the DB-4TS base with the field installed locking mechanism model DB-LK. sensitivity of the detector can be checked in the field the use of the MG-7/9 sensitivity tester. Data more than thirty (30) detectors of the ionization or type may be used on any one Cerberus detector circuit. An unlimited number of or manual stations may be used or added to one The number of flame detectors used in combination ionization and photoelectric detectors would be to the power consumption of that particular model detector. DI-6 is applicabl

Thermal Fire Detectors AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS DT-135CL, DT-200CL, DT-200CS, DT-135WP DT-200WP Listed, ULC Listed* NYMEA, CSFM, City of Chicago Cerberus Pyrotronics Thermal Fire Detectors are of the rate temperature type and are designed for use either standard Cerberus Pyrotronics systems or other available fire alarm systems. In all models the element is self-restoring after operation and is supplied ratings of 135 and 200 Laboratories, Inc. recommends the Thermal be used to protect a maximum of 2,500 square feet. conditions and engineering judgement, however, often closer spacing to provide faster detection. Models DT-135CL and DT-200CL are used with Cerberus low voltage systems where it is desirable to provide identification of an operated detector by means of an mounted incandescent lamp. These models lock in alarm, therefore they must be reset at the control panel. Models DT-135CS, DT-135WP, DT-200WP and DT-200CS can used with any fire alarm circuit of any manufacture using circuit direct shorting type units. These units do not a series-connected resistor or an indicator lamp and do lock in upon alarm. Contact ratings are 6-125 VAC, 5 Amps.; VDC, 1 Amp.; 125 VDC, 0.5 Amps. Models are Underwriter Laboratories, Inc. listed. DT-135WP and DT-200WP are UL listed and U.S. Coast approved as weatherproof. They are furnished with leads a plastic 1/2″ NPT hub that screws into a standard W.P. box cover. The shell is epoxy coated. of Operation the detector consists of an aluminum tubular shell two curved expansion struts under compression with a pair of normally open, opposed contact points are insulated from the shell. The tubular shell and the have a different coefficient of expansion. When subjected a rapid heat rise the tubular shell expands and lengthens At the same time the interior struts lengthen but at a rate than the shell. The rapid lengthening of the shell the struts to come together, thereby closing the contact and initiating the alarm. subjected to a very slow heat rise the tubular shell and the struts lengthen at approximately the same rate. At the set temperature point 135 or 200 the interior are fully extended, thereby closing the contact points and the alarm. thermal detectors, which are shock and corrosion respond only to heat, so they are suitable for use in where normal conditions would prohibit the use of other Pyrotronics detectors. connected to Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment the DT-135CL/CS/WP and DT-200CL/CS/WP detectors are compatible with Cerberus Pyrotronics ionization detectors, detectors, and manual stations. Electrically, any number of detectors can be used in a circuit. The limit is only to the practical considerations of job conditions and judgement. addition to operating their own internal alarm indicating lamps, Models DT-135CL and DT-200CL can also operate one indicating lamp when desired. and Architect Specifications thermal fire detector shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics Model (insert model number) and shall be of the rate temperature type. The detector shall be by Underwriter Laboratories, Inc. The Models DT-135CL/CS/WP and DT-200CL/CS/WP detectors shall be compatible with Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors, flame detectors, and manual stations on the circuit. There shall be no limit, other than practical to the number of thermal detectors which may be in any one circuit. DT-135CL, DT-135CS, DT-200CL and DT-200CS are UL, listed, CSFM, NYMEA, FM and City of Chicago approved. DT-135WP and DT-200WP are UL listed only. NUMBER installing contractor shall install the detectors with #18 AWG wire housed in conduit or limited energy cable permitted by local codes. Data Information No. rate compensation/fixed temperature with internal lamp rated compensation/fixed temperature with internal lamp rate compensation/fixed temperature open circuit rate compensation/fi

Thermal Fire Detectors AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics Thermal Fire Detectors are fixed or combination fixed temperature rate-of-rise The combination detectors consist of two indepen- operated thermal elements. The rate-of-rise element self-restoring. However, the fixed temperature is of the type. Laboratories, Inc., recommends the combi- type thermal detector be used to protect a maxi- of 2,500 square feet, and the fixed temperature type used to protect a maximum of 625 square feet. Job and engineering judgment, however, often closer spacing to provide faster detection. Principle of Operation: rate-of-rise element consists of an air chamber, a metal diaphragm and a moisture-proof, trouble-free which is carefully calibrated. is well known that air expands as it is heated, and con- as it is cooled. For normal, day-to-day fluctuations of the expansion and contraction of the air the chamber is automatically compensated by the action of the vent. when a fire occurs, air temperatures rise very and the air in the chamber expands faster than it be vented. This creates a pressure which distends the and closes electrical contacts. Data NUMBER rate-of-rise action is not related to any fixed tempera- level, but responds with the utmost promptness when rate of temperature rise exceeds 15 per minute. If the is removed, the air within the chamber contracts and switch moves to a normally open circuit position. Temperature Principle of a slow developing fire, the temperature may not in- rapidly enough to operate a rate-of-rise element. cases such as described a fixed temperature principle operation is desired. detector utilizes a fixed temperature element made fusible alloy and is of the non-restorable type. fusible alloy will melt and activate the detector when surrounding air rises above the preset level of 135 200 Information external heat collector drops away when the detec- is activated therefore giving a quick visual confirma- that the detector has alarmed. detector includes a thermoplastic reversible mount- plate. In one position it easily attaches to a 4″ octagon box, 3″ octagon box or plaster ring. reverse, the plate can be used for open wiring without a box. A 1/4″ space between detector and mounting allows for wire connections. All mounting screws concealed. detector simply attaches to the mounting plate with a and twist motion. No tools required. and Architect Specifications thermal fire detector shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics number). It shall operate at a of____degrees F (insert temperature). The shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, and Factory Mutual for use with Cerberus Pyrotron- systems. No. No. T – 1 3 5 F T – 1 3 5 F T – 2 0 0 F T – 2 0 0 F e s c r i p t i o n e s c r i p t i o n and fixed 135 and fixed 200 temperature 135 temperature 200 p p l i c a t i o n s p p l i c a t i o n s temperature and ceiling not 100 temperature and ceiling not 100 violent fluctua- and ceiling not 100 violent fluctua- and ceiling exceed- 100 but not d e n t i f i c a t i o n d e n t i f i c a t i o n Heat Heat o l l e c t o r o l l e c t o r Information RING SPOT SPOT & RING Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 3/94

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Fire Detector Alarm Indicating LED Simple Twist/Lock Assembly Alarm Lock-in Remote Function Output Screw-clamp Terminals ULC Listed, FM and Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics thermal fire detector is of the compensation/fixed temperature type and is designed plug-in use with the standard Cerberus Pyrotronics 3 detector base. Though the detector element is restoring, the detector electronics lock in upon alarm, it must be reset at the control panel. The detector is 135 (58 A lamp is located on the base of the to indicate initiation of an alarm. Laboratories, Inc., recommends the thermal be used to protect a maximum of 2,500 square Job conditions and engineering judgment, however, dictate closer spacing to provide faster detection. NFPA for detector sealing details. detector consists of an aluminum tubular shell con- two curved expansion struts under compression with a pair of normally open, opposed contact points are insulated from the shell. The tubular shell and have a different coefficient of expansion. When to a rapid heat rise the tubular shell expands lengthens slightly. At the same time the interior struts but at a slower rate than the shell. The rapid of the shell allows the struts to come together, closing the contact points and initiating the alarm. Data NUMBER subjected to a very slow heat rise the tubular shell the interior struts lengthen at approximately the same At the detector set temperature point of 135 (58 interior struts are fully extended, thereby closing the points and initiating the alarm. thermal detector, which is shock and corrosion responds only to heat, so it is suitable for use in where normal conditions would prohibit the use of types of detectors. connected to Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment, the is fully compatible with Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors, photoelectric detectors, flame detec- and manual stations. Electrically, any number of detectors can be used in a circuit. The limit is only to the practical considerations of job conditions engineering judgment. addition to operating its own alarm indicating lamp, the can operate one remote indicating lamp or relay when desired. and Architect Specifications thermal fire detector shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics DT-3P-135 and shall be of the rate compensation/ temperature type. The detector shall plug into its and have a lamp to indicate the initiation of an alarm. detector shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, The plug-in thermal detector shall insert into the Series 3 base and shall be compatible with Pyrotronics ionization detectors, photoelectric flame detectors, and manual stations on the circuit. There shall be no limit, other than practical to the number of thermal detectors which be installed in any one circuit. installing contractor shall install the detectors with #18 thermoplastic wire with 300 volt insulation rating, in conduit or limited energy cable where permitted local codes. Information No. Rate Compensation/Fixed Plug-in Detector Profile Surface Mounting Base energy type shielded cable (for where building codes permit detector without conduit), 2-wire, 1000 ft. roll Wt. .68 .45 22.7 Wiring Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 6/94

EC, EH & EW Single Tone Horns Horn and Horn-Strobes Horn and Horn-Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Three Models to Choose from: Chime, or Slow-Whoop Low Operating Current ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Versions High dB Output Available in Flush, Surface, or Mount Standard 4 inch Square Mounting Listed, NYMEA Approved Pyrotronics single-tone horns provide an eco- solution to horn and horn-strobe needs with tone units designed for high output and effi- These units are designed for ADA applications and the latest requirements of NFPA 72 (the National Fire Code) and UL 1971 standards for signaling devices the hearing impaired. metal construction and modern electronics dedicated, single-tone horns in flush, surface, or mounting configurations. This unit draws as low as mA due to its energy efficient design. Terminal screws provided for horn and strobe. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are in 15, 15/75, 75, and 110 Candela ratings ratings various mounting configurations. The strobe lens has bottom material made of white Lexan with 5/8 red letters. The top of the strobe has a rounded dome made of clear Lexan The overall lens height is 2.5 a width of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non- areas where lower candela is required per UL S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring cd output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets requirements for regular lighted public areas while satisfying UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake hearing impaired person per UL 1971. NUMBER Tone Horns (@ 24 VDC) (C) (H) (W) @ 10 dB @ 10 dB @ 10 dB Tone Horn-Strobes (@ 24 VDC) No. Mounting Strobe Current Ratings (mA) @ dB )-F )-S )-C )-F )-S )-C )-F Whoop )-S Whoop )-C Ceiling Whoop Diagram Diagram No. Description Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/96

Electric Control Heads for Actuation ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS ECH-24, ECH-115 and ECHS-24-EXP (shown) Fast Acting Easy Field Installation Available in 24 VDC and 120 VAC Corrosion Resistant Housing FM Approved, Pending Listed, Pending Electric Control Heads are specially designed for the release of FM-200TM from Cerberus Pyrotronics fire systems. The solenoid valve is normally closed opens when electrically energized. This action relieves pressure above the cylinder valve piston and causes the valve to open. valves are available with 24 VDC and 120 VAC coils, proof housings are available with models 24V. The are tested by UL and FM to UL standard 1058 for FM- extinguishing systems. of the solenoid valve to the cylinder valve is made with a swivel fitting. The solenoid is with 18″ pigtails fed through flexible metallic conduit connection to a user supplied junction box. These features for simple installation and removal of the solenoid valve servicing the FM-200TM cylinders. Specifications FM-200TM cylinder shall be fitted with an electric solenoid capable of actuating the cylinder valve. The solenoid shall meet all requirements of the UL standard 1058 corrosion resistance. solenoid valve shall be removable for the purpose of the filled cylinder. leads shall be supplied on the solenoid for connec- to a user supplied junction box. electric solenoid valve actuator shall be listed by Under- Laboratories and approved by Factory Mutual for use FM-200TM extinguishing systems. NUMBER Information Coils: Duty: Class: Consumption: VDC, 120VAC 4, 7 & 9 2 Amps * 1 Amp .2 Amps Use with CP-2ER ONLY Solenoid Valve Features Information No. EXP Not for use on Nitrogen Pilot Cylinders Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 Issue

EL-410D Alarm System Amplifier Unit AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 100 Watt Output 25 Volt or 70 Volt Operation Power Failure Indicator Battery Supervision Battery Transfer ULC Listed and CSFM Model EL-410D is the amplifier unit for the MXLV Voice System. The audio output amplifier section is at 100 watts, 70.7 VRMS or 25 VRMS. The amplifier designed to automatically switch over to battery opera- upon failure of the 120 VAC input. Power and battery LED are provided. The unit mounts in the MME-3 MLE-6 MXL system enclosures using the MSR-1 Rail Kit. The unit also mounts within a standard 3 enclosure and occupies eight regular spaces. Model EL-410D operates from a 120 volt 60 Hz supply a 24 volt battery standby (or other emergency DC Loss of the main operating power transfers the to battery operation and is signaled by an LED on amplifier. Restoration of main power automatically the system to normal condition. Supervision battery is supervised for charge voltage condi- Shorts or open battery lines will be signaled by an at the amplifier. amplifier and the power lines are protected by fuses are all supervised. and Architect Specifications amplifier unit shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics Model It shall supply up to 100 watts of audio power at 25 or 70 VRMS. It shall operate from a 120 VAC, 60 power supply and have provision for battery standby. of the main power supply shall transfer the unit to operation and shall indicate such loss visually at amplifier. The system shall return to normal operation upon restoration of the main supply voltage. NUMBER amplifier and all the DC lines shall be protected by The amplifier shall remain supervised during battery with a standby drain of less than 200 mA. The shall be capable of being surface or flush mounted in approved wall mounted enclosure. Line and Fuse Rating Supply Circuit Breaker: Fuse: Power: Data Requirement: Battery Drain Supervision: 100 watt Output: Output: Response: Sensitivity: 60 Hz, 2.5 Amp. Volt mA Amp. or 70.7 Volts, 100 RMS, less than 1% at 1KHz Hz +1 dB V RMS Amp. AGC Amp. AGC Amp. AGC Amp. AGC in. (22.9 cm) H x 19 cm) W x 41/2 in cm) for rail in a flush or wall mounted Information No. Wt. Kg. Unit Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 Issue

Thermal Fire Detectors Proof Models Proof Models AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS MODELS Explosion Proof Self-Restoring Detector Element Models Available in both Normally Open Normally Closed Contacts in a Wide of Temperature Settings Factory Set and Hermetically Sealed in Steel Shell and FM Approved as Fenwal Series 27120 and 27121 for Cerberus Pyrotronics Fenwal explosion proof detectors are of the rate type and are designed for use with either Cerberus Pyrotronics systems or other commer- available fire alarm systems. The detector element all models is self-restoring after operation. The Detect- explosion proof models can be supplied with closed contacts at 140, 160, 190, 210, 225, 275, 360 or 450 settings or with normally open contacts 140, 160, 190, 210, 275, 325, 360, 450, 500, 600, or settings. These detectors are only explosion proof mounted in an approved explosion proof junction of Operation of Operation units have met with wide acceptance they are designed with rate compensation. This a unique advantage over both standard fixed and rate-of-rise types of detectors because the Detect-A-Fire unit accurately senses the surround- air temperature regardless of the fire growth rate. At the predetermined danger point the system is secret of the unit sensitivity is in the design. The shell is made of a rapidly expanding alloy which follows changes in surrounding air temperature. inner struts are made of a lower expanding alloy. to resist thermal energy absorption and sealed the shell, the struts follow temperature changes slowly. slow rate fire will heat the shell and struts together. At point the unit will trigger, actuating the alarm or the extinguishant. transient rush of warm air up to 40 may expand shell, but not enough to trigger the unit. In ignoring warm air excursions, the Detect-A-Fire unit eliminates false alarms prevalent with rate-of-rise a fast rate fire starts, then the shell will expand rapidly. struts will close, actuating the alarm or releasing the The faster the fire rate of growth, the sooner the and Architect Specifications and Architect Specifications explosion proof thermal fire detector shall be a Detect- explosion proof model, Fenwal (_________), also for purposes referred to as Cerberus Pyrotronics and shall be of the rate compensated type. explosion proof detector shall have a self-restoring and shall be factory set and hermetically sealed in steel. These detectors shall be mounted in an explosion proof junction box. explosion proof detectors must be UL listed and FM # # NUMBER Cross-Reference Chart Open Contact Closed Contact 27121-140 27120-140 27121-160 27120-160 27121-190 27120-190 27121-210 27120-210 27121-225 27120-225 27121-275 27120-275 27121-325 27120-325 27121-360 27120-360 (+7,-8) (+7,-8) (+7,-8) (+7,-8) (+7,-8) (+/-10) (+/-10) (+/-10) (+/-15) (+/-20) (+/-25) (+/-15) 27121-450 27120-450 27121-500 27121-600 27121-725 Normally Closed Contact Detectors do not operate with any Cerberus Pyrotronics Control These Normally Closed Contact Detectors are offered for special applications only. Information Information to the chart above. When placing a purchase order to the Cerberus Pyrotronics model number. The of the model number is: DT- (the temperature desired) EP. For example, if you wish to order a open 140 detector, you would order model DT-140EP. The Cerberus Pyrotronics model

FireFinder Command Center Graphics System AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Intuitive Graphical User Interface (GUI) Global and Local Commands Simultaneous Interactive Terminal and Mode Time Based Command Generation SVGA Graphics Support (Any Format) Event Display by Color and Icon Context Sensitive Help Hypertext User Definable Macros Complete History Log and Report Generation Supervised Logging and Graphics Printers Full Touch Screen Support Dynamic Comment Messages Multi-Level Password Protection Multitasking Window Style Environment Industrial PC Based Listed, ULC Listed is a PC based color graphics display and control package designed for use with the Cerberus LifeLINK life safety system network. It is used to alarms, supervisories, troubles, securities and any events detected and reported by autonomous MXL maintains details of all detection devices con- to the MXL control panels, and displays screen to show the location of the devices. Any number of images may be related to each detection point, offering multiple levels of ZOOM. These screen can be bit mapped representations, usually floor generated using CAD software. Screens may also be from building drawings, color brochures, floor and even photographs captured using a color or any other graphic capture devices. One or more may be complete text screens providing the or fire department with response instructions to a device or area. The system default image type PCX, but virtually every major graphics format can be is designed to intuitively guide the operator the usage of the system. When an alarm is received, device location is displayed in the window an icon encircled by a red flashing ring. This icon is on the first graphic image associated with device, and the event corresponding text message is in the list window. The PC internal activates to alert the operator when an event needs The acknowledge button flashes on and off and selected sends the acknowledge command through LifeLINK network. The PC internal audible then NUMBER and a check mark is placed next to the event text the acknowledgment is received from the MXL panel. acknowledge button will then turn steady red indicating alarm has been acknowledged. The silence button to indicate building notification appliances are and that the operator may silence them (subject to mode of operation selected in the system settings The operator may then silence the system audibles selecting the silence button. The silence button will then steady red. The reset button can then be selected to all the MXL panel(s) and the FireFinder system of all can control the full range of features available in MXL LifeLINK network. During an alarm, system audibles be toggled back on at any time by selecting the silence again. A message can be tagged to any event for reference. That message can be printed and kept in history log files. The event graphics and text messages be sent to the printer(s) as designated in the system menu. That same ease of operation is applied to all types with the differences being that the color of the and the text will change in accordance with the type (for example yellow for troubles) and building appliances will not be activated. The operator select the ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT buttons to through the graphic images associated with the event. The NEXT and PREV buttons select the next previous events from the list window Unac- events will be listed at the top of the list and will be organized according to their priority. An next to the event text will enable the operator to quickly the type of event in the event list, and whether or the event has been acknowledged. The SHOW button enable the operator to query FireFinder for current supervisories, securities, troubles, status, messages, voltages, threshold points, device sensitivities, types, device types, disabled points and others. press of the print button will provide a hard copy of the report resulting from any query. FireFinder environment enables it to accept any event as alarms and troubles) while

FM-200TM Extinguishing Systems Discharge Hose ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Cylinder to Pipe Wire Braid Reinforced Restriction to Flow Listed, Pending Approved, Pending FM-200TM System Flexible Discharge Hoses are used to connections between cylinder valves and system or piping. They minimize the effects of variations in height of cylinder valve outlets due to dimension necessary in cylinder manufacture, and due to irregularities. Discharge Hoses are provided in 1 2 and 2 sizes. flexible discharge hoses are Unified Thread (flare type) the valve end and Male NPT on the system side. A Valve Adapter must be used to connect to system piping if flexible discharge hose is not used. Specifications Flexible Discharge Hoses shall be of the same pipe size the cylinder valves which they serve. They shall be wire- have a minimum working pressure of 560 psi, a minimum burst pressure of 2,250 psi. They shall be with the Cerberus Pyrotronics part number and be UL listed and FM approved. Information No. comes 24 inches comes 31 inches comes 48 inches Weight NUMBER Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 9/

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS and Valve Assemblies FM- 10, 20, 40, 70, 125, 200 Sizes Filled at Factory in One lb. Flow Rate Valve Manual, Electric or Pressure Operated Optional Liquid Level Indicator on Mounting on FM-10H, and 70H Listed Approved cylinder sizes are available: 10, 20, 40, 70, 125, and 200 lb. They can be filled as shown below: Lbs. (A) (C) sizes are charged with FM-200TM and pressurized with nitrogen 360 psig at 70 They are manufactured, tested, and marked in with D.O.T. specifications: 4BA500 or 4BW500 for the sizes. The 125 and 200 lb. cylinders are fitted with lifting for convenience in handling. and valve assemblies, FM-10H, 20H, 40H and 70H are with an internal siphon tube having a curved lower end permits mounting horizontally. Cylinder bracketing is for vertical, horizontal and wall mounting. Valves 10, 20, 40, 70 and 125 lb. size cylinders use a valve with a 1 unified thread outlet; the 200 lb. size uses a valve with a 2 inch thread outlet. Both valves are of a pressure-seated high rate design in order to meet the rapid discharge time specified NFPA 2001. Both have a brass body, a brass piston with resilient a pressure releasing pilot check assembly for manual and actuation, a safety disc assembly, a pressure guage, and connection port with a built-in check valve for attachment of an solenoid valve which relieves the pressure above the and permits the piston to travel upward, thus fully opening valve and permitting the FM-200TM to discharge through the The discharge outlet is fitted with an anti-recoil plug which is safety device to prevent movement of the cylinder in the event of while the cylinder valve is not connected to the piping and the cylinder is not securely fastened to a solid NUMBER Controls valve sizes are threaded to accept the same set of valve described below: Electric Solenoid Valve Solenoid valve is normally closed and opens upon electric being applied, thus relieving the pressure above the valve and causing the cylinder valve to open. The solenoid valve a swivel nut for mechanical connection to the cylinder valve. For connection it is furnished with 18″ pigtails which are led flexible metallic conduit to allow convenient removal of the valve from the cylinder valve when servicing. Manual Control Head – Local the actuating lever through 90 causes a pin to depress and the pilot check on the valve and releases FM-200TM pressure the valve piston. Manual Control Head – Remote actuation as the local manual, except the lever is controlled by a 1/16 inch diameter stainless steel pull cable enclosed in inch E.M.T. with corner pulleys at each change in direction. The terminates in a remotely located pull box. Pressure Actuator pressure actuator replaces the local and remote control heads the valve. It contains a piston of sufficient area to provide the force to open the pilot check when pressure from the discharge of a master cylinder is applied through 5/16″ The pressure actuator is used on pressure operated slave which are to be released simultaneously with the master master cylinder can be used to pressure operate up to a of four slave cylinders. If more than four cylinders are up to 15 may be pressure operated using a nitrogen cylinder. cylinder valves have a pressure actuation outlet port. It opens the same space as the valve outlet and is under pressure only the valve is discharging. The port has a 1/8″ pipe thread which fitted with a pipe plug. The pipe plug is removed when the port is be used, and a master cylinder adapter kit is installed. The or pipe is connected to the outlet of the adapter kit and run the pressure actuators on the slave cylinders. Combination Pressure Actuator and Manual special pressure actuator is also available to which either

FM-200TM Extinguishing Systems Pre-Engineered Modular Type ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Requirements shall be furnished a Cerberus Pyrotronics Balanced Type Extinguishing System for total flooding protection the hazard. The protection shall be provided by one or by an group of single cylinder systems as necessary to the specified concentration. Each cylinder shall be piped to the nozzles served by that cylinder. The design shall be suitable for the purpose intended and be in accordance with the Factory Mutual approval, the Laboratories, Inc. listing, as identified by ULC File CEX590 and with NFPA Standard No. 2001 Clean Agent Fire Agent Systems. system shall be installed in full compliance with the manu- installation manual referenced in the UL listing, the FM and with NFPA Standard No. 2001. cylinders shall be manufactured, tested and marked in with D.O.T. Specification 4BW500 or 4BA500. Eight different sizes of cylinders are available, they are 10 lb., lb., 40 lb., 70 lb., 125 lb., 200 lb., 350 lb. and 500 lb. capaci- cylinders shall be charged with FM-200TM and shall be with dry nitrogen to a total pressure of 360 (24.84 bars) at 70 (21.1 to assure rapid discharge and operation at temperatures as low as -40 (-40 larger than 70 pounds capacity shall be fitted with lugs for ease of handling. Cylinders shall be furnished with suitable for secure mounting. cylinder shall be furnished with a cylinder pressure switch to cause a supervisory signal at the control if the pressure in the cylinder drops to approximately 220 Cylinders with a capacity of 200 pounds or more shall be with a liquid level indicating device for determining the of the FM-200TM charge in the cylinders. The device shall of a brass diptube with a stainless steel float riding on outside of the diptube and a magnetic tape within the Both the tape and the float shall be fitted with magnets of coupling so as to suspend the tape with its calibra- easily read at the entry to the diptube, indicating the actual level in the cylinder. graph shall be provided to translate the tape reading to of FM-200TM at the cylinder temperature. Valves cylinder valves shall have a brass body and shall be of a seated, high flow rate design incorporating a brass with seal, pressure releasing pilot check assembly, safety assembly, pressure actuation outlet port and pressure Cylinder valves on electrically actuated master control shall have a connection for an electric solenoid valve. solenoid valve shall be easily removable from the cylinder to facilitate cylinder removal and servicing. cylinder valves shall be provided with an anti-recoil plug to the valve discharge outlet to prevent rocketing or of the cylinder in the event of discharge while the is not bracketed or not otherwise held securely in place. nozzles shall be brass and shall be of a type specified in the listing and FM approval and suitable for the purpose They shall be marked with the manufacturer identify- part number. nozzles shall have a standard female pipe thread for to the discharge piping. Nozzles shall be spaced in with the instructions in the installation manual and required by the UL listing and FM approval. and Fittings piping either black or galvanized, conforming to ASTM or A-106, or other materials confirming to these strength shall be used. The thickness of the pipe wall shall calculated in accordance with ANSI B-31.1, Power Piping All fittings used shall be 300 pound or 600 pound class in with NFPA Standard 2001. pipe ends shall be thoroughly reamed after cutting, and all oil chips shall be removed. Dry air or nitrogen shall be blown the piping to remove chips or other debris prior to of the nozzles. piping shall be securely fastened with particular attention given to fastening near nozzles to prevent pipe movement to the reaction force during discharge. Equipment system shall be designed for automatic electric operation for manual operation. When the cylinder is not so located as be readily accessible at the time of fire, a remote manual of either the mechanical type (preferred) or the electrical shall be used. release shall be by a Cerberus Pyrotronics CP-2ER Release Panel or System 3 model HC-35 or RM-30U Mo

FM-200TM Extinguishing Systems Level Indicator ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS FM-200L, FM-350L and FM-500L Level Located No Need to Move or Cylinders Simple Procedure Uninterrupted Hazard Protection as Option Approved Listed FM-200TM Liquid Level Indicator, Models FM-200L, 350L 500L are designed to determine the weight of FM- in 200 lb., 350 lb., and 500 lb. cylinders. The unit is Laboratories Inc. listed and Factory Mutual Liquid Level Indicator consists of a magnetic tape projects from the cylinder shoulder down into the to a point well below the minimum fill level. A metal tube is inserted into a special fitting located in top of the 200 lb., 350 lb., or 500 lb., FM-200TM cylinder. indicator is provided with a graduated tape designed sense the position of a toroidal magnet encased within internal float riding on the liquid surface. The gradua- of the tape indicate the location of the liquid level the cylinder. use the magnetic tape to determine the weight of FM- in the cylinder, it is necessary only to remove the cap the tape. Lift the tape with the fingers until magnetic occurs between the magnet in the float and on the of the tape. This can easily be felt and the fingers then release the tape which will be held in position The graduated tape is then read to the tenth of an inch at its entry to the fitting. The of the cylinder is read with a thermometer and weight of the FM-200TM in the cylinder is read from a of temperature curves on a graph of inches vs. of FM-200TM. Separate graphs are provided for the lb., 350 lb., and 500 lb cylinders. NUMBER Specification FM-200TM Storage cylinders shall be fitted with a liquid indicating device for determining the weight of the charge in the cylinders. The device shall consist a brass diptube with a stainless steel float riding on the of the diptube, and a flexible magnetic tape within diptube. Both the tape and the float shall be fitted with capable of coupling so as to suspend the mag- tape, with its calibrations easily read at the entry to diptube indicating the actual liquid level in the cylinder. graph shall be provided to translate the magnetic tape to pounds of FM-200TM in the cylinder at the temperature. A cap shall be provided to retain the within the diptube when in service but not in use. The level shall be installed as an option or as a permanent of the cylinder assembly and shall be Underwriters Inc. listed and Factory Mutual approved. Information Description Weight Empty lb. capacity cylinder with level indicating device lb. capacity cylinder with level indicating device lb. capacity cylinder with level indicating device lbs. Kg.) lbs. Kg.) lbs. * Kg.) Includes skid Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 9/

FM-200TM Storage Container ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS FM-350 & FM-500 High Flow Rate Valve Manual, Electric or Pressure Operated Optional Liquid Level Indicator at Factory to 350 or 500 lbs. FM-200TM in 1 lb. Increments Listed Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics Model FM-350 and FM-500 are capacity FM-200TM storage containers with 2 inch valves. The FM-350 and FM-500 have a capacity 350 or 500 lbs of FM-200TM. The FM-350 and FM-500 are of local or remote manual operation, electric pneumatic operation or a combination of a and pneumatic operation. The FM-350 and FM-500 assemblies are designed to meet the requirements UL 1058 and are ideally suited for use in all large com- and industrial hazards. Description FM-350 and FM-500 can be filled with a maximum of or 500 lbs. of FM-200TM and pressurized with nitrogen 360 psig at 70 cylinders are operated by the relief of pressure above valve piston which permits the valve piston to travel thus fully opening the valve and permitting the FM- to discharge through the outlet which is located at top of the valve. FM-350 and FM-500 can be actuated by one of the means: Electric Solenoid Valve The solenoid valve is closed and opens upon electric energy being thus relieving the pressure above the valve piston causing the cylinder valve to open. The solenoid valve a swivel nut for a mechanical connection to the cylinder For electrical connection it is furnished with 18 inch which are fed through flexible metallic conduit to convenient removal of the solenoid valve from the valve when servicing. Local Manual Control Head moving the actuat- lever through 90 causes a pin to depress and open the check on the valve and releases FM-200TM pressure the valve piston. Remote Manual Control Head Same Actuation the local manual, except the lever is controlled by a 1/16 diameter stainless steel pull cable enclosed in inch with corner pulleys at each change of direction. The terminates in a remotely located pull box. Pressure Actuator The pressure actuator replaces local and remote control heads on the valve. It contains piston of sufficient area to provide the necessary force to the pilot check when pressure from the FM-200TM of a master cylinder is applied through 5/16 inch NUMBER Cylinder Features and Valve Assembly 350 lb. (158.7 kg.) Model FM-350, FM-350L and Valve Assembly 600 lb. (272.1 kg.) Model FM-500, FM-500L The safety cap be installed all times except the cylinders connected to system piping being filled. The cap must be removed its chain. The safety cap be installed all times except the cylinders connected to system piping being filled. The cap must be removed its chain. tubing or 5/16 inch actuation hose. The pressure is used on pressure operated (slave) cylinders are to be released simultaneously with the control cylinder. master cylinder can be used to pressure operate up to maximum of four slave cylinders. If more than five cylin- are required up to 15 may be pressure operated using nitrogen pilot cylinder. cylinder valves have a pressure actuation outlet port is under pressure only while the valve is discharging. port has a 1/8 inch pipe thread and is fitted with a pipe which is removed when the port is to be used, and with a master cylinder adapter kit. The tubing or hose is connected to the adapter kit and run to pressure actuators on the slave cylinders. pressure operating tubing in a multi-cylinder fire system can be supervised with the use of the CSS cylinder supervisory switch. Combination Pressure Actuator and Manual A special pressure actuator is also available to either a local or remote type manual control head be attached. It is used when both pressure actuation manual control is required for the same cylinder. steel cylinders are manufactured and tested in with D.O.T. specifications; 4BW500. The FM- and 500 lb. cylinders are fitted with 2 lifting lugs for of handling. 2 inch brass discharge valve can be piped

Remote Firefighters CPV-90 and MXLV Systems AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS FT-301/302, FT- FT-301CL, FT- FT-302CL, FB-300, FC-300, PT-303/ FJ-303 Supervised Zone Call-in Gauge Steel High Impact Construction & Armored Versions ULC Listed Pyrotronics FT-301 is a Remote Firefighters Station which includes a cradle with switch mounted on a red enamel, heavy gauge steel and a telephone handset. The handset is of red, high impact plastic and attaches to cradle assembly with a retractable coil cord. The is designed for use with the Cerberus Hardwire Emergency Voice Alarm/Commu- System. FT-301 contains the circuitry necessary to produce distinct zone call-in signal when the handset is from its cradle. It also provides surge sup- and in-out terminals for supervised wiring. FT-301 is used with: FB-300 Flush Backbox 14″ H x W x 3.5″ D or FB-301 Surface Backbox 15″ H x 8″ W 3.62″ D and FCC-300 Key Locked Door 15″ H x 8″ W includes Push-to-Talk button in handset. Pyrotronics PT-303 is a portable Firefighters It is constructed of red, high impact plastic includes a retractable coil cord with a phone type The PT-303 is designed for use with the Pyrotronics Hardwire or MXLV Emergency Alarm/Communication System. It can be into the FJ-303 series of portable telephone PT-304 includes Push-to-Talk button in handset. FJ-303 is a Remote Firefighters Telephone Jack use with the Cerberus Pyrotronics PT-303 and 304 of portable firefighters telephone handset. The is mounted on a red, baked enamel rolled steel gang wall plate silkscreened with a white icon. NUMBER 3391 FJ-303 is designed for use with Cerberus Hardwire or MXLV Emergency Voice Alarm/ System. It includes surge suppressors well as other circuitry required to produce a distinct call-in signal when a portable telephone handset plugged in. The jack also provides polarity reversal and in-out terminal connections for super- wiring. PT-303/304 and FJ-303 CANNOT be used PT-303/304 and FJ-303 CANNOT be used the EVACS+ system. the EVACS+ system. and Architect Specifications Remote Firefighters Telephone Station (Warden shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics Model FT-301. telephone station shall be UL and CSFM listed. It consist of a telephone handset constructed of high impact plastic with retractable coil cord and cradle with switch hook. The cradle and hook assembly shall be mounted on a red, gauge steel support. Remote Firefighters Telephone Station shall be with the Cerberus Pyrotronics Hardwire or Voice Alarm/Communication System and shall surge suppression polarity reversal protection, other circuitry necessary to produce a distinct or call in signal when the handset is removed its cradle. Remote Firefighters Telephone shall operate from two conductor supervised line. A shorted or opened shall be identified and signaled visually and at the command console. A single ground fault Information not impair the line function but shall be signaled protective measures. unit shall be used with either an FB-300 (flush) or (surface) backbox and an FC-300 cover with lock door and breakable glass. The box, front and door shall be constructed of heavy gauge and finished in baked, red enamel. The door bear a silkscreened handset symbol and the – TELEPHONE – TO OPEN TELEPHONE – TO OPEN KEY OR BREAK THIS GLASS. KEY OR BREAK THIS GLASS. shall include a momentary Push-to-Talk button in the handset. shall include a flexible armored cable con- the handset to the telephone cradle assembly. shall include a flexible armored cable con- the handset to the telephone cradle assembly a Push-to-Talk switch. shall include armored cable and a zone indicator LED. This LED shall illuminate when telephone zone to which that handset is connected been selected at the command console. shall include armored cable and a zone indicator LED. This LED shall illuminate when telephone zone to which t

GAD and RRD Remote Graphic and Relay Driver AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS RRD Energizes Relays GAD Illuminates Graphic Annunciators Up to 24 Combined Module Capacity Header Connections for use with User LED Graphic Panel Listed, FM, CSFM and Approved Remote Graphic Driver and Relay Driver are modules can be used to illuminate graphic annunciators or relays. The Remote Graphic Driver Module is GAD and the Remote Relay Driver Module is model modules have a header (i.e., a male connector for a pin wire connector). The wire connector from the is fastened to a user supplied LED graphic panel. wire connector from the RRD is fastened to a user UL listed relay unit. GAD and RRD modules can be connected anywhere the IXL network communication lines. the Graphic Drivers (GAD) are connected to user graphic annunciators, the GAD can support up to graphic annunciated points. Both alarm and trouble can be annunciated with the use of the GAD. used, treat the Graphic Driver as a remote annuncia- in power calculations, with each module accommodat- up to 8 points. Remote Relay driver must include relay current in line loading calculations. wires coming from both the GAD and RRD driver card not supervised. Therefore, if possible, always mount GAD in the same cabinet as the graphic display or, for RRD, mount it in the same box as the relays. and Architect Specifications Graphic drivers shall be a model GAD, Remote drivers shall be a model RRD. These driver modules be connected anywhere onto the IXL system network lines. These modules shall have headers enable connection to user supplied LED graphic panels user supplied UL listed relay unit. NUMBER RRD Wiring Diagram GAD Wiring Diagram

System 3 Control Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS HC-35 HC-35 Module Module Cross-Zone Automatic Release Discharge Delay Timing Options Supervises Cylinder Pressure Confirms Agent Discharge Automatic or Manual Listed, FM, CSFM NYMEA Approved Fire Extinguishing System Control Module HC-35 is to effect, either manually or automatically, the dis- of Halon halogenated fire extinguishing agent, or extinguishing agents as covered by NFPA 12/12A. It Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and U.L. Canada listed Factory Mutual and California State Fire Marshal assure continuous operation of the extinguishing the HC-35 utilizes the 24 or 60 hr battery back up by the System 3 control panel. HC-35 connects to 2 separate automatic initiating which are cross zoned, therefore, requiring both to be in order to activate agent release. shorting contact device circuit which accommodates station controls, series MH-501/517C is also for immediate or selectable time delayed agent HC-35 also provides for utilization of the Cerberus AW-1 abort station. When the AW-1 is used, the will provide various selectable system abort timing operation, a supervised agent release circuit, of up to 4 series connected solenoids, auto- releases the extinguishing agent from the con- This circuit is reset from the CP-35 control panel. (3) red alarm LED are provided to identify means confirmation of agent release as listed below: Discharge LED, flashes during selectable time delay then goes steady when solenoids are ener- Manual Station LED, lights when manual release is activated. Manifold Discharge LED lights when pressure is in the discharging piping. (Separate pressure is required.) (4) yellow trouble LED are provided to indicate in: Release solenoid circuit. The Manual Station release (MH-501/517C) circuit. The abort station (AW-1) circuit. Low cylinder pressure (separate cylinder pressure required). LED can be lamp tested from the system control The HC-35 module which occupies four (4) module is placement supervised and provides a system signal when removed. NUMBER module is also fitted with a manually operated Discon- Switch which disables the release circuit during test. When placed in the disconnect position, the panel goes into the system trouble mode and the trouble LED identified Circuit is illumi- various timing options are listed as follows and set by switches: Discharge Delay, 0-60 seconds in 10 second increments Abort Delay 1 – Operational only if activated before second is in alarm. Release of the abort switch after both are in alarm will result in the regular preselected Delay time. 2 – Actuated at any time before the preselected Delay time expires, the release of the abort after both zones are in alarm will result in a delay 10 seconds before the actual discharge. 3 – Actuated at any time before the preselected Delay time expires, the release of the abort after both zones are in alarm will result in a con- of the unexpired preselected Discharge Delay before actual discharge begins. In options 1 and 3, the maximum delay period by U.L. is 10 seconds. Manual Station Release 1 – Actuation of a manual station release results a discharge delay period equal to the period pre- for the Discharge Delay provided the delay was 30 seconds or less. Manual station activa- has a maximum discharge delay of 30 seconds. 2 – Actuation of a manual station release results an immediate discharge regardless of the preselected delay period. Requirement 53mA Diagram for max. of 64 seconds followed by 106mA and Architect Specifications extinguishing system automatic or manual release shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics Model HC-35. This shall be system interconnected by a ten-pin plug harness assembly and shall be operated with and by the main control panel. HC-35 shall provide a supervised agent release circuit of operating up to four (4) series connected (6VDC, 1.6 A each). The unit shall

HN & HNH Electron-Mechanical Horns and Horn Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Contactless Design Contact Inrush and Penetrating Mechanical Weatherproof when in FWB Box Low Operating Current ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe High and Standard dB Available in Flush, Surface, Ceiling Mount Flush and Surface Models in Red or White Standard 4 inch Square Listed, NYMEA Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics Electro-Mechanical Horn com- state-of-the-art electronics with rugged, proven providing the penetrating sound of an electrome- horn while eliminating problems associated with These units are designed for ADA applications meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72 (the National Alarm Code) and UL 1971 standards for signaling for the hearing impaired. metal construction and modern electronics the effects of inrush and RFI noise associated contact operated electromechanical devices which penetrating sound in a durable package. This draws as little as 38 mA due to its energy efficient Terminal screws are provided for horn and strobe. full compliment of accessories are available including: weatherproof box, single and double projectors, pendent housing, semi-flush plate and plate. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are in 15, 15/75, 75, and 110 Candela ratings with mounting configurations. The strobe lens has a material made of white Lexan with 5/8 red The top of the strobe has a rounded dome shape of clear Lexan The overall lens height is 2.5 with a of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non- areas where lower candela is required per UL S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring 15 output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets ADA for regular lighted public areas while also UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd units. S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake the impaired person per UL 1971. NUMBER Model No. dB 10 * Output No dB 10 * (@ 24 VDC) No. )-F )-S )-C Output No. )-F )-S )-C (@ 24 VDC) dB * Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Diagram Diagram No. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/96

ICP Intelligent Control Point AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Intelligent Device for use with MXL, MXLV and MXL-IQ Connects to ALD Signaling Circuits Internally Power Limited using Self-restoring Solid Thermal Devices Supervises DC Input 25V Audio, 35 Watts 70.7V Audio, 25 Watts 24 VDC Notification Appliance Circuits, 1.5A Class A (Style Z) or Class B (Style Y) Firefighters Telephone Circuits Mounts on Standard Electrical box (Double Gang 4″ Square) Fully Programmable Software Addressing and Testing and ULC Listed, City of Chicago, CSFM, NYMEA Approved ICP is an Series Intelligent Control Device which to the MXL ALD signaling circuit and provides a output for the supervision and control of notification appliance circuits, 25 or 70 Volt single audio circuits and firefighter telephone circuits. It be used with the MXL, MXLV or MXL-IQ. ICP can be programmed for any of the usages men- above using MXL AccuLINK programming soft- and controlled by the systems output logic. It can be and tested using the SensorLINK device. It in either a standard double gang or 4″ square box. The output of the ICP is inherently power using solid state, self-restoring thermal devices. 24VDC input to the ICP is supervised by the ICP itself that power wiring may include branch circuits. The high audio risers are supervised using the ASC-2 audio card. The telephone riser is supervised by the module. equipment is approved for operation over the tempera- range of 0 C to 49 C. and Architect Specifications mounted signal, speaker, strobe and telephone circuits the MXL system shall be provided by the ICP module. The shall provide the ability to be independently activated by system custom logic programming. The ICP shall be in either a 4″ square electrical box or a standard 31/ deep double gang electrical switchbox. ICP shall occupy one of the MXL analog loop addresses. Ratings NUMBER DC Supply:: Output:: Audio Output:: VDC, 18mA max. VDC, 5mA 25 Watts max. 35 Watts max. VDC, 1.5 Amp. max. DC Output:: Data Information Number Control Point Instructions Use a standard 31/2″ deep, double gang electrical switch- or a 4″ square electrical box that is 21/2″ deep with either 11/3″ deep extension or a 11/4″ deep plaster ring extension. Connect the field wiring. Insert the ICP into the box and the module plate to the box. using the double gang switchbox or the extension, use the same four to fasten both the plate (user supplied). Cover the module front plate with a 4″ blank plate (user and the and fasten with two plate screws. The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 10/

ID-60 SERIES Initiating Devices & Ionization Smoke Detectors MXL and IXL Control Panels AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS ID-60I, ID-60IA, ID-60IB Custom Microcomputer Chip Technology Innovative Technology Supports Intricate and Detector Communication Dynamic Supervision Remote Sensitivity Adjustment and Capability LED Pulses Only During Alarm Two-Wire Operation SensorLINK, FPI-32 Programs and Verifies Address and Tests Detector Electronic Address Programming is Easier More Dependable Listed, ULC Listed, NYMEA, FM, CSFM and City of Chicago Approved Pyrotronics ID-60I, ID-60IA and ID-60IB intelli- ionization smoke detectors provide the market most method of detection, address programming and combined with sophisticated control panel Each ID-60 Series ionization detector a microcomputer chip. The ID-60 Series chip technology, and its sophisticated bi- communication capabilities with the control achieves the state of an Initiating Pyrotronics innovative technology also allows all Series intelligent ionization detectors to be pro- by using SensorLINK, the Model FPI-32 Program- The FPI-32 Programmer/Tester is a compact, menu driven accessory which makes program- and testing a detection device faster, easier and dependable than previous methods. The FPI-32 the need for mechanical addressing mecha- such as program jumpers, dipswitches or rotary because the FPI-32 assigns the ID-60 Series address into the detector microcomputer chip memory. Vibration, corrosion and other which deteriorate mechanical addressing are no longer a cause for concern. ID-60 Series ionization detectors operate with either IXL, MXL or the XL3 control panel. ID-60 intelligent ionization detectors are Underwriters Inc. and ULC Listed. ID-60I, ID-60IA and ID-60IB are plug-in, two-wire detectors, compatible with either the MXL, XL3, IXL (ICon) control panel. Each ID-60 Series ionization consists of self-compensating dual ionization custom microcomputer chip technology and stable solid state electronic circuitry. outer chamber of the detector self-compensating ionization chambers detects the presence of products combustion. The inner chamber serves as a reference to the detector sensitivity to gradual changes in NUMBER Catalog Number 6138 conditions. Also, the detector microcom- chip software compensates for ambient temperature As a result, temperature and humidity changes a minimal effect on the detector sensitivity within detector specified operating range. detector microcomputer chip has the capacity of in memory, identification information as well as operating status information such as assigned and trouble threshold values. In addition, the ID-60 detectors, using their microcomputer chip, can in either of two protocols. One protocol type used when the ID-60 Series detectors communicate with IXL or MXL control panels and other protocol is used XL3 communication. the ID-60 Series detectors are linked to an MXL or IXL panel, whether the detector operating status is or in trouble depends upon the difference between alarm threshold value stored in the detector memory the detector analog value. The detector then com- its operating status to the control panel. addition, the MXL periodically obtains the signal of the analog value. When the MXL determines that the analog values indicate excessive dust build-up, MXL informs the user that the particular detector maintenance. the ID-60 Series ionization detector alarm condi- is confirmed by the control panel, the LED blinks and blinking until the system is reset at the control Also, any user defined system alarm function and by event functions are activated when the detector into alarm. Each ID-60 Series ionization detector is of operating one I Series remote alarm indicator or auxiliary relay or one audible base. sensitivity, calibration and identification are supervised by the control panel. Det

ILI Series Ionization Smoke Detectors for IXL, MXL, and XL3 Panels AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS ILI-1A, ILI-1B, ILI-1H, ILI-1AH, ILI-1BH On-Board Motorola Microprocessor Based Design Technology Provides High Speed, Fault System/Detector Communications Supervision; Protects Critical Detector Highly Resistant to RFI, EMI and Humidity Sensitivity Adjustment and Measurement Indicator LED Wire Operation Compatible with SensorLINK, model FPI-32 Field Program /Verify Detector Addressing, Diagnostic Testing of Detectors Software Based Automatic Environmental Comp- (available only when used with MXL Series systems) Optional, Fully Programmable Relay Base and Audible Base ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, and NYMEA Approved Pyrotronics ILI-1, ILI-1A, ILI-1B, ILI-1H, ILI-1AH, ILI- intelligent ionization smoke detectors offer the fire and safety industry the most advanced method of detection, and communications available today. the ILI Series detectors provide an extremely degree of resistance to RFI, EMI and humidity. The ILI ionization detector utilizes a state-of-the-art Motorola with EEPROM. The micropro- provides the power to operate the detector detection, error checking and supervision ILI Series intelligent ionization detectors are compat- with Cerberus Pyrotronics SensorLINK FPI-32 field The FPI-32 is a compact, portable, accessory which makes programming and detectors faster, easier and more reliable than other The FPI-32 eliminates the need for cumbersome, mechanical programming methods and reduces and service costs by electronically program- addresses and functionally testing the ILI perfor- before the detector is installed. ILI Series ionization detectors are also compatible with Pyrotronics IXL, MXL and XL3 control panels. ILI Series detectors are Underwriters Laboratories Listed. ILI-1, ILI-1A, ILI-1B, ILI-1H, ILI-1AH, ILI-1B are two-wire ionization detectors, compatible with Pyrotronics IXL, MXL and XL3 control panels. ILI Series ionization detectors consist of self-compen- dual ionization chambers and highly stable solid electronic circuitry. outer chamber of the detector self-compensating ionization chambers detects the presence of products combustion. The inner chamber serves as reference to stabilize the detector sensitivity to gradual in environmental conditions. Also, the detector chip software compensates for ambient changes. As a result, temperature and changes have a minimal effect on the detector within the detector specified operating range. NUMBER detector microcomputer chip has the capacity of in memory, identification information as well as operating status information such as assigned threshold and trouble threshold values. In addition, ILI Series detectors using their microcomputer chip, can in either of two protocols. One protocol type used when the ILI Series detectors communicate with the and IXL control panels and the other protocol is used XL3 communication. the ILI Series detectors are linked to an MXL or IXL (ICon) whether the detector operating status is normal or alarm or trouble depends upon the difference between alarm threshold value stored in the detector memory the detector analog value. The detector then commu- its operating status to the control panel. addition, the MXL periodically obtains the signal of the analog value. When the MXL determines that the analog values indicate excessive dust build-up, MXL informs the user that the particular detector maintenance. the ILI Series ionization detector alarm condition is by the control panel, the detector LED blinks continues blinking until the system is reset at the panel. Also any user defined system alarm function control by event functions are activated when the goes into alarm. Each ILI Series ionization detec- is capable of operating one I Series remote alarm or one auxiliary relay or one audible ba

ILP-2 Photoelectric Detectors for MXL and MXLV Photoelectric Detectors for MXL and MXLV Panels Panels AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Most Sophisticated Intelligence Available Today Unsurpassed False Alarm Immunity Easily Programmed to Match Specific Location Hazards by a Pre-Defined Smoke Profile from the Control Panel On-Board Motorola Microprocessor Based Design Innovative Technology Provides High Speed, Fault System/Detector Communications EEPROM Supervision; Protects Critical Detector Highly Resistant to RFI, EMI and Humidity. Remote Sensitivity Adjustment and Measurement Field Cleanable Photochamber Alarm Indicator LED Two-Wire Operation Compatible with SENSORLINK, Model FPI-32 Field Program /Verify Detector Perform Diagnostic Testing of Detectors EnviroLINK: Software Based Automatic Environmental (available only when used with MXL Optional, Fully Programmable Relay Base and Audible Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM and NYMEA Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics ILP-2 Intelligent Photoelectric Detector offers the life safety industry the most method of detection and communication today. The ILP-2 utilizes advanced algorithms that the detector to distinguish deceptive phenomena optomizing response to actual hazards / fires such that from a cigarette or motor vehicle in a parking from an actual fire hazard. In addition, the ILP-2 provided an extremely high degree of resistance RFI, EMI, and humidity. No other detection system today offers a higher level of protection or false immunity. The ILP Series detector uses a state-of- Motorola microprocessor with EEPROM error checking and supervision algorithms. ILP Series intelligent photoelectric detectors are with Cerberus Pyrotronics SensorLINK FPI-32 programmer/tester. The FPI-32 is a compact, por- menu-driven accessory which makes programming testing detectors faster, easier and more reliable than methods. The FPI-32 eliminates the need for cum- unreliable mechanical programming methods reduces installation and service costs by electronically addresses and functionally testing the ILP before the detector is installed. ILP-2 photoelectric detector is compatible with Pyrotronics MXL and MXLV control panels. ILP Series detectors are Underwriters Laboratories NUMBER ILP-2 is a plug-in, two-wire photoelectric detector, with Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL or MXLV Each ILP-2 detector consists of a dust resistant, cleanable photo chamber, microprocessor based circuitry with plastic cover and base. Electronic packaging uses surface mount type technol- The entire electronic assembly is fully protected from transients by shielding and is coated to resist and corrosion. ILP-2 photoelectric detector utilizes a light emitting (LED), and light sensing photodiode assembled in a array so that under normal conditions, light transmit- by the LED is directed away from the photodiode and throughout the smoke chamber in a controlled The smoke chamber is designed to manage light and extraneous reflections from dust particles other non-smoke airborne contaminants in such a way to maintain stable, consistent detector operation. Cerberus Pyrotronics ILP-2 detector provides the level of detector intelligence available today with a / panel link that allows the user to program the for specific fire hazard profiles through simple selection. When installing a new ILP-2 detector, user simply selects the application from the following Garage Environment software does the rest; no guessing on percent of or selecting outdated alarm configuration figures; the control panel programs the detector for optimum fire protection mode without hassle and confirmation delays. Once optimized for the fire in the area, the ILP-2 provides the best detection can buy. Should the operator or installer forget to the detector, the detector will revert to a default that allows it to operate as a standard ILP-1 detec- ILP-2 detector microprocessor uses an integral to store the detector

ILP Series Photoelectric Detectors for IXL, MXL, and XL3 Panels AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS ILPT-1 Motorola Microprocessor Based Design Technology Provides High Speed, Fault System/Detector Communications Supervision; Protects Critical Detector Resistant to RFI, EMI and Humidity. Sensitivity Adjustment and Measurement Cleanable Photochamber Indicator LED Operation 135 Degree F Thermal Model, ILPT-1 with SENSORLINK, Model FPI-32 Field Program /Verify Detector Perform Diagnostic Testing of Detectors Software Based Automatic Environmental (available only when used with MXL Fully Programmable Relay Base and Audible Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA, and City of Chicago Approved Pyrotronics ILP-1 and ILPT-1 intelligent photoelec- smoke detectors offer the fire and life safety industry the advanced method of detection, programming and available today. Additionally, the ILP series provide an extremely high degree of resistance to EMI and humidity. The ILP Series photoelectric detec- utilizes a state-of-the-art Motorola microprocessor with EEPROM. The microprocessor provides the to operate the detector sophisticated detection, checking and supervision algorithms. ILP Series intelligent photoelectric detectors are with Cerberus Pyrotronics SensorLINK FPI-32 programmer/tester. The FPI-32 is a compact, portable, accessory which makes programming and detectors faster, easier and more reliable than other The FPI-32 eliminates the need for cumbersome, mechanical programming methods and reduces and service costs by electronically program- addresses and functionally testing the ILP perfor- before the detector is installed. ILP Series photoelectric detectors are also compatible Cerberus Pyrotronics IXL, MXL and XL3 control ILP Series detectors are Underwriters Laboratories ILP-1 and ILPT-1 are plug-in, two-wire photoelectric compatible with Cerberus Pyrotronics IXL, MXL XL3 systems. Each ILP detector consists of a dust field cleanable photo chamber, microprocessor electronic circuitry with plastic cover and base. component packaging uses surface mount type NUMBER The entire electronic assembly is fully protected noise transients by shielding and is coated to resist and corrosion. ILP-1 and ILPT-1 photoelectric detector utilizes a light diode (LED), and light sensing photodiode in a fixed array so that under normal conditions, transmitted by the LED is directed away from the and scattered throughout the smoke chamber a controlled pattern. The smoke chamber is designed to light dissipation and extraneous reflections from particles or other non-smoke airborne contaminants in a way as to maintain stable, consistent detector ILP-1 and ILPT-1 detector microprocessor uses an EEPROM to store the detector address, and other operating parameters which include an assigned, value for alarm and trouble thresholds. microprocessor software employs sophisticated, algorithms to identify and disregard false alarms by radio frequency (RFI) and electromagnetic (EMI) and also validates all trouble conditions before or reporting to the control panel. Communica- within the detector itself and also between the ILP-1 ILPT-1 detectors and the control panel or the FPI-32 accessory are supervised and safeguarded disruption by reliable, microprocessor based error routines. Additionally, the microprocessor super- all EEPROM memory locations and provides a high of EEPROM failure fault tolerance. IXL or MXL applications, an ILP series detector deter- it operating status to be normal, in alarm, or in depending on the difference between the alarm value stored in the detector memory and the latest analog measurement. The detector then changes in its status to the MXL or IXL panel. In addition, MXL panels will periodically the value of the detector analog

ILT Series Thermal Detectors for IXL, MXL, and XL3 Control Thermal Detectors for IXL, MXL, and XL3 Control AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Microprocessor Based Design Innovative Technology Provides High Speed, Fault System/Detector Communications Alarm Indicator LED Two-Wire Operation Compatible with SensorLINK, Model FPI-32 Field Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM and NYMEA Approved, and FM Pending Pyrotronics ILT-1 intelligent thermal detectors an advanced method of detection, address and supervision, combined with sophisti- control panel communication. The ILT-1 detectors supplied with a 135 rate compensation/fixed sensor. The ILT Series microcomputer chip and its sophisticated bi-directional communi- capabilities with the control panel, achieves the of an Initiating Device. ILT Series intelligent thermal detectors are compatible Cerberus Pyrotronics SensorLINK FPI-32 field The FPI-32 is a compact, portable, accessory which makes programming and detectors faster, easier and more reliable than other The FPI-32 eliminates the need for cumbersome, mechanical programming methods and reduces and service costs by electronically program- addresses and functionally testing the ILT before the detector is installed. ILT-1 thermal detector operates with either the IXL, or the XL3 control panel. ILT intelligent thermal detectors are UL listed. ILT-1 is a plug-in, two-wire thermal detector, with either the IXL (ICON), MXL or XL3 control Each ILT-1 has microcomputer chip technology and stable solid state electronic circuitry. ILT Series thermal detector consists of a rate temperature 135 rated sensor. The consists of an aluminum tubular shell containing curved expansion struts under compression which are with a pair of normally open, opposed, contact The contact points are insulated from the shell. The shell and struts have different coefficients of When subjected to a rapid heat rise, the tubular expands and lengthens slightly. At the same time, the struts lengthen but at a slower rate than the shell. NUMBER rapid lengthening of the shell allows the struts to come and close the contact points. When the contact close, an alarm is initiated. subjected to a very slow heat rise the tubular shell the interior struts lengthen at approximately the same At the detector set temperature point of 135 the interior struts are fully extended and close the points, which initiates an alarm. The ILT-1 is shock corrosion resistant. This detector responds only to so the ILT-1 is suitable for use in areas where prohibit the use of other types of detectors. detector microcomputer chip has the capacity of in memory, identification information as well as operating status information. In addition, the ILT- Series detectors, using their microcomputer chip, can in either of two protocols. One protocol type used when the ILT-1 Series detectors communicate with IXL (ICON) and MXL control panel and the other is used for XL3 communication. the ILT-1 thermal detector is in alarm, the LED blinks continues blinking until the system is reset at the panel. Also, any user-defined system alarm and control by event functions are activated the detector goes into alarm. FPI-32 Programmer/Tester is used to program and the detector address. The user selects the Program to enter the desired address. The FPI-32 then automatically sets and verifies the as well as tests the detector. The FPI-32 has batteries, so a detector address can be by the user from the most convenient The user can also separately test the detector for When the user selects the Test Mode, a series tests are automatically conducted and the user is whether the detector has passed or failed. ILT-1 detector is compatible on the same MXL or XL3 circuit with other Cerberus Pyrotronics IL Series or Series addressable ionization or photoelectric X Series addressable thermal detectors, MSI or Series addressable manual

INS-EVI Emergency Voice Interface Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 8 Voice Driver Outputs Isolated Outputs 4-Wire Supervised Connection Interface for CPV-90 or EVACS Multiplex Systems Field Programmable Outputs Mounts on EVK-2 Rail Assembly Output Delay Option Output Bypass Option Operates on the IXL Network Line Listed and ULC Listed, FM, CSFM and NYMEA Approved INS-EVI is a module that provides an interface be- a Cerberus Pyrotronics IXL Control Panel and a Pyrotronics CPV-90 Hardwire or Emergency Alarm Communication System. Each INS-EVI eight outputs which can activate a Model VPM-3 programming matrix located in the voice system. VPM-3 provides 10 speaker zone activation inputs. INS-EVI occupies 2 module spaces on the EVK-2 rail located in the voice system enclosure back- The INS-EVI is connected to the system Network Line. Additional INS-EVI modules are to the same circuit. Each INS-EVI output is through the system control by event logic This allows all speaker matrixing to be field Outputs are isolated and a screw terminal provided to accept an activation source. Outputs are VDC. a voice module Model VAN-312 is used, connection the INS-EVI and the VPM-3 is fully supervised. INS-EVI occupies eight control element addresses. and Architect Specifications INS-EVI shall provide a fully supervised, field program- interface between Cerberus Pyrotronics IXL or Panel and the Cerberus Pyrotronics CPV-90 or Emergency Voice Alarm Communication It shall provide eight optically isolated high going which shall be used to activate the Cerberus Model VPM-3 speaker program matrix. INS-EVI shall occupy two module spaces on the EVK-2 assembly located in the voice system enclosure It shall be connected to the system supervised circuit. Each output shall be fully field program- via the user laptop computer and activated control by event logic. Data Communication Lines (all 8 zones enabled) (per zone enabled) (all 8 zones enabled) (per zone enabled) NUMBER Diagram Connection Diagram for TB2 DESIGNATIONS TB2 DESIGNATIONS 24 volt TB1 DESIGNATIONS 24 volt return Damage may result from incorrect wiring. a VPM-3 and a VAN-312 (Supervised Speaker Control are used, remove the corresponding zone input from the VPM-3 header HD1. This will supervise connection between the VPM-3 input and the INS-EVI 1 activation output 2 activation output 3 activation output 4 activation output 5 activation output 6 activation output 7 activation output 8 activation output EXT Voice 24 volt 24 volt return TB1 DESIGNATIONS 1 activation output 2 activation output 3 activation output 4 activation output 5 activation output 6 activation output 7 activation output 8 activation output 9 activation output 10 activation output The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1994 sheet dated 8/93

IXL Intermediate XL Member of the InteLINK Family AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS NFPA Standard 72 Style 6 (Class A) or Style 4 (Class B) Line Circuits NFPA Standard 72 Style Z (Class A) or Style Y (Class B) Appliance Circuits Microprocessor Technology Fully Field Programmable Menu Driven Programming Software Interactive Panel Keypad with Guided Sequential Control of Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory Functions by Point or Zone Supports all Series Intelligent/Analog Input Devices User Selectable Series Smoke Detector Sensitivity Settings Remote UL Sensitivity Test for Series Smoke Detectors Alarm Event and Trouble Status Buffers History Log Self Diagnosis Power Limited Password Access Protection Positive Alarm Sequence Alarm Verification 24-Hour Trouble Reminder Signal Silence Inhibit and Time Limit Cutout One Person Test and Print-Out Two Supervised Indicating Appliance Circuits Rated At Each VAC Jumper Programmable Master Box/Line Reversal Circuit Four Form C Relays Rated At 1A, 30 VDC, or 200mA, Dual Mode Battery Charger Degrade Operation Mode Full Array of Optional Modules and Devices Circuitry Does Not Require Shielded Cable Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA Approved IXL part of the Cerberus Pyrotronics family of fire life safety equipment. Ideal for buildings of size, the IXL provides a full array of standard optional features. IXL is fully supervised, power limited and fully field control panel. The standard control panel two network communication lines (these lines are by NFPA72 as signaling line circuits). This can be expanded to monitor up to four network lines. network communication line consists of one data two power lines and one earth return line. The data power lines are supervised for open circuit, short and earth faults. NUMBER network communication lines can support a variety of modules and devices for maximum system These addressable modules and devices include to: 256 addressable input devices. This limit can be by a combination of any of the following: to 256 conventional zone modules to 4 Series control modules to 240 Series devices (detectors, manual TRI interfaces), 224 addressable control element relay output 24 addressable LED annunciators or graphic or 16 high visibility LCD alphanumeric displays or interfaces, interfaces, 16 remote panel control modules, 4 generic switch control modules. system operator can select one of four smoke sensitiv- settings for a specific Series smoke detector in- on an ICon circuit. In addition, the IXL displays at panel a specific Series smoke detec-tor analog value. This feature permits the user to perform a listed smoke detector sensitivity test. system architecture allows for T-tapping of the NFPA 72 Style 4 (Class B) signaling the circuits. line circuits can be configured for either NFPA 72 Style 6 (Class A) or NFPA Standard 72 Style 4 B) operation. of the major benefits of the IXL system is that it is fully programmable. Utilizing the IBM compatible computer the panel interactive keypad, the IXL can be custom- to meet specific installation requirements. interactive keypad allows you to perform basic system in the normal, program and test modes. You are through the system operation by LED that flash in to indicate available operation choices. The IXL also password access protection for the use of the panel additional security is necessary. These features installation, reconfig-uration and maintenance simple. and Architect Specifications your nearest Cerberus Pyrotronics sales outlet for copy of the IXL Specification Guide. IXL consists of the main control panel and enclosure the IXL system. It contains the intelligence for the All data is processed and transmitted to other in the system via the network communication IXL also has two notification appliance (alarm signal) rated at 2 Amp. Each, either Style Z (Class A) or Y (Class B). The IXL municipal tie circuit is jumper for master box or line reversal circuit. There is a built-in battery charger with a 40 AH b

Lever Actuated Control Head AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS LAH Features: Used for Manual Actuation Cylinder Comes Equipped with Safety to Prevent accidental Discharge of FM-200TM Brass Construction Steel Lever Listed and FM Approved LAH, the Lever Actuated Head is equipped with an lever, for manual actuation of Ceberus Pyrotronics cylinders. The LAH is secured in a closed position a safety pull-pin. When the safety pull-pin is removed, lever can be manually rotated to the open position. the lever is in the open position, it allows for the of the cylinder or valve on which it is installed. lever operated control head is self-venting to prevent system discharge in the event of a slow buildup pressure in a pilot line. that the control head is in the position, with safety pull-pin and seal wire intact. Next, remove the cap from the cylinder or stop valve actuation Using a suitable wrench, assemble the control head to cylinder valve. Finally, tighten the swivel nut securely. Information No. No. Actuated Control Head NUMBER Data Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 10/95

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Series Remote Annunciators LED-1 and LED-2 8 Separate Points or Zones for Annunci- either Trouble or Alarm Conditions Contemporary LED Annunciator Surface or Semi-flush Installation Operates on the IXL Network Communi- Line Field Programmable Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM and NYMEA Approved Pyrotronics Remote LED Annunciator units are to be used with the IXL Control Panel. It is an annunciator containing sixteen LED for the of trouble and alarm status or initiating devices. Series Remote Annunciators can be located in the lobby or in a protected area. In its quiescent of operation, all LED are off. In the event of an a red LED will light to indicate which device or zone in alarm. To report troubles (i.e., removal of a detector the corresponding yellow LED will light, indicating devices have been programmed as a single zone, only one LED will light regardless of the number of in that zone indicating the trouble condition. The Annunciator may be tested by using the Lamp feature of the Control Panel. perform the important service of pinpointing location of the alarm device or the zone from which an originates. and Architect Specifications LED annunciators will have LED for Alarm and per point. There will be eight points per annuncia- and it shall be connected to the IXL Network Communi- Line. This annunciator shall be addressable and not require DIP switches or jumper settings for its The remote LED annunciator shall be Pyrotronics model LED-1, LED-2. actuation of a zone, the corresponding red LED will Each additional actuated zone will light its corre- LED. The Remote Annunciator can be tested the Lamp Test feature of the Control Panel to indicate functioning of the LEDs. LED annunciators are field programmable. Field for the LED Series Remote Annunciator must performed when a new unit is installed. Annunciators programmed by placing the Control Panel in the mode and the next available address will be to the annunciator when it has the programming applied to it. Series Remote Annunciators must be installed in accessible locations. The unit(s) can be semi-flush mounted using a single gang electrical box. Multiple NUMBER Information No. No. e s c r i p t i o n E D – 1 Annunciator Unit-White E D – 2 Annunciator Unit-Black Cabinet (Max. 12 or LED-2s) Annunciators may be mounted side by side, by modular electrical boxes. Add two additional gangs each additional Remote Annunciator (i.e., use a three box for two annunciators). Remote Annunciators can connected to the Network Communication Line by the screw terminals provided on the module. and Environmental Power: Current: VDC (Alarm LEDs only) (All LEDs lit) Temperature: 0 to +49 Humidity: Cabinet for Units (12 max.): 245/8″ x 141/2″ x 5 5/8″ (Single Units): Single gang electrical box non-condensing H x 35/8″ W x 11/16″ D oz. Diagram The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1994 sheet dated 8/93

LED Series Annunciators for SXL and PXL AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS LED-3 and LED-4 8-Zone LED Display Annunciates Zone Alarms, Supervisory Trouble Conditions Surface or Semi-flush Installation 4-Wire Connection to SXL (Supervised) PXL Field Programmable 2 Remote Annunciators per SXL or PXL ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA FM Approved Pyrotronics Remote LED Annunciators are to be used with the SXL or PXL Fire Alarm Panels. They are eight-point annunciators contain- sixteen LED for the display of alarm, supervisory or conditions by zone. LED can be located in the building lobby or in a area. In its quiescent mode of operation, all are off. In the event of an alarm, a red LED will light to which device or zone is in alarm. To report troubles removal of a detector head), the corresponding yellow will light. Supervisory conditions are annunciated by corresponding amber zone LED. The left most LED is a device which illuminates red for zone alarm condi- and amber for supervisory zones. The Remote Annun- may be tested by using the Lamp Test feature in the or PXL test mode. perform the important service of pinpointing location of the alarm device or the zone from which an originates. and Architect LED annunciators will have LED for Alarm/ and Trouble conditions per zone. There will be zones per annunciator. It shall be connected to the or PXL auxiliary port. The annunciator shall be addres- via DIP switches. The remote annunciator shall be Pyrotronics model LED-3/LED-4. actuation of an initiating zone, the corresponding LED will light red. Each additional zone will light its corresponding LED. a supervisory circuit changes state to off-normal, the LED will light amber. When an initiating goes into trouble the yellow zone trouble LED will The Remote Annunciator can be tested using the Test feature of the Control Panel to indicate proper of the LEDs. NUMBER Information No. No. Remote Annunciator – Black Remote Annunciator – White annunciators are field programmable at the time of The dipswitch address must be set and the configured for use of the LED via the program mode the control panel. Please see the Installation Instructions, 315-093066 for further information on programming and and Environmental Power: Current: VDC (Alarm LEDs only) (All LEDs lit) to +49 non-condensing H x 35/8″ W x 11/16″ D oz. gang electrical box Temperature: Humidity: Diagram The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet date 4/

LED-8/16 Series Wired Annunciators for SXL, PXL, MXL & System 3 AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 8 and 16 Zone Displays Lamp Test Switch Option Trouble Indication with Silence Available Black or Red Enclosure Yellow LED for Supervisory Indication NYMEA and CSFM LED-8 and LED-16 Series remote annunciators provide indication of alarm and supervisory conditions for any Pyrotronics fire alarm system. The zone LED are in red with spare yellow LED for supervisory These annunciators are driven by relays in the fire control panel. addition to zone annunciation, the annunicators are with an option (Model suffix which provides a lamp test, a trouble buzzer and a local trouble silence with ring back. Each annuciator comes ready for or flush mounting. the 8 and 16 zone models are UL Listed and approved CSFM and NYMEA. The installation instructions detail connections to Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL, PXL, SXL System 3 fire alarm controls. Information Number 8 Zone Annuniator – Red Zone Annuniator – Black Zone Annunciator – with Lamp & Trouble – Red Zone Annunciator – with Lamp & Trouble – Black Zone Annunciator – Red Zone Annunciator – Black Zone Annunciator – with Lamp & Trouble – Red Zone Annunciator – with Lamp & Trouble – Black refer to Installation Instructions 315-095690. NUMBER Diagram Diagram Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 Issue

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Isolator Module Isolator Module Short Circuit Isolation Used on MXL Intelligent Device Circuits Increased Fault Tolerance Style 4 or Style 6 Up to 12 Per ALD Circuit Max. Requires no Programming Does Not Occupy a Device Address Mounts in Either 411/16″ Square or 2 Gang Box Local LED Indicator Cover Plate Included ULC Listed, NYMEA and CSFM LIM-1 loop isolator module provides short circuit on MXL intelligent device circuits (ALD). a short is detected by the LIM-1, it isolates the segment of the circuit, allowing the remaining to continue operation. The LIM-1 is self-restor- automatically reconnecting to circuit segment when fault is removed. LIM-1 also includes a yellow LED which illuminates indicate that the device has been activated. The LIM- mounts in either a 411/16″ square, 3 deep or 2 gang box and is supplied with a cover plate with an for the LED. can be wired in either a Style 4 or Style 6 configura- LIM-1 does not occupy a device address on the circuit and requires no programming. Up to twelve may be installed on each ALD circuit. and Architect Specifications and Architect Specifications circuit isolation shall be provided for all intelligent circuits. The isolator shall mount in a 411/16″ 3 deep or single gang electrical box and shall a yellow LED to indicate activation. It shall also a cover plate with an opening for the LED. isolator, model LIM-1 shall be a self-restoring device no programming, and shall not occupy an on the intelligent device circuit. It shall be of being configured in either Style 4 or Style 6 Ratings Ratings Power: Line Resistance LIM-1s: ohms VDC @ 500 mA max. Information Information Number NUMBER Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram B Installation B Installation Diagrams Diagrams Gang Box Inches Deep Inch Square Box Inches Deep for Class B Installation: wiring must comply with national and local codes. not install more than 20 devices on a single LIM-1. Minimum wire gauge is 18 AWG. total wire resistance (both wires) between LIM-1s exceed 20 ohms. not install more than 12 LIM-1s per ALD loop. circuits are supervised. to the MXL/MXLV Manual, P/N 315-092036, for the of compatible devices. Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram A Installation (Single Loop) A Installation (Single Loop) Installation a standard 31/2 inch deep, double gang electrical or a 411/16 inch square electrical box that is 21/8 deep. the field wiring. Press the LIM-1 into the box and the module plate to the box. the module front plate with the plate supplied and with screws supplied. for Class A Installation (Single Loop): wiring must comply with national and local codes. not install more than 20 devices on a single LIM-1. Minimum wire gauge is 18 AWG. total wire resistance (both wires) between LIM-1s exceed 20 ohms. not install more than 12 LIM-1s per ALD loop. circuits are supervised. to the MXL/MXLV Manual, P/N 315-092036, for the of compatible devices. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 8/96

System 3 Output Modules Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS LP-30 LP-30 MT-30 MT-30 LP-30 Meets NFPA 72 MT-30 Meets NFPA 72 LED Indicator Disconnect Switch Placement Supervised Solid State Circuitry Surge Protected FM, CSFM & Approved Station Tie LP-30 LP-30 Remote Station (Leased Line) Module, Model LP-30 is to transmit signals from a protected to a fire headquarters, central station, or other similar control center, via leased telephone lines. It the requirements of NEMA Standards and NFPA No. 72 for remote station fire alarm systems so that may be used with any annunciator designed to these two Actuation of the module is from an alarm output from any type ZU Zone Module along with that from the control panel. module contains solid state circuitry to supply 24 Vdc for the alarm signal. The unit, which has built-in surge operates on the polarity reversal principle. Under operating conditions the supervisory or alarm signal is held between 3 ma to 9 ma dc. The total maximum resistance of the leased line circuit, including the equipment is 5K ohms. Two input activation are provided for flexibility of programming module also contains a manually operated disconnect which prevents an alarm signal from being transmitted the leased lines when desired or during system tests. of the switch will illuminate the yellow and cause a system trouble condition. The LED will illuminated during an alarm condition. The LED can lamp tested by operating the disconnect switch. Model LP-30 is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. MT-30 MT-30 Municipal Tie Module, Model MT-30 is designed to a local energy type municipal fire alarm box. It meets requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for auxilliary fire systems. Actuation of the module is from a suitable output signal such as from a type ZU Zone Module or the main control panel. module contains solid state circuitry to supply supervi- and operating power to the municipal fire alarm box. circuit is a two-wire closed loop carrying approximately ma dc of supervisory current. Upon system operation the is increased, activating the tripping coil in the munici- fire alarm box, which in turn, transmits the coded signal to headquarters. module, which has built-in surge protection, also con- a manually operated disconnect switch to de-energize municipal tie line when desired or during system tests. of the switch will illuminate the yellow LED or Trouble indicator. Trouble will also be indicated from open or a tripped municipal box operating coil, or an open the municipal tie line. All these trouble conditions will also the system trouble signal. LED can be lamp tested from the control panel. Model MT-30 is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. NUMBER 3122/3123 Specifications Specifications of the alarm signal to ________ (insert location) be accomplished by a Cerberus Pyrotronics Remote Module, Model LP-30. This module shall be system by a ten-pin jumper plug and harness and shall be operable with the system main control or appropriate alarm output signal from other modules. unit shall contain solid state circuitry and shall supply for the alarm signal. Operation shall be on the polarity principle. manually operated disconnect switch shall prevent signal and shall cause the LED to illuminate. unit shall be placement supervised and shall be Under- Laboratories Inc. listed. Information Information Requirement: Normal – 20 ma (nominal) – 40 ma (nominal) Information Information Specifications Specifications of a local energy type municipal fire alarm box shall accomplished by a Cerberus Pyrotronics Municipal Tie MT-30. This module shall be system interconnected a ten-pin plug and harness assembly and shall be oper- from the system main control panel or other modules provide a suitable alarm output signal. The module contain solid

MC 3-Tone Signaling Devices Horn and Horn-Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Three Unique Sounds Low Operating Current High dB Output ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Versions Available in Flush, Surface, or Mount Standard 4-inch Square Mounting Listed ULC, FM, CSFM, NYMEA Pending Cerberus Pyrotronics F-Series of horns and horn- combines high quality electronics with the rugged of a metal housing, providing the penetrating power of an electromechanical horn while eliminat- the inrush and RFI noise problems associated with signals.These units are designed for ADA and meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code) and UL 1971 standards for devices for the hearing impaired. three distinct sounds (HORN, SIREN, WARBLE) are selectable. The energy efficient horn design draws 20 mA while supplying 100 dB at 10 feet. Screw are provided for both the horn and strobe and be configured to operate together or independently. are available for flush, surface, or ceiling installation. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are in 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 Candela ratings with mounting configurations. The strobe lens has a material made of white Lexan with 5/8 red The top of the strobe has a rounded dome shape of clear Lexan. The overall lend height is 2.5 with a of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non-sleeping where lower candela is required per UL 1971. S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring 15 output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets ADA for regular lighted public areas while also UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd units. S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake the impaired person per UL 1971. NUMBER No. No. VDC VDC VDC VDC Ratings VDC Ratings dB** 10 dB** 10 mA mA mA Horn Ratings Horn Ratings Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Strobe Current Ratings (mA) No. No. dB** 10 dB** 10 )-F )-S )-C VDC VDC VDC mA mA mA Only 15 & 17 units available in ceiling mount. Minimum UL measurements are 75 dB @ 12 VDC & 85 dB @ 24 VDC taken in a reverberant room ( ) represents strobe model, e.g., 15, 17, 75 or 110. Diagram No. Surface Box, Red Surface Box for Flush Horn/Strobe, Red Wall / Ceiling Housing for Bi-Directional Flush Horn / Strobe, Plate, Red Conduit Plate, Red The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 2/96

System 3TM Control Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS MC-30 MC-30 Code Module Dual Inputs Mulitple Signal Circuit Control State Circuitry Listed, ULC Listed Supervised NYMEA and CSFM Master Code (March Time) Module, Model MC-30 is to provide a common coded signal to connected circuits, bells, chimes, lamps, etc. via Alarm Ex- Module(s) Type AE-30U or AA-30U. Actuation of the is from a high going DC signal between 12 and 24 above system common from any type ZU Zone ZN Zone Module, or the main control panel. may also be manual from a type SM Switch Dual input actuation terminals are provided to programming. module contains solid state circuitry to supply output (15 ma maximum) at a controlled cadence of 120 per minute. These signals, in turn, can control up to (3) audible signal circuits (Model AE-30U and AA- modules) or other output modules. By adding type SR Relay Modules, additional audible circuits be actuated. Audible signal power is not provided by MC-30 Module. Model MC-30 is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed and by Factory Mutual Research Corp. Specifications Specifications coded signal (march time) capability shall be by a Cerberus Pyrotronics Master Code Module, MC-30. This module shall be system interconnected a ten-pin plug and harness assembly and shall be with the main control panel. unit shall supply output current (15 ma maximum) at a cadence of 120 pulses/minute and be capable of up to three (3) audible signal circuits or other modules. Model MC-30 shall be placement supervised and shall Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed and approved by Mutual Research Corp. Information Information Requirement: 60 ma Information Information No. Code Module lb. (.45 kg.) NUMBER Wiring Wiring Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (973) 267-1300 (973) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 5/95

MH and MHT Mini-Horns and Horn-Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Single, Two-Gang, 4 or Surface Back Mounting Both Steady Horn and Code Models ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Screw Terminals Accept up #12 AWG Available in Red or Off- Color Listed Pyrotronics horns and horn-strobes provide high- electronics for maximum reliability and low current to meet any fire/life safety application. units are designed for ADA applications and meet latest requirements of NFPA 72 (the National Fire Alarm and UL 1971 standards for signaling devices for the impaired. Pyrotronics Mini-Horns are available in both (4 x 2.75 x 1.33 deep) and universal (4.75 x 4.75 x 1.33 deep) configurations. The mounting version mounts to either a single-gang, 4 inch square, or surface box. With the universal models, the horn/horn-strobe mounts to the univer- mounting plate with a single screw. On all units, only terminal strip protrudes from the back of the horn for mounting in virtually any depth box. The MH a steady tone horn. The MHT uses a jumper to steady or temporal (Code 3) horn. Mounting Gang Mounting Mounting w/Strobe strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are in 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 Candela ratings. The top the strobe has a rounded dome shape made of clear The overall lens height is 2.5 with a width of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and is used in non-sleeping where lower candela is required per UL 1971. S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring cd output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets requirements for regular lighted public areas while satisfying UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake hearing impaired person per UL 1971. NUMBER and Horn/Strobes (@ 24 VDC) No. Rating Strobe Current Ratings (mA) (15cd) (75cd) (110cd) ) represents strobe model, e.g., 15, 17, 75 or 110. MH Series has steady horn ONLY. MHT is user selectable, steady or temporal. Wiring Wiring 6-32 x 5/8″ 6-32 5/8″ 8-32 1/2″ x 1-1/4″ Mount MH-S( )-U MHT-S( )-U next Device or (Style W/Y – “B” Circuits) Return to FACP X/Z – Class Circuits) No. Jumpers to Power Signal and Strobe Separate Circuits Box, Red, 4″ SQ Large Box, Red for Universal Mount Models When ordering signals or boxes in white, add the letter “W” to the end of the number (e.g., MH-S15-U is MH-S15-UW in white). next Device or (Style W/Y – “B” Circuits) Return to FACP X/Z – Class Circuits) The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics notification appliances, detectors and with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied regard to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 Issue Polarity from Panel Previous Polarity from Panel Previous Notification Circuit Notification Circuit

Remote Manual Electric Control Extinguishing Systems ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Reset MH-501, MH-517C Optional Contact Arrangements Double Action With Positive Motion No Break Rods Necessary Listed, FM Approved Action Until Reset Operation MH Remote Manual Electric Control has been de- with extreme flexibility in mind to meet a wide of application requirements and operational se- in connection with its basic function as a release for FM-200TM Fire Extinguishing Systems. comply with NFPA 2001 clean agent standards, these are now available with a dual action function a tab, followed by the lever Each of the above actions may operate electrical to achieve various electrical sequence functions desired. Series MH Manual Controls are Underwriters Laborato- Inc. listed and Factory Mutual approved. of Application basic standard model is the double action Model MH- which contains one normally open contact. It is for use with Cerberus Pyrotronics low voltage but has a rating of 120 Vac for connection to other ACTION CONTROL the MH-517C double action control, the optional on the first action may be used for supervisory of tampering with the control or for connection to remote annunciator. It may also be used to alarm one of a cross-zoned fire extinguishing system where the action would alarm the second zone, releasing the Description MH Remote Manual Electric Control is contructed of molded polycarbonate material, matte-finished in with raised lettering in white. The housing incorporates tab which must be operated first, permitting to the lever which, when operated, in position after releasing a spring-loaded contact Restoring the system to normal can only be accom- by opening the cover of the hinged housing with uncommon tool and then closing and locking the models are fitted with screw-type terminals for system provision is made for surface or semi-flush to conduit boxes. NUMBER Specification Remote Manual Electric Control shall be Model (See chart for number) with Underwriters Labora- Inc. listing and Factory Mutual approval. Action Model control, which shall be of the non- type, shall consist of a molded housing, fitted with a lever and a tab. It shall be necessary operate the tab first to provide access to the lever, which when operated, locks in position releasing a spring-loaded contact switch to effect of the release circuit. body of the control shall be hinged to a backplate to which it is locked with a socket head screw. the control after operation shall require opening control momentarily, and then locking the body to the Provision shall be made for surface or semi-flush to conduit boxes. Data No. Description Wt. Mounting Box 2 1/2 lbs. Tool Package 2 tools) lbs. & Electrical Information Action Type Contact & Ratings Action No. Action SPST .75A 125 VAC/DC DPST 1A 250 VAC/DC 3A 125 VAC/DC SPST .75 125 VAC.DC Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 9/

MHST Horns Horns with Synchronous Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Horns and Strobes on a Pair of Wires from Single, Two-Gang, 4 or Surface Back Mounting Synchronous Strobes with Temporal 3) Horns Screw Terminals Accept up #12 AWG Available in Red or Off- Color Listed Mounting Mounting w/Strobe Gang Mounting Pyrotronics horns and horn-strobes provide high- electronics for maximum reliability and low current to meet any fire/life safety application. units are designed for ADA applications and meet latest requirements of NFPA 72 (the National Fire Alarm and UL 1971 standards for signaling devices for the impaired. Pyrotronics MHST Horns are available in both (4 x 2.75 x 1.33 deep) and universal (4.75 x 4.75 x 1.33 deep) configurations. The mounting version mounts to either a single-gang, 4 inch square, or surface box. With the universal models, the horn/horn-strobe mounts to the univer- mounting plate with a single screw. On all units, only terminal strip protrudes from the back of the horn for mounting in virtually any depth box. MHST is a temporal (Code 3) horn that is synchro- to assure all horns in the circuit sound at the same It is controlled by the SCM-F controller which is in the notification circuit prior to the first MHST. the combination horn-synchronous strobe is used, SCM-F controller can accept input from two signaling (horn and strobe circuits). The horn-strobes are to the controller with a single pair of wires that and synchronize both horns and strobes. This also allows for the silencing of horns with strobes in operation, all on a single pair of wires from the SCM- controller. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Synchro- models are available in 15, 15/75 and 75 Candela The top of the strobe has a rounded dome shape of clear Lexan The overall lens height is 2.5 with a of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and is used in non-sleeping where lower candela is required per UL 1971. NUMBER S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring cd output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets requirements for regular lighted public areas while satisfying UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd and Horn/Strobes (@ 24 VDC) No. Rating Current Current 6-32 x 5/8″ Wiring Wiring Units to be only installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local codes Not Loop Wire, Cut Wire Run to Provide Electrical Supervision 6-32 5/8″ 8-32 1/2″ x 1-1/4″ control panel steady (non-pulsing) silenceable Appliance Circuit or previous silenceable appliance. control panel steady (non-pulsing) silenceable Appliance Circuit (N.A.C.) or previous appliance. Mount MHST-S( )S-U No. Unit Box, Red, 4″ SQ Large Box, Red for Universal Mount Models When ordering signals or boxes in white, add the letter “W” to the end of the number (e.g., MHST-S15S-U is MHST-S15S-UW in white). control panel steady (non-pulsing) silenceable Appliance Circuit or previous silenceable appliance. control panel steady (non-pulsing) silenceable Appliance Circuit (N.A.C.) or previous appliance. # SCM-F or .020Amp and by from fire control # SCM-F or .020Amp and by from fire control The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics notification appliances, detectors and with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied regard to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems.

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Input Driver 16 Individually Programmable Inputs Monitoring of Switches and Contacts Supervises Lamps Programmable Alarm, Trouble, Status, and Security Identity Screw Terminals or Connector Interface Up to 128 Inputs from one MOI-7 Listed MID-16 is an input module used in conjunction with the as a part of the Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL system. to eight MID-16 can be connected to a single MOI-7 with eight MOD-16 output driver modules. Each MID- provides a non-supervised input that can monitor devices. Each individual MID-16 input can be used as a part of MXL custom programming These inputs can be individually set for either alarm, trouble, security or status usage. They can be configured to provide supervision for lamps driven MOD-16 outputs. Screw terminals and connectors are on the MID-16 modules for interface to monitored The MID-16 occupies one System 3 type module and Architect Specifica- and Architect Specifica- inputs shall be provided by the Cerberus model MID-16 input module. The MID-16 shall used in conjunction with the MOI-7 and, optionally, the as a part of the MXL system. Each MID-16 shall 16 non-supervised inputs for monitoring contact devices. Up to eight MID-16 and eight MOD-16 may be connected to a single MOI-7, providing a of 256 I/O points. individual MID-16 input shall be capable of being either alarm, supervisory, trouble, security or identity and shall be capable of being fully incorpo- into the system logic. MID-16 shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. Information Information Power: VDC max. Ratings: Voltage Range Impedance Current equipment is approved for operation over the tem- range of 0 and 49 VDC ohms max. NUMBER Connection Connection 18 AWG minimum for all input connections. 14 AWG minimum for supply connections (TB-1-9 and TB-2-9 and 10) All wiring must be in accordance with NEC 760. All wiring must meet local codes and satisfy the having jurisdiction over the installation. All wiring to MID-16 is unsupervised. Any wiring the enclosure must be in rigid conduit and not leave the room. For additional information, see MOI-7 module P/N 315-090829. A maximum of 8 MID-16 can be used with the MOI-7. P1 is connected in parallel with TB1. P2 is connected in parallel with TB2. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 9/95

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Display/Keyboard Full Command Keyboard 80 Character LCD Display Automatic Backlight High Resolution Supertwist LCD Programmable Function Keys Partial Disable LED Power LED Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble And Security LED Audibles Active/Silenced LED with Local Audible Menu Driven Operator Commands User Help Screens Printer Control Keys Display Control Keys Tactile Membrane Switches With Audible Feedback Hinged Panel For Easy Access Listed and ULC Listed, CSFM, FM, NYMEA, City of Chicago Approved MKB-2 is a display/keyboard module for use with the Pyrotronics MXL and MXLV systems. The MKB-2 supplied on a hinged frame and mounts on the MBR-2 backbox. It provides a complete operator including an 80 character backlit supertwist LCD display of all system information. The MKB-2 also a set of keypads used to execute system com- such as Acknowledge, Silence, Reset as well as of devices for maintenance and generation of diagnostic reports. the keypad the operator is able to change the setting of smoke detectors, check device obtain system power reports, disarm input and devices and manually toggle remote and local All commands are menu driven and a Help key the operator to get further explanation of the structure. Operator actions are prompted so is kept to a minimum. MKB-2 also provides a set of 12 programmable keys. The keys can be configured to activate such as Drill, Fan Shutdown, Door Release, etc. on the MKB-2 in conjunction with a local audible, active conditions such as Alarm, Supervisory, and Security. The LEDs flash and the audible until events are acknowledged. Additional LEDs Audibles Silenced, Power On and Partial System The Partial System Disable LED illuminates an input or output device is disarmed. control keys allow the operator to Hold or Advance scrolling display and view additional active events. MKB-2s can be used in the system each provid- full control of the MXL system. Up to four MKB-2s can in a fully supervised mode, each with independent driver capability (using a PIM-1). Additional Slave can be used operating in an unsupervised mode, also capable of supporting a PIM-1 driving unsuper- peripheral devices. hinged panel allows easy access to the rear of the and the other modules in the rear of the MBR-2 backbox. The MKB-2 is covered by a clear lens as a part of the MDR-2 lockable door. NUMBER used in MXLV applications, the MKB-2 has plates on either side of the keyboard to allow of the MMM-1 (Microphone Master Module) and TMM-1 (Telephone Master Module). The MKB-2 also mounting studs available for the ACM-1 in MXLV equipment is approved for operation over the tem- range of 0 to 49 and Architect Specification display/keyboard module for use with the Cerberus MXL and MXLV systems shall be model MKB- The MKB-2 shall be supplied on a hinged frame and on the MBR-2 enclosure backbox. It shall provide a operator interface including an 80 character supertwist LCD for display of all system information. MKB-2 shall also provide a set of keypads used to system commands such as Acknowledge, Reset as well as disarming of devices for mainte- and generation of system diagnostic reports. the keypad the operator shall be able to change the setting of smoke detectors, check device obtain system power reports, disarm input and devices and manually toggle remote and local All commands shall be menu driven with a help key allow the operator to get further explanation of the structure. Operator actions shall be prompted in to minimize training. MKB-2 shall provide a set of 12 programmable keys. The keys shall be configurable to activate such as Drill, Fan Shutdown, Door Release, etc. on the MKB-2, in conjunction with a local audible indicate active conditions such as Alarm, Supervisory, and Security. The LEDs shall flash and the audible until events are acknowledged. Additional LEDs indicate Audibles Silenced, Power On and Partial Disable. The Partial System Disable LED shall whenever an input or output device is disarmed. control keys shall allow the operator to Hold or the scrolling display and view additional active

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 3 Accessory Module Module Module Voltmeter Ammeter Listed and ULC Listed NYMEA, CSFM and FM Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics Meter Module, Model MM-35, is to provide visual indication of both battery and charging current. It is used in conjunction with Charger Modules, Models BC-35, BE-35 and in fitted with emergency standby power. a voltmeter and an ammeter are contained in the The voltmeter provides a voltage reading value of battery at all times while the ammeter shows the current. Model MM-35 is placement aupervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. Model MM-35 is Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. and Architect Specifications meters shall be provided, mounted in a single module for the purpose of indicating the battery voltage the battery charging current. This module, Cerberus Meter Module Model MM-35, shall be system by a plug and harness assembly and shall operable with the main control panel. Meter Module, Model MM-35, shall only be used in with the Battery Charger Module, Model BC-35 BE-35. Model MM-35 shall be placement supervised and shall Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. NUMBER Information Requirement: None Wiring Information No. Module Wt. lb. (.45 kg.) Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 1/94

MMM-1 Microphone Master Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Dynamic Microphone with Button Retractable Coil Cord Fully Supervised Adjustable Pre-announce Tone Ready-To-Page LED Local Speaker with Volume Recording Output (on TBM-2) ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, City of Approved MMM-1 is an MXLV module which provides a super- high quality dynamic microphone for the purpose of live voice announcements. The MMM-1 mounts to the MKB-2 display/keyboard in the front of the command console. It includes a microphone with button and retractable coil cord. The micro- push-to-talk button and coil cord are fully super- MMM-1 also supplies a ready to page LED which that all selected zones are ready to be paged that the optional pre-announce tone has expired. The tone is a 900Hz signal which is adjustable 0 to 10 seconds duration in 1 second increments. A speaker with volume control allows the monitoring of audio channels. and Architect Spec and Architect Speciiffications emergency voice alarm system shall include a micro- for the purpose of making live voice announce- The microphone master module shall mount in the of the command console and provide a high quality microphone with push-to-talk button and retract- coil cord. The microphone, push-to-talk button and cord shall all be electrically supervised. module shall also include a ready to page LED which indicate that all selected zones are ready to be paged the optional pre-announce tone has expired. The pre- tone shall be a 900Hz tone, adjustable from 0 to seconds duration in 1 second increments. A local with volume control shall allow the monitoring of audio channels. NUMBER Information Information Number Master Instructions Diagram Diagram the Cable to the ACM-1 the Cable to the ACM-1 2 the MMM-1 on the MKB-2 Panel 1 The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 8/94

MMT Multi-Tone Horns Horns and Horn-Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Eight Unique Sounds Single, Two-Gang, 4 or Surface Back Mounting Available with Either and Synchronous Screw Terminals Accept up #12 AWG Available in Red or Off- Color Listed Pyrotronics horns and horn-strobes provide high- electronics for maximum reliability and low current to meet any fire/life safety application. units are designed for ADA applications and meet latest requirements of NFPA 72 (the National Fire Alarm and UL 1971 standards for signaling devices for the impaired. Pyrotronics MMT Horns are available in both (4 x 2.75 x 1.33 deep) and universal (4.75 x 4.75 x 1.33 deep) configurations. The mounting version mounts to either a single-gang, 4 inch square, or surface box. With the universal models, the horn/horn-strobe mounts to the univer- mounting plate with a single screw. On all units, only terminal strip protrudes from the back of the horn for mounting in virtually any depth box. MMT offers eight distinct sounds (HORN, TEMPORAL, HI-LO, CHIME, SIREN, SLOW WHOOP, AND SINGLE BELL) which are field selectable. These energy horns produce up to 97 dB at 10 feet while Mounting Gang Mounting Mounting w/Strobe only 20 to 40 mA at 24 VDC, depending on tone Tones are selected by dip switches on the back horn. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Conven- strobes are available in 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 ratings; synchronous models are available in 15, and 75 Candela ratings. The top of the strobe has a dome shape made of clear Lexan The overall height is 2.5 with a width of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and is used in non-sleeping where lower candela is required per UL 1971. S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring cd output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets requirements for regular lighted public areas while satisfying UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake hearing impaired person per UL 1971. The S110 is not on synchronous models. NUMBER Multi-Tone Horn & Horn-Strobes @ 24 VDC No. Rating (mA) Strobe Current Ratings (mA) @ 10 dB (15cd) (75cd) (110cd) ( ) Represents strobe model; 15, 17, 75 or 110. Wiring Wiring Units to be only installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local codes Not Loop Wire, Cut Wire Run to Provide Electrical Supervision are designed to accept no larger than 12 ga. wire. Diagram When MMT-( )-U Electronic Audible Signal with Strobe Signal Connected to One Notification Appliance Circuits Diagram For Strobe and Electronic Audible Signal Connected Two Separate Notification Appliance Circuits control panel steady (non-pulsing) silenceable Appliance Circuit or previous silenceable appliance. control panel steady (non-pulsing) silenceable Appliance Circuit (N.A.C.) or previous appliance. # SCM-F or .020Amp and by Non- N.A.C. fire alarm unit. Next or not connect audible part of MMT to the SCM-F Sync Control Module. part of MMT must be connected to SCM-F Sync Control Module. 6-32 x 5/8″ Control Panel Previous Device Control Panel Previous Device Notification Circuit Notification Circuit Jumpers in Place & Audible Are to Operate the Same Circuit) Strobes must be to a non- notification kit. Next Device or EOL Polarity Shown Jumpers in Place & Audible Are to Operate the Same Circuit) Strobes must be to a non- notification kit. Next Device

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Output Driver Open Collector Current Sink 16 Outputs Sequenced or Simultaneous Lamp Test Programmable Operates LED or Incandescent Lamps Relay Driver Listed, ULC Listed CSFM, NYMEA and City of Chicago MOD-16 is an output driver module used in conjunc- with the MOI-7 as a part of the Cerberus Pyrotronics system. Up to eight (8) MOD-16s can be connected an MOI-7 interface module. Each MOD-16 provides (16) open collector current sinking outputs rated at VDC, 50mA. MOD-16 outputs are programmable the MXL custom software. These outputs can either LEDs or 24 VDC incandescent lamps. The outputs can be lamp tested from either the MOI-7 the MXL. When the lamp test is activated, all outputs be pulsed rapidly in sequence or lit simultaneously. MOD-16 outputs can also be used to activate relays as the SR-35. MOD-16 occupies one System 3 type module space. MOD-16s connect together using a ribbon cable. equipment is approved for operation over the tem- range of 0 and 49 and Architect Specifications open collector outputs shall be provided by Cerberus Pyrotronics model MOD-16 output driver. MOD-16 shall be used in conjunction with the MOI-7 interface as part of the MXL system. Each MOD-16 provide sixteen (16) open collector current sinking rated at 24 VDC, 50mA. Each output shall be fully via the MXL custom software. MOD-16 outputs shall be capable of being lamp either from a local input to the MOI-1 or from the When in lamp test mode, all LEDs shall be pulsed in sequence or turned on simultaneously. This shall selectable in system programming. MOD-16 shall be capable of activating compatible such as the SR-35. to eight MOD-16s may be connected to each MOI-7. MOD-16 shall occupy one System 3 type module MOD-16s shall be connected together via a ribbon MOD-16 shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Information voltage: current: 2mA Current: sink current each output: peak max. max. NUMBER Data 18 AWG minimum for LED and 24V connections. 14 AWG minimum for supply connec (TB1-9 and 10, TB2-9 and 10). All wiring must be in accordance with 760. All wiring must conform to local of the authority having over the installation. All wiring to MOD-16 is unsupervised must not leave enclosure. For additional information see MOI-7 instructions, P/N 315-092799. A maximum of 8 MOD-16s can be with the MOI-1. When using SR-35, refer to Table 1. Both TB1-9 (or 10) and TB2-9 (or 10) be connected to the common the power supply. 1 1 The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 9/95

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Module MXL Network Operation Style 4 or Style 7 Communication Output Driver Interface (MOD-16) Input Driver Interface (MID-16) Local or Remote Lamp Test Sequenced or Global Lamp Test ULC Listed, NYMEA CSFM Approved MOI-7 is an MXL RS-485 network module capable of wired for NFPA Style 4 or Style 7, which provides a programmable serial interface to the MOD-16 output and MID-16 input drivers. When used with the MOD- it provides a serial annunciator or relay driver. When with MID-16 it provides programmable inputs. MOI-7 can operate up to eight (8) MOD-16 eight (8) and up to twelve (12) VPM-5 simultaneously. MOD-16 output and MID-16 input is independently via the MXL custom software. The MOI-7 a general alarm relay contact which can be set as silenceable or non-silenceable. When set as it provides subsequent alarm capability. MOI-7 also provides lamp test capability to the MOD- A local lamp test input shall be provided. The MOI-7 also accept and execute a lamp test command from MXL. If programmed below network address 128 lamps in groups of eight. If addressed above 128, light simultaneously. equipment is approved for operation over the tempera- range of 0 and 49 C. and Architect Specifica- Driver between the Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL and the LED annunciator driver shall be provided by the The MOI-7 shall be microprocessor controlled and be capable of activating up to eight (8) MOD-16 for a total of 128 open collector current sinking Communication between the MXL and the MOI-7 be provided by an RS-485 type serial network link NFPA Style 4 or Style 7 operation. MOI-7 shall accept a local lamp test input, or a remote test command from the MXL. All lamp outputs shall programmable via the MXL custom software. Driver between the Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL and the input driver shall be provided by the MOI-7. The shall be microprocessor controlled and shall be of monitoring up to eight (8) MID-16 modules for a of 128 programmable system inputs. Communication the MXL and MOI-7 shall be provided by an RS- network link. NUMBER MOI-7 shall be capable of simultaneously activating up 128 MOD-16 open collector outputs (eight MOD-16 128 inputs (eight MID-16 and 12 VPM-5 modules. Information Input/Output Instructions Driver Module Driver Module Number Information (does not include MID-16 or VPM-5) Voltage: Current: Current: +.5V @ 5V @ 5V Diagram Network Connection WIring Diagram AWG minimum. ohms maximum per pair. twisted pair or shielded twisted pair. the shield at the MMB-1 enclosure only. limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. Maximum voltage 8V p-p. Maximum current 150 mA. Style 4 network omit all Network B connections and NET-4 for modules for NET-7s. Remote Style 7 connection, the MOI-7 must not be at the end of the network. The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 7/95

MOM-2 Option Module Cardcage AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Two Half-Width or One Full-Width Option Slots Clamp Type Screw Terminals for Field Connections Mounts in MXL Main Cabinet, MXL-IQ MXLR Remote Units or MXL-SS Provides Input Terminals for Auxiliary DC Accepts CRM-4, CZM-4, ALD-2I, CSM-4, CMI-300, REP-1, NIM-1R, and XLD-1 Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA, FM and City of Chicago Approved MOM-2 cardcage provides the MXL main unit or units with card slots for option modules. Each supplies connection space for either one full-width module (ALD-2I, CZM-4, NIM-1R, XLD-1) or two option modules (CSM-4, CRM-4, CMI-300, NET-7). Note: only one CMI-300 may be used per system. Modules are supplied with card guides. MOM-2 also provides a means of connecting the modules to the MXL network. It routes 24V unfil- DC and 5 VDC to power the option The DC is routed to the MOM-2 from the MMB-1 board or the PSR-1 network supply. terminals are mounted on the MOM-2 to provide access for field wiring connections. Screw terminals also provided for connection to an auxiliary power for use with CSM-4 indicating circuits (when audible/visual power is required). MOM-2 mounts in one of the MXL system back-boxes at the main MXL, MXLR remote units or MXL mini- One MOM-2 may be mounted horizontally in MSE mini-enclosure. equipment is approved for operation over the tem- range of 0 and 49 and Architect Specifications between optional circuit cards and the MXL network shall be provided by a MOM-2 expansion The MOM-2 shall provide one full-width edge type plug-in slots for the addition of the follow- system option card modules: CZM-4 conventional module; CRM-4 controllable relay module; CSM-4 signal module; XLD-1 Series Device ALD-2I analog loop driver module; CMI-300 CXL NIM-1R network interface module; REP-1 repeater ALD-2I, NIM-1R and the CZM-4 shall each one full slot in the MOM-2 and REP-1, CRM-4, CSM-4 and CMI-300, shall each occupy one half in the MOM-2. MOM-2 shall also provide a distribution point for module power. The MOM-2 shall supply necessary terminal connections for any option module field This shall allow the replacement of modules without removal of field wiring. MOM-2 shall be mounted in one of the MXL system located at the main MXL unit or MXLR remote or MXL mini-enclosures. NUMBER MXL Modules Information Number Number Module Cardcage Instructions Ckt. Module Module Zone Module Interface Module Module Interface Module Loop Driver Diagram Series Interface Module Diagrams the MOM-2 in an MBR-2 Backbox the MOM-2 in an MSE Enclosure Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 3/95

MOM-4 Option Module Card Cage Four Half-Width or Two Full-Width AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Provides Input Terminals for Module Slots Clamp-Type Screw Terminals Field Wiring Connections Mounts in MXL Main Cabinet MXLR Remote Units Gold Plated Connectors DC Power Accepts CRM-4, CZM-4, ALD-2I, NET-7, CMI-300, REP-1, NIM-1R and ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA, and City of Chicago Approved MOM-4 card cage provides the MXL main unit or units with card slots for option modules. Each supplies connection space for either two full width modules (ALD-2I, CZM-4, NIM-1R, XLD-1) or four option modules (CSM-4, CRM-4, CMI-300, NET-7), or a combination of one full and two half- modules. Note: only one CMI-300 may be used per system. Modules are supplied with card guides. MOM-4 also provides a means of connecting the modules to the MXL network. It supplies 24V DC and 5VDC to power the option The DC is routed to the MOM-4 from the MMB-1 board or the PSR-1 power supply. terminals are mounted on the MOM-4 to provide access for field wiring connections. Screw terminals also provided for connection to an auxiliary power for use with CSM-4 indicating circuits (when audible/visual power is required). MOM-4 mounts in one of the MXL system back-boxes at the main MXL or MXLR remote units. Up to two may be installed in the MBR-1 backbox (only one TSP-40 printer is used). Up to three MOM-4s may be in the MBR-2 backbox (only two when TSP-40 is used). and Architect Specifications between optional circuit cards and the MXL network shall be provided by a MOM-4 expansion cage. The MOM-4 shall provide two full-width edge plug-in slots for the addition of the follow- system option card modules: CZM-4 conventional module; NIM-1R LifeLINK Network Interface Module; Series Device Module; REP-1 Network Re- NET-7 Style 7 Network Module; CRM-4 controllable module; CSM-4 controllable signal module; ALD-2I loop driver module; CMI-300 CXL modem. The CZM-4, NIM-1R and XLD-1 shall occupy one full in MOM-4 and CRM-4, REP-1, NET-7, CSM-4 and CMI- shall each occupy one half slot in the MOM-4. MOM-4 shall also provide a distribution point for module power. The MOM-4 shall supply necessary terminal connections for any option module field This shall allow the replacement of modules without removal of field wiring. MOM-4 shall be mounted in one of the MXL system located at the main MXL unit or MXLR remote NUMBER Data Circuit Board Layout MXL Modules Number Interface Module Crt. Module Module Zone Module Repeater Module Interface Module Series Device Interface Loop Driver Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 9/95

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS ACTION ACTION SERIES Fire Alarm Boxes Durable Plastic Design Shock and Vibration Resistant Activation Visibly Noticeable Optional Contact Arrangements Options Include Keyswitch or Alarm Lamp No Break Rods Necessary Surface or Semi-flush Installation Listed, FM and CSFM Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics Single and Double Action Manual Fire Boxes have been designed with extreme flexibility in mind meet a wide variety of application requirements and operation boxes are available with two different operating modes, being a simple single action function utilizing a action. The cover locks in the down position until the box is the double action manual boxes, except for the MS-501, of the dual actions operates electrical contacts to achieve electrical sequence functions as desired. addition, certain manual boxes can be supplied with an alarm indicating lamp and/or a key-operated electrical (N.O. SPST) for operating electrical circuits without activating the tab or lever. Cerberus Pyrotronics manual fire alarm boxes are Underwrit- Laboratories, Inc., listed. of Application single action models contain one normally open contact, for the MS-57 which contains two normally open contacts. is intended for use with Cerberus Pyrotronics low voltage These manual boxes can be used for connection to fire alarm systems of other manufacturers (reference Information Table). the double action box, the optional switch on the first action be used for supervisory tamper indication. It may also be to alarm one zone of a cross-zoned fire extinguishing fire extinguishing system where the main action would the second zone, for example, for use in the arming of a system. optional lamp may be an alarm lamp for the box, similar to detector alarm lamp, or it may be energized from a remote to indicate the alarm has been received by the system. lamp may also be connected to the system so that the first of a double action box will light the lamp. For instance, feature could be used to discourage pranksters from pulling main action lever. information Cerberus Pyrotronics single and double action manual fire boxes are constructed of durable molded polycarbonate matte finish in red with raised lettering in white. The for the single action box accommodates a which, when operated, locks in position after releasing a contact switch. Restoring the system to normal only be accomplished by opening the cover of the hinged with an Allen key and then closing and locking the housing for the double action box, in addition to the above, a tab. This tab must be operated first to access to the lever. An additional spring- contact switch, which is released upon operation of the tab, is available on Models MS-512C, MS-513C, MS- MS-517C and MS-518. Resetting of the box is as de- above with an Allen key. desired, the boxes can be supplied with a 24V alarm indicating and/or key-operated switch for special operating functions. models are fitted with screw-type terminals for special functions as necessary. NUMBER Catalog Number 6181 No. Mounting Box Key LPT Key Package 2 Allen Keys) Data .5 .2 and Architect Specifications manual fire alarm box shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics (See chart for model number) with Underwrit- Laboratories, Inc., listing. body of the manual box shall be hinged to a backplate to which it is locked with an Allen head screw. the box after operating shall require opening the box and then locking the body to the backplate. shall be made for surface or semi-flush mounting to boxes. Action Model single action box, which shall be of the non-code type, shall of a molded housing fitted with a lever, when operated, locks in position af

MS-151 and MS-157 Fire Alarm Box AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Durable Compact Design Shock and Vibration Resistant Reset With Allen Key No Break Rods Necessary Surface Or Semi-flush Installation ULC Listed, FM, Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics modern, compact design architectural and code requirements for a fire alarm box initiating device. This manual design is easily observed yet does not detract the building’s decor. MS-151 and MS-157 single action manual stations a normally open toggle switch. The switch is so that it is activated by pulling down the cover. indicate visually that the manual station is activated the cover has been pulled down, the cover re- down and locked until the station is reset. The is reset by turning the reset screw counterclock- while at the same time pushing the cover upwards. models are intended for use with all Cerberus low voltage systems but can be used for to existing fire alarm systems (reference Rating Chart.) Archiitect S Sppececiifficicaations aand Arch manual fire alarm box shall be Cerberus Pyrotronics (See chart for model number) with Under- Laboratories, Inc. listing. The single action station shall be of the non-coded type and an internal toggle switch. The switch shall be inside the manual station so that it is activated pulling down the cover. To indicate visually that the station was activated once the cover has been down, the cover remains down until the station is The station shall be reset by turning the reset counterclockwise, while at the same time pushing cover upwards. Information Information No. Action SPST DPST NUMBER and Accessories and Accessories Information Information Number No. SPST Manual Station DPST Manual Station Surface Mounting Box 0.56 Key Reset Key Adapter Kit SB-5 Adapter Plate Kit (For MS-151/157 onto SB-5R Box) Data Data Mounting the MS-151 and MS-157 Ratings Ratings switch MS-151 and MS-157: VAC, 3A VDC, 3A VAC/VDC, 1A The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as voids all warranties either expressed or implied in regard to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 10/95

File data Filename: File size: File type: Download count: Text Preview

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Small Enclosure Small Enclosure MXL Small Enclosure Flush or Surface Mount Backbox and Door Hinged Frame Slip Hinge Door with Keylock Clear Plexiglas Lens Listed Optional MHD-5 Deadfront with Small Lens MSE-2 is an enclosure for use with the MXL/MXLV It provides space and mounting studs for a variety MXL and MXLV modules, such as the MMB-1, PSR-1, TBM-1, MKB-2, MPS-6 and MPS-12. It also pro- mounting studs for an MSR-1 System 3 adapter rail Space is provided for up to 15AH batteries. The MSE-2 a backbox with a flange for flush mounting, a with slip hinges and keylock, and an MDL-1 insert. The door also includes a lower opening blank plate. MSE-2 can also be used with an MDB-1 door blank an MHD-1 lower deadfront, or MHD-5 lower dead- with openings for up to five VSM-1, VLM-1 or VFM-1 and LED modules. The MHD-5 includes a small lens to replace the sheet metal blank in the door. MSE-2 enclosure can be used as a mini-MXL enclo- a mini-MXLV enclosure, a remote display enclosure, remote power supply enclosure (PSR-1 or PS-35), or an enclosure. The top section of the MSE-2 has the dimensions and mounting as the upper or middle of the standard MXL enclosure. The lower section the MSE-2 has the same dimensions and mounting as bottom section of the standard MXL enclosure. MHD-5 is the deadfront cover for the lower section of MSE-2. It includes openings for five VSM-1 VLM-1 VFM-1 and provides an opening for the TSW-1 tamper It also includes a small clear Plexiglas lens for the section of the door. NUMBER Information Information Number Door, backbox, lens & lower blank deadfront for lower section of includes opening for (4) switch LED modules and TSW-1 tamper and small Plexiglas lens for Data Data Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 9/95

Intelligent Initiating Devices Fire Alarm Boxes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS And MSI-20B Intelligent Manual Fire Boxes for MXL and XL3 Control Panels Durable Design Shock and Vibration Resistant Pull Down Lever Remains Down Until Reset New Custom Microcomputer Chip Technology Dynamic Supervision Reset with Allen Key No Break Rods Necessary Two Wire Operation Surface or Semiflush Installation FPI-32 Programs and Verifies Device Address Tests Device Functionality Electronic Address Programming is Easier and Dependable Single and Double Action Models Listed, CSFM, FM and NYMEA Approved Pyrotronics MSI-10B and 20B intelligent manual alarm boxes provide the markets most advanced of address programming and supervision, com- with sophisticated control panel communication. MSI manual fire alarm box incorporates a new microcomputer chip. The microcomputer chip and its sophisticated bi-directional communi- capabilities with the control panel, achieves the of an Initiating Device. MSI-10B and 20B are constructed of durable molded material which is matte finished in red with white lettering. The housing accommodates a lever which, when operated, locks in position the manual fire alarm box has been activated. pull down lever remains down and locked until the fire alarm box is reset. The manual fire alarm box is only by opening the hinged housing cover with an key and then closing and locking the cover. MSI-10B and 20B manual fire alarm boxes operate the MXL, IXL/ICON-1 and XL3 control panels. manual fire alarm box microcomputer chip has the of storing, in memory, identification information as as important operating status information. Pyrotronics innovative technology also allows all Series Intelligent manual fire alarm boxes to be by using the Model FPI-32 Programmer/ The FPI-32 Programmer/Tester is a compact, menu driven accessory which makes program- and testing a manual fire alarm box device faster, and more dependable than previous methods. The eliminates the need for the device mechanical mechanisms, such as program jumpers, or rotary dials because the FPI-32 electroni- sets the manual fire alarm box address into its chip, nonvolatile memory. Vibration, and other conditions which deteriorate mechani- addressing mechanisms are no longer a cause for NUMBER MSI-10B and 20B are fitted with screw terminals for to an addressable circuit. They can be either or semiflush mounted. MSI Series manual fire alarm boxes derive their power, information and receive commands over a pair of wires. MSI Series is compatible on the same circuit with all IL ID-60 Series ionization, photoelectric or thermal TRI Series interfaces or CZM Series address- conventional zone modules. MSI-10B and 20B intelligent manual fire alarm boxes Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. and Architect Specifications addressable manual fire alarm box shall incorporate a microprocessor based integrated circuit which provide communication with its compatible control The addressable manual fire alarm box shall be a Pyrotronics Model MSI-10B or MSI-20B which be compatible with both the Cerberus Pyrotronics IXL/ICON-1 and XL3 control panels. addressable manual fire alarm box shall be con- of durable molded polycarbonate material which matte finished in red with raised white lettering. The shall accommodate a down lever, which operated locks in position after releasing a spring switch. To indicate the manual fire alarm box has activated, the pull down lever shall remain down and until the manual fire alarm box is reset. The manual alarm box shall be reset only by opening the hinged cover with an allen key and then closing and the cover. addressable manual fire alarm box shall be UL listed. addressable manual fire alarm box shall be dynami- supervised and uniquely identifiable by the control addressable manual fire alarm box address shall be with the use of a portable programming The programming accessory shall be a Pyrotronics FPI-32 Programmer/Tester. The pro

MT 8-Tone Signaling Devices Horn and Horn-Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Eight Unique Sounds Low Operating Current High dB Output ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Versions Available in Flush, Surface, or Ceiling Listed Standard 4 inch Square Mounting ULC, FM, CSFM, NYMEA Pending Cerberus Pyrotronics F-Series of horns and horn- combines high quality electronics with the rugged of a metal housing, providing the penetrating power of an electromechanical horn while eliminat- the inrush and RFI noise problems associated with signals. These units are designed for ADA and meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code) and UL 1971 standards for devices for the hearing impaired. eight distinct sounds (HORN, TEMPORAL, BELL, CHIME, SIREN, SLOW WHOOP, SINGLE STROKE are field selectable. The energy efficient horn design only 16 to 36 mA while supplying up to 101 dB at 10 depending on tone selected. Screw terminals are for both the horn and strobe and can be config- to operate together or independently. Units are for flush, surface, or ceiling installation. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are in 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 Candela ratings with mounting configurations. The top of the strobe has rounded dome shape made of clear Lexan The overall height is 2.5 with a width of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non- areas where lower candela is required per UL S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring cd output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets requirements for regular lighted public areas while satisfying UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake hearing impaired person per UL 1971. NUMBER 8-Tone Horn Currents @ 24 VDC) @ 10 VDC) No. – Lo Bell Whoop No. )-F )-S )-C 8-Tone Horn-Strobes Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Currents @ 24 VDC) @ 10 VDC) – Lo Bell Whoop Only 15 & 17 units available in ceiling mount. Minimum UL measurements range from 76 dB to 82 dB @ 24 VDC taken in a reverberant room. ( ) represents strobe model, e.g., 15, 17, 75 or 110. Diagram No. Plate, Red Conduit Plate, Red Surface Box, Red Surface Box for Flush Horn/Strobe, Red Wall/Ceiling Housing for Bi-Directional Flush Horn/Strobe, Red The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 2/96

System 3 Output Modules Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS LP-30 LP-30 MT-30 MT-30 LP-30 Meets NFPA 72 MT-30 Meets NFPA 72 LED Indicator Disconnect Switch Placement Supervised Solid State Circuitry Surge Protected FM, CSFM & Approved Station Tie LP-30 LP-30 Remote Station (Leased Line) Module, Model LP-30 is to transmit signals from a protected to a fire headquarters, central station, or other similar control center, via leased telephone lines. It the requirements of NEMA Standards and NFPA No. 72 for remote station fire alarm systems so that may be used with any annunciator designed to these two Actuation of the module is from an alarm output from any type ZU Zone Module along with that from the control panel. module contains solid state circuitry to supply 24 Vdc for the alarm signal. The unit, which has built-in surge operates on the polarity reversal principle. Under operating conditions the supervisory or alarm signal is held between 3 ma to 9 ma dc. The total maximum resistance of the leased line circuit, including the equipment is 5K ohms. Two input activation are provided for flexibility of programming module also contains a manually operated disconnect which prevents an alarm signal from being transmitted the leased lines when desired or during system tests. of the switch will illuminate the yellow and cause a system trouble condition. The LED will illuminated during an alarm condition. The LED can lamp tested by operating the disconnect switch. Model LP-30 is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. MT-30 MT-30 Municipal Tie Module, Model MT-30 is designed to a local energy type municipal fire alarm box. It meets requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for auxilliary fire systems. Actuation of the module is from a suitable output signal such as from a type ZU Zone Module or the main control panel. module contains solid state circuitry to supply supervi- and operating power to the municipal fire alarm box. circuit is a two-wire closed loop carrying approximately ma dc of supervisory current. Upon system operation the is increased, activating the tripping coil in the munici- fire alarm box, which in turn, transmits the coded signal to headquarters. module, which has built-in surge protection, also con- a manually operated disconnect switch to de-energize municipal tie line when desired or during system tests. of the switch will illuminate the yellow LED or Trouble indicator. Trouble will also be indicated from open or a tripped municipal box operating coil, or an open the municipal tie line. All these trouble conditions will also the system trouble signal. LED can be lamp tested from the control panel. Model MT-30 is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. NUMBER 3122/3123 Specifications Specifications of the alarm signal to ________ (insert location) be accomplished by a Cerberus Pyrotronics Remote Module, Model LP-30. This module shall be system by a ten-pin jumper plug and harness and shall be operable with the system main control or appropriate alarm output signal from other modules. unit shall contain solid state circuitry and shall supply for the alarm signal. Operation shall be on the polarity principle. manually operated disconnect switch shall prevent signal and shall cause the LED to illuminate. unit shall be placement supervised and shall be Under- Laboratories Inc. listed. Information Information Requirement: Normal – 20 ma (nominal) – 40 ma (nominal) Information Information Specifications Specifications of a local energy type municipal fire alarm box shall accomplished by a Cerberus Pyrotronics Municipal Tie MT-30. This module shall be system interconnected a ten-pin plug and harness assembly and shall be oper- from the system main control panel or other modules provide a suitable alarm output signal. The module contain solid

MTL 8-Tone Signaling Devices Horn and Horn-Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Eight Unique Sounds Low Operating Current High dB Output ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Versions Available in Flush, Surface, or Ceiling Listed Standard 4 inch Square Mounting* ULC, FM, CSFM, NYMEA Pending Cerberus Pyrotronics F-Series of horns and horn- combines high quality electronics with the rugged of a metal housing, providing the penetrating power of an electromechanical horn while eliminat- the inrush and RFI noise problems associated with signals. These units are designed for ADA and meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code) and UL 1971 standards for devices for the hearing impaired. eight distinct sounds (HORN, TEMPORAL, BELL, CHIME, SIREN, SLOW WHOOP, SINGLE STROKE are field selectable. The energy efficient horn design only 16 to 40 mA while supplying up to 101 dB at 10 depending on tone selected. Screw terminals are for both the horn and strobe and can be config- to operate together or independently. Units are for flush, surface, or ceiling installation. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are in 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 Candela ratings with mounting configurations. The top of the strobe has rounded dome shape made of clear Lexan The overall height is 2.5 with a width of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non- areas where lower candela is required per UL S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring cd output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets requirements for regular lighted public areas while satisfying UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake hearing impaired person per UL 1971. Although a standard 1 deep box will suffice, a deeper box allows room for wires and easier installation. NUMBER 8-Tone Horn Currents @ 24 VDC) dB Rating 24 VDC*** No. – Lo Bell Whoop 8-Tone Horn-Strobes No. )-F )-S )-C Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Currents @ 24 VDC) dB Rating 24VDC*** – Lo Bell Whoop Only 15 & 17 units available in ceiling mount. Typical dB @ 10 Feet is 88 to 101 depending on tone chosen. ( ) represents strobe model, e.g., 15, 17, 75 or 110. Diagram No. Box, Red Deep Surface Box for Flush Grill Signals, Red Square Surface Backbox, Red Surface Horn & Speaker Backbox (used with Flush Units), Red Wall / Ceiling Housing for Bi-Directional Mount (used with Units), Red The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 9/96

MXL Protection System AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS FirePrint Application Specific Capacity for over 2,000 Intelli- Input Devices Dynamic Supervision of Intelligent Security Device Monitoring Sprinkler Supervision Intelligent/Analog Detection Style 6 (Class A) or Style (Class B) Detector Sensitivity Readout/ per NFPA 72 Chapter 7 Style D (Class A) or Style B B) Conventional Initiating Style Z (Class A) or Style Y B) Notification Appliance Degrade Mode Operation Distributed Processing 80 Character Backlit Alphanu- Display Thermal Strip Printer Supervised Remote Printer 32 Character Custom Messages Multiple Command Stations Compare System Software Fully Field Programmable Via Computer Menu Driven Operator Commands Central & Distributed Architecture ChronoLINK 800 Event History With On Line & Off Line User Help Screens Multiple Levels of Password EnviroLINK Automatic Enviro- Compensation for Detectors One Person Walk Test by Zone Alarm Verification by Device or Logic Controlled Output Time Base Controlled Output System Holiday Schedule City Tie/Lease Line Coded Outputs Supervised Serial Annunciator Interface Interactive VDT – Monochrome Color Color Graphics Option Complies with NFPA 72 NEC 760 Power Limited Circuits 864 Compliant) 16 Gauge Steel Enclosure Listed 864, 1076, ULC Listed FM, CSFM, NYMEA, City of and U.S. Coast Guard Pre-action Releasing (NFPA 13) FM Approved for Sprinkler & FM Approved for Intrinsically Applications Halon & FM-200 Releasing Ap- (NFPA 12A & NFPA 2001) Multi-Language Display Intelligent Interface to Building Systems Operates as an Interactive Peer Other MXLs, MXL-IQs or in a LifeLink Network CXL Command Center Pre-Alarm Operation FireFinder Graphics MXL is a microprocessor based advanced protection Its use of unique multiprocessor design with its ability to utilize both analog and conventional devices make it the most flexible and reliable in the life safety field. The MXL is ideally suited for institutional and industrial fire, security and applications. It complies with the requirements of 72. It is UL 864 and 1076 security listed as well as ULC, CSFM, City of Chicago, U.S. Coast Guard and approved. It is also UL listed for releasing per 12A, 13 and 2001 for FM-200, Halon, Pre-Action and Deluge. basic MXL control unit consists of the following MMB-2 Main Control Board; MPS-6, MPS- with MMB-2 Power Supply; MKB-2 Annunciator and MME-3, MLE-6 or MSE-2 Enclosures. Optional which can be installed with the MXL System NUMBER MOM-2/4 Expansion Card Cage; ALD-2I Analog Driver; CRM-4 Controllable Relay Module; NIM-1R Interface Module; REP-1 Network Repeater XLD-1 Series Loop Driver; CSM-4 Controllable Module; CZM-4 Conventional Zone Module; PIM-1 Interface Module; CMI-300 CXL Modem Inter- Module; MOD-16 Output Driver; MOI-7 Network MID-16 Input Module; PSR-1 Remote Supply; DC Supply; MXL-VDT Interactive Video Display NET-4 Style 4 Network Interface; NET-7 Style 7 Interface; MXL-G Color Graphics; MXL-GT Color a full range of and IL Series intelligent detec- and devices (see data sheets). Main Control Board function control of the MXL is contained on the MMB-2 Control Board. The MMB-2 controls, operates and input device identity, network communications as as operator commands that are entered through the annunicator/keyboard. All operations are supported either the MPS-6 or the MPS-12 power supply, eliminat- the need for external power supplies. The MMB-2 is a replacement of the MMB-1 therefore providing total compatibility. MMB-2 provides 2 ALD (Analog Loop Driver) circuits. ALD loop can be configured as Style 4 (Class B) or 6 (Class A) and can monitor and control up to 60 Pyrotronics analog input devices and 60 pro- device relays. The MMB-2 is equipped with 2 and codable Style Y (Class B) or Style Z A) notification appliance circuits. Each circuit can up to 1.5 amps of C

MXL-G Interactive Color Graphics System AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Graphic Display of System Events SVGA Graphics Support Event Display by Color High Resolution Color Monitor Support PC Based Interactive Terminal Mode w/ Full MXL Control Context Sensitive Help Complete History Log w/ Report Generation Supervised Color Printer Support Automatic and Manual Graphic Screen Printing Supervised Printer Support PAL-1 Ten Levels of Zoom for Each Detection Device Status Events Support Touch Screen Support Graphical Arming and Disarming of Devices Uses Existing CAD Drawings or Scanned Regardless of Format Icon Library w/ Custom Icon Editor Special Instruction Field Supervised File Consistency Reports Password Protection NYMEA, CSFM and FM Approved Listed, ULC Listed is a PC based color graphics display package for use with the Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL system. is used to monitor alarms, supervisories, troubles and violations as detected by the MXL. maintains details of all detection devices connected the MXL control panel and holds screen image files to graphically, the location of the devices. Up to ten image files may be related to each detection point, by offering multiple levels of ZOOM. These screen are bit mapped representations, usually floor plans using CAD software. Screens may also be from drawings or brochures of buildings and floor or even photographs captured using a color or other graphic capture devices. One or more may be complete text screens providing the or fire department with response instructions to a device or area. System software includes a TSR and stay resident) screen capture program that the use of a customer existing drawings regardless their original CAD format. an event occurs (alarm, supervisory, trouble or MXL-G displays the first screen image file for the device. The operator then has the option of ZOOM- in for further details of the location of the device, or may at details of the location of the device, or may look at of other devices currently active. A new alarm or will override any trouble or security events on the screen. If a TOUCH SCREEN is installed, it be used for these functions. If a TOUCH SCREEN is not function keys and/or the mouse may be used. an alarm is received by the graphics system, the PC audible activates to alert the operator. This audible be silenced by pressing any key on the PC keyboard. If event has not been acknowledged, then the symbol for device will flash. After acknowledgment, active devices shown as solid colors according to the type of event. devices currently in alarm are shown in red, in magenta, troubles in yellow and securities in Staus events such as active fans can also be dis- The system can optionally display inactive devices green. The device whose details are currently being is encircled by a flashing ring. to two local printers can be connected to the MXL-G The primary printer is a wide carriage parallel (PAL-1) connected to LPT1. It is supervised and will all events as they occur. It can also be used to print log reports. If a color printer is used the device in will print red. This printer can also be configured to NUMBER Information See descriptions under UL listed Industrial Computer requirements Interface Module a graphic screen, although the use of a separate printer (connected to LPT2) is recommended. A screen can be printed manually by pressing the screen button on the keyboard or touch screen. The zoom screen of the FIRST ALARM EVENT can be to print automatically on the designated graph- printer. This screen can be configured to contain impor- information such as best access route for the fire MXL-G provides four separate disk based log files, one for each type of event. These files can be viewed, and printed according to event type, device date, screen, etc. The number of events logged is only by the size of the PC hard drive. When the disk is backup copies can be made and the log cleared. addition to being used as a graphics annunciation MXL-G can also function as a fully interactive allowing complete operator control of the MXL acknowledging events, silencing audibles, the control panel, disarming points, changing detec

MXL-GT Color Interactive Terminal with History Reporting AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS PC Interface and Software Supervised Context Sensitive Help Fully Interactive Operator Terminal MXL-VDT Command Structure Disk Based History Log with Report Generation Supervises Auxiliary Printer (PAL-1) Optional Color Printer On-Line Manual Function Key Command Execution Event Type Displayed by Color 9600 Baud Connects to PIM-1 Peripheral Driver Password Protected 25 or 50 Line Mode Multiple Screen Pages 864/1076 Listed, ULC Listed, NYMEA, CSFM and FM Approved is a PC based color terminal for use with the Pyrotronics MXL system. It consists of a serial module and software which allow a standard PC act as a fully interactive secondary operator terminal as as providing a comprehensive disk based history log. used with MXL, events are displayed on the PC with each event type colored for clear definition. are shown in red, Troubles in yellow, Supervisories in Security events in cyan. All events are shown in when acknowledged. screen includes a status tally indicating the overall status. The monitor can be configured in either a or 25 line mode, and up to 250 lines are stored for view the Page Up or Page Down keys on the PC key- MXL-GT terminal is fully supervised by the MXL and a of communication is indicated at both the MXL and terminal. The interface module connects to the PIM-1 driver on the MXL and operates at 9600 baud. logging printer can be connected to the PC parallel port hard copy of all events as well as history report genera- If a color printer is used, Alarms are printed in red. history log records all event types along with time and A software utility is provided to allow sorting of in various ways such as by date, by type, by etc. The number of events which can be logged limited only by the size of the PC hard drive. The log can printed, copied to a floppy disk or cleared. addition to being used as text annunciator, MXL-GT also as a fully interactive terminal, allowing the to execute MXL commands including acknowl- silence, reset, arming and disarming of devices, detector sensitivity, generating diagnostic etc. Keyboard control of the MXL as well as history and system parameters are password protected. is supplied with a microprocessor controlled which plugs into the serial port (COM1) of a IBM or IBM compatible PC Industrial Computer. interface module dimensions are 61/8″ long, 2 3/8″ and 9/16″ deep. NUMBER equipment is approved for operation over the tem- range of 0 to 49 Programming Parameters Programming Parameters 132 Operation Detection Baud Bits Parity Stop Bit KSR Operation Detection Baud Bits Parity Stop Bit Interface Module Interface Module Listed Industrial Computer Listed Industrial Computer Disk or higher or higher MBytes MBytes MBytes MBytes GBytes or higher MBytes GBytes MBytes MBytes Card XGA-2 XGA-2 XGA-2 Monitor (19 (15 (19 (15 (19 (15 Ports COM2 COM2 COM2 Ports LPT2 LPT2 LPT2 All the above are IBM industrial computer (UL 864 and UL 1076 listed) To obtain 4 hours of standby power, the ICS Lifeline model 9300057 is recommended. Information Information Color Terminal S.W. Pkg. Listed IBM Industrial Computer* Listed IBM Industrial Computer* UL Listed IBM Industrial Computer* UL Listed 15″ SVGA Monitor Listed 19″ SVGA Monitor Listed Parallel Printer Rack Mounting Kit for PC 1 CP6023) Rack Mounting Slides Rack Key

MXL-IQ Protection System AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS FirePrint Application Detection Capacity for up to 240 Analog Detectors Expandable Up to a Stand System Capacity of 998 and Output Points Dynamic Supervision of Devices Security Device Monitoring Sprinkler Supervision Intelligent/Analog Detection Style 6 (Class A) or 4 (Class B) Detector Sensitivity Read- per NFPA 72 7 Style D (Class A) or Style B B) Conventional Circuits Style Z (Class A) or Style Y B) Notification Circuits Degrade Mode Operation Distributed Processing 80 Character Backlit Display Supervised Remote Printer 32 Character Device Custom Multiple Command Stations Compare System Software System Software Fully Field Programmable Laptop Computer Menu Driven Operator Central Architecture ChronoLINK 800 Event Logging With On & Off Line Reports User Help Screens Multiple Levels of Password One Person Walk Test by or System EnEn vv iroLINK Automatic Compensa- for Smoke Detectors Alarm Verification by Device Logic Controlled Output Zone Time Base Controlled Functions Holiday Schedule City Tie/Lease Line Coded Outputs Supervised Serial Annuncia- Driver/Input Interface Interactive VDT – & Color Color Graphics Option Complies with NFPA 72 NEC 760 Power Limited (UL 864 Compliant) 16 Gauge Steel Enclosure Pre-action Releasing and (NFPA 13) FMFM Approved for Intrinsi- Safe Applications FMFM Approved for Sprinkler Deluge Pre-alarm Operation Halon and FM-200 Releas- Approval (NFPA 12A and 2001) Intelligent Link to Air Sampling System Multi-Language Display Intelligent Interface to Management Operates as an Interactive with Other MXL-IQs, or MXLVs in a Network CXL Command Center ULC Listed, FM, NYMEA, and City of Approved Graphics FireFinder MXL-IQ is a microprocessor based advanced Life system. Its use of unique multiprocessor along with its ability to utilize both intelligent analog conventional detection devices make it the most and reliable system in the life safety field. The MXL- is the system for projects such as schools, nursing small office buildings, strip malls, hotels, apart- buildings and dormatories. MXL-IQ is designed for alone or networked special hazard applications that for extinguishing agent releasing (FM-200, Halon, Pre- Sprinkler or Deluge). MXL-IQ provides the earliest possible via its intelligent link to the AnaLASERTM sampling detection system. It complies with the require- of NFPA 72. It is UL 864 and UL 1076 security listed. is also UL listed for agent releasing per NFPA 12A and 2001. NUMBER basic MXL-IQ control unit consists of the following SMB-1 Main Control Board; MPS-6 Power MKB-4 Annunciator and Keyboard; MSE-3L Optional modules which can be installed with MXL-IQ System include: MOM-2 or MOM-4 Expansion Cage; CRM-4 Controllable Relay Module; CZM-4 Zone Module; CSM-4 Controllable Signal PIM-1 Peripheral Interface Module; CMI-300 CXL Interface Module; NIM-1R LifeLINK Network Module; MOD-16 Output Driver; MOI-7 Network MID-16 Input Module; MXL-VDT Interactive Video Terminal; MXL-G Color Graphic; MXL-GT Color a full range of intelligent/analog detectors and (see table 1). Main Control Board Main Control Board function control of the MXL-IQ is contained on the Main Control Board. The on board 16 bit micro- along with nonvolatile EPROM and Flash allow the system to be custom configured to meet wide range of customer requirements. The SMB-1 operating sequences and monitors input device detector sensitivity, network communication and commands entered through the MKB-4 Annuncia- The SMB-1 also provides 2 ALD (Analog Driver) circuits. Each ALD loop can be configured as 4 (Class B) or St

MXLV Emergency Voice Alarm/Communication System AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Switched Multiplex Audio and Firefighter Modular Design 25 or 70.7 VRMS Audio Signals 1, 2 or 3 Channel Operation Central or Distributed Amplification Remote Command Consoles Flexible System Architecture Style Y or Z Speaker Circuits Redundant and Distributed Processing Style Y or Z Strobe Circuits 1.8 Amps per Strobe Circuit LED Annunciator Modules Style Y or Z Audio Risers Backup Amplification Selectable Tones with Backup Auxiliary Audio Input Auxiliary Audio Outputs for Recording Pages and Telephone Calls Remote Intelligent Audio, Strobe and Telephone Modules (ICP Optional Power Limiting Degrade Mode Tone Generator Optional Firefighter Telephone System Separate Call-in and Telephone Zone Fault Acknowledge and Busy Tones on Firefighter Transponders ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA Approved, of Chicago LifeLINK – MXLV Global Network Voice Operation Peer-to-Peer Paging Campus Paging and Evacuation Fan Control (HOA) Modules Digitized Voice Messaging Custom Recordable Messages (Any Language is Spoken Coding Spoken Walk Test Voice Message text Programmable via AccuLINK NUMBER is a switched multiplex Emergency Voice Alarm and System designed to be used as a part of Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL. Its operation is fully inte- with the MXL and programmed via a laptop com- system will respond rapidly to either automatic or commands from MXL logic or switch modules on the command console(s). Audio signals such Evacuation, Alert, Auxiliary or Page can be routed to any of speaker circuits. A wide selection of micropro- controlled tones with backup are available. Remote generators can be installed in MXLRV transponders to tone generation in a degrade mode. The system supports the use of a digital message player. One or speaker and strobe circuits can be to through MXL AccuLINK programming soft- Switches can be used to manually activate or any zone. Through the use of multi-color LEDs a indication is provided showing which zones are active linked to which audio channel. Microphone Master Module includes a dynamic with a push-to-talk switch and a ready-to-page light along with a small local speaker and volume for monitoring audio signals. An optional pre- tone is also available. MXLV flexible system architecture allows it to be as either a single, dual or three-channel audio using central or distributed amplification. Automatic to standby amplifiers can be provided in a one for or one for multiple amplifier mode. A standby amplifier act as a backup for active amplifiers in any channel. of the field programming capability and plug-in configuration, field wiring is kept to a minimum and site changes are easily made. an option, the system can provide a Firefighter system that can provide both an acknowledge and a signal. Clear indication is provided at command console as to which zones are active. The Master Module provides a red master telephone retractable coil cord, switch hook and push-to-talk telephone system uses a selective talk configuration. phone that is plugged in or taken off hook will light a zone indicator LED and sound an audible signal at command console. Up to six telephones may be active the system simultaneously with no loss of audio quality. paging can be provided from any telephone zone Page) with selection at the command console. addition, specific telephone zones can be pre-selected automatic page zones on a selective or All Call basis. zones are selectable for either 25 Volt or 70.7 Volt and either Style Y or Style Z wiring configuration. circuits are rated at 1.8A and may be wired as Style or Style Z. Strobe and Firefighter Telephone zones can be

MXL / MXLV Enclosure MBR-2, MDR-2, MDL-1, MDB-1, MHD-1, MHD-3, MHD-4, VSB-1 & MSR-1 AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Listed, ULC Listed, NYMEA, CSFM MXL/MXLV enclosure series provides a complete of hardware for the mounting of both MXL and MXLV are backbox, door, clear lenses, blank plates, dead front covers for use alone, with switch and modules and with a strip printer. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 C and 49 C. Enclosure Backbox MBR-2 is a sheet metal backbox for either the MXL the MXLV Voice Command Console, MXLR MXLRV Voice Transponder, or amplifier (using the MSR-1 rail kit). It is designed for or semi-flush mounting and includes various knockouts for wire and conduit entry as well as studs for mounting MXL and MXLV modules. Enclosure Door MDR-2 Door is used with the MBR-2 Backbox. It an upper and middle cutout for either a clear or sheet metal blank, depending upon the It includes slip hinges for easy removal and key lock. It can be used with the MXL, MXLV com- console, MXLR transponder, MXLRV transponder accessory enclosures. Clear Lens MDL-1 is a clear Plexiglass lens which fits in either of the MDR-2 Door. One lens is included in the NUMBER Sheet Metal Blank MDB-1 is a sheet metal blank which fits in either of the MDR-2 Door. One blank is included in MDB-1. Dead Front Panel MHD-3 is a sheet metal panel which attaches to the enclosure backbox. It fits the upper or middle of the enclosure. It has openings for two rows of switch modules or VLM-1 LED indicator modules rows of 7) and attaches to the MBR-2 with screw It is hinged for easy access to the rear of the and inside of the enclosure. When in place, it and protects modules and wiring, providing dead construction in that area. Dead Front Panel MHD-1 is a sheet metal panel which attaches to the enclosure backbox. It fits the upper or middle of the enclosure. It has an opening with cover for a TSP-40 printer when used and attaches to the with screw fasteners. When in place, it covers protects modules and wiring, providing dead front in that area. Dead Front Panel MHD-2 is a sheet metal panel which attaches to the backbox. It fits the lower section of the enclo- It has no openings and attaches to the MBR-2 with fasteners. When in place, it covers and protects and wiring, providing dead front construction that area. Dead Front Panel MHD-4 is a sheet metal panel which attaches to the enclosure backbox. It fits the upper or middle of the enclosure. It has openings for two rows of switch modules or VLM-1 LED indicator modules rows of 4) and the TSP-40 thermal printer. The attaches to the MBR-2 with screw fasteners. It is for easy access to the rear of the modules and of the enclsoure. When in place, it covers and modules and wiring, providing dead front in that area. Switch Blank VSB-1 is a blank plate which covers one opening in the MHD-3 or MHD-4 dead front panel. It attaches the MHD with screw fasteners. Information Number Backbox Instructions Door Instructions Lens (1) Instructions Metal Blank (1) Instructions Front Panel Instructions Front Panel Instructions Front Panel Instructions Front Panel Instructions Blank (1) Instructions Kit Instructions Door Plate Rail Kit MSR-1 is a System 3 type rail which fits into the of the MBR-2 backbox. It allows modules such as EL-410C amplifier, PS-35 Power Supply, BC-35 charger, MOI-1 I/O interface, MID-16/MOD-16 drivers and other System 3 type modules to be in the MBR/MDR enclosure set. Ventiliation Louver Plate MDG-1 i

MXL/MXLV 19 Rack Mount MXL-RK1, ACM-RK, MKB-RK, MMB-RK, MOM-RK, TSP-RK, VSM-RK, CABLES-RK, MKB-3 AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Standard 19 Rack Mounting for MXL MXLV System Modules Rack Mount Sheet Metal Adapter Use Standard MXL/MXLV Modules 19 Rack Enclosure Shipped Complete NO Assembly Required RK Series of adapter plates provide the option of 19 rack mounting of MXL and MXLV system The MXL-RK1 is a 70 inch high standard 19 wide 18 rack package supplied complete with UL 864 directly from Cerberus Pyrotronics. The MXL-RK1 is assembled with all side, back and top panels. The door comes with a lock assembly using the same key other Cerberus Pyrotronics enclosures. The door comes a clear, fire rated plexiglass lens installed. MXL-RK1 comes with a battery tray and all necessary mounting equipment is approved for operation over the tempera- range of 0 to 49 MXL modules require one or more of the following 19 mount adapter plates to mount inside the MXL-RK1. and MXLV modules must be ordered seperately, the are mounting plates: Module Mounting Plate ACM-RK mounting is 17 high by 19 wide and has space available for (1) ACM-1 Audio Control (1) MMM-1 Master Microphone Module, (1) TMM-1 Master Module, (1) TBM-2 Terminal Block and (1) PIM-1 Peripheral Interface Module. NUMBER Display and Control Keypad Mounting Plate MKB-RK Mounting Plate is 12 high by 19 wide and space available for (1) MKB-3 MXL Display and Control Module and (1) PIM-1 Peripheral Interface Module. 19 Rack Mount Display and Control Keypad MKB-3 is a fully functional MXL/V system display and keypad module. The MKB-RK is required to mount MKB-3 in the MXL-RK1 standard 19 wide rack mount Only the MKB-3 is designed for use in the MXL- enclosure. MKB-3 should be ordered in place of other model displays (MKB-1, MKB-2, MKB-4) for 19 rack use. The MKB-3 is configured via the MXL/V custom generator program – AccuLINK and is addressed a dipswitch on the MKB-3 ANN-1 circuit board. Expansion Module Cardcage Mounting Plate MOM-RK mounting plate is 17 high by 19 wide and mounting space available for up to 3 MXL/V Expansion (MOM-4, MOM-2, OMM-1 or OMM-2) in any The MXL-MPFO mounting plate may also be on the MOM-RK to allow mounting of D2300CP Optic Interface Modules or CCU/M Pager Interface By using the MOM-RK with the appropriate the following MXL/V modules may be mounting in MXL-RK1 rack: / MOM-2 / OMM-2 / BTC-1 and PSR Mounting Plate MMB-RK mounting plate is 12 high by 19 wide and mounting for either (1) MMB MXL Main Mother or (1) PSR Remote Power Supply Module. Power Supply Mounting Plate MPS-RK mounting plate is 8 high by 19 wide and mounting for up to (2) MPS-6 or MPS-12 Power Strip Printer Mounting Plate TSP-RK is a 12 high by 19 wide mounting plate set mounting (1) TSP-40 Internal Thermal Strip Printer in the 19 rack mount enclosure. The TSP-RK comes a U-shaped plate with mounting studs for the TSP-40 It is also supplied with a dress plate and clear lens. Rack Mount Extended Interconnect Cables CABLE-RK kit contains (4) extended length MXL and interconnection cables. It contains: Cable Cable Cable Cable ACM to TMM-1 ACM to ANN-1 MMB to Battery MMM-1 to ACM-1 Information Information Inch High Vertical 19 Rack Module Mounting Plate Display Mounting Plate (for 19 Rack Mount Keypad Mounting Plate Mounting Plate

MXL/MXLV Enclosuress & MME-3, MBR-MP, MLE-6, MBR-3MP, MDL-1, MDB-1, MHD-1, MHD-2, MHD-3, MHD-4 AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Enclosure & Door Package (MME-3) Standard Size MXL Enclosure Removeable Module Mounting Plate (MBR-MP) Hinged Locking Door with Optional Inserts for Lens, Grill, Blank Plate Mounting for (1) MMB or PSR-1 and Up to 3 (MOM or OMM) Enclosure & Door Package (MLE-6) Large Size MXL Enclosure Removeable Module Mounting Plates (MBR-MP & Hinged Dual Lock Door with Optional Inserts for Lens, Grill, Blank Plate Mounting for (1) MMB or PSR-1 and Either Up to 6 (MOM or OMM) or Up to 3 Cardcages 2 EL-410 Amplifiers (MSR-1 Rail Kits) NUMBER MME-3 and MLE-6 enclosures provide a complete set hardware for mounting all MXL and MXLV modules for system size requirements from small to large. in the enclosure series are backbox and door removeable mounting plates and clear lenses, ventiliation grill plates, and blank plates for use the enclosure doors. Dead front covers for use alone, switch and/or annunciator modules and with a strip are also available. equipment is approved for operation over the tempera- range of 0 to 49 Standard Size Enclosure MME-3 enclosure set consists of a sheetmetal backbox door with keylock. The MME-3 can be used for either MXL System, MXLV Voice Command Console, MXLR MXLRV Voice Transponder or Amplifier (using the MSR-1 Rail Kit). To mount MXL/MXLV in the MME-3, the MBR-MP removeable module plate is required. Using the MBR-MP mounting (1) MMB or (1) PSR-1 and up to 3 expansion (MOM or OMM) can be mounted in the MME-3 When used to mount MXL amplifiers (EL-410), MBR-MP is not required, instead up to (3) EL-410 may be installed in the MME-3 by using (3) MSR- rail kits. When amplifiers are mounted in any enclosure install MDG-1 grills in the door for proper ventilation. is designed for surface of semi-flush mounting and various knockouts for wire and conduit entry. The in the MME-3 set has two cutouts for either clear blank plates or grills depending on the application, contains a key lock. and MLE-6 MXL Module Mounting Plate MBR-MP MXL/V Module Mounting Plate is required for in both MME-3 and MLE-6 enclosures to mount all MXL MXLV equipment. MBR-MP is not necessary if the and MLE-6 enclosures are to be used only for of amplifiers (EL-410). MBR-MP is a removeable MXL/V module mouting plate allows the enclosure MME-3 or MLE-6 to be shipped to job site for installation of wiring and conduit, while the hardware (electronics) is mounted to the studs on MBR-MP, pre-wired, programmed and tested prior to and installation at the job site. This allows for more efficient system start ups with less chance of sensitive electronics being damaged while field wiring conduit are connected to the system enclosure. mounting plate bolts to either the MME-3 or MLE- enclosures for easy installation on the job site. The MBR- also has handles to allow easy transport and mounting. MBR-MP contains mounting studs for (1) MMB or PSR- w/ MXL Equipment Connected (1) PIM-1, (1) TBM-1, and up to (3) MOM or OMM or 2 cardcages and (1) TSP-40 Printer (same studs as the MBR-2 enclosures). MBR-MP is ordered and shipped seperately from the and MLE-6 enclosures. Large Size Enclosure MLE-6 enclosure set consists of a sheetmetal backbox door with two key locks. The MLE-6 can be used for the MXL system, MXLV Voice Command Console, Transponder, MXLRV Voice Transponder or Amplifier (using the MSR-1 rail kit). To mount MXL/V in the MLE-6, the MBR-MP removeable module plate is required with the MBR-3MP optionally for use. Using the MBR-MP mounting plate (1) or PSR-1 and up to (3) expansion cardcages (MOM OMM) can be mounted in the MLE-6. If additional w/ 6 Cardcages are required, the MBR-3MP optional cardcage plate can also be installed in the MLE-6 below the The MBR-3MP allows mounting of an additional MOM or OMM module expansion cardcages. combinations of hardware can be installed in the If only amplifiers are to be installed in the MLE-6, no or MBR-3MP plates are required. Instead up to (5) amplifiers can be installed by using (5) MSR-1 rail Th

NCC Network Command Center AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS MXL Network Command Center PC Based Utilizing MS-DOS Platform Control and Monitoring up to 63 MXL Systems 700,000+ Points Multiple NCCs in an MXL Global Network Color Event Display Bilingual Operation Support Disk Based History Log with Report Generation Multi-level Operator Password Protection and On Networked System Time Synchronization Fully Supervised Printer Supervision Help Menus User Programmable Macros Rack Mount or Desk Mount Key Lock Protected Floppy Disk Drive Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM and NYMEA Approved MXL network command center (NCC) is a PC based which provides the ability to monitor and control up 63 networked MXL systems. The NCC connects to the network via the NIM-1R module. It allows an to view and respond to system events as well as maintenance reports. NCC indicates the status of all MXL networked events in a color text format. The NCC also a global system status window which indicates condition status of each MXL panel in the network. NCC is capable of operating in various modes, upon the desired MXL network systems The three UL listed NCC configurations are: 72 Local Campus Configuration NCC is in a monitoring mode ONLY. The remote MXL are configured as standalone 72 Local – Campus Local control is through the MXL MKB. The NCC the current values of analog voltage, sensitivi- etc. The NCC cannot directly acknowledge, silence, reset a remote node. 72 Local Highrise Configuration NCC is the primary control point for a collection of nodes. It is capable of block acknowledge, query, control of the system. The remote MXL nodes are NUMBER as 72 Local – High rise units and may contain own annunciators (MKB). No local control is pos- at a remote MKB unless its node is out of communi- with the NCC. 72 Proprietary Configuration NCC is the primary control point for a collection of nodes. It is capable of top event acknowledge, and control of the system. The remote MXL nodes configured as 72 Proprietary units and may contain own annunciators (MKB). Control is possible from a location using an MKB that is behind a locked Logging Logging NCC history log retains all systems events on the hard disk drive in chronological order. The history size is dependent on the size of the PC hard drive. archiving indications are given when the log has 80% of capacity. Custom history reports can be directly from the NCC. Information Information Listed Industrial Computer Listed Industrial Computer for NCC-G Upgrading or higher or higher or higher Disk MBytes MBytes MBytes GBytes MBytes GBytes MBytes MBytes MBytes Card XGA-2 XGA-2 XGA-2 Monitor (19 (15 (19 (15 (19 (15 Screen only) only) only) Ports COM2 COM2 COM2 Ports LPT2 LPT2 LPT2 All the above are IBM industrial computers (UL 864 and UL 1076 listed) To obtain 4 hours of standby power the ICS Lifeline model 9300057 UPS is See descriptions under UL listed industrial computer requirements Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (973) 267-1300 (973) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/96

NET-4 Communication Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Plugs Into PSR-1 Provides Network Communication MXL RS-485 Network 19.2K Baud Transmission Rate Digital Communication PC Diagnostic Port NFPA Style 4 Listed, CSFM, FM and City of Approved NET-4 is a plug-in type module used to provide between the Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL various other MXL Remote Modules. It is designed to into an edge connector type slot on the PSR-1 Supply. The NET-4 provides NFPA Style 4 type This communication is RS-485 operating 19.2K Baud. The communication is fully digital. NET-4 also provides a port for connection of a PC. port can be used for system diagnostics. No special is required for the NET-4 Module. and Architect Specifications between the Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL Unit and various remote modules shall be provided the NET-4 Communication Module. The communica- shall be digital and use RS-485 communication at 19.2K Baud. NET-4 Communication Module shall meet the require- of the NFPA Style 4. It shall plug into the PSR-1 Supply. NET-4 shall also provide a serial port for connection of PC. This port shall be used for system diagnostic special programming shall be required for the NET-4 Information voltage current current NUMBER The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotonics detectors and bases Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 1/95

NET-7 / NET-7M 7 Network Interface Card AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Style 7 Network Diagnostic LED Cost Effective Local Solution Plugs into MOM-2/4 Width Slot ULC NYMEA CSFM MXL network interface between a main MXL and multiple remote panels can be achieved with the combina- of NET-7 and NET-7M modules. These modules Style 7 communication using two RS-485 pairs. NET-7 and/or NET-7M plugs into a half width slot of the card-cage at the MXL command center (MMB) the PSR-1 slot at MXL remote units (MXLR, MXLVR). NET-7 provides two independent and fully supervised paths allowing system operation through open as well as a short circuit. The NET-7 is usually at the extreme points of the local MXL network with an end of line resistor (EOL). The NET-7 which modules are installed in its enclosure reports this information to the MMB where it is com- to the CSGM database. In addition, NET-7 provides diagnostic LEDs, two yellow and three green, greatly in troubleshooting. NET-7M must be used in conjunction with the NET-7 The NET-7M is designed to be located in the of the network (between two NET-7s) and does not the communication paths. Two green LEDs are to indicate the status of the two communication equipment is approved for operation over the tempera- range of 0 and 49 NUMBER Information Information Yellow LEDs: XMIT Enable: message is being transmitted ANY TROUBLE: unable to communicate to the MMB either pair Green LEDs: Primary: message is being received on that specific pair Secondary: message is being received on that specific SELECT: indicates one or both pairs is functional Green LEDs: Message is being received on a specific pair Information Information No. 7 Local Network Interface Instructions No. 7 Communication Interface Instructions and Architect Specifications and Architect Specifications communication between the system CPU (MXL) and CPU (MXLR or MXLVR) shall meet the NFPA for Style 7 signaling line circuits. The com- path shall be fully redundant with both data continuously supervised. The main CPU shall be of communicating with the remote units on either of wires. Style 7 communications shall be provided by a plug in model NET-7 or NET-7M. Either of these units shall on-board diagnostic LEDs to show proper commu- on both paths and clearly indicate a failure on It shall also isolate remote power supplies so as to the ability to localize a ground fault condition to a remote enclosure. the use of system software in conjunction with the module, the system shall be capable of cross the location of all system option modules by to assure that they are placed in the specified enclosure. Ratings Ratings Voltage: current: current: current: +/- 5% average, 140mA max average, 140mA max End of line resistors should not be used with any NET-7M. of line resistors are provided with each NET-7. These devices required at the two extreme ends of each network pair as shown the below Connection Diagram. It is not required that the MMB at one of the ends. It may be at any location along the network. is not allowed on the network. Diagram Diagram – 120W, 5% (P/N 140-820150) – 120W, 5% (P/N 140-820150) This diagram should not be used for module wiring. Please to the appropriate module installation instructions. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 1/97

NIM-1R Network Interface Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS LifeLINK MXL Network Interface True Peer to Peer Communication MXL Systems Network up to 64 MXL 200,000+ Point Capacity Style 4 or Style 7 Communication RS-485/RS-232 Port for Connection to Systems (FSI) Network Command Center/Color Interface ULC Listed, NYMEA, of Chicago & CSFM Approved NIM-1R is an MXL option module which provides full to peer communication between MXL systems (MMB- and their sub-networks). The NIM-1R plugs into a full or MOM-2 cardcage slot and communicates with the MXL via TTL logic. It also provides a trunk path to network up to 64 MXL allowing a system capacity of over 200,000 input Each MXL would require a NIM-1R in this configura- The communication path will support the use of pair copper or fiber optic medium. The communica- path can meet the requirements of either Style 4 or 7 wiring with all communication paths fully super- an MXL network configuration using the NIM-1R, all MXL control panels will be capable of operating a full stand-alone mode during any failure of the network Any MXL remaining connected on this bus will continue to pass information and provide inter-panel communication. Each MXL will its own integral application programming which will the ability to recognize and act upon state changes any other MXL in the network. NIM-1R also provides an RS-232 or RS-485 port for to foreign systems such as Building Manage- Systems. This port is bi-directional and can support of the List, Control and Test functions available in the The port protocol contains full data handshaking and machine friendly. The information available from this port is software selectable in the MXL CSGM The NIM-1R will be capable of communicating all network information to the NCC (Network Com- Center) and the MXL-G (Network Color Graphics). and Architect Specifica- interface to allow multiple MXL systems to communi- together in a peer to peer configuration shall be a Pyrotronics NIM-1R. The NIM-1R shall be capable allowing up to 64 MXL systems to pass information and complete inter-panel communication. In the event any failure occurs in the network communication, all control panels will be capable of operating in full alone mode. Each MXL will contain its own applica- programming which will provide the ability to recog- and act upon state changes in any other MXL in the NUMBER NIM-1R shall be capable of providing a communication that can meet the requirements of NFPA Style 4 or 7 wiring. The communication path shall operate at Kbaud and will support the use of twisted pair copper or fiber optic medium. NIM-1R shall be capable of communicating with an (Network Command Center) to provide all network information. NIM-1R shall also contain a fully programmable serial port for connection to external systems as building management systems). The port is bi- and can support all of the list, control and test available in MXL. The port protocol contains full handshaking and is machine friendly. The port can be to monitor the external system. The information from this auxiliary port is software selectable in the CSGM program. Diagram Information Voltage:5 VDC, 160mA VDC, 70mA VP-P max., 150mA max. equipment is approved for operation over the tempera- range of 0 and 49 Information Number Interface Module Instructions Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram O T E S: 22 AWG minimum. Maximum cable length 25 feet. Cable must be in rigid conduit and can not leave the room. Shielded cable is not recommended. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC 760. Maximum voltage 24V peak to peak. Maximum current 20mA per circuit. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN

FM-200 System Nozzles AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 1, 1 2 Inch Sizes Area Coverage Capability and 360 Discharge Options Construction Information (Brass Nozzles) Part No. Part No. * FM-200TM pre-engineered system nozzles are de- to provide rapid and thorough mixing of FM-200TM the air in the protected space and to provide coverage a large area. Standard nozzles are made of brass. Pre- system nozzles are made in four pipe sizes: 1″, 1 and 2″. All sizes have both 180 and 360 patterns available. All nozzles, both 180 and have a 15 below horizontal discharge pattern to force against ceiling surfaces. hung ceiling application, the 360 nozzle is recom- and should be mounted the maximum distance the ceiling to minimize the effect on the ceiling tiles. is also recommended that the tiles be secured in place the liberal use of special clips which are made for this and Architect Specifications nozzles shall be of 180 or 360 discharge pattern type made of brass. They shall be marked with the Pyrotronics part number. nozzles shall have a standard female pipe thread for to the discharge piping. Nozzles shall be in accordance with the instructions in the pre- system design manual and as required by the listing or FM approval. NUMBER Area and Nozzle Placement Criteria – are available in both 180 and 360 discharge The 180 sidewall nozzle is designed for installation the walls of the hazard, with discharge directed away from wall on which it is installed. The 360 nozzle is designed to installed in the center of the area being protected. All nozzles be installed in a vertical (pendant) position with the nozzle down. Nozzles must be installed with orifices 6″ 2″ 5cm) below ceiling. 180 nozzles must be located 12″ (30 cm 5cm) away from side wall. Height – The maximum ceiling height when using FM- nozzles (both 180 and 360 is 12 feet (36.6 meters). Coverage – Both 180 and 360 nozzles were tested for area coverage using a 40 ft. wide by 44 ft. long x 13.4m) enclosure. Based on these parameters, the area coverage for each nozzle is described as a line distance from the nozzle to the farthest corner of the space. = 48.33 = 14.7m = 29.73 = 9.1m Nozzle Nozzle Determine the maximum nozzle area coverage protecting a 20 foot wide enclosure. nozzles use max = 48.33 ft. determine maximum length of nozzle coverage. nozzles use max = 29.73 ft. determine maximum length of nozzle coverage. = 29.73 ft. = 48.33 ft. Nozzle Nozzle = (48.33)2 – (10)2 = (cid:214) (2335.75 – 100 = 47.28 Feet Maximum = (29.73)2 – 102 = (cid:214) (883.87 – 100 = 56.0 Feet Maximum Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 9/95

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Output Control Card Controls and Supervises Up to Option Cards Gold Plated Card Edge Fingers Plugs Into OMM-1 or OMM-2 ULC Listed, FM, CSFM and NYMEA Approved OCC-1 Output Control Card is an MXLV module which into a half width slot in the OMM-1 or OMM-2 The OCC-1 acts as a controller for other MXLV It processes commands received from the MXL and directs them to the appropriate cards or producing the desired output. Up to three audio connect to the OCC-1 through screw terminals on the or OMM-2 Cardcage. The Firefighters Telephone also connects to the OCC-1. The audio buses are to the respective audio channel amplifier sets, either or distributed. The telephone riser is routed to the ZCT zone cards of the ICP telephone zone OCC-1 supervises the cards plugged into the or OMM-2. As each card is supervised, it responds its status. This status information is then sent to the over the high speed RS-485 network as required. least one OCC-1 is required in the MXLV system. It can and control up to 11 plug-in cards each having a sub-address (3 full OMM-1 Additional OMM-1 be added as necessary. Each OCC-1 occupies one network address and provides the 11 sub-addresses. MXL network address is set using a DIP switch on the card. The OCC-1 card edge fingers are gold plated maximum reliability. A key is supplied with each OCC-1 when inserted into the card edge slot will prevent any option module from being inadvertently placed in that BTC-1 may be plugged onto the OCC-1 to provide a tone generator for use in degrade mode. and Architect Specifica- cards shall be supervised and controlled using a based module (OCC-1) through which and telephone riser circuits are routed. This module also be a plug-in card and shall occupy one half width in the OMM-1 or OMM-2 cardcage and one address on high speed RS-485 network bus. Network addresses be set using on-board DIP switches. This module shall and supervise up to 11 plug-in cards. Multiple cards shall be used to accommodate additional modules as needed. OCC-1 shall provide the ability to use a plug-in backup generator for operation in a degrade mode. controller shall be supplied with a key which when into the card edge slot will prevent any other module from being inadvertently placed in that card edge fingers shall be gold plated. NUMBER Ratings: of Line Resistors: Risers:: Risers:: Wiring Diagram Ohms, 1/2 watt, 5% 140-820396 Ohms, 1/2 watt, 5% 140-820390 Loop Resistance:: 20 Ohms (both wires) Wire Size:: AWG twisted, shielded pair Wire Size:: AWG twisted, shielded pair wiring must conform to National and Local codes *If this is the last or only OCC-1, terminate the inputs shown as follows: risers: 10K, W, 5% (P/N 140-820396) riser: 5.6K, W, 5% (P/N 140-820390) Maximum loop resistance: 20 ohms for telephone and audio risers Minimum wire size: 10 AWG twisted pair, shielded wire size: 14 AWG twisted pair, shielded Output Control Card Module Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 8/94

OMM-1 Option Module Cardcage AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Cardcage for MXLV Voice Option Modules Mounts Vertically in MXL Backbox Four Keyed Cardslots Card Edge Guides Gold Plated Connectors Configurable Screw Terminals Saddle Clamp Type Terminals Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA and City of Chicago Approved OMM-1 is a backplane or cardcage into which all option modules plug. It is used in both the MXLV Console enclosure and the MXLRV Remote unit enclosures. It mounts vertically to studs in the MBR-2 backbox, and provides 4 card clots with card edge guides. All MXLV modules are half-width size. The OMM-1 also screw terminals for termination of all field wiring. terminals are saddle clamp type and designed to fit 18 AWG to 14 AWG wire. and network communications are provided by either MMB-1 or the PSR-1, depending upon the application. cables are supplied with the OMM-1. OMM-1 fits into the same footprint as the MOM-4 MXL module cardcage. to 3 OMM-1 or MOM-4 Cardcages can fit in a single enclosure (MBR-2) in whatever combination is Ribbon cables are provided for interconnection cardcages. No more than 3 OMM-1 may be con- together. equipment is approved for operation over temperature of 0 to 49 and Architect Specifications Voice System modules shall be plug-in type and with a cardcage, model OMM-1. The OMM-1 provide slots and card edge guides for up to four modules. Card slots shall be pressure type with plated contacts and shall provide keying to avoid of the modules. The OMM-1 design shall allow use of any option module in any card slot. cardcage shall provide screw terminals for all field Screw terminals shall be saddle clamp type, of being used with 18-14 AWG wire. OMM-1 Cardcage shall mount in the MBR-2 enclosure and shall include necessary ribbon cables for to the MXL main board (MMB-1) or remote supply (PSR-1) as well as for interconnection of NUMBER The OMM-1 Information Number Module Cardcage Instructions MXLV Modules Number Supv. Module Supv./Riser Module Control Card Channel, 8 Class B Spkr. or Strobe Channel, 8 Class B Spkr. Zones Channel, 8 Class B Spkr. or Strobe Channel, 8 Class B Spkr Zones Channel, 4 Class A Spkr. or Strobe Channel, 4 Class A Spkr Zones Channel, 4 Class A Spkr. or Strobe Channel, 4 Class A Spkr Zones Watt AMP/Spkr. Zone Telephone Zone Modules Diagram Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 3/95

OMM-2 Option Module Cardcage AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Cardcage for MXLV Voice Option Modules Two Half-Width Option Module Slots Mounts Vertically in MXL Backbox Mounts Horizontally in MSE-2 Backbox Two Keyed Card Slots Card Edge Guides Gold Plated Connectors Configurable Screw Terminals Saddle Clamp Type Terminals Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM & NYMEA Approved OMM-2 is a backplane or cardcage into which all option modules plug. It is used in both the MXLV console enclosure and the MXLRV remote unit enclosures. It mounts vertically to studs in the MBR-2 backbox, or horizontally in MSE-2 backbox, and provides two half-width card slots card edge guides. All MXLV option modules are half- size. The OMM-2 also provides screw terminals for of all field wiring. Screw terminals are saddle type and designed to fit up to 14 AWG wire. and network communication are provided by either MMB-1 or PSR-1, depending upon the application. cables are supplied with the OMM-2. OMM-2 fits into the same footprint as the MOM-2 MXL module cardcage. to 3 OMM-1, OMM-2, MOM-2 or MOM-4 cardcages fit in a single MXL enclosure (MBR-2) in whatever is necessary. One OMM-2 may be mounted in an MSE-2 enclosure. Ribbon cables are for interconnection of cardcages. No more than 3 or OMM-2 may be connected together, nor can be in different enclosures. equipment is approved for operation over the tem- range of 0 and 49 and Architect Specifications voice system modules shall be plug-in type and with a cardcage, model OMM-2. The OMM-2 provide slots and card edge guides for up to two modules. Card slots shall be pressure type with plated contacts and shall provide keying to avoid of the modules. The OMM-2 design shall allow the of any optional MXLV module in either card slot. cardcage shall provide screw terminals for all field Screw terminals shall be saddle clamp type, of being used with up to 14 AWG wire. OMM-2 cardcage shall mount in the MBR-2 or MSE-2 backboxes and shall include necessary ribbon for connection to the MXL main board (MMB-1) or power supply (PSR-1) as well as for interconnec- of cardcages. NUMBER Information Module Cardcage Instructions Number MXLV Modules Number Control Card Supervisory/Riser Card Supervisory Card Channel, 8 Class B Zones Channel, 8 Class B Zones Channel, 8 Class B Zones Channel, 8 Class B Zones Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones Telephone Zone Module Watt Amplifier/Zone Module Channel, 8 Class B Zones, Channel, 8 Class B Zones, Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones, Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones, Power Limiting Card Audio P.L. Module Audio P.L. Module Strobe Power P.L. Module the OMM-2 Diagrams the OMM-2 Board in the MBR-2 Backbox the OMM-2 Board in an MSE-2 Enclosure

PAD-2 Power Supply/NAC Extender AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 6 amps of Notification Appliance Power Advanced Microprocessor Control 24 VDC Regulated Output Voltage Four Power-Limited Notification Outputs Synchronized ANSI Temporal Pattern Class Selectable Gound Fault Detection Battery Supervision 3 Amp Auxiliary Power Output Trouble Contact for Monitoring Listed Model PAD-2 is a notification circuit expander with a auxiliary power output. It is listed by Underwriters for use with Cerberus Pyrotronics fire alarm panels. This power source is designed to provide extra power required in buildings conforming to the with Disabilities Act. PAD-2 provides 6 amps of regulated 24 VDC power multiple uses. All 6 amps can be directed to 4 Appliance Circuits (NAC Each is rated at amps and is power limited. Either 1 or 2 inputs can the four outputs. These outputs are compatible all Cerberus Pyrotronics 24 VDC notification appli- PAD-2 also offers a 3 amp auxiliary output for other portions of your fire alarm system. This is power limited and regulated at 24 VDC. When this output, the total power available from the will not exceed 6 amps. trouble contact is provided for monitoring the PAD-2 a fire alarm panel. It also allows for a contact input. the user has the option of connecting it to a fire alarm panel existing notification oror controlling it with a TRI series device on fire systems. PAD-2 offers battery supervision and management is required of fire alarm system components. Ground are transmitted as are any other trouble condi- Trouble conditions not only change the state of trouble contact in the unit, they also break the circuit input to create a trouble signal in the alarm control. product is packaged in its own sheet metal enclo- with enough space to house the 7 amp-hour set required for back-up. The enclosure is black displays the Cerberus Pyrotronics logo. The PAD-2 listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or both PAD-2 signal inputs control the notification NUMBER depending on the specific configuration setup. configurations for the PAD-2 are: These 1 Outputs B Circuits 1 2 1 2 1 and 2 3 and 4 B Circuits B Circuits 1 2, 3 and 4 B Circuits B Circuits 1 Outputs 1-2 and 3-4 Class A Circuit Pairs 1 2 1-2 3-4 A Circuit Pairs A Circuit Pairs A Circuit Pairs B Circuits 1-2 3 and 4 1 2 Model PAD-2 supervises a variety of functions Low AC power Low battery condition Earth ground fault Auxiliary output power limit condition EOL supervision trouble or power limited condition an output a trouble condition occurs, the PAD-2 creates a condition on the fire control signal circuits to it is connected. It still maintains the ability to be by the fire control. In addition, the PAD-2 a Form trouble relay output as an alterna- to using the notification circuit trouble. Diagram Electrical Input: Power Circuit: 1 Ciruicts: Class A or 4 Class B or Configuration: Class A & 2 Class B VAC @ 2 amps VDC @ 6 amps per Output Circuit to 27.3 VDC at 3.0 amps 4.7K ohm EOL resistor on each Class B circuit Class B or 2 Class A VDC AH to 120 x 16 x 3 of Inputs: Configuration: Voltage Range: Charging Temp.: Lights Power On: Trouble: Fault: Trouble: 1 Trouble: 2 Trouble: 3 Trouble: 4 Trouble: Information Number Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics

Pressure Actuated Control Head AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS PAH Features: High Quality Brass Construction Mounts Directly on Top of Valves Listed and FM Approved Model PAH, Pressure Actuated Head allows for pres- actuation of FM-200TM cylinders. The PAH is to be directly on top of the FM-200TM cylinder valves. operated control head is self-venting to prevent system discharge in the event of a slow build up pressure in a pilot line. Specification Pressure Actuated Head shall be a Cerberus model PAH with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Factory Mutual approval. install the PAH, remove the protection cap from the FM- cylinder actuation port. After the protection cap has removed, install the PAH control head with flexible hose or tubing, attached to the actuation line. Ensure that the pilot line is unpressurized and pins are in the retracted (SET) position. Failure to this procedure will result in accidental discharge of the cylinder when the control head is installed on the Information No. No. Actuated Control Head NUMBER Data Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 10/

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Printer Parallel Printer Supervised for Paper Out, On/Off Line, On, Paper Jam, Connection MXL, CXL, MXL-G, MXL-GT, CXL-G, NCC High Speed 24 Pin Dot Matrix Wide Carriage, Tractor or Friction Feed NFPA 72 Proprietary Listed PAL-1 is a UL listed parallel printer for use with the CXL, MXL-G, MXL-GT, CXL-G and NCC. It provides hard copy record of all system events. It also allows of system maintenance and diagnostic reports. used with the MXL the PAL-1 requires connection PIM-2 and PIM-1. When used with CXL, the PIM-2 is to connect the PAL-1 to the CXL printer port the CXC-2 module. printer is a 24 pin wide carriage dot matrix with type interface. It is supervised for AC power, line, paper out, paper jam and connection to FACP. used in an NFPA 72 proprietary configuration, a listed UPS must be supplied. and Architect Specifications system shall provide a UL listed parallel printer. The shall be high speed, wide carriage with 24 pins, matrix type. The printer shall support the use of traction feed or friction feed paper. It shall be fully for proper operation, including On/Off Line, Jam, Paper Out, Power On and wiring between and fire alarm system. PAL-1 shall be capable of being used with either the Pyrotronics MXL or CXL systems. It shall also used with the MXL-G, MXL-GT, CXL-G, SCXL and systems. used with the MXL, the PAL-1 shall be connected the PIM-1 and PIM-2 modules. Power to the PAL-1 be provided by a UL listed UPS in all NFPA 72 systems. NUMBER Wiring Diagram Maximum cable distance from PIM-1 to PIM-2 cable is 25 The two modules must be in the same room. maximum distance from the PIM-2 to the parallel is 6 feet. The two modules must be in the same power (PWR) is connected to the 5 VDC, 600mA supplied with PIM-2. The transformer requires VAC, 60 Hz, 0.5A max. NFPA 72 Local, Auxiliary, and Remote Station config- connect the output of the PIM-2 to any UL listed Centronics parallel printer. parallel printer must support the EPSON FX com- set. PIM-2 input and output connectors are DB-25 female. RESET on the PIM-2 causes the unit to read the settings. The status LED is lit when the unit is Do not use the COPY button. NFPA Proprietary and UL 1076 configurations, use printer Model PAL-1, a UL listed for fire Centronics printer. parallel printer is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper paper jam and connection to the PIM-2. The PIM-2 is supervised for power, connection to the and connection to the PIM-1. Wiring Diagram Maximum distance from PIM-2 to parallel printer is 6 feet. modules must be in the same room. PIM-2 power (PWR) to the 5 VDC, 600mA supplied with PIM-2. The transformer 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.5A max. input and output connectors are DB-25 female. RESET on the PIM-2 causes the unit to read the settings. The status LED is lit when the unit is Do not use the COPY button. revision 8.0 or higher of CXL firmware to support this is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper out, paper and connection to PIM-2. is supervised for power, connection to printer and TO NOTES 6 AND 7) IT IS NOT SUPERVISED DATA INTEGRITY BETWEEN AND THE PRINTER IN UL LISTED ELECTRICAL BOX Information Number Parallel Printer Instructions Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 4/94

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATTIONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICA Beam Smoke Detector Beam Smoke Detector Compatible with MXL, MXL-IQ (CZM-4), 3 (ZB-35), and PXL Easy Alignment and Installation Transmitter and Receiver Installed in the Same Two-Wire Installation Suitable for Ranges from 17 Feet to 280 Feet to 100M in Canada) Response Behavior Selectable in Three Sensitivity High Immunity to Extraneous Light Integrated Multi-Coincidence Circuit Suppresses and Optical Noise Signals Automatic Digital Compensation of Ambient Automatic and Comprehensive Self-Test Operates According to the Principle of Light- by Smoke Listed, ULC Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics PBA-1191 Linear Beam provide reliable monitoring over long dis- that range from 17 feet to 280 feet. The PBA- detector works in conjunction with a number of reflectors, according to the requirements of the PBA-1191 Linear Beam Detector was developed to a wide range of applications, therefore where it can be used to supplement or replace point- smoke detectors. Some ideal applications are: or high ceiling rooms (atriums and warehouses), hangars, churches, computer rooms, museums, corridors, historical buildings, rooms with com- ceiling structures (beam construction), structures to frequent tremors, buildings whose walls flex a result of temperature change or wind conditions. PBA-1191 Linear Beam Detector consists of a (IRLED) which emits an invisible infrared (IR) through the transmitter lens. The IR pulse the protected area to reach the reflector opposite the detector and is reflected back to detector. The detector receiver lens directs the IR pulse to a silicon photodiode. The resulting signal is evaluated by the detector electronics. attenuation of the IR pulse by smoke particles via and absorption, results in an alarm condition. PBA-1191 Detector has three sensitivity settings, standard, and increased. The response is set with DIP switch (S1), (S2). Transmitter intensity (strong, weak) is to be set with switch (S3). NUMBER Prism Reflector Detector Adjustment Kit Adjustment Kit Adjustment Kit PBL-1191 Detector Adjustment Kit is required for Electrical Adjustment and Mechanical Alignment the PBA-1191 Linear Beam Detector. Information Information to Installation Manual P/N 315-094912 for detailed No. Base Reflector x 20 cm Flat Reflector x 10 cm Flat Reflector Kit Heater Filter Filter Detector For Use in Canada Please add a suffix to the model No. for accessories used with the detector. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. lb. PBR-1191 Retroreflecting Prism has the shape of a whose lateral faces are formed by isosceles triangles. Light entering through the base is reflected twice on the lateral faces and back through the base. The base is equipped a reflector heater. If condensation is possible, the should be connected to a 24V supply. reflect the received light beam back the path of incidence. The design of all the minimizes the effect of vibration and structural and PBR-1193 are flat reflector foils. The foils of microprismic elements that are formed by synthetic resin sealed to a plastic sub- & PBR-1193 Flat Reflector T Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 1/97

PE-11 Smoke Detector AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Advanced Field Cleanable Chamber Design Self Diagnostic Multi-Color LED for Normal, Trouble or Alarm Low-Profile Design Easy Twist-In Base Design Made in USA at ISO 9001 Facility Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM NYMEA Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics PE-11 Series Photoelectric Detector, with its microprocessor controlled self- circuitry, eliminates cumbersome sensitivity test It is the most advanced detector in its class. detector employs a simple twist-in base for ease of and has a field cleanable/replaceable and bug screen. This detector is highly immune false alarm caused by deceptive phenomena such as or RF. The PE-11 has a full range of accessories including remote alarm indicator, remote sensi- and alarm indicator, relay and audible base adapters, a base adapter that allows use in older Cerberus DB-3S Series bases. PE-11 is a two-wire, plug-in type photoelectric smoke which is compatible with Cerberus Pyrotronics SXL, and System 3 conventional systems and on loops of MXL Series, IXL and XL3 analog- systems. PE-11 contains an infra-red light emitting diode (LED) a light sensing photodiode arranged so that under conditions, light from the LED does not reach the When smoke enters the photo chamber, light from the IR LED is scattered by the smoke par- and is received by the photodiode. The electrical produced by the photodiode is compared to a set alarm threshold, and if sufficient to indicate an latches the detector alarm. The PE-11 is reset at the panel. PE-11 has self-testing circuitry which tests the detector defective operation or contamination every 6 – 7 If a problem is detected, the multi-color LED will flash amber until the problem is corrected. detector flashes green in normal operation. In the mode, the detector will flash red every 2-3 seconds, latch into alarm, alerting the control panel to the alarm This microprocessor-controlled self-diagnostic eliminates the need for external test meters or equipment for detector testing and also alerts users trouble conditions prior to periodic system checks. detector is field cleanable by twisting the detector out the base, unsnapping the chamber from the outer cover cleaning or replacing the removable chamber labyrinth bug screen. PE-11 utilizes the low-profile DB-11 surface mounting which may be used with a 4 inch square or octagonal as well as a single-gang electrical box. The PE-11 has NUMBER base assembly into which the detector is installed be a twist/lock design with screw clamp terminals. A lock shall be installed in those areas where tamper installation is required as indicated in the draw- detector or group of detectors shall require a two-wire of #18 AWG thermoplastic fixture wire enclosed in or #18 AWG limited energy shielded cable without if permitted by local building codes. All wiring be approved for fire alarm use and in compliance with and local codes. detector shall be Cerberus Pyrotronics Model PE-11 a DB-11 surface mounting base. Specifications Specifications Requirements: Normal – 100mA peak – 40mA – 26.6 VDC Range: Temperature: 0 – 39 Information Information non-condensing Number Photoelectric Smoke Surface Mount Base Red LED, Ceiling Mount Remote Multi-Color LED, Wall Mount Red LED, Wall Mount Remote Multi-Color LED, Ceiling Module Adapter for PE-11 to DB-3 Base Detector Locking Kit Maintenance Kit Canada, Please Order: Photoelectric Smoke Surface Mount Base clamp terminals for easy wiring. The base has an concealed locking device to prevent unauthorized removal. PE-11 is capable of operating both a remote lamp and relay or audible base when used with a PXL or MXL control panel, other panels will allow one accessory detector. The RSA-1

PE-3 and PE-3T Smoke Detectors AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Advanced Photo Chamber Design High Immunity Against Dust Resistant to Condensation and Other Alarm Causing Conditions Field Cleanable Photo Chamber Detector Alarm Verification Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, and City of Chicago Cerberus Pyrotronics PE-3 Series Photoelectric Smoke operates on the light scattering principle. The photo chamber, because of its advanced design, highly immune to false and nuisance alarm causing such as dust and condensation. The detector is with a field cleanable photo chamber. The PE-3 Detector provides an excellent response to a broad of both flaming and smoldering fire conditions. PE-3 has been developed for use in a wide range of industrial, institutional and residential applica- PE-3 Series meets the requirements of the Act. PE-3 Series contains a light emitting diode (LED) and a sensing photodiode arranged in a pattern so that, normal conditions, the light emitted by the LED does reach the photodiode. When smoke enters the photo light emitted from the LED is scattered by the particles and received by the photodiode. The signal produced by the photodiode is amplified the detector circuitry and compared to a preset alarm level. When the electrical signal is greater than preset threshold, the detector verifies the alarm condi- and then locks into alarm. The PE-3 Series must be at the control panel. PE-3 Series electrical sensitivity is set at the factory and be monitored in the field by using the Cerberus Model TM-PE3 Sensitivity Test Module. The test jack is accessible from the front of the housing enabling the user to perform sensitivity without removing the detector from its base. PE-3 Series is easily cleaned by removing the detector the base, removing the detector cover and then the cover. The chamber should be cleaned with a or soft cloth and then blown clean. optional 135 (57 Thermal Sensor is available with Model PE-3T. When the optional Thermal Sensor is an alarm condition will be initiated when the around the Thermal Sensor reaches 135 At this point the Thermal Contacts close and the locks into alarm. PE-3 utilizes the low profile surface mounting base, DB-3S, which may be attached to either a 4″ octago- 4″ square wiring box or single gang outlet box – or the base Model ADB-3, which must be attached to a 4″ deep wiring box. Both the DB-3S and the ADB-3 screw clamp terminals for all electrical connections, contacts for reliability and contain a provision for optional concealed locking mechanism to prevent removal of the detector head. NUMBER is possible to connect either one remote lamp or a relay, Model RR-3/3S, or an audible base, Model if required. detector or group of detectors shall require a two wire of #18 AWG thermoplastic fixture wire enclosed in or #18 AWG limited energy shielded cable without if permitted by local building codes. All wiring shall approved for fire alarm use and in compliance with and local codes. required, the Smoke Detector shall contain a 135 temperature self restoring heat sensor. Actuation of device shall activate and lock in the detector alarm detector shall be Cerberus Pyrotronics Model PE-3, or PE-3T with a DB-3S surface mounting base or ADB-3 base. Specifications Requirements: Normal – 100ua max. – 135mA. max. Range: min., 27V max. Temperature: (0 to 100 UL standard Wt. Smoke Detector Smoke Detector with Thermal Sensor Profile Surface Mount Base Trim Ring for Base .5 3 Audible Base Relay or RLI-2 Lamp (LED) or RL-40 Remote Lamp (Incandescent) Kit for DB-3S and ADB-3 .5 Test Module .45 .45 .45 .22 .45 .45 .45 .45 .22 .45 PE-3 is capable of operating a remote alarm lamp or relay Model RR-3/3S. The Model RR-3/3S relay

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Interface Module Interface to Remote Printers Interface to Serial Printers, Video Display (MXL-VDT), Parallel Printers (PAL-1) PIM-2, MXL Color Graphics System and MXL Color Terminals (MXL-GT) RS-232C Communication Terminal Block Connector Bi-Directional Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA and City of Chicago Approved PIM-1 is an MXL option module which provides an RS-232C port for connection to peripheral devices as serial printers, CRTs and VDTs. The PIM-1 mounts standoffs in the MXL enclosure. It connects to the or MMB-2 and provides a screw terminal block for wiring. PIM-1 provides a supervised connection to the PIM-2 printer module to allow MXL to operate with any listed printer (such as PAL-1). PIM-1 also provides full control and annunciation of the MXL Color System (MXL-G) and Color Terminal Systems equipment is approved for operation over the tempera- range of 0 to 49 and Architect Specifications and Architect Specifications between the MXL system and remote periph- devices such as printers, CRTs and VDTs shall be by the PIM-1 module. The PIM-1 shall mount in MXL enclosure and provide a standard screw terminal for field wiring. The interface shall be RS-232C and ground isolation between the MXL and the periph- devices. Data Data Ratings for RS-232C 12 VDC 5mA cable length 25 feet Data Data on four standoffs in the MXL enclosure (MBR-2). For that use the MKB-4 keyboard, the PIM-1 on the back of the MKB-4. can also mount in the RCC-1 Remote Display and to provide remote printers, VDTs or Graphics. NUMBER Diagram Diagram to jumper G1 place if the printer is jumper G1 if System has unsupervised CONNECTIONS This table refers to whether or not the wiring connections are supervised. table does not refer to the type of printer used in the System. Terminals TB1-8 and 9 are connected together on the PIM-1. The busy signal from the printer prevents the loss of characters if the printer falls Refer to the printer manual for the proper pin [usually 11 (TB-1-3) or 20 Information Information Number Interface Module Instructions Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 9/95

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Interface Module MXL Supervised Parallel Printer Interface CXL Supervised Printer Interface Supervises Any UL EDP Listed Parallel Printer Supervises the PAL-1 UL 864 Listed Printer Interfaces to PIM-1 on MXL and CXC-2 CXL Configuration Dipswitches Plug-in AC Power Transformer Supervises Printer for On/Off Line, On, Paper Out, Paper Jam Wiring Faults Serial to Parallel Data Conversion ULC Listed, CSFM and Approved PIM-2 module is an interface that allows the con- of UL listed EDP Centronics parallel printers to MXL and CXL systems. It converts the RS-232 printer outputs of the MXL and CXL to a parallel interface. PIM-2 includes a plug-in AC power transformer supplies power to the unit. (NFPA 72 proprietary require that the PIM-2 transformer be con- to a UL listed UPS). The unit also provides a set dip switches for configuration. It supervises either a Centronics type parallel printer or a PAL-1, UL parallel printer. is used in conjunction with the PIM-1 when connected an MXL system. It allows the MXL and CXL to fully the attached printer for Power On, On/Off Paper Out, Paper Jam. It also supervises the wiring the MXL or CXL and the printer. and Architect Specifications system shall be provided with a fully supervised, UL parallel printer. Conversion from RS232 serial data parallel format shall be accomplished using the PIM- This unit shall include configuration dipswitches and allow either the Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL or CXL to fully supervise the printer for all possible conditions including Paper Out, Paper Jam, On/Off Power On and any wiring faults between the and the printer. PIM-2 shall include a plug-in AC power transformer. used in an NFPA 72 proprietary type system, a UL UPS shall provide power to both the PIM-2 and printer. used with an MXL system, the PIM-2 shall be to the PIM-1 serial module. When used with a system, the PIM-2 shall be connected directly to printer port on the CXL’s CXC-2 module. which do not supervise the printer for wiring will not be considered equal. NUMBER Wiring Diagram Maximum cable distance from PIM-1 to PIM-2 cable is 25 The two modules must be in the same room. maximum distance from the PIM-2 to the parallel is 6 feet. The two modules must be in the same power (PWR) is connected to the 5 VDC, 600mA supplied with PIM-2. The transformer requires VAC, 60 Hz, 0.5A max. NFPA 72 local, Auxiliary, and Remote Station configura- connect the output of the PIM-2 to any UL listed EDP parallel printer. parallel printer must support the EPSON FX com- set. input and output connectors are DB-25 female. RESET on the PIM-2 causes the unit to read the settings. The status LED is lit when the unit is Do not use the COPY button. NFPA 72 Proprietary and UL 1076 configurations, use printer Model PAL-1, a UL listed for fire Centronics parallel printer. parallel printer is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper paper jam and connection to the PIM-2. The PIM-2 is supervised for power, connection to the and connection to the PIM-1. 1 Serial Interface Communication Parameters Wiring Diagram Maximum distance from PIM-2 to parallel printer is 6 feet. modules must be in the same room. PIM-2 power (PWR) to the 5 VDC, 600mA supplied with PIM-2. The transformer 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.5A max. input and output connectors a

PL-35 Limiting Module for SXL Notification Appliance Circuits AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS PL-35 PL-35 Allows Power Limited Wiring Notification Appliance Circuits Compact Module Design Easy Installation Listed for Coded Circuits Pyrotronics Power Limiting Module, PL-35, allows use of power limited fire-protective signaling circuit on 24 VDC notification appliance circuits. The of installing a PL-35 module is that the 24 VDC appliance circuits and alarm initiating circuits be installed in the same raceway or enclosure. systems and installations with coded notification using the PL-35 meet National Electric Code power requirements. The PL-35 can be used only in Pyrotronics SXL control panels for their alarm appliance circuits. PL-35 converts the systems 24 VDC electrical non- limited circuit to a power limited circuit. The modules energy circuitry contains a non-replaceable current device. The power limiting module is to be con- in series with the electrical non-power limited source as shown in the connection diagram. The PL- may be used with either Style Z (Class A) or Style W B) wiring. Specifications conversion of an SXL non-power limited 24 VDC alarm appliance circuits to a power limited circuit be made by the use of a Cerberus Pyrotronics Model unit shall be UL listed. The unit shall be connected in with the electrical non-power limited energy source shall contain a non-replaceable overcurrent device. power limiting device shall be installed inside the fire system panel. The power limited module shall the option of using either Style Z (Class A) or Style (Class B) circuits. Information Number oz. to Installation Instruction P/N 315-088567. NUMBER Diagram STYLE W (CLASS B) terminal 1 of PL-35 the following: Terminal BL1-2, BL2-2 The + supervisory line may be wired to the control panel or may be thru PL-35 to the panel. STYLE Z (CLASS A) negative supervisory lines must be separately fused. Connect to the PL-35 terminals as follows: Circuit 1 Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 2 BL1-2 BL2-2 terminal BL1-2 BL2-2 1 1 Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 12/95

PLM-35 Limiting Module for All Pyrotronics Control Panels AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS PLM-35 PLM-35 Allows Power Limited Wiring Notification Appliance Circuits Compact Module Design Easy Installation Listed Pyrotronics Power Limiting Module, PLM-35, the use of power limited fire-protective signaling conductors on 24 VDC notification appliance circuits. benefit of installing a PLM-35 module is that the 24 VDC appliance circuits and alarm initiating circuits be installed in the same raceway or enclosure. and installations using the PLM-35 meet National Code power limiting requirements. The PLM-35 can used in all Cerberus Pyrotronics control panels for their appliance circuits. PLM-35 converts the systems 24 VDC electrical non- limited circuit to a power limited circuit. The modules energy circuitry contains a non-replaceable current device. The power limiting module is to be con- in series with the electrical non-power limited source as shown in the connection diagram. The may be used with either Style Z (Class A) or Style W B) wiring. Specifications conversion of a non-power limited 24 VDC notification circuits to a power limited circuit shall be made the use of a Cerberus Pyrotronics Model PLM-35. unit shall be UL listed. The unit shall be connected in with the electrical non-power limited energy source shall contain a non-replaceable overcurrent device. power limiting device shall be installed inside the fire system panel. The power limited module shall the option of using either Style Z (Class A) or Style (Class B) circuits. Information Number Power Limiting to Installation Instruction P/N 315-093495 NUMBER Diagram STYLE W (CLASS B) terminal 1 of PL-35 the following: terminal 35 terminal 3 (MX-316), TB1/2, 3/4 terminal 3/4, 7/8, 11/12, or 15/16 TB2, terminal 2 or 3 terminal 22 or 24 The + supervisory line may be wired to the control panel or may be thru PLM-35 to the panel. STYLE Z (CLASS A) negative supervisory lines must be separately fused. Connect to the PLM-35 terminals as follows: Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit 3 7 3 4 3, 7, 11 or 15 4, 8, 12 or 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 Issue

PM-31 & PM-32 3 Program Matrix Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS PM-31 PM-31 PM-32 PM-32 Extreme Programming Thousands of Circuit Listed CSFM, NYMEA, Approved program matrix modules, models PM-31 and PM-32 designed to offer selective /multiple circuit activation a variety of initiating circuits depending on the functions that are to be achieved upon system model PM-31 is a printed circuit matrix board intercon- so as to accept any number of ten (10) inputs, any or combination of which can activate any number ten (10) preselected controlled circuits. This is accom- through the use of diodes, properly placed and to the matrix board. (See flow chart on reverse typical circuitry). Typical application examples are: of selected relays from two or more independent paths, operation of multiple annunciator circuits a single input, activating an audible signal circuit from number of initiating device circuits, etc. The unit occu- two (2) standard module positions. model PM-32 provides thirty-six (36) individual diodes separate anode and cathode terminal connections to diode. Any combination of diode inputs and outputs be combined together to provide the isolation or logic required by the System 3 Control Panel A typical application would be the activation of devices on the fire floors, floor above and floor PM-32 module occupies one standard module space. may be double mounted, two to a module space necessary. modules PM-31 and PM-32 are Underwriters Labora- Inc. Listed and CSFM, NYMEA approved. NUMBER 3169 Specifications program matrix module shall be a Cerberus Pyrotron- model PM-31 or PM-32. With these units it shall be to make any combination of available inputs to any combination of available outputs. The mod- shall utilize a printed circuit matrix board with diodes appropriately interconnected to achieve the desired controlling preselected audible circuits, relays, PM-31 and PM-32 shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Listed and CSFM, NYMEA approved. Wiring Information input and output circuit is capable of carrying current up to .5 Amp. @ 30VDC. Diodes are rated at 200V (peak voltage). Information No. Matrix Module w/o 10 inputs and 10 program details factory) lb. (.45 kg.) Matrix Module (1 x 36) lb. (.45 kg.) The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 1/94

PNC-2Z Expansion Module for PXL AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 2 Style Z (Class A) Notification Appliance (NAC) Compatible with Cerberus Pyrotronics Notification Appliances 2 Amp, Power Limited Circuits Programmable for Coded or Non- Operation Bypass Option Programmable Listed, ULC Listed model PNC-2Z Notification Appliance Circuit module 2 programmable, power limited circuits. They the same device compatibility as the circuits con- in the PPS-10M power supply module. The PNC-2Z listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Underwrit- Laboratories of Canada. PXL basic system contains 4 Notification Appliance on the power supply module. The system can be with one additional power supply module and 4 modules for a total of 16 NAC notification circuit is provided with terminals for Style Z (Class A) or Style Y (Class B) wiring. Each is rated for 2 amps and is power limited per UL 864 The circuits are compatible with a wide of Cerberus Pyrotronics notification appliances. refer to compatibility chart. notification circuits default to steady operation, but can programmed for March Time, Temporal or California Fire Code operation. Any circuit can alternatively programmed as non-silenceable (waterflow service for In that event, the circuit is steady. Temporal is required for building evacuation by NFPA Standard as of July 1996. Information Information NAC Expansion Module for PXL more information on PXL please refer to catalog #8100. installation Instruction for the Model PNC-2Z is P/N 315-093975. NUMBER Diagram Diagram Device List Device List Horns with Strobe Stroke Bells Strobes Strobes Strobes Plate Electro-Mech. Horns/ Strobes Horns/ Strobes Module Bell/Strobe Plate Horns Whoop Horns Mini-Horns Mini-Horns/ 8-Tone SCM-F/FW Synchronizing Control Module must be used with these modules to synchronize the strobes. = Ceiling = Explosion Proof = Flush = Flush w/Terminals = Gang Mount = Horizontal = Low Current = Surface = Single Stroke = Surface w/Terminals = Universal Mount = Vertical = White Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/96

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Amp Power Supply for PXL 10 Amps Available for Notification Appliances 1 Amp, Power-Limited, Auxiliary Port 4 Notification Appliance Circuits Rated Amps and Power-Limited 3 System Relays for Alarm, Supervisory, 2 Amp Battery Charger Provides Connection to all System Supports Up to 2, 32 Zone Remote Listed, ULC Listed Model PPS-10M, power supply for PXL, is a non- 10 Amp power supply designed to meet the need for power in fire alarm systems. When in a PXL fire alarm system it is listed by Underwriters Inc. and Underwriters Laboratories of PPS-10M supplies the power necessary to drive a PXL alarm system. In addition, it supplies 10 amps of power all other system requirements. Those 10 amps can be for Notification Appliances or 1 amp can be used a power limited auxiliary port leaving 9 amps for power supply comes complete with 4 Notification Circuits. Each NAC is rated 2 amps and is fully limited. The additional power available for Notifica- Appliances can be directed to PNC-2Z, Notification Circuit Modules. power supplies also include one each, Form for alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions. These are rated at 5 amps for resistive loads. They transfer and only when their designated conditions power supplies contain the data interface to system modules both internal and external to the PXL The data bus for external modules, such as the and LED-4 remote annunciators, supplies amp of to these devices. Up to 8 modules in 2 remote can be connected to the PPS-10M to provide annunciators for a 32 zone system. your system requires an additional power supply it can added locally at the PXL in a PSE-2 enclosure. A model PXL transformer and appropriately sized battery set required for each PPS-10M. Information Information more information on PXL please refer to catalog #8100. installation Instruction for the PPS-10M is P/N 315-094202 NUMBER Diagram Diagram Notification Appliances Notification Appliances Horns with Strobe Stroke Bells Strobes Strobes Strobes Plate Electro-Mech. Horns/ Strobes Horns/ Strobes Module Bell/Strobe Plate Whoop Horns Mini-Horns/ 8-Tone

FM-200TM Extinguishing Systems Switch ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Shutdown/Interlock Functions System is Released Mechanically Operated Only by Pressure of Discharge Can Perform Shutdown/Interlock Directly Connected Anywhere in Discharge Piping Foot Length of Connecting or Tubing Listed Approved as Standard PS Model (Shown) PS-EXP Explosion Proof Version Pressure Switch is of three pole double throw type and activated by the FM-200TM pressure in the system piping the time of system discharge. It is used to signal the fire panel that discharge is occurring so that the panel perform its assigned shutdown/interlock functions in the of manual mechanical release of the system. It can be used to perform shutdown/interlock functions if desired. pressure is obtained from the outlet of a tee anywhere in the discharge piping. Connection from tee to the pressure switch can be made with inch copper tubing and tubing fittings or with 1/8 or inch 40 pipe and 300 pound class malleable iron or iron fittings. The maximum length of connecting or pipe is 100 feet. Specifications Pressure Switch shall be provided to operate upon actual of FM-200TM into the system piping. The pressure shall be so connected with the fire control panel that panel will perform its assigned shutdown/interlock in the event of manual mechanical release of the Information No. Switch Weight NUMBER Diagram Series FM-200TM Opersted Switch Switch may be mounted in any position but preferred installation is as shown. Any load connected to the switch must not exceed switch rating utilize a suitable protection device. (ie., circuit breaker, fuse) Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 9/

FM-200TM Extinguishing Systems Trip ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Mechanical Closing of or Doors Operated Only by Pressure of Discharge Connected Anywhere in Discharge Foot Length of Connecting or Tubing Listed Approved Pressure Trip is activated by the FM-200TM pressure in system piping at the time of system discharge. It is to release door, or damper-closing hardware, or other or spring operated devices. Trip damper release is recommended for vent which continue to move air during a deceleration following electrical fan shut down. The use of a delay timer to allow for the deceleration period have no effect if the system is discharged mechanically, dampering is necessary for sound design. Pressure Trip is designed for a maximum load of 100 (This is based on a minimum pressure of 75 at the Pressure Trip.) pressure is obtained from the outlet of a tree anywhere in the discharge piping. Connection from tree to the pressure switch can be made with inch 40 pipe and 300 pound class malleable iron or iron fittings. The maximum length of connecting or pipe is 100 feet. Specifications Pressure Trip shall be provided to release damper (or closing hardware upon actual discharge of FM-200TM the system piping, so as to assure damper or door in the event of mechanical release of the system. Information No. Trip Weight NUMBER Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 9/

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Module for PXL 4 Form Relays SPDT 5A Rating Programmable by Zone Bypass Option Programmable Listed, ULC Listed Information Relay Module for PXL more information on PXL please refer to catalog #8100. installation Instruction for the Model PRM-4 is P/N 315-093955. Model PRM-4 Relay Module contains 4 form single double throw relays. Each relay is rated for 5 amp loads. PXL basic system contains dedicated relays for Alarm, and Trouble Conditions. Up to eight PRM-4 can be added to the PXL to provide one relay for of the 32 initiating zones. relays can be programmed to change state on the of any number of initiating zone activations ( Alternatively, any relay can be easily programmed an extra global alarm, global supervisory or global relay. Relays can be bypassed in the PXL program PRM-4 relay module is listed by Underwriters Labora- Inc. and by Underwriters Laboratories of Canada. NUMBER Diagram Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 4/96

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 3 Power Supply Multiple Usage Deadfront Construction Modularized ULC Listed, FM, NYMEA and of Chicago Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics power supply model PS-35 is a transformer and bridge rectifier designed for with control panel model CP-35 or to provide addi- DC power for notification appliances. units, which are modularized for System 3 enclosure are of deadfront construction and contain a strip, circuit breaker with a reset switch on the AC protection fuses on the DC outputs and a receptacle jumper plug connection directly into the control panel, CP-35. PS-35 occupies three module positions within the 3 enclosure. model PS-35 provides a rectified, full wave 24 VDC from an input supply of 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The consists of a main power phase and a trouble phase, separately fused, and a common neutral. 24 volt full wave output is rated at 10 Amp. DC, full When the PS-35 is used to power the control panel the second output (terminals 5 & 6, rated at 24 1.5 Amp.) is used to power modules internally and wired within the control unit enclosure. protection is provided across both input phases as as the DC output. When an additional PS-35 power supply is used for notification appliance power in a CP-35 con- system with emergency power, a transfer module is required to supply emergency power to the appliance circuit. and Architect Specifications power supply for the alarm system shall be a Pyrotronics model PS-35. The unit shall be Laboratories, Inc. Listed. unit shall provide a full wave of rectified 24 VDC output at 10 Amp., full load. The PS-35 shall be capable of 100 detection zones (49 ZU-35 zone modules 4 fully loaded alarm extender modules, model AE- simultaneously. rated output, which shall be completely fused, shall be at a plug receptacle. A second output (terminals & 6, rated at 24 VDC, 1.5 Amp.) is used to power internally housed and wired within the control unit power supply shall be of deadfront construction and in a steel enclosure compatible with the modular- alarm system. Externally mounted 120 VAC/24 VDC shall not meet the intent of this specification. NUMBER Information Requirement: VAC, 50/60 Hz, wire, 3.5A max. model PS-35, plus the CP-35 control panel occupy normally taken by eight modules. The power supply the CP-35 must be mounted in the upper right-hand of a System 3 enclosure. This should be consid- when sizing the enclosure. power supplies, if required, are mounted to the modules to be powered by them. Wiring Information No. Supply lb. (8.3 The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misappli-cation of Cerberus equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 8/94

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 3 Power Supply Multiple Usage Deadfront Construction Modularized FM Approved for Pre-Action Deluge Sprinklers Listed, ULC Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics Power Supply Model PS-35S a step-down transformer and bridge designed for use Control Panel Model CP-35 and to provide power regulated pre-action releasing service. units, which are modularized for System 3 enclo- mounting, are of deadfront construction and terminal strips, a circuit breaker with a reset on the AC input, protection fuses on the DC and a receptacle for jumper plug connection into the control Panel Model CP-35. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 Model PS-35S provides a rectified, full wave 24 VDC from an input supply of 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The consists of a main power phase and a trouble each separately fused, and a common neutral. 24 volt full wave output is rated at 10 Amps DC, full When the PS-35S is used to power the control system, the second output (terminals 5 and 6, at 24 VDC 2 Amps, bridge only) is used to power modules through a DC-35S regulator and a transfer module for releasing pre-action or valves. This module combination is approved by for this application. Surge protection is provided both the input phases as well as the DC output. and Architect Specifications power supply for the alarm system shall be a Pyrotronics Model PS-35S. This unit shall be Laboratories Inc. listed. unit shall provide a full wave of rectified 24 VDC rated at 10 Amps full load. The PS-35S shall be of powering 100 detection zones (50 ZU-35 Modules and 4 fully loaded Alarm Extender Model AE-30U simultaneously.) rated output, which shall be completely fused, shall provided at a plug receptacle. A second output 5 and 6, rated at 24 VDC 2 Amps bridge only) used to power modules internally housed and wired the control unit enclosure. power supply shall be of a deadfront construction housed in a steel enclosure compatible with the alarm system. Externally mounted 120 VDC transformers shall not meet the intent of specification. NUMBER Information Wt. Supply lb. (8.3 kg.) Ratings Power Requirement: VAC, 50/60Hz, wire. 3.5A Max. Model PS-35S with the CP-35 Control Panel occupies normally taken by 8 modules. The power supply for CP-35 must be mounted in the upper right-hand of a System 3 enclosure. This should be consid- when sizing the enclosure. power supplies, if required, are mounted to the modules to be powered by them. Wiring The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as voids all warranties either expressed or implied in regard to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 10/94

PS-5N7 Interface/5 VDC Power Supply AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS MXL Network Interface Style 4 or Style 7 Communications 5 VDC Supply MKB Connections Same Mounting as PIM-1 May be Used with PIM-1 Provides Remote Display and Module Integral Part of RCC-1 Connects to OMM Cardcage Supports all MXLV Plug-in Card Modules Listed, ULC Listed, NYMEA, CSFM and City of Chicago Approved Remote Audio Extender PS-5N7 is an MXL module which acts as a Style 4 or 7 RS-485 network interface to other MXL modules, as the MKB-1 and MKB-2. PS-5N7 can be mounted remotely in the MXL enclo- either on the rear of an MKB-1 keyboard/display, or an MBR-2, MSE-2 or RCC-1 enclosure backbox. It connections from the MXL network and from a 24 supply such as the MMB-1, PSR-1, PS-35 or Alarm- model AS/PS5-BF5-24-UL. used with an MKB, the PS-5N7 may also incorporate PIM-1 module and acts as a complete display/keyboard remote peripheral interface. used in conjunction with an auxiliary power supply, cardcages and MXLV modules are capable of being supported by PS-5N7 to communicate with the MMB- PS-5N7 occupies one of the MXL network nodes. It not occupy an MXL network address. MXL modules to the MXL network through the PS-5N7 occupy addresses. equipment is approved for operation over the tem- range of 0 to 49 and Architect Specifications of remote MXL modules to the MXL network shall provided by the PS-5N7 module. The PS-5N7 shall also 5 VDC to those modules. When used with the keyboard/display, the PS-5N7 shall provide a com- display and command center. PS-5N7 shall mount on the rear of the MKB-1 or in the or MSE-2 enclosures. It shall be capable of being in conjunction with the PIM-1 peripheral interface PS-5N7 shall occupy one MXL network node. The PS- shall be capable of connecting to OMM card-cages fully supporting all MXLV plug-in cards. Ratings VDC Input: VDC Output: VDC 300mA max. VDC, 500mA max. VP-P max., 150mA max. NUMBER Information Number Interface Supervisory Instructions Interface Module Control Center MXLV Modules Number Slot Cardcage Slot Cardcage Control Card Supervisory/Riser Card Supervisory Card Channel, 8 Class B Zones Channel, 8 Class B Zones Channel, 8 Class B Zones Channel, 8 Class B Zones Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones Channel, 4 Class A or B Zones Telephone Zone Module Watt Amplifier/Zone Module Wiring Diagram in the RCC-1 Enclosure (Without a PIM-1) Power Supply and Network Wiring Diagram to the following Installation Instructions as to the: Manual, P/N 315-092036 315-090375 315-090911 315-085062 The minimum wire gauge is 18 AWG. Use a maximum of 80 ohms per pair of wires for the connections. 24 VDC connections should be a maximum of 10 Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair for network Terminate the shield ONLY at the MMB-1 enclosure. Eliminate all Network B wiring for Style 4. DO NOT place the PS-5N7 at the end of the network. This configuration is power limited to NFPA 70 NEC760. Connection to an OMM-1 all equipment for configuration in the enclosure. to the following Installation for further information: 315-090911 P/N 315-090267 Restrictions max. = 500mA No. Use the PS-5N7 Module in a Remote Enclosure: Use the PS-5N7 Module

PSE-1 and PSE-2 for the PXL AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS PSE-1 Houses 16 Zones, NAC 10 Amp Power and 15 Amp Hour Set PSE-2 House a Maximum Zone System With 2-10 Power Supplies, 16 and 32 Programm- Relays Constructed of Sturdy 16 Steel Available in Black or Red Standard Key Access Dead-Front Option Flush Trim Option Listed, ULC Listed PSE-1 and PSE-2 enclosures are built in the tradition all Cerberus Pyrotronics systems. They are sturdy for life and attractive to add to your buildings appear- When used in a PXL fire alarm system it is listed by Laboratories, Inc. and Underwriters Laborato- of Canada. PSE-1 houses a PXL system including up to 16 device circuits, one power supply module PPS- one transformer model PTX-12 and 15 Amp hour set. Up to either 2 PNC-2Z NAC modules or 2 Relay Modules (or one of each) can also be in the enclosure. PSE-2 can house all the above equipment and expand system to its maximum compliment of 32 IDC 16 32 relays and 2 power supplies. When 2 power are installed, 2 PTX-12 transformers are required can be installed in the enclosure. PSE-2 comes complete with a battery bracket which for mounting 2-15 AH battery sets. The bracket can removed and one model BTX-1, 31 AH battery set can installed; or one PMK-2 bracket which holds 8 relay model PRM-4, can be installed. Additional sets should be removed to a separate enclosure as the Model BB-55 battery box. NUMBER Drawings Enclosure trim and dead front options are available for both PSE-1 and PSE-2 enclosures. They come standard in Pyrotronics black, however, both enclosures and trim kits are available in red to satisfy local code Both enclosures include module mounting model PMK-1. Number Information Small Enclosure – Black Large Enclosure – Black Small Enclosure – Red Large Enclosure – Red Small Dead Front Door Large Dead Front Door Small Enclosure Flush Trim Red Flush Trim for PSE 1/1R Large Enclosure Flush Trim Red Flush Trim for PSE-2/2R Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket more information on PXL please refer to catalog #8100. installation Instruction for the PSE-1 is P/N 315-094154. installation Instruction for the PSE-2 is P/N 315-095069. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Enclosure Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 4/96

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Power Supply 24VDC Power Supply 5VDC Regulated 6 Amp or 12 Amp Output Power Options Microprocessor Controlled Status Indicator Lights Common Alarm Relay Common Trouble Relay Degrade Mode 19″ Rack Mount Capability 2 Amp. 24VDC Class A Power Output Power Limited Auxiliary Power Output Listed, ULC Listed CSFM, NYMEA, FM and City of Chicago PSR-1 is a microprocessor controlled remote power and battery charger for use with the Cerberus MXL. It operates in conjunction with either an or MPS-12 to provide 6 or 12 Amps of power for with various MXL modules. When used with a NET-4 or plug in communication module, the PSR-1 a part of the MXL RS-485 network. It acts as an between remote option modules and the MXL. PSR-1 can be mounted in the MBR backbox and is an part of the MXLR or MXLRV remote units. It can be mounted in a graphic annunciator panel and used power an MOI/MOD annunciator driver set. The PSR-1 also be used to power a remote MKB-2 module. When with an MOI-7, a NET board is not required. Interface the network is provided by the MOI-7. PSR-1 provides LED status indicators for: Power On, Power On, 24VDC Aux. Power On, Battery Trouble, Power Trouble, Ground Fault, Transmit Enable, Trouble and Common Alarm. PSR-1 always requires an MPS-6 or MPS-12. PSR-1 provides a common alarm and a common relay. When connected to a MOM-2 or MOM-4 containing option modules, data is transferred to from the MXL through the PSR-1. If the MXL main fails or network communication is lost, the PSR- will continue to receive a common alarm or common signal from modules in the MOM-2 or MOM-4 which it is connected. When an alarm is received during operation, it can activate local notification appli- circuits. are provided for interface to the MPS-6 or and MOI-7, TSP-40 and a MOM-2 or MOM-4 on-board battery charger can charge up to 55 Amp batteries. Any PSR-1 can be interrogated by the Battery voltage, charge current, DC load and AC can be viewed on the MKB display. PSR-1 provides two 24VDC outputs: a 2 Amp output is to power MXL remote intelligent modules such as and ICPs. This output can be wired in a Class A configuration. When wired this way, a transfer relay supply power to these devices even during a single in the circuit. This output is power limited per NEC and is supervised. The other 24VDC output is used to MXL option modules. PSR-1 is UL, ULC listed and NYMEA, FM, CSFM This equipment is approved for operation over temperature range of 0 to 49 and Architect Specifications MXLR units shall be powered by a PSR-1 remote supply/network communication module. The PSR-1 be used with an MPS-6 or an MPS-12. The MPS-6 NUMBER MPS-12 each consists of a transformer, bridge line filter and resettable circuit breaker. The PSR-1 be capable of operating with a NET-4 or NET-7/7M communication module. When used with a NET module, the PSR-1 shall become a part of the MXL network. Any MXL option module which is con- to the PSR-1 will be capable of full bi-directional communication with the main MMB. PSR-1 shall provide 24VDC and 5VDC power to MXL modules. Connectors shall be supplied to interface PSR-1 with compatible MXL option modules. PSR-1 shall be capable of providing power to the output interface module and MOD-16 output driver for use with LED or lamp type annunciators or for Programmable Input Zones. PSR-1 shall provide one power limited Class A auxil- power output rated at 24VDC, 2 Amp and one 24VDC limited output. The Class A power output shall capable of being wired in a Class A configuration, able supply power to its connected devices even during a open in the wiring. When wired in a Class A configu- power circuit wiring shall be fully supervised and fault shall be indicated at the PSR-1 as well as the main unit. Power limiting shall be provided by a self thermal device. Fuses shall not be used to supply limiting. degrade alarm relay, degrade trouble relay, and on status LED shall be provided by the PSR-1. They be capable of operation in the event of MXL main failure or loss of network communication. LED shall indicate: Power On, 5VDC Aux. Power 24VDC Aux Power On, B

PTX-12 & PTX-12/230 Amp Transformers for PXL AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 12 Amp, 31 VAC Power Output 5 Amp, 120 VAC Maximum Power Separate Packaging for Ease of Secure Connection at Power Supply PTX-12/230 Input is 220/240 VAC, Listed, ULC Listed PTX-12 or PTX-12/230 Transformer supplies all power for the PXL fire alarm system. When installed in PXL it is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Laboratories of Canada. PTX-12 is a conventionally wound power transformer a 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 5 Amp maximum input and 31 VAC, 12 Amps to the PXL. The lead wires on the primary and secondary are securely fastened to at the PPS-10M power supply. This eliminates need for the installing electrician to supply any other connection device. PTX-12/230 is similar to the PTX-12 except that it a 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5 Amp maximum input. PTX-12 and the PTX-12/230 are individually packaged insure safe delivery and to ease installation. Information Information Number Amp Transformer for PXL Amp 220/240 Transformer PXL more information on PXL please refer to catalog #8100. installation Instruction for the PTX-12 is P/N 315-094180. installation Instruction for the PTX-12/230 is P/N 315-095036. NUMBER Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/96

FM-200TM Extinguishing Systems Box (Remote Manual Mechanical Control) ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Panel or Semi-flush Mount Top, Bottom or Side Cable Entry Non-Electric Means of System Release Cable Length Up to 100 Feet Corner Pulleys Allowed Listed, Pending Approved, Pending Remote Manual Control Pull Box is used to operate the lever on cylinder valves or selector valves. The Pull is connected to the control lever by means of 1/16 inch steel cable run in inch EMT or 3/8″ threaded pipe a corner pulley at each change in direction. 100 feet of and 18 corner pulleys can be used between the Pull and the control lever. The Pull Box can be surface, semi- or panel mounted, and the design provides for en- of the cable from the rear, top, bottom, or either side. A mounting box, with integral cable roller, is used for mounting. Pull Box provides a means of releasing the system reliance on electrical power. the Pull Box is used, a pressure switch should be to signal the fire control panel upon system dis- so as to assure performance of shutdown/interlock Specifications remote manual mechanical control Pull Box shall be for a means of releasing the system without the of electrical power. Pull Box shall be UL listed and FM approved. Information Weight No. Box Corner Pulley Corner Pulley Cable .08 .05 lb/ft NUMBER Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 Issue

PXL Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 12 Zone System Expandable to 32 10 Amp Base Power Supply Multiple Power Supplies Available – or Remote 4 Notification Appliance Circuits in System – Expandable to 16 2 Amp, Power Limited Notification Circuits Easy to Use, ATM-type Display for and Programming with 80 Character On-line Help Text for All System Operations Factory Programmed – Ready to Install Fully Field Programmable Options – No Tools Required Compatible with Cerberus Pyrotronics Initiating Devices and Appliances Sprinkler Supervisory Service with Relay Output Alarm Verification by Zone 150 Event History One Person Test Feature Zone and Output Bypass Password Protection ULC Listed, CSFM & NYMEA FM Pending PXL from Cerberus Pyrotronics is a conventional fire control panel designed to meet the changing needs the core of the fire alarm market. While providing basic protection in a flexible architecture, it also uses technol- designed for other markets to speed installation and to the response to fire. Combined with Cerberus smoke detectors, which long ago established a for quality in the industry, PXL fire alarm controls the most reliable and easy to use systems available PXL basic system consists of a microprocessor based with 12 alarm initiating circuits. At the heart of the flexible architecture is a 10 amp power supply with 2 amp battery charger. Although this supply is included in base PXL it can also be reproduced in the system. power supply includes 3 relays which are automatically in the event of fire alarm, supervisory conditions, trouble conditions – one relay for each type of condition. the power supply includes four notification circuits, each rated at 2 amps. These features NUMBER the power required to answer today needs for devices and remote communication of system status is reported on a 4 line LCD display in a similar to an automated teller machine. The system can quickly identify the condition of the facility by this display and/or individual zone LED Proper to conditions is indicated in the display by clear, to read messages which highlight the correct buttons press. When the user is confronted with multiple functions can be performed at the same time the system leads him or her to the most critical functions first. same display is used for system programming. The system, including many of the desirable software available in today systems, can be programmed this display without the need for a computer or programming tools. Further, most installers can all of these features without any training. basic PXL can be expanded conveniently to 32 zones, relays and 16 – 2 amp notification appliance circuits by two power supplies. A larger enclosure or standard enclosures are required. enclosures sizes are available for the PXL. The Model includes a single module mounting bracket which support one PZE-4B, in addition to the main control, for total of 16 initiating circuits. The PPS-10M power supply is mounted in this bracket with room for 2 other expan- cards, either PNC-2Z or PRM-4 Model PSE-2 is a larger enclosure which can support to 32 IDC two power supplies and the full complement bell and relay modules. If two power supplies are in- the batteries are to be moved to a Model BB-55 cabinet. Expansion Model PZE-4B is a 4 zone expander for the base PXL. zones are Style B (Class B) and can be converted to D (Class A) with the Model PZC-4D card. These Device Circuits (IDC – see NFPA 72) are compat- with all of Cerberus Pyrotronics currently available detectors and devices. Please refer to the on the wiring diagram for a complete list. maximum of 5 PZE-4B cards can be supported in any PXL Appliance Circuits Model PNC-2Z is a 2 circuit expander for the base PXL. PXL Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC – see NFPA come standard as Style Z (Class A). They are compat- with the majority of Cerberus Pyrotronics currently signaling devices. Please refer to the chart on the diagram for

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

PZC-4D Converter Module for PXL AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Converts IDC from Style B (Class B) Style D (Class A) Converts 4 Zones per Module Mounts to Existing PCM-1 or PZE-4B Modules Removable Terminal Blocks Listed, ULC Listed Model PZC-4D converts PXL Initiating Device Circuits Style B (Class B) to Style D (Class A). Notification Circuits do not require a converter module as are designed for either Class A or B use. PZC-4D mounts style to either PCM-1 or modules. The terminal blocks on the PZC-4D are to the original IDC terminals to simplify system Additionally, the terminal blocks are removable for service. PZC-4D converts 4 Initiating Device Circuits. Electrical and device compatibility of the IDC are not by the use of this module. End of line supervision is also the same as in Style B circuits. PZC-4D is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada. Information Zone Class A Converter Card PXL installation Instruction for the Model PZC-4D is P/N 315-094164. NUMBER Diagram Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 Issue

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Expansion Module for PXL 4 Style B (Class B) Initiating Device Circuits Compatible with Cerberus Pyrotronics Intiating Devices 30 Smoke Detectors per Circuit Programmable for Alarm Verification or Service by Zone Alarm Supervisory and Trouble LEDs by Zone Style D (Class A) Hardware Option Available Listed, ULC Listed Model PZE-4B zone expansion module for PXL four initiating device circuits which are fully They have the same device compatibility the initiating device circuits in the main PXL. They are by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Underwriters of Canada. PXL basic system consists of a microprocessor based with 12 alarm intiating circuits. The system can be to a maximum of 32 circuits via 5 model PZE-4B modules. is important to note that all features, including the software features, are available on all device circuits within the PXL. This allows maxi- flexibility in system design. Information Information Zone Expansion Module for PXL more information about PXL please refer to Catalog #8100. Installation Instruction for the Model PZE-4B is P/N 315-094065 Module Board are underneath the board) NUMBER Diagram Diagram Each IDC can support and supervise up to 30 ionization and type smoke detectors, and an unlimited number of devices. When a zone is in alarm, each IDC can operate the following: one ionization or photoelectric type smoke detector one relay base, or audible base, or remote alarm lamp Each IDC, if configured as an alarm verified zone, is capable of between a shorting-type device and a smoke detector alarm. Remote accessories can not be used on IDCs configured with alarm Each IDC is user programmable. Refer to the Programming section the PXL Operation, Installation, and Maintenance Manual, P/N for further information. This module contains LED point annunciation of Alarm or and Trouble of each IDC. Refer to the PXL Manual, P/N 315-094131, for further information on internal power and communication interface. All wiring should be in a continuously grounded conduit or, where in approved 300V shielded, limited energy cable (such Cerberus Pyrotronics Model LEC). When shielded cable is used without conduit. The wire shields in all should be continuous and grounded at the control panel. Multiple initiating circuits within the same cable or conduit do not to be individually shielded. T-tapping and parallel branching are not allowed.Every detector except the last one, must have one set of incoming and one of outgoing wires. The wire interconnecting the devices is continuously supervised and be terminated with a 4.7K, 1/4W, EOL resistor (P/N 140- For four-wire Class A type connection, install the EOL device at the A module. Horns with Strobe Stroke Bells Strobes Strobes Strobes Plate Electro-Mech. Horns/ Strobes Horns/ Strobes Module Bell/Strobe Plate Horns Whoop Horns

RC-30U 3 Confirmation Module 3 Confirmation Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Variable Interrupt Period seconds) Variable Confirmation Period second to 2 minutes) System or Zone Confirmation Placement Supervised FM, NYMEA and of Chicago Approved Confirmation Module, Model RC-30U is designed to against unwanted system alarm operation which result, as an example, from the presence of occa- momentary but harmless products of combustion. RC-30U will interrupt the transmission of an alarm to the system control panel for a factory set period 20 seconds, however, it is adjustable from 1 to 60 Immediately following the interruption period, a period is in effect during which time a subse- alarm signal, if present, will be sent immediately to control panel. This confirmation period as factory set is 1 minute, however, it is dependent upon the setting. the confirmation period should an alarm signal be it will put the system into alarm condition. Confirmation Module is placement sensitive as Modules connected between the Confirmation receptacle P2 and the control panel are not by its operation. Modules connected subsequent receptacle P1 of the Confirmation Module may be This is determined by which plug (system or is used. system plug (orange wire) is for basic applications a single alarm interrupt/confirmation cycle is suffi- See typical connection #1. In this application, a Plug/Harness Assembly is used between recep- P4 and P5 and any alarm signal from a module to receptacle P1 will be interrupted for a period of time from 1 to 30 seconds (20 seconds the standard setting). During this period power to the on receptacle P1 is removed, a yellow LED is and a system trouble signal is initiated. In a high-going signal (20 ma) is present on a for use as a pre-signal or for connection to a device. Immediately following the interruption the circuit power is restored, the yellow LED is and the system trouble signal is canceled. also starts the confirmation period – a period during time if any alarm signal is present, it will be passed uninterrupted to the control panel, and the system go into alarm condition. This confirmation period is to the extent that it is a multiple of the duration of interruption cycle (One minute is standard). If no alarm is present during the confirmation period, the RC- resets automatically and the system is normal. zone plug (white wire) is used for applications requir- various alarm interruption/confirmation cycles – two or RC-30U will be needed. See typical connection #2. this application only alarm signals from modules con- to receptacles P1 will not be interrupted/confirmed. interruption and confirmation cycle described above in a zone mode. A yellow trouble LED is provided on RC-30U to annunciate a specific trouble within the RC- NUMBER Model RC-30U which occupies two standard module is placement supervised, providing a system signal upon removal from the system. In addition, of the system/zone plug and/or the special Plug/ Assembly provides a system trouble signal. unit is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. and Arch and Archiitect Spe for precise time control of an alarm signal shall be provided by a Cerberus Pyrotronics Module, Model RC-30U. This module shall be interconnected by a ten-wire jumper plug and assembly, and shall be operable with the system control panel. Specciiffications duration of the interruption period shall be capable of set at any precise interval between the time frames one second to sixty seconds. Power to modules on the circuit shall be removed, a system trouble occur, and a high-going signal shall be present on a terminal during this period. At the end of this period, shall be restored to the modules and the confirma- period shall begin. An alarm signal from the modules the confirmation circuit received during this period shall put the system into alarm condition. If no signal is received, the RC-Module shall reset to A module trouble visual indicator shall be provided the RC-30U module. Model RC-30U shall be c

Color Video Display Terminal AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS RC-318 RC-318 14 Inch Diagonal Area 12/24 Function Keys Low Profile Keyboard Anti-Glare Screen 8 Color Display 1,920 (80 x 24) Display Smooth Scrolling RC-318 Color Video Display Terminal is the premier top terminal offered by Cerberus Pyrotronics. All displayed on the terminal is color coded to the operator in readily identifying alarm and trouble for ease of system operation. The RC-318 is compatible with the CXL and multilarm VI systems. RC-318 Color VDT is used with the above systems to a higher level of supervision and system reliability. CXL and Multilarm VI supervise the wiring which the RC-318 to the system by transmitting specific to the VDT. The VDT must process these codes and the system with a predefined response. This of supervision insures that the wiring is intact and the RC-318 is electrically functional. Element size: cell: width/double height characters screen Sets bit ASCII code ASCII drawing characters: character set: 24 94 in. (35.6 cm) x 16 NUMBER Element cord of keys: of function keys: keypad keys lock keys keys and field attributes video intensity colors: colors: Management scrolling, jump scrolling, smooth buffer viewpoints viewpoints buffer storage: functions characters line Port speeds: interface mode format Port speeds: 16 (50-19,200 Baud) interface print data pass-through Features saver control control memory (NVM, battery) operator setup audible alarm error check access to 25th row specification Element (with stand): (with stand): element element Requirements VAC 60 Hz to 50 (32 ro 122 95% non-condensing Information in. (380 mm) in. (385 mm) in. (405 mm) lbs. (14 kg) in. (345 mm) in (70 mm) in. (315 mm) lbs. (2.5 kg) in. (492 mm) in (40 mm) in. (210 mm) lbs. (2.5 kg) Color Video Display with Keyboard lbs. kg) number Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1994 Issue

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Command Center Remote MKB for Display and Control 80 Character LCD Display Auto Backlight Supertwist High Resolution Full Command Keypad MXL Network Interface (Style 4 or Style 7) Metal Enclosure with Keylock Door Restricts Keypad Access Optional Printer/Peripheral Interface (PIM-1) Supervised ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA City of Chicago Approved RCC-1 is a full control remote command and center for use with the MXL. It includes the a PS-5N7 power supply and local interface, and a small sheet metal enclosure a lockable door. The door restricts access to the and control keypad located on the RCC-1. RCC-1 is connected to the MXL local network and powered by the system power supplies or other listed, supplies such as the PS-35 or Alarm-Saf AS/PS5-BFS-24UL. The RCC-1 is capable of connected to the MXL local network in either 4 or Style 7 wiring configurations. Located inside RCC-1 enclosure, the PS-5N7 modules acts as an to the MXL network and also supplies the 5 VDC to the unit. Adjacent to the PS-5N7 are studs for a PIM-1 modules. The addition of a to the RCC-1 allows the connection of a printer PAL-1), VDT, Color Graphics (MXL-G, MXL-GT) or peripherals. to four RCC-1s may be operated in a fully super- mode. Additional RCC-1s can be used and in a non-supervised mode. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 and Architect Specifications the use of the RCC-1 keypad, the operator may events, silence audibles, and reset the The menu driven display allows the listing to the and optional printing of a wide range of data the detector voltages, sensitivity settings, log, system status, and more. In addition, pass- access allows the operator to perform control and functions such as changing smoke detector sensi- settings, disarming input and output devices, controlling relays, executing display and lamp walk test, etc. Access to the keypad controls is by a locked enclosure door. The only keys without opening the door are the HOLD and display control keys. As an option, a GenBox-WD lens may be inserted instead of the metal cover in the door. This permits viewing of the full and keypad but does not allow access to any of keys. The RCC-1 is shipped with the sheet metal in the door. NUMBER Information No. Command Center Lens for RCC-1 Door Instructions Data Wiring Configuration Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 5/95

RCM-1 Audio Riser Control Module Audio Riser Control Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS LifeLINK MXLV Global Network Voice Peer-to-Peer Paging Capability Multiple Unique Page Command Centers Style 4 or Style 7 Inter-Panel Audio Audio Signal Repeater Copper, Fiber Optic or Combination Audio Communication Campus Paging and Evacuation Listed RCM-1 adds the capability of inter-panel paging or to peer paging to MXL LifeLINK networks. MXLV are designed to provide full stand alone life safety voice evacuation and paging capability, the adds the ability to send a live voice paging an- to any or all other MXLV stand alone systems are connected as part of the LifeLINK network. The provides a page riser that connects MXLV together and operates in various configurations meet an almost unlimited number of combinations of audio communication requirements. RCM -1 is designed for applications that call for live paging between buildings, such as are required for industrial facilities, and other multiple building These applications typically call for independent, alone life safety systems with live voice paging both each individual building and between buildings in combination. RCM-1 also provides the option within a single or multi- application of multiple unique command consoles, subset command consoles for paging system control. RCM-1 plugs into a full OMM-1 or OMM-2 cardcage and communicates directly with the MXLV system via logic . The RCM-1 provides control and supervision of page risers in MXL Voice networks. The audio path between RCM modules will support use of twisted pair copper wire or fiber optic cable or a of copper and fiber optic cable. The communi- path between RCM modules can be configured to the requirements of either Style 4 or Style 7 for full bi- live voice paging or Style 4 one direction live paging. All communication paths are fully supervised. circuit isolation is provided between RCM modules an added level of system performance , this is particu- important for campus paging systems. a LifeLINK network voice system using RCM-1 each MXLV control panel can be programmed to inter-panel paging (Panel #1 can send a live voice to any zone or group of zones on Panel #2 and vice The ability to transfer the control between paging consoles is also programmable. This allows paging command consoles to be installed with the to indicate which command console has control and ability to , or access to gain of the paging command console. the event of a network failure of any type, each individual systems still maintains the ability to control the voice system locally. In all cases whether a system failure occurred or not, the individual MXLV local system always has the highest priority in the system. NUMBER Mode of Operation Mode of Operation RCM-1 operation can best be described as operating in three possible modes; Local Mode, Global Mode 1 and Mode 2. Please refer to the diagram below. Mode Mode : A (cid:213) D D from the local MXL (ACM/TBM) will switched to the local speaker zones The Global audio riser will be to Port C the Style 4 output riser. Mode 1 Mode 1: The audio output from the local MXL is B (cid:213) C C B (cid:213) D D The audio from the global is connected to the local speaker and to Port C, Style 4 output riser. Mode 2: Mode 2: The audio from the local system is con- A (cid:213) B B to both the local speaker outputs A (cid:213) C C the global risers. A (cid:213) D D Diagram Diagram Information Information Current: Voltage: to RCM) equipment is approved for operation over the tempera- range of 0 and 49 C. @ 24VDC V RMS Module Terminal Description Diagram Module Terminal Description Diagram Note:: This diagram should not be used to wire and install the RCM-1 module. refer to the RCM-1 Ins

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Remote Control Module Remote Acknowledge, Reset or Same User Interface as Control Key Switch Activated 16 Module Capacity on IXL Network Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM and NYMEA Approved RemCon remote control module features the ability to acknowledge or reset the IXL system, or conduct fire drill. The RemCon provides a remote user interface functions in the same way as the IXL control panel. maximum of sixteen RemCon modules can be installed the IXL communication network system. use of the RemCon is ideal in situations where the control panel is not conveniently accessible or having the control functions of the fire system is at a remote location. example of the RemCon installation and use is when an is installed in a school utility room, but control of the is required in a principal or administrator office. this way the responsible person may be able to remotely silence or reset an alarm or remotely a fire drill. RemCon module has a key switch that enables or the module. It also has LED for Power, Alarm, Supervisory condition, Bypass or Bell Silence Service Required, and Polling. module LED blinks periodically to show the system supervision, that is, polling of the module. RemCon also features LEDs and corresponding keys for: Acknowledge, Reset, Drill. RemCon is equipped with a sounder horn. If desired, sounder horn can be disabled. and Architect Specifications Remote Control Module for use with the IXL System be model RemCon. The RemCon shall remotely reset, or drill the IXL system. The RemCon interface shall function in the same way as the IXL panel. maximum of sixteen RemCon modules may be installed the IXL communication network system. NUMBER RemCon module shall have a key switch that enables disables the module. It also shall have LEDs for Power, Trouble, Supervisory condition, Bypass or Bell condition, Service Required, and Polling. module LED shall blink periodically to show IXL system supervision, that is, polling of the module. RemCon shall also have LEDs and corresponding keys for: Acknowledge, Reset, Drill. RemCon shall be equipped with a sounder horn. If the sounder horn can be disabled. Configuration use a RemCon module on a system, it is necessary to and enable the module in the IXL computer configuration software. (For details, reference the Programming Manual.) Address Programming the RemCon module address by entering the mode from the IXL panel and applying the to the appropriate place on the module front Data Characteristics RemCon Acknowledge, Reset and Drill function keys operational only when the operator inserts and the RemCon key switch using the control panel key. Diagram the RemCon in a 411/16″ x 411/16″ x 21/8″ backbox. Con- the system wiring to the screw terminals on the module. Connections power network communication Return line wire power connections the RemCon module to a 4 11/16 inch by 2 1/8 inch electrical backbox. If an auxiliary power supply is be sure J2 is in position To disable the sounder move and open the safety pin jumper SW5. wiring polarity when making connections. Dam- may result from incorrect wiring. Information No. No. Remote Control Semi-flush Trim (Black) The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Remote Switch Module Remote Reset Remote Acknowledge Remote Drill Generic Switch Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA Approved RemSwitch remote switch module is designed for use the CZI Series modules. The RemSwitch module is a that provides the necessary hardware, when used a CZI module, to perform any one of the following IXL functions, Remote Acknowledge, Remote Remote Drill, Generic Switch. Remswitch module contains a UL listed supervised operated momentary switch. The switch is normally When the switch key is inserted and the operator the key, the switch closes. The CZI receives the switch input. When the operator removes the switch the switch is in the normally open position. and Architect Specifications model RemSwitch module designed for use with the CZI modules of the IXL system shall be used to provide one of the following operations: Remote Acknowledge, Reset, Remote Drill, Generic Switch. and Installation the RemSwitch in a single gang backbox that is 2 1/8 deep. For Electrical Operating Characterisitics, reference CZI Series Module. NUMBER Diagram Resistor Chart No. Value No. Current Current OHMS OHMS Information Number Key Switch for CZI on IXL The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all warranties, either expressed or implied in regard to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1994 sheet dated 6/93

REP-1 Repeater Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS RS-485 Network Communications Repeater Network Star Wiring Configuration Two Style 4 or One Style 7 Circuit(s) Expands Network Distances Half MOM Card Slot Increases MXL Node Count to 64 Local or Global Repeater Style 7 to Style 4 Conversion Listed REP-1 is an optional MXL module that extends the of the MXL RS-485 network. The REP-1 the ability to support various wiring configura- including series and star configurations. The REP- provides the ability to support NFPA Style 4 or Style 7 communications wiring. The REP-1 can be to provide network wiring between MXL panels or and MXLR panels. The REP-1 is a one-half slot that plugs into a MOM-4 or MOM-2 cardcage. REP-1 allows MXL network distances to be ex- to allow greater application flexibility. The is an RS-485 repeater module capable of being as one Style 7 or two Style 4 network lines. REP-1 provides the ability to convert from a Style 7 to a Style 4 tap. This Style 4 tap can be used annunicators that may not require Style 7 wiring as RCC-1 or MOI/MOD-16). Using the REP-1 the MXL, MNET or XNET node count to 64. MXL configurations which require network distance in of 5,000 feet of copper wire, the REP-1 provides network wire distances in either straight or star Up to two REP-1s may be connected in with no limitation in the number of REP-1s in an system with star configuration wiring. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 and Architect Specifications REP-1 shall be an RS-485 network repeater module shall provide two Style 4 or one Style 7 network line(s). The REP-1 shall occupy a single MOM-4 or MOM-2 cardcage slot. REP-1 shall network communications between the MMB and or MOI as well as between MMB/NIM-1R and MMB/ RS-485 communication shall be supported for Style 4 or Style 7 in any combination of serial or star wiring configurations. Ratings Voltage: Current: Temperature: Line Resistance: VDC @ 24 VDC to 49 Ohms per pair NUMBER Information No. Repeater Module Instructions Diagram Network Wiring as a Repeater Use 18 AWG minimum wire. Limit the maximum ohms per pair to 80. Use shielded twisted pair. End the shield ONLY at the MMB-1 enclosure. The wiring is power limited according to NFPA 70/NEC 760. Maximum voltage is 8V P-P. Maximum current is 150mA. Use the end-of-line resistor P/N 140-820150 ohms, 1/4W) with Star Network Wiring Use 18 AWG minimum wire. Limit the maximum ohms per pair to 80. Use shielded twisted pair. End the shield ONLY at the MMB-1 enclosure. The wiring is power limited according to NFPA 70/NEC 760. Maximum voltage is 8V P-P. Maximum current is 150mA. Use the end-of-line resistor P/N 140-820150 ohms, 1/4W) Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 1/95

TRI-B6M Intelligent Interface Devices Interface Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Interface Modules For and IXL Control Panels Interfaces and Supervises Normally Open (Fire Detection) Normally Closed Contacts (Security Detection) Compact Size Allows Mounting in Single Gang Box Equipment Operates with MXL ALD Loop or IXL ICon Loop Microcomputer Chip Technology Innovative Technology Supports Comprehensive System Interface Communication Dynamic Supervision Two Wire Operation SensorLINK, model FPI-32 Programs and Verifies Address and Tests Device Functionality Electronic Address Programming is Easier and Dependable ULC Listed, CSFM and NYMEA Pending Pyrotronics TRI-B6M Intelligent interface module designed to provide the means of interfacing direct devices to the MXL system ALD loop circuit or IXL system ICon loop circuit. Pyrotronics TRI-B6M Intelligent interface module the market most advanced method of address and supervision, combined with sophisti- control panel communication. Each TRI-B6M module incorporates microcomputer chip and its sophisticated bi-directional communi- capabilities with the control panel. TRI-B6M is designed to monitor a normally open or dry contact and reports the contact status to the panel. device microcomputer chip has the capacity of in memory, identification information as well as operating status information. Pyrotronics innovative technology allows all intelligent interface modules to be programmed using the SensorLINK model FPI-32 Programmer/Tester. FPI-32 Programmer/Tester is a compact, portable, driven accessory that makes programming and an interface device faster, easier and more depend- than previous methods. The FPI-32 eliminates the for mechanical addressing mechanisms, such as jumpers, DIP switches or rotary dials, because it sets the TRI-B6M interface address into interface microcomputer chip non-volatile memory. corrosion and other conditions that deteriorate addressing mechanisms are no longer a for concern. This TRI-B6M is connected to the with the programming cable provided the tester. This cable utilizes two (2) alligator clip to attach to the TRI-B6M. (P/N 110-694927) TRI-B6 Series has five leads, one for grounding, which wired to the system with user supplied wire nuts. TRI-B6M is fully compatible on the same MXL circuit all intelligent IL and ID-60 Series detectors, MSI Series manual stations or any other addressable NUMBER Information Input Model for Canada Wt. Wiring to Figures 1, 2, 3 or 4) Refer to the appropriate diagram below and wire the addressable interface accordingly. wire size: AWG minimum AWG maximum modules, such as the CZM or ICP. The TRI-B6M also fully compatible on the IXL (ICon) circuit with all IL and ID-60 detectors and MSI manual stations. TRI-B6M intelligent interface modules are UL and ULC operating conditions for all TRI-B6M mod- are 32oF (oC) to 120oF (49oC) with a relative humidity not greater than 93% non-condensating. and Architect Specifications addressable interface module shall incorporate a microprocessor based integrated circuit that shall communication with its compatible control panel. addressable interface module shall be a Cerberus TRI-B6M that shall be compatible with a Pyrotronics IXL or MXL control panel. Pyrotronics TRI-B6M intelligent interface modules provide the means of interfacing direct shorting to the control panel addressable circuits. The module shall report the contact status to the panel. TRI Series devices shall be capable of and listed for normally closed security switches to the MXL UL 1076). addressable interface module shall be UL and ULC addressable interface module shall be dynamically and uniquely identifiable by the control panel. addressable interface module address shall be with the use of a portable programming The programming acces

RL-30/RL-40 3 Remote Alarm Lamp AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Listed electrical contractor shall mount the RL-30 unit on a 4″ octagonal outlet box and the RL-40 on a switch box. The wiring between the lamp and the shall be #18 AWG thermoplastic fixture wire in conduit or #18 AWG limited-energy shielded without conduit, if permitted by local building codes. Data RL-30 and the RL-40 have screw-type terminals for of installation. The mounting plate of the RL-30 is off-white molded plastic. Both units present an pleasing appearance that will blend with any Cerberus Pyrotronics remote alarm lamps are de- for use with Cerberus Pyrotronics conventional that are concealed or otherwise not exposed to (e.g., in false ceilings, under sub-floors, in unexposed ducts, normally locked in vaults, within com- consoles, etc.). Even though the detector initiating alarm is out of sight, this remote alarm lamp readily it. The RL-30 lamp is designed for mounting on a octagon outlet box and the RL-40 lamp is designed for on a standard single gang switch box. Although is no mounting limitation, the RL-30 is normally mounted, while the RL-40 is normally mounted to a and Architect Specifications remote alarm lamp for the Cerberus Pyrotronics shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics RL- (fill in 30 or It shall be electrically connected to the detector for it is to provide remote indication. When the detector a fire and activates the fire alarm circuit of the panel, the remote alarm lamp will identify the initiating the alarm. The unit shall be listed by Laboratories, Inc. NUMBER Wiring Information Wt. Alarm Lamp Assembly (for to 4″ box) lb. (0.25 kg.) Alarm Lamp Assembly (for to standard switch box) lb. (0.25 kg.) The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 3/94

RL-6 3 Remote Lamp Assembly AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS RL-6 RL-6 Listed CSFM Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics RL-6 Remote Lamp Assembly designed for use with low voltage system detectors. RL-6 provides a single lamp which will indicate at a remote point the operation of 2, 3 or 4 fire detec- that are concealed or otherwise not exposed to (such as in false ceilings, under subfloors, in ventilating ducts, normally locked vaults, consoles, etc.). The RL-6 is UL listed and CSFM RL-6 assembly is fitted with one incandescent lamp a red lens and is designed for mounting on a single gang switch box. The lens protrudes the front of the assembly and facilitates viewing the side. If any one of the four detectors alarms, lamp will turn on. Each of the four detector inputs of RL-6 has a series diode to isolate a fired detector the remaining unfired detectors. and Architect Specifications remote alarm lamp for the Cerberus Pyrotronics shall be an RL-6 which shall be electrically to 2, 3 or 4 detectors for remote indication of alarm condition. The unit shall be Underwriters Inc. Listed and CSFM approved. electrical contractor shall mount the RL-6 on a switch box. The wiring between the lamp and detector shall be #18 AWG thermoplastic fixture enclosed in conduit or #18 AWG limited-energy cable without conduit, if permitted by local codes. Installation wiring shall be performed as in system drawings supplied by Cerberus or their authorized distributor. Data RL-6 has screw-type terminals for ease of installa- The brushed stainless steel outer plate is attached screws to an inner support bracket and circuit board which, in turn, is assembled to the switch box. NUMBER Data Wiring Information Wt. Alarm Lamp Assembly lb. The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all warranties expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 1/94

RLI-1/RLI-2 Alarm Lamps AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Listed NYMEA, CSFM and FM initiating device is activated, the remote alarm lamp will the initiating device. The remote alarm lamps shall Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. electrical contractor shall mount the RLI-1 on a 4 octagon conduit box and the RLI-2 on a single gang switch box. The wiring between the alarm lamp and the initiating device shall be #18 thermoplastic fixture wire enclosed in conduit or AWG limited energy shielded cable without conduit, if by local building codes. Installation wiring shall as indicated in system drawings. Data RLI-1 and RLI-2 have screw-type terminals for ease of The mounting plates of both units are off-white and present an attractive, pleasing appearance that blend with any decor. Cerberus Pyrotronics remote alarm lamps, models and RLI-2, are designed for use with Cerberus initiating devices that are concealed or other- not exposed to view (e.g. in false ceilings, under sub- in unexposed ventilating ducts, normally locked within computer consoles, etc.). Even though the initiating the alarm is out of sight, these remote lamp assemblies will readily identify it. The RLI-1 is for mounting on a 4 octagon outlet box and the is designed for mounting on a standard single gang box. Although there is no mounting limitation, the is normally ceiling mounted, while the RLI-2 is mounted to a wall. RLI series is Cerberus Pyrotronics most versitile lamp because of their highly efficient and intensely LED. Models RLI-1 and RLI-2 operate with all 3, 4 and 6 conventional detectors, DF-1, DF-3/3A, flame detectors, as well as the Series analog and the Series intelligent detectors. and Architect Specifications remote alarm lamp for the Cerberus Pyrotronics devices shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics RLI-(fill in or 2). It shall be electrically connected to the initiating for which it is to provide remote indication. When NUMBER Wiring connection shown to DB-3S base) Information Wt. Alarm Lamp Assembly lb. (0.25 kg.) Alarm Lamp Assembly lb. (0.25 kg.) The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotonics detectors and bases Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 1/95

Remote Lamp Panels AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS RLP-4, RLP-8 & RLP-12 Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics Remote Lamp Panels, RLP-4, and RLP-12 are designed for use with all Cerberus systems where remote lamp annunciation of detection system activity is desired. This activity could DI-3 type detector operation using a 24V lamp directly using dry contacts, one may indicate zone alarm, alarm, trouble, power failure, etc. RLP panels are normally fitted with neon lamps to the high voltage detector pulse lamp operation. 6-volt, 24-volt, 48-volt and 120-volt lamps are as optional items to match the electrical charac- of any desired system. RLP-4 remote lamp panel is equipped with 4 lamps clear lenses and is designed for 2-gang switch mounting. The RLP-8 has 8 lamps and requires 4- switch box mounting, while the RLP-12 has 12 lamps requires 6-gang switch box mounting. The panels are attractive whether mounted vertically or horizon- panel has an upper and lower bracket to accommo- plastic or nameplate strips for lamp identification. Data RLP panel is completely assembled with screw type on its printed wiring board to facilitate wiring The panel is then connected to the switch with upper and lower fastening screws. The plate screws are in such a position that they are by the nameplate strip after installation. and Architect Specifications remote lamp panel for the Cerberus Pyrotronics shall be Cerberus Pyrotronics RLP____ (insert 4, 8 12). The panel shall be capable of monitoring the of the Cerberus Pyrotronics DI-3 type detector 24V lamp directly or using dry contacts one may zone alarm, system alarm, trouble, power failure, The RLP panel shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. NUMBER in conduit or #18 AWG limited-energy shielded without conduit, if permitted by local building codes. wiring shall be performed as indicated in drawings supplied by Cerberus Pyrotronics. electrical contractor shall mount the RLP-4 panel on a deep switch box; the RLP-8 panel on a 4-gang, switch box; and the RLP-12 on a 6-gang, deep box. The wiring between the panel and the system shall be #18 AWG thermoplastic fixture wire Information No. Lamp Panel, 4-position Lamp Panel, 8-position Lamp Panel, 12-position Lamps (order total quantity needed) lb. lb. lb. No. lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 3/94

System 3 Control Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS RM 30U/30RU RM 30U/30RU Device Module Device Module FM Approved Suitable for: Systems Dioxide Systems Systems Sprinkler Systems Control Control Listed CSFM & NYMEA Approved Releasing Device Modules, Models RM-30U and RM- are designed to operate and supervise solenoid valves relays used for release of extinguishing systems and to and supervise relays used for door closing/opening fan control. RM-30U and RM-30RU are functionally the same except the RM-30RU incorporates three (3) series resistors that used to adjust the resistance of the circuit to compensate varying numbers of solenoids. logic and subsequent activation of the modules are by appropriate zone and control modules in the 3 control panel. modules are suitable for continuous duty when used with duty solenoids. input signals are required for activation of these mod- and a release takes place when a high going signal is on both of the input terminals. These input signals compatible with the outputs available from the System 3 and control modules. All agent release logic, time etc., are performed ahead electrically of the RM-30U/ by utilizing such System 3 modules as : ZU-35 Zone PM-31 Program Matrix, TL-30U Timer, and SR-32 Module. The separate release power input terminals the modules versatility and reduces the load on the conductor system bus. circuit disconnect switch is provided to deactivate the during servicing of the system. When the switch is in off position, a trouble condition LED will be illuminated. modules are provided with a yellow LED trouble indicator show an open release circuit condition when the system is in alarm. The LED indicator can be lamp tested from the panel. In addition all wiring is monitored by the control for ground faults. The modules are placement super- providing a trouble signal on removal from the system. Specifications supervised release circuit for the (extinguishing system, system, door control, or fan control) shall be by a Cerberus Pyrotronics Releasing Device NUMBER Model RM-30U (30RU). This module shall be system by a ten pin plug and harness assembly and be operable with the main control panel. receipt of the two high going input activation signals, solid state circuitry shall apply power for the (solenoid or 24 Vdc relay). circuitry disconnect switch shall be provided to deactivate circuit during servicing of the system and shall indicate a condition when the switch is in the off position. module shall contain a yellow LED indicator to indicate open release circuit when the system is in an otherwise condition. The LED shall be lamp tested from the panel. model RM-30U (30RU) shall be placement supervised shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory approved. Information current requirement: supervisory – 5 mA energized – 1.5A maximum line resistance – 3 ohms for typical approved load. Information No. Wt. Device Module Releasing Device Module with Diagram The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotonics detectors and bases Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 1/95

RR-35 3 Remote Reset Device AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Remote Reset Module Switch Available for Use with or DC Notification Requires One Module Reset Switch is and Key Information No. No. model RR-35 Remote Reset Device includes a System module for mounting in the System 3 enclosure and reset switch mounted on a single gang plate. This device reset a System 3 from a remote location. A System utilizing a model RR-35 can also be reset from the system reset switch on the CP-35. RR-35 reset switch is key operated and momentary. system module requires one module space for The assembly comes complete with the neces- cables for operation of 24 VDC or 120 VDC notifica- appliances. NUMBER Diagram Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 Issue

RTA-38 3 Remote Indicator Unit AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Alarm Indicator Trouble Indicator Trouble Silence Switch Key-Operated Alarm Switch ULC Listed, CSFM, and Approved model RTA-38 can be used with System 3 fire alarm for remote system indication. Both alarm and conditions are annunciated visually and audibally. local trouble signal can be silenced with a switch. The switch for the alarm condition is key operated. RTA-38 is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and of Canada. It is also approved by Factory Mutual, the of California and the City of New York for use with 3. Information No. No. NUMBER Diagram Spaces @ .375 = 3.375 23 24 25a 25b 26 27 28 30 31 23 24 25a 25b 26 27 28 30 31 Unit Used) 23 24 25 26 28 31 Up to Two(2) RTA-38 Units may be used. When a RTA-38 is used, remove jumper between terminals 25 and 26 of the CP-35 When a second RTA-38 is used, remove jumper between terminals 25B and 26 of the first RTA-38. 22 thru 26 VDC, 100mA 27 & 28 VDC, 28mA 30 & 31 VDC, 2mA Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 Issue

Model S-2406 Infrared Flame Detector AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Dual Sensors Discriminate Between Flames and Sources of Four Stage Sensitivity Selection a Very Sensitive Setting Wide Temperature Range of 13 158 Cerberus Pryotronics Selective Dual-Sensor Infrared Detector, Model S-2406 has been developed to the strictest requirements for reliability, response and durability over a wide range of environ- The four stage sensitivity selection includes a very sensitivity setting which will respond to a one square gasoline fire at a distance of 75 feet. The housing is waterproof and immune to corrosion, and salt spray. Electronics are encapsulated and are protected behind scratch-proof sapphire Operation is unaffected by high frequency and all elements are highly resistant to the S-2406 dual element infrared detector has designed to perform under severe environmental there are four user selectable sensitivity and dual element discrimination. You can expect performance, simplified installation and minimal of maintenance from this design. S-2406 detector has two pyro-electric sensors which sensitive in two different light wave lengths. The first reacts to the infrared energy in the spectral range 4.1 to 4.7 m m which is emitted by heated carbon produced by combustion of materials containing such as wood, alcohol, oil products, plastics. The sensor reacts to infrared energy in the spectral 5 to 6 m m emitted by typical interference sources as artificial light, heaters and hot vibrating surfaces. having a typical flame flicker frequency from 2 to are amplified and checked for amplitude and phase. IR-energy is emitted by flames, the signal amplitude the first sensor is larger than that from the second and an alarm is triggered. If, however, the infrared is emitted by an interference source, like a hot surface, the signal from the second sensor will be same or larger and an alarm is not triggered. flexibility in project application, the sensitivity and integration time can each be set in two levels by small built-in switch. S-2406 has been designed for detecting fires where development of flames can be expected, as with flammable liquids and gases. The detector reacts all burning materials which contain carbon. In addition, detector has two pyro-electric sensors and a sophisti- electronic circuit which gives the detector immunity interference sources. The S-2406 is, therefore, suitable applications even in extreme environments. NUMBER infrared flame detector cannot be used for applica- with phosphor, sodium, magnesium or hydrogen and Architect Specifications infrared flame detector shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics S-2406. The infrared flame detector, model S-2406 have a four stage sensitivity selection. The infrared detector shall have dual sensors for the purpose of between infrared energy in the characteristic dioxide spectral range (4.1 to 4.7 m M) and other energy typically emitted by interference sources in 5 to 6 m M spectral range. The detector housing must impact resistant, waterproof and immune to corrosion, and salt spray. The detectors electronics must be The sensors must be protected behind sapphire windows. The detectors sensitivity response integration time shall be set in either of two by use of a built-in switch. The S-2406 shall not be for applications with phosphor, sodium, magnesium hydrogen fires. Capability S-2406 is designed to operate with the following listed Pyrotronics Control Panels: ZU-35 Module Zone Circuits CZI-H2S (Style B, Class B) CZI-H4S (Style D, Class A) CZM-4, CZM-1* 3 to power requirements, a maximum of twelve S-2406 can be connected to a zone. due to power requirements, a maximum of six S-2406 due to power requirements, a maximum of six S-2406 can be connected to a zone. can be connected to a zone. S-2406 Flame Detector must be installed in accor- with N.E.C. 760 and N.F.P.A. 72 guidelines. Pyrotronics installation and maintenance manual be referenced for detector spacing and sensitivity each particular application. The S-2406 is normally wall on an MWV1 swivel bracket at a 45 angle with

S121 and S122 Flame Detectors AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Insensitive to Electric Arcs Intrinsically Safe Weatherproof Two Wire Supervised Built In Response Indicator Pyrotronics S121 and S122 are infrared flame designed to provide an early warning of flaming involving all types of hydrocarbons and material carbon. S121 and S122 detectors make use of of the infrared sensors and filters to provide major improve- in rejection of deceptive phenomena such as arcs, heaters and artificial light sources while the inherent advantages of infrared type flame In the detectors design, special attention has paid to the optimization of the optical bandwidth. optical filters are used to restrict the response of S121 to a narrow band of the infrared spectrum, which its response to sunlight to a level at which it is blind. S121 and S122 responses are not seriously affected lens fouling caused by oil or dust as compared to U.V. flame detectors. The use of micro-power electronic allows the S121 and S122 to operate on a conven- two-wire detection circuit. This two-wire circuit allows to be connected to a fire alarm zone in the same as conventional Cerberus Pyrotronics smoke and detectors. S121 and S122 each have specific application. in general they are intended for the protection high risk areas in which the materials that are likely to will produce flames along with the production of dioxide. materials of this type are: Flammable Liquids and Gases Paper and Packaging Materials Foamed Plastics detectors are not designed to respond to flames from fuels which do not contain carbon, e.g. and ammonia, and should be used with such only after satisfactory testing. S121 and S122 were tested and approved by FM and considered to be intrinsically safe when used in with either the Cerberus Pyrotronics System 3 the ZS-30 intrinsically safe module or the MXL CZM-1 ISI-1 shunt barrier. With proper installation the S121 S122 can be used safely in Class 1, Division 1, A, B, C & D hazardous locations. Solar blind of the S121 make this detector ideally for outdoor areas where other infrared detectors produce unwanted alarms. Some of these areas refineries, gas production plants, petrochemical facilities, hangars and other airport facilities, sites, offshore drilling platforms, etc. S122 is suited best for indoor applications such as storage facilities, and other large indoor where requirements for the detector to be solar blind minimal. NUMBER detectors are essentially line of sight devices, special care must be taken in applying them to that their ability to respond to fire in the area which to be protected will not be compromised by the pres- of intervening structures or other opaque objects or The detectors should be installed at a point provides the most direct line of sight with the source of fire. used with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment in safe the S121/S122 are fully compatible with other 3 compatible detectors with up to thirty (30) S121/ flame detectors per ZU-35 or a combination of where the total permitted load on the zone would exceed 3.0 mA maximum at 22 VDC. used with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment in Areas, the S121/S122 must be used in con- with the intrinsically safe module ZS-30 or CZM-1 a limit of five (5) S121/S122 per zone. and Performance fires involving carbonaceous material produce quantities of carbon dioxide. This part of the combus- process gives rise to a very high level of infrared in the wavelength region between 4.2um and The S121 responds only to infrared radiation in the of 4.4um making the S121 resistant to sunlight to a where it is solar blind. The S122 responds to a wider of infrared radiation produced by the combustion This range which is between 4.2um and 4.7um the detector more sensitive to the detection of However, although it is resistant to sunlight re- it is not totally solar blind. The radiation from a fire in a characteristic way and the detector uses this Response of Gasoline Fire signal to give extra discrimination against interfering sources, such as flickering fluorescent lamps and blown sunlit pools

SCXL CXL Command Center CXL Command Center AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Provides Central Monitoring and Control for up to 168 MXL and/or XL3 Utilizes DOS Operating Platform Built-In Diagnostics for Controller Supports Full CXL Command Set Hard Disk Based History Logging Two level Operator Password Protection Log On Protection Printer Supervision Custom Log Report Generation Listed, ULC Listed SCXL is a PC based command center that provides a monitor and control point for up to 168 MXL and/or systems. The SCXL includes a controller (CPP) which up to 3 CXL panels. The SCXL is designed to hold to 2 controllers (CPP) resulting in a capacity of 6 CXL The controller (CPP) is equipped with built-in When prompted by the operator, the SCXL the controller (CPP) to perform a loopback test two of its ports. SCXL operates on a MS DOS platform and has a two password protection. The operator has the ability to up to three default terminal screens to display while system is in normal condition. These three default modes consist of Event Status Mode, System Mode and Active Status Mode. The Event Status displays each alarm and trouble event in chronologi- order. The System Status Mode shows alarm and trouble at each individual fire indicator panel. Active Status displays only active events for each fire indicator . history data can be archived on the hard disk as well a diskette, diagnostic printer and terminal test functions. system log is capable of storing all MXL and XL3 system Custom reports can be generated directly from the with selectable parameters including a date range, panel, device range, etc. NUMBER Information Information Controller Module (CPP) Controller Module (CPP) See description under UL listed Industrial Computer requirements. Listed Industrial Computer Listed Industrial Computer Disk or higher or higher or higher MBytes MBytes MBytes GBytes MBytes GBytes MBytes MBytes MBytes Card XGA-2 XGA-2 XGA-2 Monitor (19 (15 (19 (15 (19 (15 Screen (19 only) (19 only) (19 only) Ports COM2 COM2 COM2 Ports LPT2 LPT2 LPT2 To obtain 4 hrs. of standby power, ICS Lifeline model 9300057 UPS is

Fire Door Holders ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Cerberus Pyrotronics Door Holders, Model Series SDH- through SDH-8, provide automatic control over fire doors from all Cerberus Pyrotronics Control Panels. The holders keep the fire doors open by magnetic attrac- When fire is detected, the control panel causes the to be released automatically by interrupting the to the electromagnet. This provides fail-safe opera- for protection against the spread of fire and smoke. importance of closing fire doors is emphasized by the that more lives are lost in fires through the spread of and toxic gases than through heat. Open doors permit and smoke to spread rapidly. Cerberus Pyrotronics fire door holders are listed by Laboratories, Underwriters Laboratories of most state and local agencies having jurisdiction approved by Factory Mutual NUMBER model units operate on 120 VAC power and all units operate on 24 VDC. All units are furnished with detailed mounting instructions, necessary and mounting templates. The models draw 17mA current except model SDH-6A which draws 34mA AC. models draw 68mA DC current except model SDH- which draws 136mA DC. Series SDH-2: The Fire Door Holder, Model Series is for use with self-closing, swinging, fire and smoke doors. The unit, which uses concealed wiring, in- an electromagnet assembly encased in an attractive extended door armature assembly, door plate, and box bracket. The total projection of the unit is 3 armature assembly and magnet. The magnet has a force of approximately 25 lbs. Series SDH-3: The Fire Door Holder, Model Series is used with self-closing, swinging, fire and smoke doors in existing buildings or other applications surface wiring is required. The unit includes a surface adapter, electromagnet assembly encased in an housing, door armature assembly, and door The total projection of the unit including armature magnet assembly is 4 The magnet has a holding of approximately 25 lbs. Series SDH-4: The Fire Door Holder, Model Series is for use with self-closing, swinging, fire and smoke doors that are fully concealed where the wiring also is The unit includes electromagnet assembly in an attractive housing, door armature assembly, plate, and outlet box bracket. The total projection of the is 2 including armature assembly and magnet. The has a holding force of approximately 25 lbs. Series SDH-5: The Fire Door Holder, Model Series is for self-closing, swinging, fire and smoke barrier This model is floor mounted and for use with single applications. The unit includes a single faced electro- assembly encased in an attractive housing, door assembly, and door plate. The electromagnet consists of a floor plate and floor housing which, installed with gaskets provided, forms a waterproof junction box. Incoming conduit connects directly floor plate and forms and additional means (4 concrete bolts are provided) for anchoring the unit to the floor. magnet has a holding force of approximately lbs. Series SDH-6: The Fire Door Holder, Model Series is for self-closing, swinging, fire and smoke barrier This model is floor mounted and for use with double applications. The unit includes a double faced assembly encased in an attractive housing, door armature assemblies, and two door plates. The portion consists of a floor plate and a floor which, when installed with gaskets provided, forms waterproof electrical junction box. Incoming conduit directly into floor plate and forms an additional (4 concrete anchor bolts are provided), for anchor- the unit to the floor. The magnet has a holding force of lbs. (Continued) Series SDH-7: The Fire Door Holder, Model Series is for use with heavy swinging and sliding fire and barriers doors. The unit consists of an electromagnet unit, an angle bracket, a latch unit, and door brack- The holding unit has a light gray hammer enamel finish is equipped with a test switch. Mounting brackets are gauge cadmium plated steel. The device has a holding of approximately 120 lbs. Anchorage to supporting wall be capable of withs

SEA-1 and SEA-3 3TM Audible Devices AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Electronic Horns Choice of Tones Weatherproof 110 dBA at 10 Feet Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics models SEA-1 and SEA-3 horns of the electronic polarized Selectone (TM) type manu- specifically for Cerberus Pyrotronics. The horn contains a volume control permitting the level to be to meet the needs of the ambient noise level in area. horns are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. It be particularly noted that other listed horns, having electrical characteristics, may not operate prop- with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment. Pyrotronics low voltage systems can accommo- either AC or DC audible devices, depending on the of control panel or control module incorporated in the design. Cerberus Pyrotronics high voltage systems use AC audible devices. They may be intermixed Cerberus Pyrotronics polarized bells on the same circuit, providing circuit capacity is not ex- These horns may also be used for non-super- signaling applications. Cerberus Pyrotronics supervised alarm circuit em- no voltage dropping resistors. Hence, the number of may, at any future date, be increased or decreased changing the type of horns (or bells) or making adjustments. When used with the supervised the horn polarity must be observed during horn tone can be selected from any of those listed Each tone has a distinctive penetrating sound (110 typical at 10 feet). The tone is selected to be distinctive other nearby signals. When conditions change or the for a different tone exists, the tone module can be replaced with another, creating an entirely different to meet the new requirement. Note that the horn be rotated to project the sound in any desired direc- electronic circuitry is mounted in a rugged cast gasketed to exclude dirt and moisture. The horn is suitable for outdoor use. and Architect Specifications horn(s) shall be (a) Cerberus Pyrotronics model model number). The horn(s) shall be listed by Laboratories, Inc. The unit(s) shall have a tone module model (insert model number). NUMBER Data Information Voltage VAC, 60 Hz VDC following plug-in tone modules are available: Siren Siren High and Low High to Low, Repeated Whoop Ascending Low to High, Repeated Information 120 VAC, less tone module 24 VDC, less tone module Module, Wail Module, Yelp Module, Hi-Lo Module, Yeow Module, Horn Module, Slow Whoop End-of-line mounting plate, System 3 , DC circuits device, System 3 , AC circuits Wt. .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .2 .2 Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 5/95

SensorLINK Programmer and Tester Intelligent Initiating Devices AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS FPI-32 Programmer/Tester Program, Test and Menu Modes User Can Change Modes Anytime During FPI-32 Operation Simple Menu Operation Compact and Portable Withstands Field Handling and Shock Up to 4 Hours of Operation on Full Battery Charge Standard Rechargeable Batteries AC Adapter Built-in DB-3S Base for Use with Detectors Non-Polarized Jack for Use with Manual Stations, Modules and ICP Modules Green Light on Keyboard Indicates Charger On Red Light on Keyboard Indicates Low Battery Automatic Shut Off After 5 Minutes of Keyboard Inactivity Optional Carrying Case Listed, ULC Listed, FM and CSFM Approved Mode: Electronically sets address device chip memory Automatically verifies address Automatically verifies functionality Stores in memory last address until is off Eliminates need for mechanical programming pins, or rotary dials Mode: Automatically performs a of functionality Informs user if device has or failed tests Gives device analog information Special test-function Pyrotronics SensorLINK, model FPI-32 Program- is the most sophisticated technological for programming and testing Cerberus Initiating Devices. The FPI-32 can used with IL and ID-60 Series detectors, MSI Series stations, TRI Series Interfaces, CZM-1 Conven- Zone Modules, or ICP Control Modules. FPI-32 Programmer/Tester is a compact, portable, driven accessory which makes programming and an intelligent initiating device faster, easier and dependable than previous methods. The FPI-32 with the Cerberus Pyrotronics Intelligent Devices and electronically programs an address NUMBER automatically query the user if the next address in should be used. The user may either select the sequenced address or input a different address. The address sequence memory will remain active until FPI-32 is turned off. FPI-32 also has two device testing modes. The first mode can be used by pressing the TEST key. The mode will automatically perform a sequence of tests and inform the user if the device has or failed the functionality test. The second test can be used by pressing the MENU key. The user several test and test-function options in the MENU The MENU mode is designed for the advanced who is familiar with the device analog re- The device analog responses which are by the FPI-32 are the CAL, ID1, ID2 and ANA- values. During any mode, when the FPI-32 tests a the FPI-32 will pulse only a functional detector Also, when testing a TRI-60R interface or ICP, the will switch the interface relay on and off. portability, the FPI-32 is designed to operate on its own power for up to four hours when the batteries are charged. The user can carry the FPI-32 to an area it is most convenient to address or test the device. FPI-32 has six standard long-life rechargeable batter- To keep the batteries from being depleted when the is not in use, the FPI-32 is designed to automati- shut off if the keypad is not used for 5 minutes. For battery life, the batteries should be fully recharged the red, battery light comes on. AC adapter supplies AC power for the FPI-32 and for its batteries. When the AC adapter is used a light on the keyboard will come on to indicate the are being charged. non-polarized jack is for use with intelligent manual interfaces modules, ICP control modules and Conventional Zone Module. The FPI-32 has built in equalizer which automatically ensures the polarity connection to a manual station or interface or CZM-1 module. There is an indented area on FPI-32 for resting a manual station, an interface device a CZM-1 module. FPI-32 is designed to take shocks from a typical field For instance, a drop from table height will not affect the FPI-32. the device microcomputer chip nonvolatile memory. FPI-32 can also test Cerberus Pyrotronics Intelligent Devices for functionality. FPI-32 comes with an integral keypad and LCD an integral DB-3S base for use with de

SH High-Output Speakers and Speaker-Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Standard 4-inch Square Mounting with Ring, Deep Surface Box Available Available in 25 or 70 VAC Versions ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Versions Flush, Surface, or Ceiling Mount Flush & Surface Unit Available in red or Selectable Wattage Taps Listed, NYMEA Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics SH high-output speakers and are designed to meet the rigid demands fire protection and life safety applications. When ordered strobes, these units are designed for ADA applications meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72 (the National Alarm Code) and UL 1971 standards for signaling for the hearing impaired. Cerberus Pyrotronics SH high-output provides excep- sound clarity and mounts in a standard 4-inch box (FIB) with an FER extension ring, or an FBX-SF surface box and is available in flush, surface, or mount versions. Both 25 and 70 volt models have for .33, .66, 1.25, and 2.5 watts and a blocking for DC supervision. Standard wall models are ceiling units are white. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are in 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 Candela ratings with mounting configurations. The strobe lens has a material made of white Lexan with 5/8 red The top of the strobe has a rounded dome shape of clear Lexan The overall lens height is 2.5 with a of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non- areas where lower candela is required per UL S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring cd output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets requirements for regular lighted public areas while satisfying UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake hearing impaired person per UL 1971. NUMBER No. Chamber dBA (UL dBA per 1480) W W W W with 24 VDC Strobes Chamber dBA (UL dBA per 1480) Strobe Current Ratings(mA) No. W W W W 24 VDCWatt Taps Surface Box for Flush Grill Signals, Red No. Inch Deep Flush Back Box Inch Square Extension Ring, Red Box, Red Conduit Plate, Red Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/96

(cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:4)(cid:9)(cid:10) (cid:16)!(cid:26)(cid:26)(cid:21)(cid:4)”(cid:26)#(cid:21) (cid:25)#(cid:15)(cid:4)(cid:1)# $(cid:27)(cid:4)(cid:3)(cid:14)!(cid:4)%(cid:14) (cid:17)(cid:14)&(cid:4)(cid:9) (cid:21) #(cid:15)-*(cid:26)(cid:16)(cid:27)(cid:4).(cid:16)*# (cid:13)(cid:26)(cid:4))/(cid:23)(cid:4)(cid:7)0(cid:11)(cid:4)1(cid:3) WIRING MUST BE DONE AS DESCRIBED BELOW OBTAIN SAFE AND PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. Earth ground the PXL enclosure see the latest edition of the Electrical Code for approved Conduit ground is not as the primary of grounding. Separate all wiring for initiating device (i.e., detectors, manual etc.) from all other wiring in PXL enclosure. To wire the in compliance with UL 864, to the Power Limited Wiring for the PSE-1 Enclosure, 315-094154. ALL CABLE DRAIN from any conduit or earth electrical box, including in the PXL enclosure. Connect shield cable drain wire inside the PXL enclosure. AND WARNINGS caution symbol appears periodically throughout this manual. It important safety instructions. Read these instructions care- Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to the warning symbol appears periodically throughout this manual. It important safety instructions. Read these instructions care- Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious or fatal injury or costly property damage. Conventional Fire Alarm Control Panel (cid:9)(ci

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

SL Speakers Speakers and Speaker-Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Low Profile, No Extension Required Mounts in Standard 4-inch 1- inch Deep Box ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Flush, Surface, or Ceiling Selectable Wattage Taps Listed ULC, FM, CSFM, NYMEA Cerberus Pyrotronics F-Series of SL Low-Profile and speaker-strobes provide an economical to your sound needs. When ordered with strobes, units are designed for ADA applications and meet the requirements of NFPA 72 (the National Fire Alarm and UL 1971 standards for signaling devices for the impaired. Cerberus Pyrotronics SL Low-Profile speaker mounts in standard 4-inch square box (FIB), FDBB surface box, or bi-directional pendent housing and is available in surface, or ceiling mount versions. The 25 volt have taps for .50, 1.0, 1.75, or 2.75 watts. The 70 models have .50, 1.0, 1.75 and 3.5 taps. A wire screw block for up to 12 guage wire is supplied on each Standard wall models are red, ceiling are white. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are in 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 Candela ratings with mounting configurations. The strobe lens has a material made of white Lexan with 5/8 red The top of the strobe has a rounded dome shape of clear Lexan The overall lend height is 2.5 with a of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non-sleeping where lower candela is required per UL 1971. S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring 15 output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets ADA for regular lighted public areas while also UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd units. S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake the impaired person per UL 1971. NUMBER Speaker Ratings No. VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC dB** 10 / 84 / 86 / 88 / 84 / 86 / 88 / 84 / 86 / 88 / 84 / 88 / 90 / 84 / 88 / 90 / 84 / 88 / 90 Taps / 1 / 1.75 / 2.75 / 1 / 1.75 / 2.75 / 1 / 1.75 / 2.75 / 1 / 1.75 / 3.5 / 1 / 1.75 / 3.5 / 1 / 1.75 / 3.5 with 24 VDC Strobes Speaker Ratings Strobe Current Ratings No. )-F )-S )-C )-F )-S )-C dB** 10 Taps VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC / 84 / 86 / 88 / 1 / 1.75 / 2.75 / 84 / 86 / 88 / 1 / 1.75 / 2.75 / 84 / 86 / 88 / 1 / 1.75 / 2.75 / 84 / 88 / 90 / 1 / 1.75 / 3.5 / 84 / 88 / 90 / 1 / 1.75 / 3.5 / 84 / 88 / 90 / 1 / 1.75 / 3.5 Only 15 & 17 units available in ceiling mount Minimum UL measurements taken in a reverberant room, 75 to 81 dB. ( ) represents strobe model, e.g., 15, 17, 75 or 110. Diagram No. Square Surface Backbox, Red Conduit Plate, Red Surface Horn & Speaker Backbox (used with Flush Units), Red Wall / Ceiling Housing for Bi-Directional Mount (used with Units), Red The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 2/96

SLT-1 Line/Municipal Tie Module for SXL AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Remote Supervising Station per NFPA 72 4 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Service NFPA 72 Chapter 4 Meets UL 1459 Standard for Line Interfaces Placement Supervised ULC Listed, FM and NYMEA Cerberus Pyrotronics SLT-1 is a Leased Line and Tie Module for the SXL. It is used in place of the Relay Module. The SLT-1 is fully field program- from the SXL display. It is listed by Underwriters Inc. and meets the requirements of their No. 1459 for Telephone Line Interfaces. Line Remote Station (Leased Line) portion of the Module is to transmit signals from a protected to a fire headquarters, central station, or other supervised control center, via leased telephone It meets the requirements of NEMA Standards and Standard No. 72 for remote station fire alarm so that it may be used with any annunciator to these two standards. circuit, which has built-in surge protection, operates the polarity reversal principle. Under normal operating the supervisory or alarm signal current is held 3 mA to 9 mA DC. The total maximum load of the leased line circuit, including the receiving is 5K ohms. Tie Municipal Tie portion of the module is designed to a local energy type municipal fire alarm box. It the requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for fire alarm systems. module contains solid state circuitry to supply supervi- and operating power to the municipal fire alarm box. circuit is a two-wire closed loop carrying approxi- 1 mA DC of supervisory current. Upon system the current is increased and the polarity is activating the tripping coil in the municipal fire box, which in turn, transmits the coded signal to fire will be indicated from an open or a tripped munici- box operating coil when no alarm is present, or from an in the municipal tie line. NUMBER troubles in the SLT-1 or its external circuits will be by the number 5 on the SXL 7-segment SLT-1 has a polling LED which pulses when the is operating correctly. If the SLT-1 is not operating this LED will be off. and Architect Specification fire alarm control panel shall be a Cerberus Pyrotron- SXL, shall utilize conventional zones, shall be micro- based and fully field programmable. The base shall include 4 initiating zones, relay outputs for alarm and trouble, and two power limited notifica- circuits capable of a total of 3 Amps of power for appliances. system shall be expandable to 8 zones via a model expansion module which shall contain an addi- 4 conventional zones, 4 general purpose relay and 4 general purpose open collector outputs. of the alarm signal shall be accomplished via Cerberus Pyrotronics model SLT-1 Leased Line Module. module shall communicate on a 4 wire data loop with main SXL. of a local energy type municipal fire alarm box be accomplished via a Cerberus Pyrotronics model Municipal Tie Module. This module shall communi- on a 4 wire data loop with the main SXL. SLT-1 shall contain a polling LED which will pulse when module is operating correctly. The LED shall be off the module is not operating correctly. SLT-1 troubles be annunciated as code 5 in the SXL seven-segment SLT-1 is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and the requirements of their standard No. 1459 for Line Interfaces. Information Current: Current: Tie 50 mA mA Coil: 14.5 ohms Current: 240mA DC max Current: 1mA DC 18.3-24.1 VDC external resistance should not exceed 22.5 ohms. emergency power: hour standby minute alarm Line 18.3-24.1 VDC current: 3mA to 9mA, alarm/supervisory circuit resistance: 2K to 5K ohms Line circuit rating: 24 VDC open circuit load must a compatible polarity reversal labeled remote station unit. emergency power: hour standby minute alarm Diagram Polling LED Information No. No. Line/Municipal Tie for SXL Catalog Number 7900 for further SXL data. SLT-1 Installa-

SM Speakers Profile Speakers and Speaker-Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Low Profile, No Extension Required Mounts in Standard 4-inch 1- inch Deep Box* ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Flush, Surface, or Ceiling Flush & Surface Models in Red or White Selectable Wattage Taps, to 2 Watt Listed, NYMEA Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics SM Low-Profile speakers and provide an economical solution to your needs. When ordered with strobes, these units are for ADA applications and meet the latest require- of NFPA 72 (the National Fire Alarm Code) and UL standards for signaling devices for the hearing Cerberus Pyrotronics SM Low-Profile speaker mounts a standard 4-inch* square box (FIB), FBX-S and FBX-SF box, or FBDM bi-directional pendent housing and available in flush, surface, or ceiling mount versions. The volt and 70 volt models both have taps for 0.25, 0.50, or 2.0 watts. A wire screw terminal block for up to 12 wire is supplied on each unit. Standard wall models red, ceiling are white. a standard 1 inch deep box will suffice, a deeper box more room for wires and easier installation. strobe versions utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state for maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are in 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 Candela ratings with mounting configurations. The strobe lens has a material made of white Lexan with 5/8 red The top of the strobe has a rounded dome shape of clear Lexan The overall lens height is 2.5 with a of 1.25 S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non-sleeping where lower candela is required per UL 1971. S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring cd output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets requirements for regular lighted public areas while satisfying UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake hearing impaired person per UL 1971. NUMBER Speaker Ratings No. Chamber dBA (UL dBA per 1480) W W No. with 24 VDC Strobes Speaker Ratings Strobe Current Ratings Chamber dBA (UL per 1480) W W Diagram Diagram No. Description Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 9/96

System 3 Control Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS SM-30 SM-30 Module LED Indicators Dual Circuit Control Placement Supervised SPDT Switches ULC Listed, NYMEA, and Approved Switch Module, Model SM-30 is designed to provide (2) SPDT, manually operated switches to perform a wide of system control functions. function would include, but not be limited to the Audible signal silence for each individual audible Manual activation of relays, audible signals, etc. System disconnect Zone disconnect Shunt type city box disconnect Alarm drill Fan relay override Timer, coder, or municipal tie by-pass Extinguishing system release their position during system operation, the provide a single pole double throw contact through terminals. The yellow LED indicators mounted on the of the module (one for each switch) are not illuminated. the switches are manually thrown to the SPDT contact condition is reversed, and their LED indicators are illuminated. The contact rating of switches is 0.5 amp 30 Vdc or 120 Vac. is also provided within the module to indicate trouble when a switch is in an abnormal position, if desired. Model SM-30 is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. Specifications manually operated switches shall be provided, mounted a single module assembly for the purpose of opening or circuits which control system operating functions. module, the Cerberus Pyrotronics Switch Module, SM-30 shall contain two (2) SPDT switches (one for circuit) connected to screw type terminals mounted on face of the module. addition, the module shall contain a yellow LED indicator for each circuit that shall illuminate when the switch is from position to position. The shall be system interconnected by a ten-pin plug harness assembly and shall be operable with the main panel. NUMBER Model SM-30 shall be placement supervised and shall Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. Information Requirement: Normal – None Operated – 45 ma each Wiring Information Module Number Switch Module for Canada Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 3/92

SR-30 3 Supplementary Relay AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Dual Inputs Placement Supervised SPDT Configuration ULC Listed, FM, CSFM supplementary relay module, model SR-30 is de- to activate or deactivate, as desired, external such as door releases, fan shut-down, extinguish- system release, audible alarms, etc. Actuation of the may come from the system control panel, a ZN or ZU module, an SM switching module, or any other with appropriate alarm output. module is fitted with two independent, 24 VDC relays, of which provides a set of single pole, double throw contacts, rated 120 VAC or 30 VDC, 3 amp each. for each relay is from a high resistance transistor circuit, requiring a high going DC signal from be- 12 and 24 volts above system common. Dual input terminals are provided for each relay to facilitate model SR-30 is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. The is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. and Architect the control of external devices, there shall be provided Cerberus Pyrotronics supplementary relay module, SR-30. module shall be system interconnected by a ten-pin and harness assembly and shall be operable with the control panel. shall contain two independent 24 VDC relays, fitted with contacts with a rating of 3 Amp. (120 VAC or 30 Each relay shall have dual input screw terminals for of programming. Relay output screw type termi- shall also be provided on the face of the module. unit shall be placement supervised and shall be Laboratories, Inc. listed. Information Requirement: de-energized – None energized – 45mA Information No. Relay Wt. lb. (.45 kg.) NUMBER Wiring The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all warranties either or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 sheet dated 12/93

SR-32 3 Supplementary Relay AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 6 Relays per Module DPDT Configuration Terminals for Two #12 Wires FM, CSFM and Approved supplementary relay module, Model SR-32 is to activate or deactivate, as desired, external such as door releases, fan shut-down, system release, audible alarms, etc. of the unit may come from the system panel, a ZN or ZU zone module, an SM module, or any other module with appropri- signal output. module is fitted with six (6) independent, 24 VDC each of which provides a set of double pole, throw (DPDT) contacts rated 3 Amp., 120 VAC 30 VDC each. Power to operate the relays is from the 24 VDC system power supply. of each relay is from a high resistance input circuit, requiring a high going DC from between 12 and 24 volts above system All terminals are of the clamp type, accom- 2 wires of up to 12 gauge. model SR-32 occupies 2 standard module and is Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. and Architect the control of external devices, there shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics supplementary relay model SR-32. This module shall contain six (6) 24 VDC relays, fitted with DPDT contacts a rating of 3 Amp., 120 VAC or 30 VDC each. to operate the relays shall be 24 VDC furnished the system power supply. separate terminal shall be provided for individual of each relay. All terminals shall be of the type which shall accommodate two (2) wires of to #12 gauge. Therefore, no spade type, ring type special connectors shall be required to connect two wires to each input (activating) or output (contacts) unit shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. NUMBER Information Requirement: de-energized – None energized – 45mA Wiring Information No. Relay Module lb. (1.4 kg.) The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 12/93

System 3 Supplementary Relay AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS SR-35 SR-35 8 Relays per Module Hi or Low Going Input Activation 2A, 120 VAC or 30 VDC Contacts ULC Listed, NYMEA, CSFM and City of Approved SR-35 relay module is designed to activate or de- external circuit controls such as fan shutdown, releases, and other fire related equipment. The SR-35 eight independent relays with 2 amp SPDT Each relay can be selected to operate either on a going input signal from appropriate System 3 mod- or an open collector input signal such as those on Cerberus Pyrotronics XL3, MXL and SXL The position of actuation mode headers on each determines high going or low going signal activation. to operate the relays is provided from the 24 VDC power supply. The SR-35 module occupies only standard module position in the System 3 enclosure. terminals are of the clamp type and will accommodate 2 of up to #14 gauge. SR-35 is UL and ULC listed and NYMEA, FM, CSFM City of Chicago approved. and Architect Specifications Cerberus Pyrotronics Model SR-35 Supplementary shall be provided for control of external fire related The module shall contain eight (8) independent 24 relays fitted with SPDT contacts rated at 2 amp, 120 or 30 VDC. Power to operate the relays shall be 24 furnished by the system power supply. Each relay be provided with a program plug that will select either high going input signal actuation or a low going signal. separate terminal shall be provided for individual actua- of each relay. All terminals shall be of the clamp type will accommodate 2 wires of up to #14 gauge. unit shall be UL and ULC listed and NYMEA, FM, and City of Chicago approved. Information Requirements de-energized: None Energized – High Going – 26 mA per relay Energized – Low Going – 21 mA per relay Information Number Relay Lbs. lb. NUMBER Catalog Number 3125 Wiring The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 6/86 Catalog Number 3125

SRC-8 Relay Output Module for SXL AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 8 Form Relay Outputs 2 Amp Relay Rating Relays Programmable with Alarms Available for Class or ULC Listed, FM and NYMEA Cerberus Pyrotronics SRC-8 is an 8 relay module which output control for the SXL. Each relay can be to change state when any initiating zone is Therefore , any multiple number of zones can a single relay. Alternatively, any initiating zone can any combination of relays.. Form relays are rated 2 Amps at 30 VDC or 120 VAC. can be used to operate field devices or to control a graphic annunciator. SRC-8 is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for in the SXL. SRC-8 is mounted in the SXL enclosure and can be with any 4 or 8 zone system. SXL firmware Revision 2.2 higher is required to program and operate the SRC-8. installation and programming is detailed in the Instructions, part number 315-092968. and Architect Specification fire alarm control panel shall be a Cerberus Pyrotronics shall utilize conventional zones, shall be micro- based and fully field programmable. The base shall include 4 initiating zones, relay outputs for alarm and trouble, and two power limited notifica- circuits capable of a total of 3 Amps of power for appliances. system shall be expandable to 8 zones via a model expansion module which shall contain an addi- 4 conventional zones, 4 general purpose relay and 4 general purpose open collector outputs. SRC-8 Output Module shall be available for controlled by initiating zone. The SRC-8 shall contain 8 form which shall be programmable to operate with any of initiating zones. Any initiating device circuit have the capability of being mapped to any optional via the system programming. fire alarm system shall have the following features: alarm and trouble, One Person test, brown out 24 or 60 hour battery backup. It shall also have NUMBER fire alarm control panel shall be UL/ULC listed and the requirements of NFPA 72 for local fire alarm control automatic or manual service, and for sprinkler supervi- – water flow services. It shall meet NFPA 71 require- for Central Station Service when connected to Model 5128 or DFC 5129 Digital Communicators. following selectable features: supervisory zones, alarm by zone, non-latching alarm zone, alarm, and supervisory history, notification circuit coding, alarm, alarm/trouble 24 hour reminder, zone/output bypass. Information Number Relay Output Module for SXL Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel See Catalog Number 7900 for further SXL data. Installation Instructions are P/N 315-092968. Diagram The SXL Control Panel NFPA 72 local requirements. All wiring must be in with 70. Form C relay contacts shown de- They are for resistive only. Refer to the Battery table on next page to battery Characteristics 18 mA 26mA per relay Characteristics Form C Relays at 30 VDC and 120 VAC only Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9775 1997 sheet dated 5/94

Visual Signaling Devices ADA Synchronized Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Available in 15, 15/75, and 75 Models Flash Rate 1.0 to 1.1 per Second Meets ADA/UL 1971 Requires SCM-F or SCM-FW Controller Also Available in Horn-Strobe and Combinations Xenon Flashtube with Solid State Weatherproof Rated When Surface in FWB Series Box Single Gang, 4 Inch Flush, and 4 Inch Mounting Horizontal or Vertical Bell-Chime/ Plate Available Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics F-Series of strobes signals maximum reliability and low current drain, meet- any visual signaling fire/life safety application. These are designed for ADA applications and meet the latest of NFPA 72 (the National Fire Alarm Code) UL 1971 standards for signaling devices for the hearing units utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry for reliability and efficiency. Synchronous strobes are in 15, 15/75, and 75 Candela ratings with various configurations. The strobe lens has a bottom made of white Lexan with 5/8 red letters. top of the strobe has a rounded dome shape made of Lexan The overall lens height is 2.5 with a width of SCM-F and SCM-FW Sync Strobe/Signal Control Unit is remote module that operates from the fire alarm panel circuit. It mounts in a 4 inch square box and is with either a red (SCM-F) or off-white (SCM-FW) Class wiring is required to the controllers block. When activated, the SCM unit triggers the lights to flash at a synchronized rate of 1 to 1.1 per second. S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non- areas where lower candela is required per UL S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring 15 output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets ADA for regular lighted public areas while also UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd units. NUMBER Synchronized Stobes No. )S-FS )S-F )S-S VDC VDC VDC No. )S-6060H Strobe VDC )S-6090V Strobe VDC Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Gang in. sq. in. sq. in. sq. in. sq. Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Strobe Plates alone strobes utilize wire nuts for connection. Terminal strips are available by modifying part number to read -FT or -ST. FS models are not available with Surface mount units are rated weatherproof when used with FWB-1 or FWB-2 surface weatherproof box. ( ) represents strobe model, e.g., 15, 17 or 75 . Diagram Deep Surface Box for FLush Grill Signals, Red Wall/Ceiling Housing for Bi-Directional Flush Horn/Strobe, Red No. Surface Box, Red Surface Box, Red Plate, Red Conduit Plate, Red Box, 1/2 Conduit, Red Box, 3/4 Conduit, Red Control Module for F-Series, Red Control Module for F-Series, Off-White The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics bases or signals with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regard to loss, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 Issue

Stand Alone Strobes Mount AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Universal Mount Low Current Draw – DC or Full Wave Very Low Inrush Current 24 Vdc Units Available with 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110 Candela Strobes Standard Strobe Units or Synchronize Strobe with SCM-F Sync Control Module or Dual Sync Control Units Lightweight Plastic Design on New Stand Strobe Units Metal Plate Design on Strobe Retro Plate and Proof Stand-Alones (6090V Models Required) Mounting for 4(cid:148) Square Weather Proof Strobe Units, [When Ordering Specify a (-1) After the Model U-S17-1)], Must be Used with FBX-1 or Weather Proof Back Box ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Versions Available for Wall or Ceiling Mount Applications Red or White Colors) Screw Terminals Accept #12 AWG U.L. Listed for Ceiling Mount CSGM, NYMEA, FM & ULC Pending new Cerberus Pyrotronics(cid:146) strobes combine state of art electronics to provide reliability and low current drain meet visual life safety application. Same low current draw either wall or ceiling mount installations. new strobes are constructed of light durable plastic is available in two colors: red or white. To order a in (cid:147)white(cid:148) use a (cid:147)-W(cid:148) at the end of the model (i.e., U-S75S-W). The units design provides for installation with single gang, double gang or 4 square The lens construction provides high candela with a very low current consumption while meeting and ADA standards. Retro Plate units come with the same strobe choices one major physical difference, construction. The retro plate is constructed of metal for mounting bell or devices to the plate. Overall dimensions are 6(cid:148) wide 9(cid:148) high. remote strobes and strobe remote plates use a Xenon with solid state circuitry for maximum reliability efficiency. The full range of new strobes have a dome shape made of clear Lexan (cid:147)FIRE(cid:148) letters visible on the front mounting plate. The overall lens is x 2 7/8(cid:148) with a height of 1 3/8(cid:148). units can also be synchronous when used with the or DSC sync control units. (See reverse side for information.) If weather proof units are required, the strobe units with either the FBX-1 or FBX-2 back Weather proof units are surface mount with metal plate construction. NUMBER Catalog No. 2533 Information Strobes – Wall Mount Strobes – Ceiling Mount Number Description Number Description currents are Full Wave / Filtered environmental ratings 32 to 120 (0 to 49 with 85% humidity. Outdoor, -31 to 150 (-35 to 66 RH at 95%. For weather proof units, order model number FWB-1 or FWB-2 back box. control MARKING FOR SYSTEM IN end of device class “A” for Canadian ULC listed model) Canadian French ULC listed model) Pyrotronics Fernwood Road Park, NJ 07932 (973) 593-2600 (973) 593-6670 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1998 sheet dated 3/98 catalog number 2533

SXL Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 4 Zones Expandable to 8 Zones Microprocessor Based Control Factory Programmed Field Configurable 2 Style Y Notification Appliance Circuits Multiple- Programmable-Power Limited 3 Amps Notification and Auxiliary Power 24 and 60 Hour Battery Backup Optional Outputs 4 Open Collector, 4 Dry Contact or 8 Dry Contact Relays Subsequent Alarm and Trouble with 24 Hour Reminder Signal Silence Inhibit Sprinkler Supervisory Service Alarm Verification by Zone Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory and Verification Last Event One Person Test Drill Function Zone/Output Bypass Remote Annunciator Option 220/240 VAC/50 Hz Power Supply Option Inherently Power Limited per NEC 760 FM, CSFM and NYMEA Approved Listed, ULC Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics SXL is another in a family of designed to provide cost effective, reliable life equipment to the fire alarm market. The micropro- based fire alarm control panel is supplied with four zones and is expandable to eight. It has features required by today demanding market as field programmability, power limited circuits, one test feature, remote annunciation and sufficient to meet ADA requirements for signaling. SXL is designed to meet the varied fire alarm needs small office buildings, apartment buildings, department hotels, strip malls or anywhere a cost efficient, purpose fire alarm control panel is required. the SXL can be used to supply remote bell for larger systems such as MXL. and Features and Features Circuits base SXL has four conventional, Style B (Class B) which are typically compatible with the DI-3 ioniza- detector, the PE-11 photoelectric detector, Cerberus thermal, flame and beam detectors and the Series of manual stations. (Please refer to the detector list in the wiring diagram for specific compat- questions). combination of 30 compatible smoke detectors can combined on a zone. Any number of thermal detectors, stations or other compatible direct shorting may be connected to each zone. All of these devices can be mixed on the same zone provid- the total power requirement of the zone does not 9 mA supervisory current. NUMBER system is expanded through the model SZE-4R module which has an additional four initiating in addition to relays and outputs which shall be later. system can alternately be expanded through the SZE-8A expander module which has an additional Class A (Style D) initiating circuits. The SZE-8A also the four initiating circuits and the two notification on the main SXL to Style D (Class A) and Style Z A) respectively. Appliance Circuits base SXL has two Style Y (Class B) Notification Circuits, each rated at 1.5 Amps. The total output of the panel, between the two notification and the auxiliary output, is limited to 3 Amps. The notification circuits are power limited to reduce costs without the addition of any hardware. (3) Amps is sufficient to provide power for many requiring appliances designed to ADA specifi- Circuits can be programmed for various codes. include temporal, march time, simplified zone code, number of rounds. They can also be inhibited during and programming functions. and Outputs base SXL has form relays for general alarm and rated at 1 Amp., 30 VDC. The model SZE-4R expander module has an additional four general programmable relays rated at 2 Amps., 30 VDC, four programmable open collector outputs. the model SRC-8 relay module provides eight purpose, programmable relays rated at 2 Amps., VDC/120 VAC. All remote operations in the fire alarm are controlled from the SZE-4R or the SRC-8, both which are installed within the SXL enclosure. and Audible Indicators SXL has visible LED annunciation by zone for alarm trouble. Additionally, there is a system alarm LED and system trouble LED. Supervisory zones utilize the zone LED flashing in sync with a system supervisory to indicate an off normal situation. with the system alarm, trouble and supervisory are also LEDs for AC power, bypass and test/

firealarmresources.com

System 3 Accessories AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS JA Ten-Pin Plug JP Program Plug below are miscellaneous accessories for use with Cerberus Pyrotronics System 3 Universal Alarm JA Ten-pin plug and harness assembly for modules and control panels. JS Supervisory return harness assembly. JP Program plug for use with systems not fitted emergency power. BP Blank face plate for insertion in brackets on of enclosure door. The model BP covers those within the enclosure not occupied by modules or panels. EL End-of-Line device mounting plates or to be mounted on single gang switch boxes, for with audible signal circuit or detector circuit. BP-30 Blank Face Plate Wt. Assembly, 5″ for modules in a row Assembly, 24″ for modules from row row Assembly, 48″ for modules from row row Assembly, 96″ for modules from row row Return Harness Assembly, 24″ Return Harness Assembly, 64″ Return Harness Assembly, 98″ Plug (black wire) for AC signaling circuits Plug (yellow wire) for DC signaling Plug for 10 Amp. output Face Plate for enclosure Wall mounting plate for end-of-line device used on 3 DC audible circuit or detector circuit device for use with AC audible circuit .45 .90 .90 .90 .45 .45 .45 .45 .45 .45 .45 .45 .90 NUMBER The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 5/94

System 3 Enclosures AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Attractive Styling Left or Right Hinged Door Surface or Semi-Flush Key Lock Dead Front Construction FM, CSFM, NYMEA Approved Optional Coast Guard Enclosure Available Optional Red Door Available Listed, ULC Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics Enclosures are designed to accom- System 3 control panels, input and output modules, all power supplies utilized in the system. They can be either or semi-flush mounted. enclosure consists of a back box and door cover assem- fabricated of heavy gauge sheet steel. The back box, which finished in a black enamel, is designed for mounting the and channel supports on which are mounted the modules, and power supplies. door is mounted with a sag resistant, steel piano hinge and fitted with a key locking arrangement. Left hand or right hand can be made on all enclosures as desired. door contains full-width horizontal viewing slots, to permit identification of each row of modules and control panel the various functions served by the system. The inside of the is fitted with brackets to accommodate blank face plates cover those positions in the back box not occupied by the panel or modules. Pyrotronics enclosures are shipped unassembled box and door cover) to facilitate installation. The prewired controls, power supply, and operating modules are assembled for support as one complete unit and in a to install condition. All that is required is to bolt the com- system assembly in position in the back box and mount hinged door cover assembly. NUMBER Information boxes, doors, rail/bracket kits with mounting hard- and semi-flush mounting trim kits are available To order, use the following module numbers. Box Kit Mount Trim Kit Module Module Module Weight (kg.) Weight (kg.) Weight (kg.) Weight (kg.) Data The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 8/94

SZE-4R Expansion Module for SXL Expansion Module for SXL AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATT IONS AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICA Expands SXL from 4 to 8 Zones, Style B B) Zones Selectable as Alarm, Supervisory, or Generic Input Programmable Output – 4 Open Collector, Dry Contact Relays 30 Smoke Detectors per Zone Listed, ULC Listed CSFM and NYMEA Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics SXL is another in a family of designed to provide cost effective, reliable life equipment to the fire alarm market. The Model expands the base SXL from 4 to 8 zones, the capacity of the system. The SZE-4R is UL listed, listed and approved by the City of New York and the of California. and Features and Features Circuits SZE-4R has four conventional, Style B (Class B) zones are typically compatible with the DI-3 ionization the PE-11 smoke detector, Cerberus Pyrotronics flame and beam detectors and the MS Series of stations. (Please refer to the detector compatibility in the wiring diagram for specific compatibility ques- combination of 30 smoke detectors can be combined a zone. Any number of thermal detectors, manual or other compatible direct shorting devices may connected to each zone. All of these initiating devices be mixed on the same zone providing the total power of the zone does not exceed 9 mA supervi- current. and Outputs base SXL has form relays for general alarm and rated at 1 Amp., 30 VDC. The model SZE-4R module has an additional four general purpose, programmable relays rated at 2 Amps., 30 VDC only, plus four programmable open collector Programmability and Test Functions following functions are field programmable in the SXL. features are generally not programmed in the unit received from the factory. Field programming is accom- through the display and does not require the use a computer or any proprietary tools. Circuit Types: Verification by Zone, Zone Bypass, Supervisory or Generic Zone when the SXL is to be used to remote notification appliance circuits. The default mode is an alarm causing zone.) Appliance Circuit Programming Options: Simple Zone Coding, March Time, California Uniform Fire Code, Silence Inhibit, Timers and Reminders. The default mode is a steady signal.) Control Options: Outputs/Relays. Programming Options: to Output Matrix and Password Maintenance. NUMBER test features include the One Person Test feature, a Test and Search and Clear of the Alarm, trouble and history buffer. While in the test mode, the is capable or receiving and initiating alarms except those zones under test or bypass. Information Information Number: SZE-4R Number: Expander Module-SXL w/ Outputs Connection Diagram Connection Diagram DEVICE CIRCUIT RATINGS DETECTORS Loop No. All field wiring must be in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 760. Make no wiring connections while the System is powered. Alarm Relay Contacts are shown de-energized and Trouble Relay Contacts are energized. Suitable for resistive load only. Auxiliary output rated 0.5 amps at +24 VDC filtered. Maximum line impedance Combined current output for NAC1, NAC2, and auxiliary outputs is limited to 5 ohms. amps. Equipment connected to these terminals must be located within the same room. Refer to the SXL Operation, Installation, and Maintenance Manual, P/N 315- for further details. No T-Tapping allowed. See SXL Operation, Installation and Maintenance Manual, P/N 315-092419 Form C RELAY Form C RELAY RATINGS RATINGS at 30 VDC Resistive Only at 30 VAC Resistive Only COLLECTOR COLLECTOR RATINGS RATINGS (max.) at 26.4 VDC (max.) Connect standby batteries only to terminals B+ and B-. The batteries may be in either the bottom of the cabinet or in a UL listed battery enclosure. In all cases Cerberus Pyrotronics model number is the compatibility identifier, the control panel, module(s), and all compatible initiating devices. When using the SLT-1 m

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Terminal Block Module Audio Riser Connection Telephone Riser Connection Point Auxilliary Audio Input Jack Type) Configurable Auxilliary Recording Jack (RCA Type) Listed, FM, NYMEA, Approved TMB-2 is an MXLV module which acts as the central point for audio functions including audio and riser wiring. The ACM-1 audio control module with other MXLV modules through the TBM-2 provides various screw terminal blocks and for interface between internal and field wiring. the use of the TBM-2, the number of connections discrete internal wires is kept to a minimum, facilitat- easy installation and system check out. risers may be connected in either Style Y (Class B) Style Z (Class A) configuration. A telephone riser may connected in a Style Y (Class B) configuration. TBM-2 also provides an RCA type jack for connection an external audio source, and an RCA type jack for to an external audio recording unit. This jack is configurable to monitor either the micro- or telephone channels. When configured to monitor microphone, it will become active whenever the keyswitch is pressed. When configured to telephone traffic, it will become active whenever a station is on line. A dry contact output is avail- on the TBM-2 to start a recording device. TBM-2 mounts in the upper right side of the MBR-2 backbox on studs provided. and Architect Specifications and Architect Specifications emergency voice alarm/communication system shall a single module which shall act as the central point for audio functions including audio and riser wiring. The audio control module shall with other voice system modules through terminal block module, model TBM-2. TBM-2 shall provide various screw terminal blocks and for interface between internal and field wiring. the use of the TBM-2, the number of connections discrete internal wires shall be kept to a minimum, easy installation and system checkout. risers shall be capable of being connected in either Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A) configuration. A riser shall only be capable of being connected a Class B configuration. TBM-2 shall also provide an RCA type jack for con- of an external audio source such as background and an RCA type jacks for connection to an audio recording unit. This recording jack shall be to monitor both the microphone and tele- channels. When configured to monitor the micro- it shall become active whenever the microphone is pressed. When configured to monitor tele- traffic, it shall become active whenever a telephone is on line. Dry contact outputs shall be available on TBM-2 to start a recording. NUMBER TBM-2 shall mount in the upper right side of the enclosure blackbox on studs provided. Information Information the audio and telephone risers: wire size: wire size: loop resistance: 20 ohms for both wires Diagram Diagram AWG twisted pair, shielded AWG twisted pair, shielded Information Information Number Block Module Instructions Diagram Diagram The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotonics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 8/94

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 3 Control Module Precision Timing LED Indicator Delayed Signal Capability Placement Supervised Solid State Logic Circuitry Listed and ULC Listed NYMEA, CSFM and FM Approved Time Limit Module, TL-30U is designed to provide a time interval from 6 seconds to 10 minutes, after either a signal circuit is activated, (such as a alarm) or a signal circuit is deactivated (such as bells). The module is also capable of repeating the operational sequence when a subsequent alarm is received in a system utilizing the Subsequent Feature. module, which is of solid state circuitry, is normally drawing no power until an alarm signal is re- When this occurs, a binary counter is activated to precisely, the length of the desired time limit before the pre-programmed sequence of system This sequence could be for silencing audible devices so that the system could receive and subsequent alarms. An alternate use would be sending of an alarm to municipal headquarters if the source had not been checked or controlled, or, it involve the actuation of an extinguishing system. time interval is available in two ranges as follow: 6 seconds to 20 seconds 30 seconds to 10 minutes units are preset for a 5 minute, time-out se- but can be changed by field adjustment. : Underwriters Laboratories Inc. standards require when time limit cutoffs are used with audible devices, shall operate no less than 3 minutes and no more 10 minutes. module contains a red LED indicator lamp that is at the end of the timing period. This lamp will on until the module has been reset. Model TL-30U module is placement supervised, a system trouble signal upon removal from the unit is Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. and Architect Specifications for precise time control of an output signal by delaying actuation or stopping actuation shall be by a Cerberus Pyrotronics Time Limit Module, TL-30U. This module shall be system intercon- by a ten-wire jumper plug and harness assembly, shall be operable with the system main control panel. NUMBER time in/time out duration period shall be capable of set at any precise interval between the time frames 6 seconds to 20 seconds, and 30 seconds to 10 This interval shall be controlled by a solid state binary counter contained in the circuitry of the At the end of the time interval, a red LED indicator shall indicate completion of the time cycle, after a subsequent alarm can be received and pro- in an identical manner. The module shall be reset the main control panel. model TL-30U shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Information Requirement: None 45 mA Information No. Wt. Limit Module lb. Wiring the TL-30U are two jumpers and one potentiometer on the component board used program the module. IN/TIME OUT JUMPER* TIME/SHORT TIME JUMPER whether TL-30U will be in or time out. Connect jumper common and TO or TI. timing period LT: 30 10 min ST:6-20 sec. jumper between common LT or ST. potentiometer R13 (500K) for the exact time desired. Cross-zoning may be accomplished the use of zone operated relays. The two zone are fed directly into the TL-30U (terminals 1 and After the second zone has activated, the TL-30U will as programmed. in denotes delay time period before 3 goes high (+). When SA-30 or cross are not used, terminal 2 to 1. input/output signals not The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied in regard to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 5/94

TMM-1 Telephone Master Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Master Firefighter Telephone Push-To-Talk Button Red High Impact Plastic Switchhook High Quality/Low Noise Acknowledge Tone Busy Signal Warden Page Recording Output (on TBM-2) Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA and City of Chicago Approved TMM-1 is an MXLV option module which provides a firefighter handset for communication with other stations. It mounts to the right of the MKB-2 in the front of the MXLV Command It includes a red telephone handset and retract- cable. The handset itself has an integral push-to-talk and is constructed of high impact plastic. The also includes a switchhook and the telephone riser circuitry. MXLV firefighter telephone unit is designed for performance in communication quality. The circuitry allows at least 6 telephone stations to be hook simultaneously with no degradation of audio TMM-1 also supports a Warden Page function which live voice announcements from any remote tele- Zone call-ins are annunciated on the appropriate module. Remote stations receive an optional tone and an optional busy tone. and Architect Specifications and Architect Specifications Emergency Voice Alarm/Communication System console shall include a master firefighter handset and switchhook. The handset shall be of red, high impact plastic and shall include a button and retractable coil cord. telephone master module (model TMM-1) shall mount to the MKB-2 display/keyboard in the front of the command console. It shall include firefighter riser interface circuitry and shall support at least telephone stations on line simultaneously with no of audio quality. firefighter telephone system shall support a warden function which shall allow live voice announcements any remote telephone station. zone call-ins shall be annunciated on the VSM-1 switch module. Remote telephone shall receive an acknowledge signal when calling and a distinct busy signal when the command console is on line with another telephone zone. NUMBER Information Information No. No. Master Instructions Diagram Diagram The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (973) 267-1300 (973) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 4/97

TRI-B6 Series Initiating Devices Interface Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Interface Modules For XL3, Interface Modules For XL3, and IXL Control Panels and IXL Control Panels TRI-B6R, TRI-B6D TRI-B6R, TRI-B6D and Supervises Normally Open (Fire Detection) Normally Closed Contacts (Security Detection) SPDT Relay Model TRI-B6R Input Model TRI-B6D Microcomputer Chip Technology Technology Supports Comprehensive System Interface Communication Supervision Wire Operation Model FPI-32 Programs and Verifies Address and Tests Device Functionality Address Programming is Easier and Dependable ULC Listed, CSFM, City of Chicago NYMEA and FM Approved Pyrotronics TRI-B6 Series Intelligent interface are designed to provide the means of interfacing shorting devices to the MXL system ALD loop the IXL system ICon loop circuit or to the XL3 INX loop circuit. Pyrotronics TRI-B6 Series Intelligent interface provide the market most advanced method of programming and supervision, combined with control panel communication. Each TRI-B6 interface module incorporates a microcomputer The TRI-B6 Series microcomputer chip technology its sophisticated bi-directional communication capa- with the control panel, achieve the state of an Device. TRI-B6 Series intelligent interface modules are avail- in three models. The TRI-B6 and TRI-B6R are to monitor a normally open or closed dry con- The interface module reports the contact status to control panel. The TRI-B6 model can only monitor and the status of the contact, while the TRI-B6R incorpo- an addressable Form C relay. The TRI-B6R relay contact device input are controlled at the same For the XL3 and MXL system, the relay and input can be controlled as a separate function, while for IXL, they are controlled as a related function. The relay typically used where control or shunting of external is required. TRI-B6D is a dual input module and is designed to and monitor two sets of dry contacts. This module requires two address settings. The TRI- is ideal for monitoring a waterflow switch and its valve tamper switch. TRI-B6D Series devices can also be used to monitor status of normally closed security switches. device microcomputer chip has the capacity of in memory, identification information as well as operating status information. In addition, the Series interface modules using their microcomputer can communicate in either of two protocols, XL3 or for the MXL and IXL (ICon). Pyrotronics innovative technology allows all TRI- Series intelligent interface modules to be programmed using the SensorLINK model FPI-32 Programmer/Tester. FPI-32 Programmer/Tester is a compact, portable, NUMBER driven accessory that makes programming and an interface device faster, easier and more depend- than previous methods. The FPI-32 eliminates the for mechanical addressing mechanisms, such as jumpers, DIP switches or rotary dials, because FPI-32 electronically sets the TRI-B6 interface into the interface microcomputer chip non- memory. Vibration, corrosion and other conditions deteriorate mechanical addressing mechanisms are longer a cause for concern. TRI-B6 Series is fitted with screw terminals for connec- to an addressable circuit. TRI-B6 Series is fully compatible on the same MXL or circuit with all intelligent IL and ID-60 Series detectors, Series addressable manual stations or any other intelligent modules, such as the CZM or ICP. TRI-60 Series is fully compatible on the IXL (ICon) with all intelligent IL and ID-60 detectors and MSI stations. Pyrotronics FPI-32 Programmer/Tester. The programmer shall be menu driven. Once the address is entered the programmer shall set and the address. The programming accessory shall also capable of testing the interface functionality. The interface module address shall be set by means only. No mechanical means such as pins, DIP switches or rotary d

Tri-Tone Electronic Horn Horn AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Three Distinct Tones Tone Modules are NOT High dB Output Weatherproof 24 VDC & 120 VAC Models Listed ULC, FM, CSFM, NYMEA Pyrotronics Tri-Tone electronic horns offer three tones: Siren, Warble & Yowl in one solid, weather- package. metal construction and modern electronics 112 dB at 10 feet with this versatile alert signal. tones are built in for convenient tone selection at of installation. This unit is painted red, easily mounts four 1/4 inch bolts, and is especially suited for high areas such as manufacturing facilities or outdoor No. at 10 The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as void all warranties either expressed or implied with regard to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 2/96

TSP-40 Thermal Strip Printer AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Event Logging 40/80 Character Line Modes System Reports Battery Backup Paper Take Up Reel Out of Paper Indication Event Buffer Full Message When of Paper RS-232C Communication Listed, CSFM, FM, and City of Approved TSP-40 is a thermal strip printer designed for use with Cerberus Pyrotronics MXL system. It mounts in the enclosure and its printout is visible through a window the locked enclosure door. Printouts are automatically on a take up reel for easy record storage. TSP-40 acts as an event logging device providing a history report of all MXL system activity. It can be used to provide system status reports, including a of all smoke detector sensitivities and thresholds. It also supply a listing of device analog voltages, device and custom messages. TSP-40 operates from the MXL main power and will to function if the MXL transfers to standby This battery backed up operation assures event during an AC power loss without the need for a TSP-40 uses thermal printer paper and can operate in normal and compressed character modes. System such as Alarm and Troubles are indented and in caps for easy identification. System reports are in compressed (80 character) mode. All events and are printed with the time and date. The MMB also a printer test at midnight each day. and Architect Specifications history logging of all system events shall be by the TSP-40 thermal strip printer. The printer be mounted in a locked enclosure and printout shall visible through an opening in the enclosure door. All shall be automatically spooled onto a take up printer shall operate from a 24 VDC supply and shall to operate from the system standby batteries in event of main power loss. No UPS system shall be for backup power. TSP-40 shall record all system events including commands and shall be capable of providing a list of system condition such as detector sensitivi- thresholds, analog voltages, device type, and custom A trouble condition shall be generated when paper has run out. An internal buffer shall continue store events when paper is out. NUMBER Data Wiring Installation TSP-40 comes with two attached cables – a two-conduc- power cable and six-conductor data cable. To complete electrical installation Connect the six-conductor, data cable to P4 on the If no MOM-4 is installed, connect the two-conductor cable to P3 on the MMB-1. If a MOM-4 is installed, connect the two-conductor cable to P8 on the MOM-4. The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotonics detectors and bases Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 9/95

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Series Horn Universal Mount: 1, 2 Gang or 4(cid:148) Square back Mounting Horn or Horn / Strobe Units 24 Vdc Units Available with 15/75, 30/75, 75 or 110 Candela Strobes Electronic Selectable 8-Tone: Horn, Temporal, Hi-Lo, Chime, Siren, Slow-Whoop and Stroke Bell Raised Mounting Design – Eliminating Need Deeper Back Box Very Low Inrush Current Available for Wall or Ceiling Mount Devices (in or White Colors) Light Plastic Grill Construction Low Operating Current – DC or Full Wave ADA/UL 1971 Horn-Strobe Versions Screw Terminals Accept #12 AWG CSFM, NYMEA & FM Approvals dBA output, very low inrush current and the operating current DC or Full Wave are characteristics all new Cerberus Pyrotronics devices. The electronic horns provide maximum reliability and low current for every application. U-MMT series 8-tone horn operates on a current of 20 40ma at 24Vdc depending on tone selected. The audio of the signal provides a 91 to 97 dB output. The U- mounts on a single gang, while all other units are 1, 2 gang or 4(cid:148) square mounting. Pyrotronics notification devices are designed with installer in mind. The U-MMT series devices are con- with all of the electronics in the housing and not in box. This design helps eliminate possible ground faults jamming everything in the box. Units are also available two different colors, red or white. U-MMT horn / strobe units construction consists of flashtube with solid state circuitry for maximum and efficiency. The full range of new strobes have rounded dome shape made of clear Lexan (cid:147)FIRE(cid:148) are visible on the front mounting plate. The overall is 2.0(cid:148) x 2 7/8(cid:148) with a height of 1 3/8(cid:148). units can also be synchronous when used with the sync or DSC (Dual Sync Control) units. order a device in (cid:147)white(cid:148) use a (cid:147)-W(cid:148) at the end of the number (i.e., U-MMT-W). NUMBER Information Series Horn Wall Mount Horn Rating 10 Series Horn/Strobe Wall Mount Series Horn/Strobe Ceiling Mount Number Horn Rating 10 Number Horn Rating 10 operating range is 20 to 31 Vdc/FWR UL measurements ar 85-88dB taken in free air at 360 around device and averaged. Typical readings are frontal sound readings with a dB meter with signal mounted on wall. Rated for indoor use 32 to 120 (0 to 49 with 85% RH.

MXL-VDT Interactive Video Display Terminal AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Control of MXL Display of All MXL System Events 80/132 Column Mode Supervised/Non-Supervised Mode RS-232 14 Amber Monitor Detachable Keyboard 4 Pages of Screen Memory Auxiliary Serial Port Function Key Operation Support for MXL Commands Password Protection for Control Test Menu Functions System Status Line System Diagnostic Report Full Page Terminal Set Up Menu Help Screen ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA MXL-VDT is a 14 video monitor with detachable it provides an interactive terminal for secondary of MXL information, and operation of MXL func- such as Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset as well as and disarming devices. It also provides a means generating system reports such as listing smoke sensitivity settings and voltages, battery and supply voltages and current. system events are displayed on the MXL-VDT amber The unit can scan up to four (4) pages of screen allowing the user to access data that would have been lost when screen capacity was All events are shown with the date and time of are executed using either a three letter string or a pre-programmed Function Key. to the MXL control and test menu functions are protected. MXL-VDT can be operated in either a supervised (one or non-supervised (multiple) mode and connects to PIM-1 module. It includes an auxiliary RS-232 port for of additional terminals, CRTs or printers. bottom line of the CRT always displays a system line showing total number of alarms, troubles, and securities. unit is factory burned-in for 60 hours to provide It is pre-programmed with essential set-up MXL-VDT operates on 120 VAC and provides no for battery backup. If standby power is required, an UPS (uninterruptable power supply) must be NUMBER COMMANDS SUPPORTED ALARMS SUPERVISORY TROUBLE SECURITY AUDIBLES STATUS ALARMS SUPERVISORY TROUBLES SECURITY SENSITIVITY SETTINGS ANALOG VOLTAGE THRESHOLD VOLTAGE SENSITIVITY VOLTAGE MODULE TYPE DEVICE TYPE MESSAGES SOFTWARE REVISION ON OFF SENSITIVITY SETTINGS INPUT POINT OUTPUT POINT REPORT LAMP TEST LAMP TEST ON DEVICE LED TIME AND DATE Refresh: Information: 10 x 16 character cell Data Rate: Screen: Set Up: via CSGM 50 Diagonal flat screen. Brightness and controls Hz adjustable low with 6 foot coiled RJ11 600 bytes NVM bi-directional main port with DB25 connector. Asynchro- bi-directional RS-232C port with DB9 female page menu on/off. Embedded back VAC, 50/60 Hz 10% Power Requirements: 0.6A for 24 Hours) 12.5 (31.75 cm) 13.3 (33.78 cm) 12.2 (30.99 cm) 9.5 (20.90 cm) 20 lbs. (9.1 kg.) 3 lbs. (14.1 kg.) Pyrotronics Ridgedale Ave. Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 12/93

Visual Signaling Devices Strobes Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Available in 15, 15/75, 75, and 110 Models Meets ADA/UL 1971 Low Current Draw, Less Inrush Xenon Flashtube with Solid State Weatherproof Rated When Surface in FWB Series Box Single Gang, 4 Inch Flush, and 4 Inch Mounting Available with Red or Off-White Horizontal or Vertical Bell-Chime/ Plate Available Listed, FM and NYMEA Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics strobes signals provides maxi- reliability and low current drain, meeting any visual fire/life safety application. These units are for ADA applications and meet the latest require- of NFPA 72 (the National Fire Alarm Code) and UL standards for signaling devices for the hearing units utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry maximum reliability and efficiency. Strobes are available 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 Candela ratings with various configurations. The strobe lens has a bottom made of white Lexan with 5/8 red letters. top of the strobe has a rounded dome shape made of Lexan The overall lens height is 2.5 with a width of S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non- areas where lower candela is required per UL S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring cd output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets requirements for regular lighted public areas while satisfying UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd S110 version intensifies a non-sleeping ADA area with cd and can be used in sleeping areas to help wake hearing impaired person per UL 1971. NUMBER Stobes No. )-FS )-F )-S VDC VDC VDC No. )6060H Strobe VDC )6090V Strobe VDC Gang in. sq. in. sq. in. sq. in. sq. Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Strobe Plates alone strobes utilize wire nuts for connection. Terminal strips are available by modifying part number to read -FT or -ST. FS models are not with terminals. Diagram Diagram No. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 1/97

Visual Signaling Devices ADA Synchronized Strobes AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Available in 15, 15/75, and 75 Models Flash Rate 1.0 to 1.1 per Second Meets ADA/UL 1971 Requires SCM-F or SCM-FW Controller Also Available in Horn-Strobe and Combinations Xenon Flashtube with Solid State Weatherproof Rated When Surface in FWB Series Box Single Gang, 4 Inch Flush, and 4 Inch Mounting Horizontal or Vertical Bell-Chime/ Plate Available Listed Cerberus Pyrotronics F-Series of strobes signals maximum reliability and low current drain, meet- any visual signaling fire/life safety application. These are designed for ADA applications and meet the latest of NFPA 72 (the National Fire Alarm Code) UL 1971 standards for signaling devices for the hearing units utilize a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry for reliability and efficiency. Synchronous strobes are in 15, 15/75, and 75 Candela ratings with various configurations. The strobe lens has a bottom made of white Lexan with 5/8 red letters. top of the strobe has a rounded dome shape made of Lexan The overall lens height is 2.5 with a width of SCM-F and SCM-FW Sync Strobe/Signal Control Unit is remote module that operates from the fire alarm panel circuit. It mounts in a 4 inch square box and is with either a red (SCM-F) or off-white (SCM-FW) Class wiring is required to the controllers block. When activated, the SCM unit triggers the lights to flash at a synchronized rate of 1 to 1.1 per second. S15 model provides 15 cd and are used in non- areas where lower candela is required per UL S17 model is for non-sleeping installations requiring 15 output while also providing an ADA compliant 75 cd output for public areas. S75 version offers a 75 cd polar output that meets ADA for regular lighted public areas while also UL 1971 in substitution of multiple 15 cd units. NUMBER Synchronized Stobes No. )S-FS )S-F )S-S VDC VDC VDC No. )S-6060H Strobe VDC )S-6090V Strobe VDC Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Gang in. sq. in. sq. in. sq. in. sq. Strobe Current Ratings (mA) Strobe Plates alone strobes utilize wire nuts for connection. Terminal strips are available by modifying part number to read -FT or -ST. FS models are not available with Surface mount units are rated weatherproof when used with FWB-1 or FWB-2 surface weatherproof box. ( ) represents strobe model, e.g., 15, 17 or 75 . Diagram Deep Surface Box for FLush Grill Signals, Red Wall/Ceiling Housing for Bi-Directional Flush Horn/Strobe, Red No. Surface Box, Red Surface Box, Red Plate, Red Conduit Plate, Red Box, 1/2 Conduit, Red Box, 3/4 Conduit, Red Control Module for F-Series, Red Control Module for F-Series, Off-White The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics bases or signals with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regard to loss, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 Issue

Valve Outlet Adapter AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS VOA Features: Brass Construction in the Sizes, VOA-1 VOA-2 VOA-2 Listed and FM Approved Valve Outlet Adapter is used to connect the cylinder valve to the discharge piping when no flexible discharge is used. connect the valve outlet adapter to system piping connection) prior to connection of the valve. After the Valve Outlet Adapter to the system piping, SECURELY following is a chart that correlates the FM-200TM cylinders the proper Valve Outlet Adapter size. Capacity Outlet inches) Information No. Outlet Adapter Outlet Adapter Outlet Adapter No. Ensure that the pilot line in unpressurized and pins are in the retracted (SET) position. Failur to follow this will result in accidental discharge of the FM-200TM cylinder, the control head is installed on the cylinder. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. Lb. NUMBER Ensure that the pilot line in unpressurized and pins are in the retracted (SET) position. Failur to follow this will result in accidental discharge of the FM-200TM cylinder, the control head is installed on the cylinder. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 Issue

VoiceCom Voice Alarm Communication System AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Listed 864 CSFM, NYMEA Approved Style Y (Class B) and Style Z (Class A) and strobe circuits Power Supply and Battery Charger output over-voltage protection Dry contact or polarity reversal activation Activation inputs are fully supervised High efficiency digital amplifier True 100 Watts RMS output capacity 25 or 70.7 VRMS audio (field selected) Up to 11 optional Speaker and supervision modules in one cabinet All outputs are power limited Stand-alone or for use with any Fire Alarm/ Control panel Optional digital MessageMaker is field Coded tone option Backup evacuation tone option VoiceCom is a PRE-BUILT emergency voice and tone communication system. The VoiceCom can be used a stand alone system or in conjunction with any listed/ fire alarm control panel. The VoiceCom is self-contained and has its own power supply, charger, brown-out supervision and transfer, earth- detection, trouble and trouble ring-back circuitry. It incorporates an emergency paging microphone, tone 50 Watt RMS audio amplifier and a speaker circuit. The power supply is capable of a full Amps DC at 24 volts. A set of dry form trouble is provided for external connection to a fire alarm panel or fire suppression system. Speaker and circuits are supervised by the VoiceCom panel. The supply is capable of charging up to 24 AH batteries only 6 AH batteries are required for 24 hours of and 15 minutes of maximum alarm load operation. expansion of the VoiceCom system can be with the use of speaker (101-SPK) and strobe supervisory modules. Up to five speaker and/ strobe supervisory modules will mount in the same enclosure in any combination. An optional message unit called the MM-1 (MessageMaker) can added in the place of two speaker or strobe zone (three zone spaces in the large cabinet option). MM-1 comes pre-installed in the VoiceCom-MM package. The MM-1 comes with 20 seconds of programmable digital voice message capacity and 18 of capacity for virtually any evacuation tone(s) Through the use of up to two optional 20 second expansion devices, up to 60 seconds of a message can be recorded. The digital message can recorded through audio coupling using the microphone the MM-1 or electrically (with a tape recorder) using the jack on the MM-1. The MM-1 MessageMaker with a standard test message, alert tone, alarm tone NUMBER a standard evacuation message which can be over- if a specific message and tone are required. The MessageMaker has a built-in sequencer which an ALERT tone followed by the emergency and in turn followed by the ALARM tone. The tone can be coded to conform to any local and codes. The emergency message can be set to up to seven times with the setting of DIP switches. digital message can also be programmed to repeat the system is reset. The MM-1 MessageMaker uses memory thus retaining its messages indefi- As a further safeguard the 101-AMP amplifier will activate an evacuation tone backup in the event a MessageMaker failure. auxiliary audio input can be used for connection to a paging microphone RMT-PG, telephone paging, or required audio signal. The auxiliary audio input can set to the lowest priority so that it will be disabled in the of an alarm condition or when the system micro- button is pressed. The auxiliary audio input can also set to the highest priority ensuring that the remote RMT-PG has precedence over the VoiceCom the VoiceCom modules/options are centrally monitored ground faults and supervision troubles. Troubles are on the panel via a LED and an audible trouble A form system trouble relay is used to create a at the fire alarm control panel. The audible trouble may be silenced by activating the trouble silence Full annunciation of troubles is provided at both the control panel and the individual modules. LEDs are for short circuit and open circuit trouble annuncia- at every module. The system can be configured to a reminder a

VSM-1 / VLM-1 / VFM-1 Operator Switch Module/MXLV Annunciator Module/MXLV Fan Control Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Eight Programmable Protected Space for Labeling Discreet Switches Multi-Color LED For Indication Of Status Modular Programmable LED Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM, FM, City Chicago Approved (4) Programmable Fan Switches Rotary H.O.A. Manual On/Off/ Positions Positive Feedback LED Indication of Fan (On/Off and Protected Label Modular Activation Stagger Timer Listed, ULC Listed, and CSFM VSM-1 is an MXLV Command Console option module provides manual control of the Emergency Voice System. Each VSM-1 module provides eight push button switches and 16 LED to their status. Each switch is assigned two LED a label to indicate the switch programmed usage. label slides behind a clear protective membrane. of the LED assigned to each switch is a dual color used to indicate what type of signal is active. This may also be lighted steady or flashing to further system status. For example, zones active to the audio channel will have the LED lighted RED steady; zones active to the Alert audio channel will the LED lighted RED and flashing; zones selected paging will have the LED lighted GREEN and flashing the microphone key is pressed; when the zone confirmation message is received by the MXLV Console, the LED will change to steady indicating that it is clear to page; telephone with a call-in in progress will have their LED RED until selected at the Command Console at time the LED will convert to steady RED etc. This NUMBER the operator easy, clear access to the overall condition at all times. The second LED is amber is used to indicate a fault condition. VSM-1 and each switch is fully programmable and be used to control speaker circuits, and a wide of general system functions such as All Call, All Warden Page, Local Speaker, Select, etc. Any of circuits may be grouped and controlled by a switch. Switch usage and zone groupings are using AccuLINK system programming soft- VSM-1s are mounted on a hinged panel as a part of MXLV Command Console enclosure. A four conduc- cable is supplied for interconnection of the modules. 12″ cable (Model MRRC-1) is available for connection rows. VSM-1 connects to the TBM-1 module mounted in enclosure. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 VLM-1 is an MXLV option module which provides annunciation of system activity. Each VLM-1 module eight groups of 2 LED each of which can be to desired outputs using the AccuLINK pro- software. Eight LED are dual color capable being lighted either RED or GREEN flashing or steady. remaining LED are AMBER flashing or steady. space is provided for labeling of LED functions. The slides behind a clear protective membrane. VLM-1 dimensions are identical to the VSM-1 and is on the same hinged panel as a part of the MXLV Console enclosure. A four conductor cable is for interconnection of the modules. A 12″ cable MRRC-1) is available for connection between combination of VSM and VLM modules may be used. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 VFM-1 is an MXLV command console option module provides manual control of building HVAC system motors, and dampers. Each VFM-1 module provides rotary (3) position switches for manual system control. H.O.A. (Hand, Off, Auto) switches provide a visual of the switch state. (Off, On, or Automatic and its associated control outputs by both switch position indication and LED status indica- Each switch has 3 associated LEDs to indicate Fan/ status: OFF (Red LED), ON (Green LED), (Yellow LED). in the automatic position the red and green LEDs fan status (On or Off) based on the system logic can be programmed to automatically control the fan When manually switched to the Off position, the LED will flash indicating that the output circuit used turn off the Fan/Damper/Motor has activated. The red will light solid red to indicate positive feedback of

Technical Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

XL-3 to MXL Hardware Kits (XEA-1/-2, XED-1/-2, MKB-4) AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Allows Mounting MXL in Existing Enclosures Up to 6 MOM-4s (EBX-2) MKB-4 MXL Control/ with Optional Mounting Mounting for MMB-1/-2, MOM-4, MPS-6 MPS-12 Reduces Cost to Convert from XL-3 to MXL Listed XLD-1 module allows existing XL-3 systems to be to MXL systems without having to install new devices (smoke detectors, manual stations, TRX, SAX, etc.). All Series field devices communicate the MXL via the XLD-1. XL-3s that are to be converted to MXLs, the XEA-1/-2 XED-1/-2 sheetmetal adapter kits are available to the existing XL-3 enclosure to be used to house the System. The XEA-1/-2 adapter plates mount on the of the XL-3s, EBX-1 (small enclosure) and EBX-2 enclosure). XED-1/-2 doors replace the existing XL-3 doors, EDX-1 door) and EDX-2 (large door). MKB-4 must be used when converting an XL-3 to an The MKB-4 is functionally the same as the MKB-2, has slightly different sheetmetal to allow it to mount in XL-3 enclosures. (Note: the MKB-4 does not allow the of the MMM-1 or the this guide to select the proper XL-3 to MXL conver- hardware: XL-3 has: small XL-3 enclosure small XL-3 door large XL-3 enclosure large XL-3 door small adapter plate small black door large adapter plate large black door NUMBER MKB-4 is functionally the same as the MKB-2. It always be used when using XEA-1/-2 adapter in an exisiting XL-3 enclosure. MKB-2 will not fit with XEA-1/-2. The PIM-1 can optional mount on the back of MKB-4. The MKB-4 does not allow the mounting of the TMM-1 or ACM-1. XED-1 black door is required for use with XL-3 sys- being converted to MXL in an exisiting small XL-3 (EBX-1, EDX-1). The XED-2 black door is for use with XL-3 systems being converted to MXL an existing large XL-3 enclosure (EBX-2, EDX-2). XEA-1 adapter plate allows mounting of the following in an existing XL-3 small enclosure (EBX-1): PSR-1, MPS-6, MPS-2 MOM-4 cardcages, XEA-2 adapter plate allows mounting of the following an existing XL-3 large enclosure (EBX-2): MMB-1/-2, MPS-6, MPS-2 MOM-4 cardcages, MKB-4. Information Information # # plate for small XL-3 Enclosure (EBX-1) Plate for Large XL-3 Enclosure (EBX-2) Door for Small Xl-3 Enclosure (EDX-1) Door for Large XL-3 Enclosure(EDX-2) Display & Control Keyboard for use with Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 2/95

CXL Enclosures AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Attractive Styling Surface or Semi-Flush Mount Key Lock Dead Front Construction FM Approved Listed EAX Series of enclosures are designed to accommo- the CXL control panel, input/output modules and supply necessary for proper system operation. The Series of enclosures are constructed to permit semi- and surface mounting. enclosure consists of backbox and door assembly of heavy gauge steel. The EBX-1 and EBX-2 is finished in a brown baked enamel and provides necessary mounting studs for the CXL (CXE-1, see data) cardcage and power supply. EDX-1 and EDX-2 doors are attractively styled in a and brown textured baked enamel finish. The door is to the backbox using a sag resistant, steel piano and is fitted with a key locking arrangement. Each contains a viewing slot to permit the visual identifica- of the current system condition. The EDX-1 and EDX-2 left side mount only. NUMBER Information Number Weight lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs lbs. The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotronics and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 10/95

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Series Loop Driver Devices To MXL Interface Allows XL-3 to MXL System Conversion Style 4 (Class B) or Style 6 (Class A) Loops 30 Series Devices Per Loop Full MOM Card Slot Supports All Devices (TRX, PEX, DI-X3, etc.) Allows MXL Operation with Devices Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA Approved XLD-1 is an optional MXL network module that XL-3 analog addressable devices to the system. By using the XLD-1, existing XL-3 can be replaced by MXL systems, yet to use all Series devices that are in- on the XL-3. XLD-1 provides (4) analog loops for connection or Series devices. Each of the XLD-1 supports up to 30 alarm causing, trouble and supervisory type devices, as well as output devices (such as TRX relays, relay audible bases.) Each XLD-1 analog loop is of being wired for either Style 4 (Class B) or 6 (Class A.) MXL can support up to 8 XLD-1 modules (960 devices.) The XLD-1 provides the same device loop capacity as the XL-3 module INX. XL-3 system with (8) INX modules (fully loaded XL- – 960 devices) being replaced by an MXL would (8) XLD-1s to utilize all existing field device. Archiitect S Sppececiifficicaations aand Arch XLD-1 shall be an analog loop driver with the to supervise and communicate with all Pyrotronics or Series devices the CZM-1 and ICP). XLD-1 shall provide MXL network analog loops each capable of up to 30 or Series devices. XLD-1 shall occupy one full card slot in the or MOM-4 card cages. Each XLD-1 network loop shall be capable of being wired for either 4 (Class B) or style 6 (Class A.) The XLD-1 shall contain an on board microprocessor provides it with the ability to function and to alarm conditions even if the main MXL pro- fails. NUMBER Rl Raattiingsngs RATINGS: 200mA max. 200mA max. CIRCUITS ARE RATED: peak, 40mA max. peak, 40mA max. devices in alarm) Circuit Resistance: Circuit Capacitance: Ohms max. uF line to line uF line to ground Information Information Device Loop Driver Instructions XL-3 Enclosure Adapter Number XL-3 Enclosure Door (Black) XL-3 Enclosure Adapter XL-3 Enclosure Door (Black) Module Diagram Module Diagram Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram Table for XLD-1 Table for XLD-1 315-085388F 315-086588B 315-086590-7 315-086592-5 315-086590-7 315-086592-5 315-083534D 315-086587B 315-083406A 315-084125C 315-090287-2 315-090287-2 315-086590-7 315-086529-5 315-090289-3 315-090288A 315-092724-2 315-093234-1 315-093235-1 315-092994-2 315-092994-2 315-093336-1 315-090903-3 315-093329-1 315-183043C 315-088528B 315-084615C 315-087558-3 315-086552C 315-086552C 315-084614C 315-087791A 315-090556-5 315-092329-2 315-093315-1 315-183462E 315-086678-4 315-086288A Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Zone Amplifier Card 30 Watt Plug-in Audio Amplifier 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS Supervised Integral Speaker Zone Style or or Zones Power Limited Plugs into One-Half OMM Cardcage Slot Channel Switching (Supports 1, 2, or 3 Audio Channels) Central or Distributed Amplification/Zoning Amplifier Supervision Back-up Amplification Available ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA and of Chicago Approved ZAC-30 is a combination 30 watt amplifier/speaker for use with MXLV. Style Y, Z or speaker zone configurations are supported. ZAC-30 is power and can be configured to provide 30 watts of at either 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS. It is a plug-in card mounts in one OMM card slot and can be pow- by either the MMB-2/MPS-12, PSR, PS-35 or AS/PS5-BFS-24-UL power supplies. ZAC-30 channel input switching to allow operation in 1, or 3 channel voice evacuation systems. With this a 30 watt amplifier is provided on a zone so that each zone can have the necessary audio (Page, Evac, Alert or Other) switched to its without having to provide bulk amplification for audio channel. ZAC-30 contains internal amplifier supervision, the need for additional amplifier supervision provide amplifier backup, additional ZAC-30s can be to achieve the desired amplifier backup ratio; 1:1 backup with one ZAC-30 backed up by one or switched backup 1:X, multiple ZAC-30s can backed up by a single ZAC-30. Each ZAC-30 occu- one of the OCC-1 eleven sub-addresses. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 Archiitect S Sppececiifficicaations aand Arch shall be a combination 30 watt audio amplifier/ zone capable of being wired Style Y or Z or operating at 70 VRMS or 25 VRMS. ZAC-30 shall be limited and be powered by either MMB, PSR, PS- or auxiliary UL listed power supplies. ZAC-30 shall in an OMM cardcage and support 1, 2, or 3 channels. Internal amplifier supervision shall be ZAC-30 shall be capable of being backed up other ZAC-30s in either 1:1 or 1:X configurations. Rl Raattiingsngs Input:: VDC Input:: Current:: Current 25V/30W:: Current 70V/30W:: Range:: max. under full load max. max. +1dB NUMBER Module Board Module Board Information Information Number Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram there is no backup amplifier, terminals 3 and 4 together. one backup amplifier is shared by than one ZAC-30, connect all 3s together and leave the 4s unconnected. Profile Profile / Strobes / Strobes Strobe models require ZC Series of control modules. Refer to this series additional information. Speaker Zone Connections RMS, 30 watts max (1.2A) RMS, 30 watts max (0.42A) Loop Resistance: 7.50 ohms at 25.2V RMS, 15W 3.75 ohms at 25.2V RMS, 30W 5.40 ohms at 70.7V RMS, 30W ohms at 70.7V RMS, 15W Wire Size: 18 AWG Wire Size: 14 AWG Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 www.cerbpyro.com in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1997 sheet dated 3/96

System 3 Input Module Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS ZB-35 Linear Beam ZB-35 Linear Beam Detector Zone Module Detector Zone Module Two Wire Circuit eliminates need separate power wiring to the detector. Low Cost Installation Style B (Class B) Two Zones Placement Supervised Power Limited Listed, ULC Listed, CSFM, NYMEA Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics Linear Beam Smoke Detector Zone Model ZB-35 is designed to accommodate the Pyrotronics Linear Beam Smoke Detector, Model on only a two wire initiating circuit (Class B, Style B). additional power or other interface wiring is required. The module is connected to the System 3 via the 10 pin structure.. ZB-35 is a System 3 module that occupies 2 module This module contains two separate zones. Each supports either one set of PB-1191 Beam Smoke , or up to thirty compatible smoke detectors. A does not support a mix of a beam detector and smoke regulated zone output circuit may be connected in a B (Class B) installation. (Refer to Figures 1 and 2). Use 2K ohm, 1/2W, 1% resistor for supervision. A shorted line is current limited to 120mA maximum. circuits are power limited per NFPA 70, National Code. ZB-35 contains separate output terminals for use with and trouble conditions. An alarm is locked in until the is reset. An alarm always overrides any trouble A zone trouble does not lock in. Specifications model ZB-35, System 3 Module shall be used to accommo- a Cerberus Pyrotronics Linear Beam Smoke Detector PB-1191. The ZB-35 Module shall use a two wire circuit (Style B, Class B). additional power or other interface wiring shall be re- The ZB-35 Module shall be connected to the System via the 10 pin bus structure. ZB-35 module shall contain two separate zones to the PB-1191 Beam Detector. The ZB-35 may be used with compatible smoke detectors and manual Each zone shall support either one set of PB-1191 Beam Smoke Detectors or up to thirty compatible detectors. A zone shall not support a mix of beam and smoke detectors. ZB-35 will contain separate output terminals for use with and trouble conditions. An alarm shall be locked in until system is reset. An alarm shall always override any indication. A zone trouble shall not lock in. NUMBER Information Requirements: Standby – 15 mA per Zone – 120 mA per Zone Information Description Dual Zone Linear Beam Module .9kb to Installation Instruction P/N 315-090067. Diagram with PBA-1191 Beam Detector Connections with Smoke Detector Connections 1 2 The ZB-35 zone may be connected as either Class A or Class B. to Figures 1 and 2. Do not connect more than one PB-2400 Bean Detector in each zone. The maximum total detector line resistance is 40 ohms. Do not mix smoke detectors and beam detectors on the same zone. Place an EOL resistor across any terminals where a zone is not used. All wiring should meet local requirements. Connect terminals 1, 6, 7, and/or 12 to annunciator or Relay Module or equivalent. use up to 30 smoke detectors from any of the compat- detectors listed at the right) or use shorting devices, detector or remote lamps (Refer to related detector instruction). For see Notes 2 and 4. DETECTORS* is the compatibility identifier The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotonics detectors and bases Cerberus Pyrotronics control equipment will be considered a of Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment and as such void all either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 1/95

ZC Series Speaker/ Non-Coded N.A.C. Circuit Cards ZC2-8B, ZC2-4AB, ZC3-4AB) Limiting Option Modules PL864-25A, PL864-70A, PL864-25S) AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Fully Supervised Notification Appliances Speaker, Strobe, Non-Coded Horns, Chimes Style Y or Style Z (Class A or B) Fully Mappable and Controllable 70V or 25V Audio Signal Capability on Card ZC Cards are a series of optional MXLV modules provide various configurations of notification circuits, such as speaker, strobe, non-coded bells or chimes. are versions of the ZC cards that allow the of single, dual or three channel audio opera- as well as Style Y or Style Z zone configuration All of the ZC cards can support either 25V or audio signals. 24VDC polarity reversal type circuits also be used for strobe, horn, chime or bell appli- ZC cards zones are individually fused but not limited. When power limiting is required, the card and appropriate PL864 modules must be to meet U.L. 864 power limiting requirements. ZC cards plug into a slot in either the OMM-1 or cardcages. Each ZC card occupies one of the available sub-module addresses of the MXLV controller module. The zones are completely and mappable using MXL AccuLINK software (CSGM). These outputs are fully and are controllable automatically through control by event logic or manually via the VSM-1 modules in the MXLV command console. series cards may be used in non-MXLV applications use as non-coded NAC circuits. 1, 2, or 3 Audio Channel versions Plugs into OMM-1 or OMM-2 Cardcage Optional Power Limiting Modules (U.L. 864) Listed, U.L.C. Listed equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 – 1 Channel audio (25V or 70) / Zone Card ZC1-8B is a plug in speaker or strobe zone card. It into a slot in either the OMM-1 or OMM-2 ZC1-8B contains (8) class B speaker or circuits . The (8) zones can be divided into of 3,3, and 2 ; where each group can be either or speaker circuits. Strobe circuits are limited to amps @24VDC each. When used for 25V speaker each zone is rated at 45 Watts maximum. used for 70V speaker circuits, each zone is rated 70 Watts maximum. The maximum ZC1-8B card (all wattage is 300 watts. For applications that high speaker loads on a single zone, ZC1-8B are capable of up to (3) 100 Watt, 70V speaker when audio is supplied by (3) separate EL-410D For strobe or non-coded horn applications, ZC1-8B card (all zones) is rated for a maximum load of 14.4 amps @24Vdc. If power limiting of are required the PLC-4 and the appropriate (PL864-25A, PL864-70A, PL864-25S) current module(s) is required. NUMBER Module PL864-25S) current limiting module(s) are required. – 2 Channel Audio (25V or 70V) Zone ZC2-8B is a plug in 25V or 70V speaker zone card. plugs into a slot in either the OMM-1 or the OMM-2 ZC2-8B contains (8) Class B dual channel circuits . When used for 25V speaker circuits, zone is rated at 45 Watts maximum. When used 70V speaker circuits, each zone is rated at 70 Watts The ZC2-8B total speaker load (wattage for all zones) maximum is 100 Watts. For applica- that require high speaker loads on a single zone, ZC2-8B is capable of a single 100 Watt , 70V audio If power limiting of zones is required the PLC-4 the appropriate PL864 (PL864-25A, PL864-70A, – 3 channel audio (25V or 70V) / Zone card ZC3-4AB is a plug in speaker or strobe zone card. plugs into either the OMM-1 or the OMM-2 cardcage. ZC3-4AB contains (4) class A or class B three speaker circuits or Class A or B strobe circuits. horn circuits are limited to 1.8 amps each. When used for 25V speaker circuits, zone is rated at 45 Watts maximum. When used 70V speaker circuits, each zone is rated at 70 Watts The ZC3-4AB total speaker load (wattage for all zones) maximum is 100 Watts. For applica- that require high speaker loads on a single zone, ZC3-4AB is capable of a single 100 Watt , 70V zone. If power limiting of zones is required the and the appropriate PL864 (PL864-25A, PL864- current limiting module are required. – 2 Channel audio (25V or 70V) / Zone card ZC2-4AB is a plug in speaker o

System 3 Control Module Zone Coder AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS ZC-30 ZC-31 110 Code Capacity Positive Non-Interfering Coding Microprocessor Logic Placement Supervised Each Code Field Programmable One to Four Digits per Round to Fourteen Pulses per Digit ULC Listed, NYMEA, FM, and City of Chicago Cerberus Pyrotronics ZC-30 and ZC-31 are zone modules designed for use with Cerberus Pyrotronics 3 Control Panels. Zone Coders are required when alarm system requires an audible coded alarm signal, one or more zones, to facilitate fire location. ZC-30 Zone Coder module is a microprocessor based module designed to output a pre-programmed sequence when activated by a System 3 Zone Each zone, or group of zones, which requires a coded output signal has its zone output signal(s) fed an input terminal of the zone coder. Associated with two input terminals is a ZC-BD Dual Code Board. boards are programmed with the code information for their respective zones. The ZC-30 will accept to five ZC-BD for a capacity of ten individual codes. Zone Coder Extender modules are available to the capacity of the basic zone coder module. Each will accept ten ZC-BD which will generate 20 codes. Up to five ZC-31 Extenders may be to a ZC-30, for a total capacity of 110 unique input terminals are continuously scanned for an alarm from a zone module. When an alarmed zone is the information programmed on the respective ZC- Dual Code Board is read into the microprocessor. The then processes this information and outputs the NUMBER code in a form compatible with System 3 output If the alarm inputs occur faster than the codes transmitted, they are stored by the microprocessor When the first code has completed the required of rounds, the microprocessor will transmit the priority code in its memory. Priority is determined physical terminal location on the ZC-30 and ZC-31 No. 1 has the highest priority, while terminal No. has the lowest. code may contain from one to four digits, as re- Each digit may consist of from one to fourteen The system may be programmed to sound from to four rounds. All code information for a given zone be programmed, or changed in the field if required. consists of removing selected diodes on the No special equipment is required. The system rate is adjustable from 1.6 to 3.8 pulses per second, two pulses per second the standard factory setting. coder output may be set to either remain energized or after the completion of the code rounds. ZC-30 Zone Coder module and the ZC-31 Zone Coder module each require four module spaces in the 3 enclosure. The ZC-BD Dual Code Boards plug the ZC-30 and ZC-31 and require no space in the The ZC-30 derives its power from the System 3 conductor bus. Connections between the ZC-30 and ZC-31 Extenders are made with the supplied ribbon The ZC-30 is placement supervised. Any failure of ZC-30 software or internal power supply will generate a trouble and light a yellow LED on the ZC-30. and Architect Specifications system shall be provided with a UL listed solid state coder. Activation of any zone shall automatically _____ rounds of the respective code on all audible Alarms shall sound in a positive, non-interfering Wiring successive fashion, so as to sound all codes, without zone coder shall be of totally solid state design, the need for motors or code wheels. The system be programmable in the field as to the number of it sounds. Each code shall contain from one to four with from one to fourteen pulses per digit, all field The coder shall be expandable in the field accommodate up to 110 different codes. The coder be programmable for either continuous after-ring or at the end of the coding time. coder shall transmit its codes on a priority basis, with highest priority codes being transmitted first. All codes sound in positive, successive fashion, without inter- from subsequently received codes. The coder be compatible with the subsequent alarm feature of control panel. Failure of the coder, software, or internal supply shall generate a system trouble. The zone shall be a Cerberus Pyrotron

ZCT-8B Firefighter Telephone Zone Card AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Firefighter Telephone Circuits Plugs Into OMM-1 and OMM-2 Call-in Acknowledge Tone Command Console Tone Separate Call-in And Circuit Shorted Power Limited Circuits Warden Page Option-Manual or Fully Programmable ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, and City of Chicago ZCT-8B is an MXLV option module which plugs into a on the OMM-1 or OMM-2 cardcage, providing 8 telephone zones. The zones can be configured have an off-hook acknowledge tone as well as a Com- Console busy tone. zone is activated when a firefighters telephone (FT-301/302 series) connected to that zone is taken or a portable handset (PT-303/304 series) is into a jack (FJ-303 series). When the zone active, the remote telephone station will receive off-hook acknowledge tone and the programmed zone will begin flashing at the Command Console. Once by the operator, the zone will be connected to the riser in a party line mode. If the signal has been enabled, the active remote telephone will receive a busy tone when the Command is presently connected to another telephone telephone zone uses a single pair of wires (shielded) is individually supervised in a Class B type mode. are also individually power limited per NEC 760. zone also contains transient protection. Up to 6 stations may be off-hook simultaneously with no of audio quality. ZCT-8B is supplied with a KEY which when inserted the slot on the OMM-1 or OMM-2 will prevent any type of module from being inadvertently placed in location. edge connectors on the ZCT-8B are gold plated for reliability. and Architect Specifications Telephone circuits shall be provided by a plug- type module which supplies eight individually super- and power limited circuits. Each circuit shall use a pair of shielded wires (min 18 AWG) and shall be of providing both an off-hook acknowledge and a Console busy signal. telephone zone module shall plug into an OMM-1 or cardcage as a part of the Cerberus Pyrotronics Emergency Voice Evacuation system. Edge connec- shall be gold plated for maximum dependability. to 6 firefighters telephones, either stations or portable may be active simultaneously with no noticeable of audio quality. warden station on a telephone zone shall be capable acting as a wardens page microphone in either a console controlled mode or automatic mode. NUMBER Ratings Electrical Characteristics Maximum wire size: Minimum wire size: Maximum loop Outputs: End of line resistor: AWG twisted pair, shielded AWG twisted pair, shielded ohms for both wires 9 VDC, 9mA max. 12.5 VDC, 300mA 1/4W, + 1% 140-383467) Diagram Information No. firefighter’s telephone zone No. Instructions telephone equipment telephone station telephone station with cable telephone station with switch telephone station with switch and armored portable handset jack handset back box back box w/ key lock glass for FC-300S The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Cerberus Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus Pyrotron- equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied with regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 8/94

ENGINEER AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS 3 Input Module LED Alarm Indicator LED Trouble Indicator Dual Zoning Placement Supervised Solid State Circuitry ULC Listed, Approved dual contact zone module, Model ZN-31U, is de- to provide two (2) detector line circuits incorporat- contact type devices. These devices may be manual waterflow switches, thermal detectors, relay etc. Each circuit provides Class supervision. module also contains two (2) red LED lamps two (2) yellow LED lamps, one of each for circuit. operation of any shorting type device installed on detection circuit, the system will lock into alarm initiating the start of the sequential functions into the system, such as ringing alarm bells, coded alarm transmitters, closing doors, shut- down fans and equipment, recalling elevators, etc. In to the system alarm, the red LED alarm lamp on face of the module for the particular zone in alarm will illuminated. The module also provides a current-limited signal for the zone in alarm for activating a supple- alarm relay module , or annunciator module. The alarm indicating circuits and signaling lamps are from the system control panel. yellow LED trouble lamps (one for each circuit) will should a break occur in the detector lines. Such condition will initiate a system trouble signal. The yellow trouble indicators will be extinguished upon restora- of circuit integrity or upon receipt of any system alarm. red and yellow LEDs can be lamp tested from the control panel. model ZN-31U is placement supervised, providing a trouble signal upon removal from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. Features Model ZN-31U can be supplied in normal or lock-in modes as desired. NUMBER and Architect detection line circuit monitoring shall be provided by Cerberus Pyrotronics dual contact zone module, model This module shall be system interconnected by a plug and harness assembly and shall be operable the main control panel. detector line shall consist of a two wire circuit in an end of line device and shall accommo- contact type devices. Each circuit shall provide Class supervision. operation of any contact device installed in the the system shall lock into alarm and the red LED indication lamp (one for each circuit) mounted on face of the module shall illuminate. A yellow LED Wiring indicating lamp (one for each circuit) also on the of the module shall illuminate should a break occur in detection circuit. LEDs shall be lamp tested from the system control model ZN-31U shall be placement supervised and be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed. Information Requirement: – 15mA – 110mA per Circuit Information No. Contact Zone lb. (.45 kg.) The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics and bases with Cerberus control equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus equipment and as such void al warranties either expressed or implied regazrds to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1995 sheet dated 12/93

System 3 Valve Supervision Modules AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Module ZN-34US ZN-34UA Distinct Supervisory Distinct Circuit Trouble Dual Circuit Module Placement Supervised Style Circuit Supervision ULC Listed for Supervision Sprinkler Valve Supervision Modules, Model ZN-34US Model ZN-34UA, are designed to provide two circuits the supervision of sprinkler system gate valves and equipment in accordance with NFPA Standard 72. module provides two yellow LED indicators per circuit. first illuminates when a supervisory condition exists and second when a circuit trouble condition occurs. The utilizes an end-of-line resistor in parallel with open switches to provide this supervision. Model ZN-34US provides annunication of conditions as when a sprinkler valve is closed the supervisory is shorted, the yellow supervisory LED is illuminated the supervisory module output is energized. The output be used to operate a separate AE-30U Module with audible device. When a break in the circuit occurs the trouble LED is illuminated and the control panel is in system trouble. The supervisory condition is non- therefore, the supervisory condition will clear if the valve is restored to its normal, open position. Model ZN-34UA is a latching device. Operation is the as the ZN-34US except that the condition latches and only be cleared through a system reset after the valve is restored to its normal, open position. NUMBER addition to gate valves, other sprinkler supervisory limit such as water pressure, water level, temperature, pressure and fire pump supervision may be supervised the ZN-34US/A. module LED are illuminated when the system reset/ test switch on the CP-35 main module is operated. ZN-34US/A sprinkler valve supervision module is supervised, providing a system trouble signal removal from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and ULC listed, Sprinkler Supervisory Service. Information VDC at 6mA Supervision and Supervisory Switch Activated loop resistance: 100 ohms Information Zone Sprinkler Valve Module Zone Sprinkler Valve Module Latching to Installation Instructions P/N 315-094221. Wiring ZN-34US Normally open parallel connected gate valve contacts, or the equivalent. The maximum loop resistance for each zone is 100 ohms. Connect the supervisory contact operated output of the zone (terminal 6 or 12) to the input of a AE-30U (terminal 5 or 6). Multiple ZN-34US zones may be connected to a single Refer to the CP-35 Wiring Information, P/N 315-085178, for signal factor load The ZN-34US is a non-latching device. Wiring ZN-34UA Normally open parallel connected gate valve contacts, or the equivalent. The maximum loop resistance for each zone is 100 ohms. Connect the supervisory contact operated output of the zone (terminal 6 or 12) to the input of a AE-30U (terminal 5 or 6). Multiple ZN-34UA zones may be connected to a single Refer to the CP-35 Wiring Information, P/N 315-085178, for signal factor load The ZN-34UA is a latching device. The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 Issue

System 3 Valve Supervision Module AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Module ZN-34U2 Distinct Supervisory Annunciation Distinct Circuit Trouble Annunciation Dual Circuit Module Placement Supervised Solid State Circuitry ULC Listed, FM and CSFM for Sprinkler Supervision Sprinkler Valve Supervision Module, Model ZN-34U2, designed to provide two circuits for the supervision of system gate valves and ancillary equipment in with NFPA Standard 72. The module provides yellow LED indicators per circuit. The first illuminates a supervisory condition exists and the second when circuit trouble condition occurs. The module utilizes an resistor in parallel with normally open switches provide this supervision. Model ZN-34U2 provides annunication of conditions follows; when a sprinkler valve is closed the supervisory is shorted, the yellow supervisory LED is illuminated the supervisory module output is energized. The should be used to operate a separate AE-30U with an audible device. When a break in the circuit the module trouble LED is illuminated and the panel is placed in system trouble. The supervisory is non-latching, therefore, the supervisory will clear if the sprinkler valve is restored to its open position. addition to gate valves, other sprinkler supervisory limit such as water pressure, water level, temperature, pressure and fire pump supervision may be supervised the ZN-34U2. module LED are illuminated when the system reset/ test switch on the CP-35 main module is operated. ZN-34U2 sprinkler valve supervision module is place- supervised, providing a system trouble signal upon from the system. unit is Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed, and Mutual approved for Sprinkler Supervisory Service. Specifications system gate valve (water pressure, water level, air pressure, fire pump) supervision shall be by a Cerberus Pyrotronics sprinkler valve supervi- module, Model ZN-34U2. This module shall be interconnected by a 10 pin plug and harness and shall be operable with the main control NUMBER circuit shall supervise any number of normally open contacts which are placed in a parallel ar- The circuit shall be terminated with an appro- end-of-line device. a sprinkler valve is closed the supervisory circuit be shorted. A yellow supervisory LED shall be and the supervisory module output energized. output shall operate a separate AE-30U Module with audible device. When a break in the circuit occurs a trouble LED shall be illuminated and the control shall be placed in system trouble. The supervisory is non-latching, therefore, the supervisory will clear when the sprinkler valve is restored to normal, open position. module shall be placement supervised, and UL listed/ approved for sprinkler supervisory service in accor- with NFPA 72. Wiring Information Requirements: Normal 4 mA per zone 60 mA per zone max. loop resistance: 100 ohms Information No. Zone Sprinkler Valve Module Wt. The use of other than Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors and bases with Pyrotronics equipment will be considered a misapplication of Cerberus equipment and as such void all warranties either expressed or implied regards to loss, damage, liabilities and/or service problems. Pyrotronics Ridgedale Avenue Knolls, NJ 07927 (201) 267-1300 (201) 397-7008 in U.S.A. Pyrotronics East Pearce Street Hill, Ontario 1B7 CN (905) 764-8384 (905) 731-9182 1996 sheet dated 6/95

System 3 Input Module ZS-30 INTRINSICALLY SAFE ZONE AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS FM Approved For Class I, Division 1, A, B, C, D, E, F, and G, Class II, Class III Single Zone Solid State Circuitry Alarm and Trouble Indicators Supervised FM Approved Ground detection circuit on CP must be disabled to ground at shunt diode barrier. Hazardous Location Classifi- Hazardous Location Classifi- I: II: III: 1: A: B: C: D: E: F:

System 3 Input Modules ZU-35, ZU-35DS, ZU-35TS Dual Zone AND ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS Complete Supervision Of Detection Class A (Style D) and Class B (Style B) Accommodates Ionization, Photoelectric, Flame Detectors, Manual and Other Contact Devices Alarm And Trouble LEDs Per Zone Listed, ULC Listed, FM, CSFM, NYMEA Approved ZU-35TS Coast Guard Approved Cerberus Pyrotronics Dual Zone Module Model ZU- is designed to provide two independent initiating Up to thirty standard Cerberus Pyrotronics and photoelectric detectors or flame detectors model DF-3, DF-3A and DF-30) are supported by modules. Additionally, any quantity of shorting type devices such as manual stations and thermal also can be accommodated and intermixed on initiating circuit. Terminals are provided for each power limited in either NFPA Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style addition to all the same features of the ZU-35, each is provided with a disconnect switch which will the zone. This action will cause a zone trouble a system trouble signal until the switch is returned to ZU-35TS is furnished with a 3 position momentary test switch for each zone. The normal switch is in the center, one side position will test the trouble signal and the other will test a zone alarm This is a requirement for US Coast Guard ap- for use on marine systems, and the module is Guard approved. operation of a detector or shorting type device on the initiating circuit, the module will lock into alarm condition, initiating the start of the sequential designed into the system. These functions may sounding audible devices, operating alarm closing doors, shutting down fans and recalling elevators, and other similar func- required for life and property safety. addition to the system alarm, a red Alarm LED, on the of the dual zone module will be illuminated for that detection circuit. A trouble on either detection will be similarly annunciated with a yellow LED, for each circuit. NUMBER module supplies a current limited output signal for circuit in alarm providing for activation of supplemen- modules or annunciators. dual zone module occupies one module space in the 3 rail structure and is interconnected via a ten- plug and harness assembly. Dual Zone Module Model ZU-35/DS/TS is Underwrit- Laboratories Inc. listed and FM approved. equipment is approved for operation over the range of 0 to 49 Archiitect S Sppececiifficicaations aand Arch initiating circuit line monitoring shall be provided a Cerberus Pyrotronics Dual Zone Module, Model ZU- ZU-35DS or ZU-35TS. This module shall be system by a ten-pin plug and harness and shall operable with the main control panel. zone circuit shall accommodate up to thirty current Cerberus Pyrotronics detectors (except for model which is limited to 5 devices.) Any quantity of type contact devices such as thermals and stations can also be intermixed on a zone circuit. detection circuit shall consist of either NFPA Class (Style D) or Class B (Style B.) operation of any initiating device installed in the the module shall lock into alarm and the red LED indicating lamp (one for each circuit) mounted on face of the module shall illuminate. A yellow LED indicator (one for each circuit) also on the face of module shall illuminate should a break occur in the circuit wiring or a detector be removed from the of alarm conditions shall have priority over and shall be annunciated over any trouble LED indicators shall be lamp tested from the system panel. Model ZU-35, ZU-35DS or ZU-35TS shall be place- supervised and shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and FM approved. Rl Raattiingsngs Requirement: – 23.5 VDC mA mA Information Information No. Wt. Zone Module lb. (.45 kg.) 500-887255 lb. (.45 kg.) Zone Module with Zone Disconnect except w/ trouble & test switches. S. C. G. approved. 500-885420 lb

Siemens Switzerland Ltd & Cities Sector Technologies Division Headquarters 22 Zug +41 41 724 24 24 information in this document contains general descriptions of technical options available, do not always have to be present in individual cases. The required features should therefore specified in each individual case at the time of closing the contract. Siemens Switzerland Ltd, 2012 for infrastructure. world is undergoing changes that force us to think new ways: demographic change, urbanization, global and resource shortages. Maximum efficiency top priority and not only where energy is concerned. addition, we need to increase comfort for the well-being users. Also, our need for safety and security is constantly For our customers, success is defined by how they manage these challenges. Siemens has the are the preferred partner for energy-efficient, and secure buildings and infrastructure. Fire Safety control panels versatile applications system design, scalable to meet future requirements for infrastructure. Quick, reliable detection of fire, and carbon monoxide Simple panel operation with access to all functions Systems custom built according your safety and budget Reliable detection confirmed the S-LINE detectors Alarm Guarantee detectors to panels protection complete fire protection solution one source is a deep-rooted, fundamental That why solutions that reliably people, assets and processes fire, smoke and carbon monoxide such a crucial role. Desigo Fire Safety everything needed for compre- fire protection: Fire detectors with excellent reliability false alarms and meet the of the fire safety and monoxide codes NFPA 72 and 720. Control panels, fire terminals, remote and displays provide full view and are easy to operate, in the case of an event. Complete range of peripherals, ranging notification devices to manual stations. precise and reliable detection, fast notification, quick Desigo sets the standard in three areas, including: Redundant sensors that increase the of the fire detectors. Forward and backward light scattering that ensures enhanced to actual fires and practically false alarms. All detectors with ASAtechnology with a Genuine Alarm Guarantee. special carbon monoxide (CO) detector CO, whether generated by or from fire. Fast, fault-tolerant between FDnet devices the control panels increases system The control panels allow simple, operation, plain text displays and instructions, which allow security to focus on the event. every need from to is a homogeneous family of fire and control panels whose are all compatible. From standard special situations, it easy to realize the of this comprehensive system: ASA detectors from the S-LINE range are for sophisticated applications deceptive phenomena. They offer than 20 detection profiles for environments including data power generation, utility warehouses, manufacturing, garages and ducts. This means can cover all applications with one The C-LINE detector portfolio is a option for standard The different control panels increase in system planning and keep system scalable for the future. Fire Safety: based on trusted from Siemens Fire Safety is a comprehensive fire safety system for fast, reliable detection as well as alarm signaling and control. It is designed to protect and assets and to prevent production losses, thereby safeguarding your buildings and survival. Desigo not only defines the technological of the art, but also offers a high level of flexib

Catalog limited) XLS Cage-5 Slots CC-5 Common card cage for all FireFinder XLS / V option cards Five (5) slots to mount any option cards with no restrictions Mounts on back box or CAB-MP (two-module spaces) Removable terminal blocks Numbered terminal blocks All field-wiring terminations on top (power limited) All internal-wiring terminations on bottom Molded card guides for card mounting Card-position locator label on card guide All cards communicate via common 60-pin power / data bus Screw terminals wire sizes supported: 12 AWG 24AWG DIN connectors UL 864 9th Edition Listed and ULC Listed; Overview Model CC-5 card cage provides the physical location and all wiring connection for all fire and voice system options cards the FireFinder XLS system. cards plugged into the Model CC-5 card cage with other modules of the XLS panel via a common, 60-pin data This 60-pin bus runs through the card making all communication data buses and available to all cards. Connectors are on the left and right side of Model CC-5 connect a 60-pin cable for communications the FireFinder XLS operator interface, power and amplifiers modules. There are no components on Model CC-5. CSFM & NYMEA Approved Industry, Inc. Technologies Division wiring to all devices and circuits at the Model CC-5 card cage. cards designed for use with Model CC-5 their field wiring terminations to the Model CC-5 these connections are all limited. Internal wiring connections 24VDC to cards or high-level audio (depending on application used) to the of Model CC-5 connections are all non-power wiring connections to Model CC-5 are made removable terminal blocks. Terminal blocks rated for use with wire-sized 12AWG to Each terminal block comes with a cover that also serves as a handle to easy terminal-block removal when wires connected. XLS 6320 FireFinder XLS Cards combination of the following (5) option can be installed in the CC-5: for Ordering to Installation Instruction: 315-033035 and Humidity Range are UL 864 9th Edition listed for dry locations within a temperature of 120+/-3 (49+/-2 to 32+/-3 and at a relative humidity of 93+/-2% a temperature of 90+/-3 (32+/-2 (continued) connector is numbered to make wiring to the correct position on the block simple and reduce the potential wiring errors. CC-5 is shipped with two (2) card (top and bottom) that mount to the CC-5 PCB. The card guide contains a label for use by the installer to indicate the or card-slot position. The blank label as a reminder to the installer to ensure proper card goes in the correct card slot is important during commissioning cards may be installed after the field- terminations have been made and cards are removed for service. field-wiring terminations are typically to the Model CC-5 terminal blocks the card guides are mounted and the cards are installed. Model CC-5 mounts two (2) of the four (4) available module directly on the back box or optional CAB-MP for installation in the CAB-1, or CAB-3 enclosures. This marketing catalog sheet is not intended to be used for system design or installation purposes. the most up-to-date information, refer to each product installation instructions. Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Safety Fernwood Road Park, NJ 07932 (973) 593-2600 (908) 547-6877 www.SBT.Siemens.com/FIS in U.S.A. Safety Kenview Boulevard Ontario 5E4 / Canada (905) 799-9937 (905) 7

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SIEMENS Desigo CC: Weather Extension Module CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between (either an a legal entity or any affiliated companies or other entities) and Siemens Industry Inc. as the licensor (hereafter or for the LICENSED SOFTWARE specified in Clause 1 (each a and collectively The EULA You to use the LICENSED SOFTWARE under the terms and conditions set forth below. Read this EULA carefully installing or using the LICENSED SOFTWARE. INSTALLING, COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE LICENSED SOFTWARE YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU: (1) HAVE READ UNDERSTOOD THIS EULA AND ANY THIRD PARTY LICENSES (INCLUDING ANY OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE LICENSES) SET IN THE TERMS ADDENDUM BELOW OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR YOUR REVIEW AS SPECIFIED IN CLAUSE 6 TERMS AND (2) AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA AND SUCH TERMS. FURTHERMORE, YOU CONFIRM THAT YOU HAVE THE POWER TO MAKE SUCH A DECLARATION ALSO YOUR COMPANY. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT IF SIEMENS OR ANY LICENSOR OF SIEMENS IS REQUIRED TO ENGAGE IN PROCEEDING, LEGAL OR OTHERWISE, TO ENFORCE THEIR RIGHTS UNDER THIS EULA, SIEMENS AND/OR ITS LICENSOR BE ENTITLED TO RECOVER FROM YOU, IN ADDITION TO ANY OTHER SUMS DUE, REASONABLE ATTORNEY FEES, AND DISBURSEMENTS UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN A SEPARATE WRITING BETWEEN THE PARTIES. IF YOU DO NOT TO ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA, YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO INSTALL OR USE THE LICENSED IN SUCH AN EVENT, YOU SHOULD PROMPTLY CONTACT SIEMENS FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OR CERTIFIED OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE. LICENSED SOFTWARE. As used in this EULA, the term SOFTWARE shall mean (i) the software offered by under the brand name CC: Weather Extension Module in any release and (ii) any related documentation the LICENSED SOFTWARE. PROPERTY RIGHTS NOTICE. The Licensed Software and all rights, without limitation, including all patents, trademarks, trade secrets, publicity rights, and other proprietary rights therein, are owned by Siemens, licensors or affiliates and are protected by international treaty provisions and all applicable national laws. The structure, and code of the Licensed Software are the valuable trade secrets and confidential information of Siemens, their or affiliates. Except as expressly and unambiguously provided herein, You do not possess, and Siemens does not to You, any express or implied rights (whether by implication, estoppels or other legal theory) in or to any such property rights and all such rights are retained by Siemens, its licensors or affiliates. You must reproduce and the copyright notices with any permitted copies You make of the Licensed Software. LICENSE GRANT AND USE RESTRICTIONS. The LICENSED SOFTWARE is not sold to You. Siemens only grants to You a non-transferable license to use the Licensed Software in executable form solely for your own use. The EULA use of the Licensed Software, only within the boundaries established herein that may be supplemented by the order The configuration and execution of the Licensed Software may be enabled for use and/or supervised by a key, license set and/or other mechanism. Any component of the Licensed software shall be used exclusively for the CC: Weather Extension Module application. LIMITATIONS ON LICENSE. the LICENSED SOFTWARE was obtained by You from Siemens directly or through its licensed distributors for use a single machine, then You may only install the LICENSED SOFTWARE on a single machine owned or licensed by at any one time. the LICENSED SOFTWARE was obtained by You from Siemens or its distributors for networked use, You may copy distribute the LICENSED SOFTWARE over an internal network for use, at any one time, by the number of active users for which You obtained a license key from Siemens. You may make one copy of the Licensed Software, excluding the documentation, as an archival backup copy of the Any other copies You make of the Licensed Software are in violation of this EULA. If this LI

Readme for 3rd Party Software Party Software Agreement README for Desigo Weather Extension v2.5.2 in, or bundled with, this product are open source software (OSS) components and other third party components below. You may receive a copy of,distribute and/or modify any open source code for the OSS component under the terms their respective licenses,which may be GNU General Public License, the GNU Lesser General Public License, the modified BSD and the MIT license. In the event of conflicts between Siemens license conditions and the Open Source Software license the Open Source Software conditions shall prevail with respect to the Open Source Software portions of the software. are permitted to modify proprietary components originating from Siemens and to engage in reverse engineering for purposes of such modifications, to the extent such components are linked to libraries licensed under the GNU Lesser General Public You are not permitted to distribute information resulting from such reverse engineering or to distribute the modified components. Your rights to modify proprietary components originating from parties other than Siemens are governed by respective third party license conditions. written request within three years from the date of product purchase and against payment of our expenses, Siemens will supply code for any OSS component identified below in linewith the terms of the applicable license. this, please contact us at: Schweiz AG Technologies Group Property 22 6300 Zug the identified OSS components are distributed in the hope that they will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, even implied warranty such as for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, and without liability any Siemens entity other than as explicitely documented in your purchase contract. Source Software (OSS) Components open source software components used within the product are listed below (including their copyright holders and the license OSS components having different portions released under different licenses, refer to the included Upstream Resources Internet location(s) specified for each of the respective OSS components for identifications of code files released under the identified Json.net – version 6.0.8 Resources / Authors / Maintainers: (c) 2007- 2008 James Newton-King (c) 2007-9 Atif Aziz, Joseph Albahari. All rights reserved. (c) 2010-2014 James Kovacs & Contributors License: is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, July 2017 Copyright 2017, Siemens Schweiz AG 1/4 for 3rd Party Software publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is to do so, subject to the following conditions: above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Noda-Time – version 1.3.2.0 Resources / Authors / Maintainers: (c) 2009 – 2015- The Noda Time Authors License V2.0, January 2004 AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION Definitions. shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of document. shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under control with that entity. For the purposes of this d

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

Installation Instructions FHB2001-U1/-R1 and FHB2002-U1/-R1 Black/Red Backboxes and 2HU Black/Red Backboxes Model FHB2001-U1/-R1 is designed for use with the FT Series display terminals. FHB2002-U1/-R1 is designed to house system modules, power supplies or 300W), and batteries. Each backbox is shipped empty and without the inner outer doors as shown in Figure 1. and FHB2002-U1/R1 backboxes are for indoor use only in dry environ- FHB2001-U1 and FHB2002-U1 backboxes are black; the FHB2001-R1 and backboxes are red. FHB2001-U1 and FHB2001-R1 are identical in all respects and for the remainder of this document will be referred to as the FHB2002-U1 and FHB2002-R1 are identical in all other respects and for the of this document will be referred to as the FHB2002. BACKBOX NPT = 1 1/4 TYP = 1 1/4 TYP = 2.0 TYP = 1 1/4 TYP = 1 1/4 TYP = 3 1/2 TYP = 5.0 TYP ARE DOUBLE 3/4 – 1.0 NPT SIZES OF 3 PLACES EXCEPT THE 3 AT THE BOTTOM) 1 Backbox with Knockout Locations NPT B Inc. Inc. Inc. Industry Inc. Inc. TTTTTececececechnologies Di Di Di Division Di BACKBOX = 1 1/2 TYP = 3 1/2 TYP = 3 1/2 TYP = 3 1/2 TYP = 1 1/2 TYP = 1 1/2 TYP = 1 1/2 TYP = 2 1/2 TYP = 6 1/8 TYP = 2 1/2 TYP = 7 1/2 TYP = 2 1/2 TYP NPT KNOCKOUTS ARE DOUBLE 3/4 – 1.0 NPT SIZES OF 9 PLACES EXCEPT THE 2 AT THE BOTTOM) 2 Backbox with Knockout Locations to installation consider the following: FHB2001 and FHB2002 backboxes are mounted on a flat surface with four user- bolts that are a minimum of 3/8 inch in diameter. FHB2001 backboxes contain space in the bottom to mount a set of BT-33 (7.5AH) batteries. FHB2002 contain enough space in the bottom to mount a set of BTX-1 (33AH) when only the upper inner door is used. When both upper and lower inner are used in FHB2002 backboxes, batteries larger than 18AH (BP61) require an battery box. Mounting height for visual and manual access to the Person Machine (PMI) displayed in an opening of the outer door. Weight and size of the enclosure. enclosure installation must meet the requirements of NFPA 72, the Having Jurisdiction and local codes. of the outer door opening (all doors are hinged left). a clean, dry, shock and vibration free surface. the backbox clear of obstructions so that the front door opens and the controls and indicators are easily accessible. Mark the locations of the two upper mounting bolts of the backbox on the (Refer to Figure 3 for the FHB2001 and Figure 4 for the FHB2002.) There are two key-shaped cutouts on the top of the backbox. Make sure the end with the key-shaped cutouts is on top when installing the backbox. (Refer to Figure 3 and 4.) Drill the two holes located in the previous step and screw in the top bolts, a small gap between the wall and each top bolt. (Refer to Figure 3 the FHB2001 and Figure 4 for the FHB2002.) the backbox over the two top bolts and allow it to slide down over the Mark, drill, and install the two bottom bolts in the backbox. all four bolts securely against the back wall of the backbox. the backbox: Industry, Inc. Technologies Division STRAP LOOSE END BE MOUNTED THE OUTER BACKBOX 3 Holes for the FHB2001 FOR / / / / HOLES FHB2002 B BACKBOX STRAP LOOSE END BE MOUNTED THE OUTER LUG

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

EPD – Type II on ISO 14021 Plt 4″ Box ,Dbl Gng Box Declaration Pro & Desigo Firefinder of equipment / No. line Technologies, Inc. Enterprise Ct IL 60048 System 9001 (Quality) 14001 (Environment) protection according to load data entry on disposal weight of device necessary 864 Mailer Bag for Screws Foam compatible design responsibility of Siemens covers the entire product life cycle. Siemens already assesses, avoids and minimizes environmental impact of its products with respect to production, procurement, sales, use, services and disposal the product and process planning phases by complying with Siemens EP Standard No. 1 (former SN 36350) on Environmentally Compatible Product and System Design”. use energy consumption total weight of a device may deviate from the total of the weights of all individual components due to rounding. stainless; zinc plated <=5% alloyed; powder-coated Plate control of fire (Printed Circuit Board components of the assembled PCB) Page 1/2 - Type II on ISO 14021 device is classified as waste electronic equipment in terms of the European Directive 2012/19/EU (WEEE) and must be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste. The relevant national legal rules are to be adhered too. Regarding use the systems setup for collecting electronic waste. all local and applicable laws. 2011/65/EU (RoHS) device does not contain substances in concentrations and applications banned under the EU RoHS Directive. (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH) the best of our knowledge and according to the information of our suppliers the above mentioned device and its packaging contain no substances of the list according to Article 59 (1, 10) of the regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 concerning the Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of (REACH) in concentrations above 0.1 % w/w. according to the creation date of this document.) device is halogen-free. Disclaimer: This declaration is for information purpose only. Environmental Product Declaration does not constitute a guarantee of the composition of a product, neither does it guarantee that the product will retain a particular for a particular period. Technologies, Inc. therefore does not assume liability for any error or for any consequences which may arise from the use of this information to the maximum under the law. contact your local Siemens branch office to get further information on environmental aspects and disposal. Page 2/2

s Sheet Safety Products | System Accessories (Fire-Secondary) Digital Communicator 5128 | 5129 | 5230 AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATIONS Four (4) fully supervised input channels Dual-phone line interface and line-fault Automatic 24-hour test Reports in eight (8) standard- formats Local-keypad Programmer / Annunciator (Model 5230) Remote programming (Upload / Download) Relay output for system Alarm or Trouble Compact size allows mounting in most control also available in separate enclosure, Model 5129 Overview Fire Safety offers the (4) four-channel, digital communicators (Models 5128 5129 by Silent Knight). These are designed to monitor UL FACPs. Model 5128 is specifically designed meets fire codes for mounting in FireFinder, 3, SXL-EX and MXL system enclosures. from each of the aforementioned FACPs Model 5128. and by user-friendly, English-version available with the local programmer 5230). Inputs (4) supervised / unsupervised channel inputs be configured as either voltage inputs; active, or low inputs, or contact closure inputs. 5230 5129 UL864 9th Edition Listed; NFPA 72 Chapter 4, for Central / Remote Station monitoring UL Listed as a secondary communicator for to System 3TM, SXL FireFinder and MXL fire-alarm control panels (FACPs) 1: Alarm (Fire) 2: Trouble (Fire) 3: Sprinkler (Supervisory) 4: Alarm (Undefined) FACPs (XLS, SXL-EX and MXL) use a contact for each channel. XLS FACP connects to Model 5129, via the dry on the Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory on the Power Supply Charger (Model PSC- preset channels are programmed as follows: Monitors (2) phone-line circuits detect phone line faults monitoring their voltages. Reporting of a fault as trouble condition is delayed by 40-90 seconds. If condition should persist, an audible trouble either Model 5128 or Model 5129 will sound, and the trouble event be reported to the central station. Models 5128 5129 are equipped with line seizure to ensure accessibility. Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Four-Channel Digital Communicator 4000 Data DC Load: Output: Lights: Formats: 24 VDC from UL Listed FACP 84mA Alarm 154mA at 1Amp; VDC / 24 VAC for or Trouble LED: Power LED: Phone-line Trouble LED: Input fault and Trouble terminals for phone line and outputs. Color-coded flying leads control-panel inputs via: SK 3/1 SK 4/2 SESCOA 3/1 SK FSK (4/2) Radionics BFSK 14 and 23 SIA 8 / SIA20 formats registration Number: Equivalence: 0.9B of Jack: RJ31X [two (2) jacks required] for Ordering Knight 4-Channel, Dual-Line Digital Communicator Internal Knight 4-Channel, Dual-Line Digital Communicator Remote / Annunciator with Harness Options 3: Mount in rear of enclosure, or on rails Mount on inside front door below viewing or left-side back box on inside of either a Model MHD-2 Model MSR-1 rail kit on inside of any Model CAB-series (continued) Functions power-up, the Models 5128 and 5129 self- system status. A circuit on the resets the communicator if a fai

OPERATION Instructions Knight Model 5128/5129 Fire Communicator Connected to the Control Panel for the MXL Manual MXL from Siemens Industry, Inc., reports system to a Central Station using the Silent Knight 5128/5129, a four channel digital communica- that reports alarm, trouble, supervisory, and status. When used with the MXL, the Knight Model 5128/5129 uses the alarm, and supervisory channels. The miscellaneous channel may be used to annunciate conditions other fire at the Central Station. RATINGS all system power before installation, battery and then AC. (To power up, the AC first and then the battery.) Knight Model 5128 the Silent Knight Model 5128 within the MXL Alternate mounting for the Silent Knight may include double-sided tape, velcro, or Knight Model 5129 Silent Knight Model 5129 must be mounted to the MXL Control Panel and within 20 feet it using electrical conduit. MXL Control Panel connects to the Silent Model 5128/5129 Digital Fire Communicator the Alarm, Trouble, and Supervisory dry on the MXL Main Board (See Figure 1). to the Silent Knight 5128/5129 Fire Slave Installation Manual, P/N 150805, with the Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 for instructions. Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 monitors all troubles through the MXL trouble relay. The delays the AC fail trouble signal in accordance NFPA and UL requirements. NFPA 72 Remote Station install batteries to 60 hour standby capacity. For signalling DACT wire according to the Figure 1. NFPA 72 Central Station connections AC fail is delayed. The delay is typically 6 hours of 24 hours). Only the reporting of the trouble delayed. power must be present for a full minute before system switches back to AC power from the the optional AC monitor input (See Figure 1), Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 monitors AC fail When the MXL System reports an AC fail the Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 sends a code to the Central Station that identifies the as AC fail. to the MXL/MXLV Manual, P/N 315-092036 MXL System information. Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Park, NJ 315-093294-7 Building Technologies, Ltd. Safety & Security Products Kenview Boulevard Ontario 5E4 Canada Silent Knight Model 5230 LCD Keypad Program- can be connected temporarily to Pin P4 on the Knight 5128 Main Board (See Figures 1 and 2) on-site programming or troubleshooting of the English language messages assist in data, changing the 24-hour test time, and conditions currently in effect. 1 lists the recommended program for the Silent 5128/5129 Digital Fire Communicator. Before begin programming, read the Step Program- Form in the Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 Slave Communicator Installation Manual, P/N provided with the Silent Knight 5128/5129. Knight Model 5128/5129 Programming Table 1 No. Option Name Option Name ACTIVE SUPERVISED CHANNEL INPUT CHANNEL INPUT CHANNEL RESPONSE 1 RESPONSE 2 RESPONSE 3 RESPONSE 4 1 CODE CODE TYPE ENABLE LINE 1 LINE 2 REPORT 1 REPORT 2 MONITORING LOSS HOURS See Note 2 Note 4 See Note 2 ALARM CODE TROUBLE CODE RESTORE CODE TEST CODE SPRINKLER SUPERVISORY 1 FIRST 1 FIRST 1 FIRST 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 ACCOUNT PHONE TIME TIME See Note 2 See Note 2 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 the selection is left blank, the user must fill in the proper information. Skip = No selection is required. After each selection is made, press the ENTER key to proceed to the next step. a. For Systems Configured as NFPA 72 Local, enter 6 hours. For Systems Con

OPERATION Instructions Knight Model 5128/5129 Digital Fire Connected to the Control Panel for the SXL-EX Manual SXL-EX Control Panel reports system to a Central Station using the Knight Model 5128/5129, a four chan- digital communicator that reports alarm, supervisory, and miscellaneous When used with the SXL-EX, the Knight Model 5128/5129 uses the trouble, and supervisory channels. miscellaneous status channel may be to annunciate conditions other than fire the Central Station. 84mA, 18-40 VDC 154mA, 18-40 VDC Knight Model 5128 the Silent Knight Model 5128 within SXL-EX enclosure as shown in Figure 1. Knight Model 5129 Silent Knight Model 5129 must be outside of the SXL-EX enclosure within 20 feet of it. All electrical wiring be in metal conduit. Safety all system power before first battery and then AC. power up, connect the AC first then the battery.) SXL-EX Control Panel connects to the Knight Model 5128/5129 Digital Fire using the Alarm and Trouble contacts on the SXL-EX Main Board (See 2). The Supervisory dry contact is by using either the SZE-4X or the dry contact relay to follow any SXL-EX event. (Refer to the SXL-EX Installation, and Maintenance P/N 315-095997, for programming Also refer to the Silent Knight Fire Slave Communicator Installation August, 1994, P/N 150805, provided the Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 for instructions.) Silent Knight Model 5128 monitors all troubles through the SXL-EX trouble The SXL-EX delays the AC Fail trouble in accordance with NFPA and UL NFPA 72 remote station connections, 60 hour backup battery capacity. The SXL-EX Control Unit delays the AC trouble transmitted by the Silent Model 5128/5129 dialer for 6 hours. Building Technologies, Inc. Fernwood Road Park, New Jersey 07932 315-093223-7 Building Technologies, Ltd. Kenview Boulevard Ontario L6T 5E4 Canada Silent Knight Model 5230 LCD Keypad can be connected temporarily to P4 on the Silent Knight 5128 Main Board Figure 1) for on-site programming or of the communicator. English messages assist in entering data, the 24-hour test time, and describ- conditions currently in effect. 1 lists the recommended program for Silent Knight 5128/5129 Digital Fire Before you begin program- read the Step Programming Form in Silent Knight Model 5128/5129 Fire Slave Installation Manual, August, P/N 150805, provided with the Silent 5128/5129. Knight Model 5128/5129 Programming Table 1 Option Name Option Name ACTIVE SUPERVISED CHANNEL INPUT CHANNEL INPUT CHANNEL RESPONSE 1 RESPONSE 2 RESPONSE 3 RESPONSE 4 1 CODE CODE TYPE ENABLE LINE 1 LINE 2 REPORT 1 REPORT 2 MONITORING LOSS HOURS See Note 2 Note 4 No. ALARM CODE TROUBLE CODE RESTORE CODE TEST CODE 1 FIRST 1 FIRST 1 FIRST 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 ACCOUNT PHONE TIME TIME See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 2 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 the selection is left blank, the user must fill in the proper information. Skip = No selection is required. After each selection is made, press the ENTER key to proceed to the next step. a. the Silent Knight Model 5129 Digital Fire Communicator is used, enter a from 0 to 15 hours. the Silent Knight Model 5128 Digital Fire Communicator is used, enter 0 NUT Remove hex nuts from the 4 studs on the of the SXL-EX door. Place the 5128 over the studs as shown the diagram. Attach each of the 4 hex nuts to each of studs as shown. the Silent K

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

Data 3TM Alarm Extender Modules AA-30U, AE-30U Y or Z circuit operation AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATIONS Light-emitting diode (LED) Trouble indicator Placement supervised AC or DC audibles UL 864 9th Edition Listed & ULC Listed; CSFM and New York City Fire Department Approved Overviews AA-30U Alarm Extender Module (Model AA-30U) from Fire Safety is designed for use with the 3 fire-alarm control panel (FACP), and meets requirements of NFPA 72 A ( Z AA-30U provides a (4) four-wire circuit for polarized, parallel-connected 24 VDC, notification appliance circuits (NACs). The capacity is typically 20 vibrating DC bells 10 horns or strobes. Additional bells, horns or can be added depending on the current of the connected devices based upon condition that the total circuit load does not 1.5 Amps. of the module is caused by a high-pitch signal from a system control module. Dual- activation terminals are provided for or sequencing its operation. AA-30U contains a yellow Trouble LED on the face of the module, indicating an or shorted loop condition. The Trouble LED is operative at all times except when the is in Alarm mode. AA-30U is placement supervised, providing a Trouble signal upon removal from the system. power for the Alarm circuit is fused within module. The fused circuit requires an end-of-line resistor rated 5.6 Ohms @ 0.5 Watts. Industry, Inc. Technologies Division AE-30 Alarm Extender Module (Model AE-30U) from Fire Safety is designed for use with the 3 FACP, and meets the requirements of 72 A ( Z AA-30U provides a (4) four-wire circuit for polarized, parallel-connected 24 VDC, or 120 VAC NACs. The circuit capacity depending on the device type and rating. total circuit load must not exceed 1.5 Amps. of the module is caused by a high-pitch signal from a system control module. Dual- activation terminals are provided for or sequencing its operation. AE-30U contains a yellow Trouble LED on the face of the module, indicating an or shorted loop condition. The Trouble LED is operative at all times except when the is in Alarm mode. AA-30U is placement supervised, providing system Trouble signal upon removal from the The (2) two-wire circuit on which Model is fused requires an EOL resistor rated at Watts for DC devices and 5.0 Watts for AC 3TM Audible Alarm Extender Modules 3129 Diagrams AA-30U AE-30U Ratings Input Power and Humidity Range AA-30U, AE-30U are UL 864 9th Edition for indoor dry locations within a temperature of 120+/-3 (49+/-2 to 32+/-3 (0+/-2 at a relative humidity of 93+/-2% a temperature 90+/-3 (32+/-2 for Ordering 500-884310 500-884320 A Alarm Module, space Module, space 0.45 Kg. 0.45 Kg. This marketing data sheet is not intended to be for system design or installation purposes. the most up-to-date information, refer to product installation instructions. Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Safety Fernwood Road Park, NJ 07932 (973) 593-2600 (908) 547-6877 www.SBT.Siemens.com/FIS in U.S.A. Safety Kenview Boulevard Ontario 5E4 / Canada (905) 799-9937 (905) 799-9858 2011 sheet dated 8/05

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

s Sheet Safety Products Bases Audible (Sounder) Base [with Loop-Power Option] ABHW-4B AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATIONS Innovative two-wire, loop-power option Highly flexible programming and configuration options independently controlled outputs by device Provides six (6) field-configurable audible-tone patterns: Steady American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Temporal 3 ANSI Temporal 4 (Carbon Monoxide [CO]) March time 120 (and Canadian March time 30) Synchronization by loop Power options include: NACs Loop (two-wire) Siemens PAD-series NAC Extenders Model ZIC-4A (for FireFinder XLS FACPs) Any other UL Listed, 24VDC regulated power supply Overview Model ABHW-4B Audible (Sounder) Base from Siemens Fire Safety is an intelligent, supervised and addressable base designed for use in standard applications in an audible notification device is required. The Model base generates a 3,000 Hz audio signal that with NFPA 72 Standard. used with a Desigo intelligent detector, Model which is UL / ULC Listed has the option of powered directly from a signal line circuit (SLC) in a configuration. In turn, this connection feature each audible (sounder) base the distinction of being first base of its kind to attain agencies approval. loop-power feature and advanced configuration contained with each audible (sounder) base are available when a Siemens Model detector is Conversely, Model ABHW-4B will function similar to of a Model ADBH-11 audible base when a Model or detector is used. innovative loop-power option provides easier two-wire for new or expansion applications where wiring or power options are limited. View) View) Compatible with Desigo Fire Safety intelligent devices and and addressable detectors Standard 3,000 Hz Buzzer tone UL268, UL464 & UL2075 Listed, ULC-S525 / -S529 Listed; (#3150, 3230 & 3010) & CSFM (#7300-0067:0271) Approved Model ABHW-4B can be powered in a four-wire configuration, utilizing a notification- circuit (NAC); a Siemens PAD-series NAC Model ZIC-4A, or any UL Listed, 24VDC power supply. See the Model ABHW-4B Installation and Operation (IOM: A6V10405587) for further details. ABHW-4B provides six (6) field-configurable tone two (2) volume levels are used with compatible intelligent, addressable detectors and FACPs. Temporal 3 pattern; Temporal 4 pattern; Temporal with low-power; March Time 120 and Canadian March 30 are supported by each audible (sounder) base. (sounder) bases wired in the same device loop are fully synchronized with the Desigo Fire Safety S- and C-Line detectors, and support Siemens Remote Models RL-HC and RL-HW. used in conjunction with agency-listed / compatible fire components, Model ABHW-4B may be used in of a single / multiple station smoke alarms to achieve system-level functionality. Industry, Inc. Technologies Division ABHW-4B Audible (Sounder) Base 6159 audible (sounder) base consists of a standard Siemens Fire Safety Series detector-base layout combined supportive circuitry for Desigo Fire Safety and Model / of addressable detectors. ABHW-4B houses a pre-wired, audible (sounder) capable of generating a 3,000 Hz tone that provides signal up to 85dBA at 10 feet (3.1m) for localized options are available to provide power to the Model audible base. Additionally, all Model ABHW-4B are capable of sounding simultaneously, individually in any combination depending upon the system used on a Siemens FACP. For power and wiring options, see IOM: A6V10405587. ABHW-4B is a UL / ULC Listed supplementary device that meets or exceeds the 85dB at ft. (3.1m) audibility requirement specified in UL268

Detection Bases Audible (Sounder) Base [with Loop-Power Option] ABHW-4B AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATIONS Sheet Innovative two-wire, loop-power option Highly flexible programming and configuration options independently controlled outputs by device Provides six (6) field-configurable audible -tone patterns: Steady American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Temporal 3 ANSI Temporal 4 Carbon Monoxide [CO] Temporal 4 Low Power March time 120 (and Canadian March time 30) Power options include: NACs Loop (two-wire) Siemens PAD-series NAC Extenders Model ZIC-4A (for FireFinder XLS FACPs) Any other UL Listed, 24VDC regulated power supply Compatible with Cerberus PRO intelligent detectors Siemens and devices ABHW-4B View) ABHW-4B View) Synchronization by loop Standard 3,000 Hz Buzzer tone UL268, UL464 & UL2075 Listed; ULC-S529 Listed; FM #3230 & #3010) and CSFM Approved Overview Model ABHW-4B Audible (Sounder) Base from Siemens Inc. is an intelligent, supervised and addressable base designed for use in standard applications an audible notification device. Each Model base generates a 3,000 Hz audio signal that with NFPA 72 Standard. ABHW-4B is UL / ULC Listed, and is the first-ever audible base to have the option of being directly from a signal line circuit (SLC) in a two- configuration when used with a Cerberus PRO The loop-power feature and advanced options contained with each audible base are not available when a Siemens Model detector is used. Though, Model ABHW-4B will similar to that of a Model ADBH-11 audible base a Model or detector is used. innovative loop-power option provides easier two-wire for new or expansion applications where wiring or power options are limited. Model can also be powered in a traditional four-wire utilizing a notification-appliance circuit a Siemens PAD-series NAC extender; Model ZIC-4A, any UL Listed, 24VDC regulated power supply. PRO Safety Products See the Model ABHW-4B Installation and Operation (IOM: A6V10405587) for further information. ABHW-4B provides six (6) field-configurable tone two (2) volume levels are used with compatible detectors and FACPs. Steady; Temporal 3 Temporal 4 pattern; Temporal 4 with low-power; Time 120, and Canadian March Time 30 are by each intelligent audible (sounder) base. audible (sounder) bases wired in the same circuit are fully synchronized with the PRO Advanced-Line and Standard-Line detectors, support the Siemens Remote Lamps, Models RL-HC RL-HW. used in conjunction with agency-listed / Siemens fire components, Model ABHW-4B be used in lieu of a single / multiple station smoke to achieve enhanced, system-level functionality. intelligent, addressable audible (sounder) base of a standard Siemens Fire Safety Series layout combined with supportive circuitry Cerberus PRO and Model / of detectors. Audible (Sounder) Base for infrastructure FC901 (24), Software-tool v01.02.16 (53) Intelligent Detectors Data (continued) Ratings Voltage: (max) max) power: 16 33 VDC power: 16 33 VDC SLC loop: 250 external source: 20 dBA: 7.5 mA dBA: 4.5 mA dBA: 8.0 mA dBA: 3.5 mA Cross- Cable: 18 AWG Wire Gauge) (2) back-end blocks of up to four screw terminals on each side for Ordering

Instructions ABHW-4B Audible Base Model ABHW-4B audible base from Siemens Industry, consists of a standard base combined with an audible It is an intelligent supervised audible base which 6 selectable tone patterns, 2 volume levels and 2 power types for alarm (loop power or external power) using system configuration tool when ABHW-4B used with FD-UL compatible detectors (refer to fire control panels detector and and Volume Selection The ABHW-4B bases in the same device loop are fully synchronized FD-UL detectors and also support RL-HC, RL-HW remote The ABHW-4B provides Steady, Temporal 3, Temporal Temporal 4 low power, March time 120 and Canadian time 30. is fully compatible with all Siemens addressable (see Compatible detectors section) and recognizes detector type automatically. ABHW-4B is a UL268 & ULC-S529 listed smoke detector device which combines detector base and device functions. It meets or exceeds 85 dB at 10-foot requirement as specified in UL268. When used in with listed, compatible Siemens equipment, the may be used in lieu of single/multiple station smoke to achieve enhanced, system-level functionality. ABHW-4B can also meet requirement specified in UL464, and ULC-525 except 520 Hz requirements for Area Industry, Inc. Infrastructure Physical Specifications: temperature: 32 ~120 (0 ~ 49 humidity: 10 ~ 95%RH (Non-Condensing) electrical mounting boxes: 4 square gang box with 2.5-inch depth minimum; 4 octagon box is compatible Output: 85 dB 75 dB 3 4 4 low power time 120 March time 30 Ratings: voltage: Loop power: External power: ~ 33 VDC ~ 33 VDC current (max): From loop: From external: 20 uA current (RMS max): Loop powered: High dBA: dBA: powered: High dBA: Low dBA: mA mA mA mA If the alarm current of ABHW-4B is energized by an external supply, any UL listed 24 VDC regulated power supply the aux power output of XLS/Desigo Fire Safety PRO Modular, FC2005/FC901, and PAD-3/PAD-4/PAD-5 can used (refer to Figure 3); or a 24 VDC NAC, such as PAD- (refer to Figure 6), ZIC-4A (FireFinder-XLS/ Fire Safety Modular/Cerberus PRO Modular zone card (NAC), refer to Figure 5) and NAC from (refer to Figure 7.1) NAC from FC2025/FC2050/FV2025/FV2050, FC922/ (refer to Figure 7.2). The alarm current of ABHW-4B CANNOT be energized by a V FWR power supply. The maximum number of ABHW-4B is related to the max. rating and the power line resistance of the external supplies applied on the ABHW-4B. Refer to the related instructions of the auxiliary power supply. Refer to Figure 1 for Powered The maximum number powered ABHW-4B is limited by the max. load and devices loaded in loop. Refer to APPENDIX-A this document to calculate the max. number of ABHW-4B audible bases. The maximum device line resistance cannot exceed the device line resistance specified in the compatible T-tapping of the notification appliance circuit is not allowed. The NAC output must be set to a steady DC if it is used for ABHW-4B must be configured by the panel when it is with FD-UL detectors (see table 1). Failure to the ABHW-4B will cause problems. For additional plea

Instructions ABHW-4BZ Audible Base Model ABHW-4BZ audible base from Siemens Industry, consists of a standard base combined with an audible It is an intelligent supervised audible base which 6 selectable tone patterns, 2 volume levels and 2 power types for alarm (loop power or external power) using system configuration tool when ABHW-4BZ used with FD-UL compatible detectors (refer to fire control panels detector and and Volume Selection The ABHW- audible bases in the same device loop are fully with FD-UL detectors and also support RL-HC, remote lamp. The ABHW-4BZ provides Steady, 3, Temporal 4, Temporal 4 low power, March time and Canadian March time 30. is fully compatible with all Siemens addressable (see Compatible detectors section) and recognizes detector type automatically. ABHW-4BZ is a UL268 & ULC-S529 listed smoke detector device which combines detector base and device functions. It meets or exceeds 85dB at 10 foot requirement as specified in UL268. When used in with listed, compatible Siemens equipment, the may be used in lieu of single/multiple station smoke to achieve enhanced, system-level functionality. ABHW-4BZ can also meet requirement specified in UL464, and ULC-525 except 520Hz requirements for Industry, Inc. Infrastructure Physical Specifications: temperature: 32 ~ 120 (0 ~ 49 humidity: 10 ~ 95%RH (Non Condensing) electrical mounting boxes: 4 square gang box with 2.5 inch depth minimum; 4 octagon box is compatible Output: 85dB 75dB 3 4 4 low power time 120 March time 30 Ratings: voltage: Loop power: External power: ~ 33 Vdc ~ 33 Vdc current (max): From loop: From external: 20 uA current (RMS max): Loop powered: High dBA: dBA: mA mA powered: High dBA: Low dBA: mA mA If the alarm current of ABHW-4BZ is energized by an power supply, any UL listed 24VDC regulated supply including the aux power output of XLS/Desigo Safety Modular/Cerberus PRO Modular, FC2025/FC2050/FV2025/FV2050, and PAD-3/PAD-4/PAD-5 can used (refer to Figure 3); or a 24VDC NAC, such as PAD- (refer to Figure 6), ZIC-4A (FireFinder-XLS/ Fire Safety Modular/Cerberus PRO Modular zone card (NAC), refer to Figure 5) and NAC from (refer to Figure 7.1) NAC from FC2025/FC2050/FV2025/FV2050, FC922/ (refer to Figure 7.2). The alarm current of ABHW-4BZ CANNOT be energized by 24V FWR power supply. The maximum number of ABHW-4BZ is related to the max. rating and the power line resistance of the external supplies applied on the ABHW-4BZ. Refer to the installation instructions of the auxiliary power supply. Refer to Figure 1 for Powered The maximum number powered ABHW-4BZ is limited by the max. load and devices loaded in loop. Refer to APPENDIX-A this document to calculate the max. number of ABHW-4BZ audible bases. The maximum device line resistance cannot exceed the device line resistance specified in the compatible T-tapping of the notification appliance circuit is not allowed. The NAC output must be set to a steady DC if it is used for ABHW-4BZ must be configured by the panel when it is with FD-UL detectors (see table 1). Failure to the ABHW-4BZ will cause problems. For additional please refer to the manual of related panel. Also, for with H-Series detectors (see table 2) it does not require confi

s Sheet Safety Products Bases Audible (Sounder) Base [designed for sleeping areas] ABHW-4S AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATIONS Meets NFPA 72 code requirements for Hz square-wave tones in sleeping areas Meets NFPA 720 carbon-monoxide (CO) requirement for 4 tone with 520 Hz in sleeping areas Minimizes footprint on the wall or ceiling One (1) box solution Offers highly flexible programming and configuration with independently controlled outputs by device Provides six (6) field-configurable audible-tone patterns: Steady American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Temporal 3 ANSI Temporal 4 (Carbon Monoxide [CO]) March time 120 (and Canadian March time 30) can also follow the Siemens fire alarm control panel (FACP) appliance circuit (NAC) output Compatible with Desigo Fire Safety intelligent devices Siemens and detectors Overview Model ABHW-4S Audible (Sounder) Base from Fire Safety is an intelligent, supervised base designed for use in sleeping areas of a Each Model ABHW-4S base generates a 520 Hz audio signal, complying with NFPA 72 as well as with UL / ULC Listed applications. ABHW-4S provides six (6) field-configurable tone two (2) volume levels are used with compatible detectors and FACPs. Steady; Temporal 3 and Canadian March Time 30 are supported by intelligent audible base for sleeping areas. ABHW-4S is fully compatible with all Siemens detectors listed in the detector tables in this document. to the Details for Ordering section on Page 2). used in conjunction with other listed, compatible fire-safety components, Model ABHW-4S may be in lieu of single / multiple station smoke alarms to enhanced, system-level functionality. ABHW-4S meets the requirements specified in ULC-S525, ULC-S529 as well as UL464, which includes 520 Hz, low-frequency for Area View) View) Bases for sleeping areas compatible with: Desigo Fire Safety fire alarm control panels (FACPs) FireFinder XLS FACPs Siemens PAD-series NAC Extenders UL268, UL464 & UL2075 Listed, ULC-S525 / -S529 FM (#3150, 3230 & 3010) and CSFM Approved ABHW-4S is made up from a standard Siemens Series detector-base layout, and has supportive circuitry for FACPs and Model / detectors. each Model ABHW-4S base houses a pre- audible sounder device, capable of generating a Hz, square-wave tone that produces a signal up to at 10 ft. (3.1m) for localized annunciation. power options are available for the Model ABHW- audible base, and can therefore be powered in a usual configuration, via use of any one (1) of the a notification-appliance circuit (NAC); a PAD-series NAC extender; Model ZIC-4A, or any Listed, 24VDC regulated power supply. See the Model ABHW-4S Installation and Operation (IOM: A6V10405588) for further details. ABHW-4S bases are capable of sounding individually or in any combination: it is upon the detector type, and when it used and with a compatible Siemens FACP. When Model ABHW-4S bases are used with Model / detectors, functionality is limited, and is similar to Model ADBH-11 audible base. ABHW-4S Audible Base (for Sleeping Areas) 6160 Industry, Inc. Technologies Division ABHW-4S is a UL / ULC Listed supplementary device that meets or exceeds the 85dB 10 ft. (3.1m) audibility requirement specified in ULC-S525, ULC-S529 as well as UL464 / including the low-frequency requirement of Hz for Areas Data smoke detectors used with Model ABHW-4S are to the maximum 30 ft. center spacing sq. ft.) as referred to in the Nati

Detection Bases Intelligent Audible (Sounder) Base [designed for sleeping areas] ABHW-4S Meets NFPA 72 code requirements for Hz square-wave tones in sleeping areas AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATIONS Sheet Meets NFPA 720 carbon-monoxide (CO) requirement 4 tone with 520 Hz in sleeping areas Minimizes footprint on the wall or ceiling One (1) box solution Provides highly flexible programming and configuration with independently controlled outputs by device Supports six (6) field-configurable audible -tone patterns: Steady American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Temporal 3 ANSI Temporal 4 Carbon Monoxide [CO]) Temporal 4 Low Power March time 120 (and Canadian March time 30) can also follow the Siemens fire alarm control panel (FACP) appliance circuit (NAC) output Compatible with Cerberus PRO intelligent and Siemens / devices Overview Model ABHW-4S Audible Base from Siemens Industry is an intelligent, supervised detector base designed for in sleeping areas of a building. Each Model ABHW-4S generates a 520 Hz square-wave audio signal, with NFPA 72 Standard, as well as UL / ULC applications. ABHW-4S provides six (6) field-configurable tone two (2) volume levels are used with compatible detectors and FACPs. Steady; Temporal 3 pattern; 4 pattern; Temporal 4 with low-power; March 120, and Canadian March Time 30 are supported by intelligent audible base for sleeping areas. ABHW-4S is fully compatible with all Siemens detectors listed in the detector tables included this document. to the Details for Ordering section on Page 2). used in conjunction with other listed, compatible fire-safety components, Model ABHW-4S may be in lieu of single / multiple station smoke alarms to enhanced, system-level functionality. ABHW-4S meets the requirements specified in ULC-S525, ULC-S529 and also UL464, including 520Hz, low-frequency requirements Area PRO Safety Products for infrastructure ABHW-4S View) ABHW-4S View) Bases for sleeping areas compatible with: Cerberus PRO fire alarm control panels (FACPs) FireFinder XLS FACPs Siemens PAD-series NAC Extenders UL268, UL464 & UL2075 Listed; ULC-S525, Listed; FM (#3150, #3230 & #3010) CSFM (#7300-0067:0271) Approved ABHW-4S consists of a standard Siemens Fire Series detector-base layout combined with circuitry for Cerberus PRO FACPs and Model detectors. each Model ABHW-4S base houses a pre-wired, sounder device, capable of generating a 520 Hz tone that produces a signal up to 85dBA at 10 (3.1m) for localized annunciation. power options are available for the Model ABHW-4S base, and can therefore be powered in an ordinary configuration, via use of any one (1) of the notification-appliance circuit (NAC); a Siemens NAC extender; Model ZIC-4A, or any UL Listed, regulated power supply. See the Model ABHW-4S Installation and Operation Manual A6V10405588) for further information. Model ABHW-4S bases are capable of sounding individually or in any combination on the detector type, and when it is used and with a compatible Siemens FACP. When Model ABHW-4S bases are used with Model / devices, functionality is limited, and is similar to Model ADBH-11 audible base. Audible Base (for Sleeping Areas) (continued) ABHW-4S is a UL / ULC Listed supplementary smoke- device that meets or exceeds the 85dB at 10 ft. (3.1m) requirement specified in UL268, ULC-S525, ULC- as well as UL464 / UL2075, including low-frequency of 520Hz for Areas with s FACPs

Instructions ABHW-4S Audible Base for Sleeping Area with 520Hz Frequency Sounder Model ABHW-4S audible base from Siemens Industry, is an intelligent supervised base which is designed for use sleeping areas. The base generates a 520 Hz square wave signal complying with the latest NFPA 72 standard and UL/ULC listed. It provides six selectable tone patterns, two levels when used with compatible fire detectors and panels. The ABHW-4S audible bases wired in the device loop are fully synchronized with FD-UL detectors also support RL-HC, RL-HW remote lamps. The ABHW- provides 520 Hz Steady, Temporal 3, Temporal 4, 4 low power, March time 120 and Canadian March 30. is fully compatible with all Siemens addressable and recognizes the detector type automatically. to the list of compatible detectors and control panels in document). ABHW-4S is a UL & ULC listed smoke detector device. It meets or exceeds 85 dB at 10-foot requirement as specified in UL268 & ULC-S529. used in conjunction with listed, compatible Siemens the ABHW-4S may be used in lieu of station smoke alarms to achieve enhanced, functionality. The ABHW-4S can also meets the specified in UL464, UL2075 including 520 Hz frequency requirements for Area Industry, Inc. Infrastructure Physical Specifications: temperature: 32 ~ 120 (0 ~ 49 humidity:10 ~ 95%RH (Non Condensing) electrical mounting boxes: 4 square gang box with 2.5-inch depth minimum; 4 octagon box is compatible Output: 85 dB 75 dB 3 4 4 low power time 120 March time 30 Ratings: voltage: power: 16 ~ 33 VDC current (max): loop: external: mA current (max): powered: dBA: dBA: mA @ 33 VDC mA @ 24 VDC mA @ 16 VDC mA from loop mA @ 33 VDC mA @ 24 VDC mA @ 16 VDC mA from loop The alarm current of ABHW-4S has to be energized by any listed 24 VDC regulated auxiliary power supply including aux power output of XLS/Desigo Fire Safety PRO Modular, FC2005/FC901, FC2025/ FC922/FC924/FV922/FV924 and Fire Safety Modular/Cerberus PRO Modular (refer to Figure 1), ZIC-4A (FireFinder- indicating card (NAC), refer to Figure 3), PAD-3/ PAD- (Figure 4), or a 24 VDC NAC circuit such as FC901 (Refer to Figure 5.1) or NAC circuit such as FC922/FC924/FV922/ The alarm current of ABHW-4S CANNOT be energized by a (Refer to Figure 5.2). V FWR power supply. The maximum number of ABHW-4S is related to the current rating and the power line resistance of the power supplies applied on the ABHW-4S. Refer to related installation instructions of the auxiliary power The maximum loop line resistance cannot exceed the line resistance defined in the compatible fire panels. T-tapping of the notification appliance circuit is not allowed. The NAC output must be set to a steady DC if it is used for ABHW-4S must be configured by the panel when it is with FD-UL detectors (see Table 1). Failure to the ABHW-4S will cause problems. For additional please refer to the manual of related panel. Also, for with H-Series detectors (see Table 2) it does not require configuration as it will function the same as an ADBH-11 will not be synchronized. to Figures 7 and 8) Audible base Model ABHW-4S be interconnected as shown in the Installation/ Wiring and wired to the specific system modules and control following the appropriate instructions. For operation with Fire Safety Modular/Cerberus PRO

Instructions ABHW-4SZ Audible Base for Sleeping Area with 520Hz Frequency Sounder Model ABHW-4SZ audible base from Siemens Industry, is an intelligent supervised base which is designed for use sleeping areas. The base generates a 520Hz square wave signal complying with the latest NFPA 72 standard and UL/ULC listed. It provides six selectable tone patterns, two levels when used with compatible fire detectors and panels. The ABHW-4SZ audible bases wired in the device loop are fully synchronized with FD-UL detectors also support RL-HC, RL-HW remote lamps. The ABHW- provides 520Hz Steady, Temporal 3, Temporal 4, 4 low power, March time 120 and Canadian March 30. is fully compatible with all Siemens addressable and recognizes the detector type automatically. to the list of compatible detectors and control panels in document). ABHW-4SZ is a UL & ULC listed smoke detector device. It meets or exceeds 85dB at 10 foot requirement as specified in UL268 & ULC-S529. used in conjunction with listed, compatible Siemens the ABHW-4SZ may be used in lieu of station smoke alarms to achieve enhanced, functionality. The ABHW-4SZ can also meets requirements specified in UL464, UL2075 including low frequency requirements for Area Industry, Inc. Infrastructure Physical Specifications: temperature: 32 ~ 120 (0 ~ 49 humidity:10 ~ 95%RH (Non Condensing) electrical mounting boxes: 4 square gang box with 2.5 inch depth minimum; 4 octagon box is compatible Output: 85dB 75dB 3 4 4 low power time 120 March time 30 Ratings: voltage: power: 16 ~ 33 VDC current (max): loop: external: mA current (max): powered: dBA: dBA: mA @ 33VDC mA @ 24VDC mA @ 16VDC mA from loop mA @ 33VDC mA @ 24VDC mA @ 16VDC mA from loop The alarm current of ABHW-4SZ has to be energized by any listed 24VDC regulated auxiliary power supply including aux power output of XLS/Desigo Fire Safety PRO Modular, FC2005/FC901, FC2025/ FC922/FC924/FV922/FV924 and (refer to Figure 1), ZIC-4A (FireFinder- Fire Safety Modular/Cerberus PRO Modular indicating card (NAC), refer to Figure 3), PAD-3/ PAD- (Figure 4), or a 24VDC NAC circuit such as FC901 (Refer to Figure 5.1) or NAC circuit such as FC922/FC924/FV922/ (Refer to Figure 5.2). The alarm current of ABHW-4SZ CANNOT be energized by 24V FWR power supply. The maximum number of ABHW-4SZ is related to the current rating and the power line resistance of the power supplies applied on the ABHW-4SZ. Refer to related installation instructions of the auxiliary power The maximum loop line resistance cannot exceed the line resistance defined in the compatible fire panels. T-tapping of the notification appliance circuit is not allowed. The NAC output must be set to a steady DC if it is used for ABHW-4SZ must be configured by the panel when it is with FD-UL detectors (see Table 1). Failure to the ABHW-4SZ will cause problems. For additional please refer to the manual of related panel. Also, for with H-Series detectors (see Table 2) it does not require configuration as it will function the same as an ADBH-11 will not be synchronized. to Figures 7 and 8) Audible base Model ABHW-4SZ be interconnected as shown in the Installation/ Wiring and wired to the specific system modules and control following the appropriate instructions. For operation with Fire Safety Modular/Cerberus PRO FC

Suite of Software Site, ABT-SSA, ABT Pro and ABT Go The ABT Suite of Software is a complete set of user-centric tools that provides support for the Desigo line of controllers and solutions, including DXR with Desigo Room Automation and MS/TP Bus Interface Module (BIM). The ABT Suite of Software is based on Microsoft Windows-compatible software and is designed to efficiently engineer and configure Desigo devices. ABT Site software provides device engineering, configuration, startup and support for the Desigo controller platform. ABT-SSA is an embedded Web server interface designed for commissioning, and balancing Desigo DXR controllers. ABT Pro software provides engineering and programming for custom applications, for Desigo Room Automation projects. ABT Go is a simple and intuitive iOS or Android mobile app designed for balancing and servicing DXR (Ethernet) controllers. The app allows to command and monitor point values, manage alarms, perform point and commissioning, and generate commissioning reports. Technologies Site Building structure task. Site Application configuration task. Industry, Inc. Site SSA Pro Go FREE required Engineering FREE for device startup and commissioning and edit device engineered data project-specific settings to devices preloaded and existing application libraries custom applications and application libraries default values for applications application options and change default values device instances with addresses and parameters up Device devices on the network baud and auto address devices master definition on MS/TP network custom applications device application values (room unit, direct to device, over network) device data over network concurrently applications from the application library (add/remove I/O, Alarms and Trends) standard applications debug and validate application new application type to device Commissioning to Web server (ABT-SSA) for device start-up and services with a mobile app (iOS or Android) services with a device including device discovery identification, point commands, setpoint adjustments, status, commissioning status, alarm management, commissioning reports balancer mode access and device editors for process summary Industry, Inc. Description Number (ASN) (SSN) Site license, 1 year Pro license, 1 year dongle (Optional) USB-KNX interface Support Products data Requirements Drive of operation: A.M. – 6:00 P.M. CST (Mon – Fri) 800-877-7545 (Dial 2)

Installation Instructions AC-ADPT Adapter Model AC-ADPT Adapter from Siemens Industry, Inc., as shown in Figure 1, is to connect a notebook or laptop computer to the system power supply. Plug Connects External Power Supply Notebook Computer Plug PTB, P1 ft. 1 Adapter Cable to Figure 2. the white plug into P1 on the PTB Power Termination Board. the black plug into the external power supply/adapter of the notebook laptop computer. on power to computer. 2 The AC-ADPT Adapter Cable AC-ADPT Adapter can only be used to connect a notebook or laptop computer to system power supply. AC-ADPT is 6 ft. in length. of PTB: 120VAC, 60Hz 315-033992-4 Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Park, NJ Building Technologies, Ltd. Safety & Security Products Kenview Boulevard Ontario 5E4 Canada 315-033992-4

Installation Instructions ACM-1 Control Module Model ACM-1 Audio Control Module Siemens Industry, Inc. is the master module for the MXLV audio system. module controls all Voice related func- It has two yellow LEDs TROUBLE indicates ACM-1 troubles and the LED monitors network activity. to Figure 1 for the location of the (These troubles also appear on the panel.) has a supervised tone generator provides a variety of tones for use the system. Each system can have two the available tones. The tones are set CSG-M. If an application requires tone use the P6 connector on the for the BTC-1 Backup Tone card. to Figure 1.) ACM-1 occupies one network address. switch S102 shown in Figure 2 is used set the network address that was chosen CSG-M for the ACM-1 module. The ACM-1 controls and supervises the circuit for the microphone wiring for the retractable cord. The circuit controls the volume any signal that enters the circuit. When the microphone key is pressed, ACM-1 sends the preannounce tone was configured in CSG-M, making microphone the source for audio 1. 1 PC Board Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Park, NJ 315-092083-10 Building Technologies, Ltd. Safety & Security Products Kenview Boulevard Ontario 5E4 Canada The ACM-1 also controls a small local in the MMM-1 module. Any several signals available in the can be sent to this speaker if in CSG-M. Three supervised riser circuits provide power audio signals to the OCC-1 to sent to power amplifiers. The ACM-1 also connect these risers to an non-emergency signal source use in non-emergency audio The Audio Control module communi- with the VSM-1 Voice Switch the VLM-1 Voice LED and the VFM-1 Fan Control that are part of the system. VSM-1 modules provide firefighters a means of controlling nonautomatic of the MXLV system. VLM-1 modules provide status of the System. The VFM-1 provide the system operator automatic and manual control and of fan control functions for management. These functions set in CSG-M. For more information the VSM-1, VLM-1, and VFM-1, to the MXLV Manual, P/N 315- and the VLM-1//VSM-1/VFM-1 P/N 315-092064. The ACM-1 controls the warden page comes from the TMM-1 Telephone module. When activated, the page becomes the audio for selected speaker zones. all system power before instal- first battery and then AC. (To up, connect the AC first, then the set the network address of the Remove the ACM-1 from its protective Refer to the CSG-M configuration for the address of the ACM-1 Set the ACM-1 address on switch S102. to Figure 2 for the location of 2 the ACM-1 S102 Find the correct setting for the ACM-1 When an MHD-3 is used in the top of the enclosure (instead of MKB-2): Mount the ACM-MPT bracket on the studs located in the lower right corner of the MME-3 backbox. are the same studs used for TSP-40 printer.) Secure the with the four nuts provided. Figure 3.) Be sure that P1 is in the upper right corner of the ACM. (Refer to 3.) Mount the ACM-1 PC over the six threaded mount- spacers. Fasten the module in place with the No. 6 screws provided (one of spacers is used for support). to Figure 3.) in Table 1 on page 6 of and use dipswitch S102, SW1 through SW8, to set the for the module. To open a dipswitch, press on the side of the marked OPEN. To a dipswitch, press down the side of the dipswitch the side marked open a slide switch, push slide to the side opposite side marked ON. To close a switch, push the slide to side marked ON. mount the ACM-1 module: ACM-1 may be mounted in two differ- locations in the enclosure, depending on or not there is an MKB-2 in the (In some cases an MHD-3 is instead of the MKB to enable the use more VSMs in a system.) When an MKB-2 is in the top

INSTALLATION/WIRING INSTRUCTIONS AD-3I and AD-3ILP DUCT DETECTORS AD-3I and AD-3ILP Detectors from Siemens Industry, Inc. are System 3, PXL, System SXL-EX, System SXL, System XL3, System MXL Control Panel and MXL-IQ Control Panel compatible air detectors. They are designed for use in heating, ventilating, and air duct systems. Model AD-3I uses ionization smoke detectors, Model AD-3ILP uses photoelectric smoke detectors to detect the pres- of combustion products in a duct system. (Refer to TECHNICAL below for information on compatible detectors.) smoke or combustion products are detected, shutdown of the duct and/or operation of supplementary equipment is provided by the system control panel. DATA Detector Compatibility 1 COMPATIBILITY Control Panel Control Panel (CZM-1/1B6 or CZM-4) 3 PXL PXL (PZE-4B) SXL SXL (SZE-4R) SXL (SZE-8A) SXL-EX SXL-EX (SZE-4X) SXL-EX (SZE-8AX) XL3 (INX-3) XL3 (ZNX-3) Detectors DI-B3H ILI-1BH DI-B3H (no accessories with CZM-1/1B6) DI-B3H DI-B3H DI-B3H DI-B3H (no accessories) DI-B3H (no accessories) DI-B3H (no accessories) DI-B3H DI-B3H DI-B3H ILI-1BH DI-B3H Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Park, NJ 315-093234-7 Building Technologies, Ltd. Safety & Security Products Kenview Boulevard Ontario 5E4 Canada 2 COMPATIBILITY Control Panel XL3 (INX-3) Detectors ILP-2* ILP-2 is only compatible with MXL/MXLV Rev. 8.0 or greater firmware and MXL-IQ 3.0 or greater firmware. When the CSG-M is configured, the DUCT application must selected. NOT USE air duct detectors with Alarm Verification. 3 DATA ( (

(cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:9)(cid:6)(cid:9)(cid:11)(cid:12) (cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:11)(cid:14)(cid:15)(cid:4)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:2)(cid:3) (cid:14)(cid:18)!”(cid:6)(cid:5)(cid:1)(cid:14)!(cid:20)(cid:1)(cid:4)#(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:1)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:18)(cid:5)(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:3)(cid:20)(cid:21)(cid:1)$!(cid:18)%(cid:1)(cid:14)(cid:15)(cid:1)(cid:14)#&!(cid:6)!(cid:14)(cid:20)(cid:23)(cid:1)(cid:20)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:14)(cid:23) %(cid:3)(cid:18)(cid:3)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:5)(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:20)!(cid:19)(cid:1)(cid:21)(cid:24)(cid:3)-(cid:5)(cid:1)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:18)(cid:5)(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:3)(cid:20)(cid:21)(cid:1)(cid:18)(cid:3)(cid:1)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:18)(cid:5)(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:1)(cid:18)%(cid:5)(cid:1) (cid:20)(cid:5)(cid:21)(cid:5)(cid:15)(cid:19)(cid:5)(cid:1)(cid:3)*(cid:1)(cid:19)(cid:3)(cid:24)”#(cid:21)(cid:18)!(cid:3)(cid:15) (cid:20)(cid:3)(cid:4)#(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:21)(cid:1)!(cid:15)(cid:1)(cid:14)(cid:1)(cid:4)#(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:1)(cid:21)(cid:23)(cid:21)(cid:18)(cid:5)(cid:24) (cid:14)(cid:18)!”(cid:6)(cid:5)(cid:1)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:18)(cid:5)(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:3)(cid:20)(cid:21) (cid:20)(cid:3)(cid:4)#(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:21)(cid:1)(cid:14)(cid:20)(cid:5)(cid:1)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:18)(cid:5)(cid:19)(cid:18)(cid:5)(cid:4)(cid:31)(cid:1)(cid:21)%#(cid:18)(cid:4)(cid:3)$(cid:15)(cid:1)(cid:3)*(cid:1)(cid:18)%(cid:5)(cid:1)(cid:4)#(cid:19)(cid:18) (cid:5)(cid:20)(cid:14)(cid:18)!(cid:3)(cid:15)(cid:1)(cid:3)*(cid:1)(cid:21)# (cid:6)(cid:5)(cid:24)(cid:5)(cid:15)(cid:18)(cid:14)(cid:20)(cid:23)(cid:1)(cid:5)0#! (cid:24)(cid:5)(cid:15)(

If the fire alarm system is connected to a central station or fire or operates external devices such as fans, extin- etc., connected, notify appropriate personnel and the external devices until all tests are completed. testing, reset the system, reconnect the devices, and notify personnel that the system is operating again. RATINGS FOR PE-11 RATINGS FOR AD2-4W Instructions AD2-4W Duct Monitoring Housing AD2-4W from Siemens Industry, Inc., is an air duct housing containing sampling tubes. When used a PE-11 smoke detector, smoke and combustion are detected for shutdown of the duct system and/ operation of supplementary equipment as provided by the control panel. The duct unit supports two sets of C alarm contacts, one Form A alarm contact and one C trouble contact. The trouble contact supervises the of the input power, removal of the detector cover the removal of the smoke detector head. Range: (0OC) – 100OF (38OC) per UL 268A Range: altitude limitations Humidity: to 85% RH (non-condensing/non-freezing) Duct Velocity Range: ft/min and Exhaust Tube Pressure Differential Range: than 0.01 and less than 1.2 inches of water column air duct detectors are designed for detection and of products of combustion in a duct system. They are to be used as a substitution for open area protection. NOT USE air duct detectors with Alarm Verification. ACCESSORIES accessories available for use with AD2-4W are: DATA DUCT CONDITIONS Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Park, NJ Building Technologies, Ltd. Safety & Security Products Kenview Boulevard Ontario L6T 5E4 Canada 315-049709-3 315-049709-3 Industry, Inc. Technologies Division detector has a cover tamper (removal) switch. Care be taken when installing the cover. Squarely place the on the unit to aviod possible damage to the switch. NOT SLIDE COVER INTO POSITION. AD2-4W duct smoke detectors provide early detection smoke and products of combustion present in air moving an HVAC duct supply, return, or both. These devices designed to prevent the recirculation of smoke in areas the air handling system fans and blowers and may be with fire alarm systems that shut down complete air system in the event of smoke detection. the correct installation of a duct smoke unit please refer NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code), NFPA 90A (Standard Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems), NFPA 92A (Recommended Practice for Smoke Control detector is not intended for open area protection nor it be used for early warning detection or to replace a fire detection system. the Model AD2-4W is operating, a sample of air is drawn the duct and passed through the sampling chamber by of the input sampling tube. The air sample passes the smoke detector mounted in the duct housing and exhausted back into the duct through the outlet tube. AD2-4W supports two sets of Form C alarm one Form A alarm contact and one Form C contact. The trouble contact supervises the of the in

Installation Instructions AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR Duct Monitoring Housings DATA DUCT CONDITIONS AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR (AD2 Series) from Building Technologies, Inc., are air duct monitoring containing sampling tubes. When used with a smoke detector, smoke and combustion prod- are detected for shutdown of the duct system and/or of supplementary equipment as provided by the control panel. See the following chart for usage. compatible control equipment, see charts on the page of this manual. Range: (0OC) – 100OF (38OC) per UL 268/268A Range: AD2-PR and AD2-XHR No altitude limitations Humidity Range: (non-condensing/non-freezing) Duct Velocity Range: ft/min AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR Tube Pressure Range of Differences: than 0.01 and less than 1.2 inches of water column air duct detectors are designed for detection and of products of combustion in a duct system. They not to be used for open area protection. NOT USE air duct detectors with Alarm Verification. Building Technologies, Inc. Fernwood Road Park, New Jersey 07932 315-049708-2 315-049708-2 Building Technologies Safety Indicator AD2 Series duct smoke detectors provide early detec- of smoke and products of combustion present in air through an HVAC duct supply, return, or both. These are designed to prevent the recirculation of smoke in by the air handling system fans and blowers. Com- systems may be shut down in the event of smoke the correct installation of a duct smoke unit please refer NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code), NFPA 90A (Standard Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems), NFPA 92A (Recommended Practice for Smoke Control the Models AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR are operat- a sample of air is drawn from the duct and passed the sampling chamber by means of the input tube. The air sample passes through the smoke mounted in the duct housing and is exhausted back the duct through the outlet tube. detector is equipped with cover removal switch (SW1) instantly provides a trouble condition upon removal of clear cover. For all testing and inspection with the cover the cover removal switch (designated as SW1 on must be manually depressed to simulate normal AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR contain an LED indicator on the smoke detector) capable of flashing either one three distinct colors: green, yellow, or red. During each flash the microprocessor based detector checks the smoke in its sensing chamber its critical smoke sensing electronics are operating. Building Technologies Safety 315-049708-2 315-049708-2 Building Technologies Safety CONTROL EQUIPMENT detector model number is the compatibility identifier. equipment does not support remote accessories; e.g., lamps or relays. RATINGS FOR PE-11 RATINGS FOR FP-11, HFP-11 AND HFPO-11 ratings are not provided here for these detectors. for detector loop loading, along with loop wire specifications are provided in the applicable control instructions given in the above Compatible

Installation Instructions AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR Duct Monitoring Housings DATA DUCT CONDITIONS AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR (AD2 Series) from Industry, Inc., are air duct monitoring housings sampling tubes. When used with a compatible detector, smoke and combustion products are for shutdown of the duct system and/or operation supplementary equipment as provided by the system panel. See the following chart for usage. compat see charharharharharts on the page compat compat control equipment, control equipment, see c see c on the page on the page control equipment, see c compatible control equipment, on the page see c control equipment, compat on the page of this manual. of this manual. of this manual. of this manual. of this manual. Range: (0OC) – 100OF (38OC) per UL 268/268A Range: AD2-PR and AD2-XHR No altitude limitations Humidity Range: (non-condensing/non-freezing) Duct Velocity Range: ft/min AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR Tube Pressure Range of Differences: than 0.01 and less than 1.2 inches of water column air duct detectors are designed for detection and of products of combustion in a duct system. TheyTheyTheyTheyThey not to be used for not to be used for open area prot open area prot open area protectectectectection. not to be used for open area prot not to be used for not to be used for open area prot NOT USE air duct detectors with Alarm Verification. 315-049708-6 Inc. Inc. Inc. Industry Inc. Inc. TTTTTececececechnologies Di Di Di Division Di detector has a cover tamper (removal) switch. Care be taken when installing the cover. Squarely place the on the unit to aviod possible damage to the switch. NOT SLIDE COVER INTO POSITION. AD2 Series duct smoke detectors provide early detec- of smoke and products of combustion present in air through an HVAC duct supply, return, or both. These are designed to prevent the recirculation of smoke in by the air handling system fans and blowers. Com- systems may be shut down in the event of smoke the correct installation of a duct smoke unit please refer NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code), NFPA 90A (Standard Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems) NFPA 92A (Recommended Practice for Smoke Control the Models AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR are operat- a sample of air is drawn from the duct and passed the sampling chamber by means of the input tube. The air sample passes through the smoke mounted in the duct housing and is exhausted back the duct through the outlet tube. detector is equipped with cover removal switch (SW1) instantly provides a trouble condition upon removal of clear cover. For all testing and inspection with the cover the cover removal switch (designated as SW1 on must be manually depressed to simulate normal AD2-P, AD2-PR and AD2-XHR contain an LED indicator on the smoke detector) capable of flashing either one three distinct colors: green, yellow, or red. During each flash the microprocessor based detector checks the smoke in its sensing chamber its critical smoke sensing electronics are operating. Indicator Industry, Inc. Technologies Division 315-049708-5 on the results of these checks, the LED indicator as follows: DUCT 1

s Detection Devices Bases ADB-11, ADBH-11 and ADBX-11 AND ENGINEER SPECIFICATIONS Model ADB-11 is compatible with Series 11 detectors Model ADBX-11 is compatible with Model Series detectors Model ADBH-11 is compatible with Model Series detectors Models produce 85db audible signal Temporal or Steady Surface mounting Listed; CSFM and NYMEA Approved Overview ADB-11 and ADBX-11 are audible-base that contain a pre-wired, audible and piezo- device that produces an 85db signal for annunciation. Model ADB-11 is designed to used with conventional Series 11 plug-in detectors, Model ADBX-11 is designed for use with analog Model FP-11 and Model FPT-11 application includes all areas that normally require localized, audible annunciation, such as: motel, apartment, condominium, and dormitory Model ADB-11 and Model ADBX-11 are listed. ADB-11 is powered by a conventional zone of system control panel with operation of the piezo- device being controlled by the detector. During supervision or non-alarm condition, circuit ground to ADB-11 is absent, and there is zero current flow. alarm to its detector, circuit ground is provided Model ADB-11, via the base contact, and the audible Industry, Inc. Technologies Division is activated, producing an 85db audible signal, serves as the local alarm. ADB-11 is turned off by the reset of the system panel. The system control panel guarantees only one (1) auxiliary or remote device will activate zone. The addition of a jumper wire between 7 and 8 on the audible base changes the from steady to temporal. Model ADB-11 operates an input-zone power of 17 VDC 31 VDC, and a 4″ square, 2 electrical box. is a smoke-detector accessory, Model ADBH-11, combines detector-base and audible-device functions. applications for use of Model ADBH-11 include: hotels, motels, apartments, etc. ADBH-11 the audibility requirements for smoke alarms as in UL217: and Multiple Station Smoke used in conjunction with listed, compatible Model ADBH-11 may be used in lieu of / multiple-station smoke alarms to achieve system-level functionality. Bases 6180 NFPA-guideline spacing; however, is based ideal conditions namely: smooth ceiling, no movement, and no physical obstructions the fire source and the detector. aforementioned spacing requirement should be as the guide for detector-installation layout. not mount detectors in areas close to ventilating air-conditioning outlets. Exposed joists or beamed may also effect safe spacing limitations for It is mandatory to precisely follow 72 regulations, as well as applying professional judgment, regarding detector locations spacing. Data Output: ADB-11 ADBX-11) @ 10 feet / min. 31VDC (zone power) Rating: ADB-11) ADB-11) Current: ADB-11) ADB-11) Rating: ADBX-11) @ 25VDC one (1) device is guaranteed to per zone. 31VDC (AC power) 27VDC (full wave on battery) ADBX-11) Current: ADBX-11) 24mA @ 25VDC HFP-11 HFPT-11 DT-11 PE-11 PE-11T ADBX-11 FP-11 FPT-11 (continued) Audible Base Model ADBX-11 consists of a Series 11 base combined with supportive for the FP Series Detectors and an audible All field wiring terminates at two (2) of the (4) terminal blocks located on the back of the Model ADBX-11 can be used with the MXL of control panels. different configurations can provide audible power to Model ADBX-11 at termi

Installation Instructions ADB-11 Base ADB-11 Model ADB-11Audible Base consists of a standard Series 11 base with an audible device. The ADB-11 is an audible base used only with 11 conventional detectors (DT-11, PE-11/-11T) and is powered directly the zone circuit. (Refer to Table 1 for compatible detector model numbers the related Installation Instructions.) All field wiring terminates at a four terminal block located on the back of the unit. The audible device when the detector alarms and stops sounding when the system is (Refer to Figure 1, the ADB-11 Audible Base Terminal Blocks, and 2, the ADB-11 Wiring Diagram.) Only one device is guaranteed to per zone. ADB-11 can generate either steady or temporal tone with the insertion of a at the terminal block. NEXT DB-11 OR ADB-11 USED FOR SELECTION INITIATING CIRCUIT OF CONTROL PANEL Audible Base Terminal Blocks 1 Industry, Inc. Technologies Division Park, NJ 315-096162-8 Building Technologies, Ltd. Safety & Security Products Kenview Boulevard Ontario L6T 5E4 Canada + of – + – – + + – – + not use looped wire under Terminal 5 of DB-11 base. Use a break in the wire at the to provide supervision of connection. tone = select + and select – are unconnected (without a jumper). select + and select – are shorted (insert a jumper). Panels: CP-2ER, CP-2HR, System 3, MXL/MXL-IQ (CZM-4 only), and PXL. PE-11T, and DT-11. 2 Installation/Wiring Diagram NOTE ADB-11 is a UL268 listed smoke detector supplementary device which detector base and audible device functions. It meets or exceeds the dB at 10 foot audibility requirement for smoke alarms as specified in Single and Multiple Station Smoke Alarms and NFPA 72 for sleeping When used in conjunction with listed, compatible Siemens equipment, ADB-11 may be used in lieu of single/multiple station smoke alarms to enhanced, system-level functionality. Typical applications are sleeping in hotels, guest suites, dormitories, day-care, and residential board and facilities as designated in NFPA 72. RATINGS AND CONSTRAINTS ADB-11 Rating: 17 – 31 VDC Supervisory 0A 24mA at 25 VDC Only one device is guaranteed to activate per zone. PLACEMENT table below lists the detectors that can be used with the ADB-11 Detector along with the appropriate Installation Instructions. though no specific spacings are allocated to the detectors used with bases, use 30 foot center spacing (900 sq ft), as referred to in NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, Chapter 5 and CAN/ULC-S254, as a or starting point, if practical, in a detector installation layout. This spacing based on ideal conditions ceiling, no air movement, and no physi- obstructions. all installations (except in special circumstances like computer room locate the detector on the ceiling, a minimum of 6 inches from a wall, or on a wall, between 4 and 6 inches from the ceiling. questions arise regarding detector placement, it is extremely important that drawings provided or approved by Siemens Industry, Inc. or by its autho- distributors be followed! The detector placements shown on these draw- were chosen af